BrailleNote-VoiceNote
Apex BT
USER GUIDE
V9.5
HumanWare
1800 Michaud,
Drummondville,
Québec, CANADA
J2C 7G7.
Telephone 1‑888‑723‑7273. Fax (819) 471‑4828
E‑mail: ca.info@humanware.com
Sales: ca.sales@humanware.com
Internet: http://www.humanware.com
User guide
version 20140307
P/N NT433
Model APBT320
Susceptibility
to Interference.
There may
be temporary degradation of the image when the BrailleNote Apex BT is subjected
to a strong radio‑frequency field, electro‑static discharge or
transient electrical noise. An electro-static discharge (caused by
static electricity) may disrupt network operations. If this happens, save all
documents and press and hold the Reset button for 6 seconds.
Medical Compliance Warnings
This product is
equipped with a 3-wire grounding type plug as a safety feature. This plug has a
third (grounding) pin and can only be plugged into a grounding-type power
outlet. If necessary, contact an electrician to replace your power outlet with
a grounding-type power outlet.
This product
should be operated with the external power supply indicated on the marking
label to ensure compliance with the requirements of IEC 60601-1. The external
power supply must be of the following manufacturer and model:
Manufacturer: GlobTek.
Model Number: GTM21097-3005
Electromagnetic
compatibility: The use of accessories and cables other than those specified by
HumanWare may result in increased emissions or decreased immunity of the Apex.
Placement of
equipment: The Apex should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other
equipment.
USB, VGA, Ethernet, Microphone, Headphone connectors
shall be connected to medical grade SELV circuits only or they shall be
connected to medical grade isolating devices.
FCC
Warning.
This
equipment generates and uses radio frequency energy and if not installed and
used properly, in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction, may cause
interference to radio and television reception. It has been type tested and
found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device in accordance with
Subpart B of Part 15 of FCC Rules and Regulations, which are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such interference in a residential
installation. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur
in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause interference to
radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment
off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or
more of the following measures:
1. Reorient the receiving antenna.
2. Relocate the equipment with respect
to the receiver.
3. Move the equipment away from the
receiver.
4. Plug the equipment into a different
outlet so that the equipment and receiver are on different branch circuits.
If
necessary, the user should consult the dealer or an experienced
radio/television technician for additional suggestions. The user may find the
booklet prepared by the Federal Communication Commission helpful: "How to
Identify and Resolve Radio‑TV Interference Problems". This booklet
is available from the U.S. Government Printing Office, Washington, DC 20402.
Stock No. 004‑000‑00345‑4.
Shielded
cables and certified Class B peripherals must be used on this product. Using
unshielded cables or uncertified peripherals may result in this unit not
complying with FCC Rules Part 15. Changes or modifications not expressly
approved by the manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate this
equipment.
Notice
for Canada.
This
Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference‑Causing
Equipment regulations.
FCC, IC
and CSA label location
The FCC, IC and CSA logos and number are located on the device, under
the battery. Removing the battery will allow the user to find them.
Equipment
Classification (IEC 601-1)
Type of Protection: Class 1
Applied Parts: None
Sterilization Method: Not intended for sterilization
Enclosure Degree of Protection: IP20
The equipment is not AP or APG category
Mode of Operation: Continuous
Important Safety Instructions
Carefully read the instructions described in this user
guide prior to using the Apex.
Keep away from water or high humidity. Do not
submerge.
Only use cables provided with the Apex.
The power supply
cord is a disconnect device for pluggable equipment. The socket-outlet should
be installed near the equipment, and be easily accessible.
This product
should be operated from the type of power indicated on the marking label. If
you are not sure of the type of power available, consult your dealer or local
power company.
Refer all
servicing of this product to qualified service personnel. Do not attempt to
service it yourself, as opening or removing covers may expose you to dangerous
voltage points or other risks.
The use of
accessories and cables other than those specified by HumanWare may result in
safety hazard.
The above
exclamation point within an equilateral triangle is intended to inform the user
to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instructions
in the literature accompanying the appliance.
Disposal
At the end of the
life of the BrailleNote Apex, its internal components must be disposed in
compliance with the local authorities.
The BrailleNote Apex contains no hazardous materials.
For disposal, return to HumanWare or follow local governing ordinances or
hospital procedure.
Environmental conditions
Operating Temperature:10 to 40º C
Transport and Storage Temperature: -20 to 60º C
Operating Humidity: 20% to 80% (RH)
Transport and Storage Humidity: 10% to 95% (RH)
Operating Altitude: -200 to 2000 m
Transport and Storage Altitude: -200 to 12 000 m
Transport and Storage Barometric Pressure: 70-103 kPa
HumanWare
Corporate Headquarters
1800 Michaud, Drummondville, Québec, CANADA
Telephone: 1‑888‑723‑7273
FAX: (819) 471‑4828
E-mail: ca.info@humanware.com
Sales: ca.sales@humanware.com
Web: www.humanware.com
Global
support
North America
Telephone: (800) 722 3393
Sales: us.sales@humanware.com
Support: us.support@humanware.com
Europe
Russell Smith House
2 Bullmatt Business Centre
Northampton Road, Rushden,
Northamptonshire NN10 6AR
United Kingdom
Telephone: 01933 415800
FAX: 01933 411209
Sales: eu.sales@humanware.com
Support: eu.support@humanware.com
Australia /
Asia
Suite 2, 7‑11 Railway Street, PO Box 944,
Baulkham Hills
NSW 2153, Australia
Telephone: (02) 9686 2600
FAX: (02) 9686 2855
E-mail: au.sales@humanware.com
Copyright
2010 HumanWare, Drummondville, Canada.
All rights reserved.
No part
of this publication may be reproduced in any form whatsoever without the
express written permission of HumanWare Limited. Every effort has been made to
ensure that the information contained in this user guide is correct at the time
of issue. Neither HumanWare Limited nor its agents assume responsibility for
errors or omissions in this information. No liability is assumed for damages
resulting from the use of this information.
This
product complies with the requirements of EMC Directive 89/336/EEC.
Braille
translation copyright 1975‑2005 Duxbury Systems, Inc. All rights
reserved.
The
patent for the touch cursor technology incorporated in the BrailleNote is owned
by ALVA BV.
The
Zip/Unzip functionality in the File Manager uses the SharpZipLib from the
ICsharp team. For more information, see http://www.icsharpcode.net
The Text
Adventure Games application in KeySoft uses a software module based upon the
Jzip interpreter written by John D. Holder and redistributed according to the
terms below:
Original
source code and programs are available from the Interactive Fiction Archive
whose main page is http://www.ifarchive.org/
Jzip V2.1 Infocom/Inform Zcode Format
Interpreter
‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑‑
Copyright
(c) 2000 John D. Holder. All rights reserved.
Redistribution
and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted
provided that the following conditions are met:
1.
Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
2.
Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this
list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or
other materials provided with the distribution.
THIS
SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE AUTHOR "AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF
MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO
EVENT SHALL THE AUTHOR BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,
EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT
OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS
INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN
CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING
IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY
OF SUCH DAMAGE.
The PDF to text conversion
utility is based on software from Xpdf, copyright 1996-2011 Glyph & Cog,
LLC. (http://foolabs.com/xpdf), and
distributed under the terms of the GNU General Public License v2. The source
code for this program is available from the HumanWare website, or through the
customer service representatives.
Authorized European Union Representative:
HumanWare
Russell Smith House
2 Bullmatt Business Centre
Northampton Road, Rushden
Northamptonshire NN10 6AR
United Kingdom
phone: +44 (0) 1933 415 800
fax: +44 (0)1933
411 209
e‑mail: eu.info@humanware.com
web: www.humanware.com
Contents
1 Getting Started.................................................................................... 1
1.1 Unpacking your BrailleNote.................................................................................... 1
1.2 General Features...................................................................................................... 2
1.3 Software Features.................................................................................................... 2
1.4 Orientation............................................................................................................... 4
1.5 Carry Case................................................................................................................ 4
1.6 Thumb Keys............................................................................................................. 5
1.7 Braille Display.......................................................................................................... 5
1.8 Touch Cursor............................................................................................................ 5
1.9 Power Switch........................................................................................................... 5
1.10 Keyboard................................................................................................................. 6
1.11 Scroll Wheel............................................................................................................. 7
1.12 Resetting the BrailleNote BT................................................................................... 8
1.13 Speech...................................................................................................................... 8
1.14 Earphones................................................................................................................. 8
1.15 KeySoft Concepts.................................................................................................... 9
1.16 The KeySoft Menus............................................................................................... 11
1.17 A First Experience................................................................................................. 12
1.18 General Functions.................................................................................................. 14
1.19 Switching Between Tasks...................................................................................... 18
1.20 Copying and Pasting Text...................................................................................... 19
1.21 Help........................................................................................................................ 19
1.22 One‑Handed Mode................................................................................................ 19
1.23 Saving before Switching off.................................................................................. 20
1.24 Time and Date........................................................................................................ 20
1.25 User Settings.......................................................................................................... 21
1.26 User Guide............................................................................................................. 22
1.27 Reviewing the Main Menu..................................................................................... 24
1.28 Information............................................................................................................ 25
1.29 Virtual GPS Navigation......................................................................................... 26
1.30 Where to Now?...................................................................................................... 26
2 BrailleNote Apex BT Hardware........................................................... 29
2.1 The Battery............................................................................................................ 29
2.2 Long Term Storage................................................................................................ 31
2.3 Connectors and sockets......................................................................................... 31
2.4 Secure Digital Cards.............................................................................................. 33
2.5 USB Peripherals..................................................................................................... 35
2.6 Current time........................................................................................................... 36
2.7 Visual Display........................................................................................................ 36
2.8 Braille Terminal for Screen Reader........................................................................ 41
2.9 Braille Display Care............................................................................................... 42
2.10 General Care.......................................................................................................... 42
3 Word Processor................................................................................. 43
3.1 What is a Word Processor...................................................................................... 43
3.2 Braille and Text...................................................................................................... 43
3.3 The KeyWord Menu.............................................................................................. 44
3.4 Documents Folders and Drives.............................................................................. 44
3.5 Opening a Document............................................................................................. 45
3.6 Naming a Document.............................................................................................. 46
3.7 Creating a Document............................................................................................. 46
3.8 Reading a Document............................................................................................. 48
3.9 Review Commands................................................................................................ 52
3.10 The Cursor.............................................................................................................. 52
3.11 Braille Display Modes............................................................................................ 54
3.12 Format Indicators................................................................................................... 55
3.13 Editing a Document............................................................................................... 59
3.14 Breaking your Document into Pages..................................................................... 61
3.15 Checking the Word Count and File name............................................................. 62
3.16 Searching a Document........................................................................................... 62
3.17 Checking the Cursor Position................................................................................ 64
3.18 Going to a Specified Position................................................................................ 64
3.19 Marking Places for Quick Reference..................................................................... 64
3.20 The Spelling Checker............................................................................................. 65
3.21 Opening ASCII and Plain Braille format Documents........................................... 69
3.22 Opening and working with DOCX files................................................................ 71
3.23 Accessing PDF Content......................................................................................... 72
3.24 Large Documents................................................................................................... 73
3.25 Switching Between Documents............................................................................. 73
3.26 Setting the Default Working Language................................................................. 73
3.27......................................................................................................................................... 74
4 Book Reader...................................................................................... 75
4.1 Instant Braille Transcription................................................................................... 75
4.2 Reading the Sample Book..................................................................................... 75
4.3 Braille Display thumb key commands................................................................... 75
4.4 The Review Cursor................................................................................................ 76
4.5 Additional Reading Commands............................................................................ 77
4.6 Miscellaneous commands....................................................................................... 78
4.7 Review Book Opening Options............................................................................. 78
4.8 Reading Books Stored on Other Drives................................................................ 80
4.9 Exiting KeyBook................................................................................................... 81
4.10 Bookshare.............................................................................................................. 82
4.11 DAISY Book Reader............................................................................................ 84
4.12 Audible.com Books............................................................................................... 90
4.13 NLS books............................................................................................................. 91
4.14 NIMAS books........................................................................................................ 91
5 General Functions.............................................................................. 93
5.1 Date........................................................................................................................ 94
5.2 Time Options.......................................................................................................... 94
5.3 Grade of Braille for Keyboard Entry..................................................................... 96
5.4 Braille Display Options.......................................................................................... 96
5.5 Keyboard Settings............................................................................................... 101
5.6 Review Voice....................................................................................................... 102
5.7 Visual Display...................................................................................................... 105
5.8 Next Appointment............................................................................................... 106
5.9 Power and Battery Status.................................................................................... 106
5.10 User Guide........................................................................................................... 106
5.11 Insertion............................................................................................................... 106
5.12 Repeat and Spell.................................................................................................. 107
5.13 Hear Punctuation................................................................................................. 107
5.14 Move to Another Task......................................................................................... 108
5.15 Front Thumb Keys On/Off.................................................................................. 109
5.16 Scroll wheel On/Off............................................................................................. 109
5.17 Change Speech Volume Rate and Pitch.............................................................. 109
5.18 UEB Symbols Table............................................................................................. 109
5.19 Editing at a Prompt.............................................................................................. 110
6 Embossing and Printing Documents................................................. 113
6.1 Setting Up the Embosser or Printer..................................................................... 113
6.2 Printing with USB............................................................................................... 113
6.3 Printing with Bluetooth....................................................................................... 113
6.4 Embossing or Printing a Document..................................................................... 114
6.5 Embossing Options.............................................................................................. 115
6.6 Embossing a Group of Documents...................................................................... 115
6.7 The Embosser Set‑up List.................................................................................... 116
6.8 Printing a Braille Document................................................................................. 118
6.9 Testing the Embosser........................................................................................... 118
6.10 The Printer Set‑Up List........................................................................................ 119
6.11 Testing the Printer................................................................................................ 120
7 Advanced Word Processing............................................................. 121
7.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 121
7.2 Document Types.................................................................................................. 122
7.3 Formatting a Braille Document............................................................................ 122
7.4 Formatting a Braille Document for Ink‑printing.................................................. 130
7.5 Block Commands................................................................................................. 136
7.6 Cursor Movement Modes.................................................................................... 142
7.7 Moving to the Start of the Next Line.................................................................. 143
7.8 Moving to the Next Tab....................................................................................... 143
7.9 Inserting the Time Date or Calculator Result...................................................... 143
7.10 Binding Spaces.................................................................................................... 144
7.11 Pasting an Address.............................................................................................. 144
7.12 Working with Documents on other Drives.......................................................... 144
7.13 Saving a Document.............................................................................................. 144
7.14 Quitting a Document........................................................................................... 145
7.15 Text Documents................................................................................................... 146
7.16 Computer Braille.................................................................................................. 147
7.17 Formatting a Text Document............................................................................... 148
7.18 Creating Other Document Types......................................................................... 155
7.19 Initial Format Settings in a Document................................................................. 156
7.20 Extended Characters............................................................................................ 156
7.21 Nemeth Code Entry............................................................................................. 161
7.22 UEB Braille Code................................................................................................ 162
8 The Scientific Calculator.................................................................. 163
8.1 Entering KeyPlus................................................................................................. 163
8.2 Entering a Calculation.......................................................................................... 163
8.3 Basic Operations.................................................................................................. 165
8.4 Statistical Operations........................................................................................... 169
8.5 Memory Operations............................................................................................. 177
8.6 Scientific Operations............................................................................................ 179
8.7 Inserting a Result or a Calculation....................................................................... 181
9 Planner............................................................................................ 183
9.1 Entering the Planner............................................................................................. 183
9.2 The KeyPlan Menu.............................................................................................. 183
9.3 Selecting a Date................................................................................................... 183
9.4 Scheduling Appointments.................................................................................... 186
9.5 Recurring Appointments...................................................................................... 188
9.6 Reviewing the Appointments.............................................................................. 192
9.7 Changing an Existing Appointment..................................................................... 194
9.8 Selecting Another Date........................................................................................ 196
9.9 Alarms.................................................................................................................. 196
9.10 Embossing and Printing....................................................................................... 198
10 Address List.................................................................................... 199
10.1 Adding an Address.............................................................................................. 199
10.2 Looking Up an Address....................................................................................... 201
10.3 Changing a Field or Adding More Information.................................................. 203
10.4 Deleting a Record................................................................................................ 204
10.5 Duplicating a Record........................................................................................... 204
10.6 Inserting an Address into a Document................................................................ 204
10.7 Embossing Addresses.......................................................................................... 205
10.8 Printing Addresses............................................................................................... 206
10.9 Templates............................................................................................................. 207
10.10 Copying Addresses.............................................................................................. 209
10.11 Selecting an Address List.................................................................................... 210
10.12 Creating an Address List..................................................................................... 210
10.13 Using KeyList to Manipulate Databases............................................................. 212
11 E‑mail.............................................................................................. 213
11.1 What Can KeyMail Do........................................................................................ 213
11.2 KeyMail Menu..................................................................................................... 214
11.3 Before You Start.................................................................................................. 215
11.4 Correcting Input Errors........................................................................................ 216
11.5 Writing an E‑mail Message.................................................................................. 216
11.6 Email Signatures.................................................................................................. 219
11.7 Attaching a file to an e‑mail................................................................................. 219
11.8 Read E‑mail......................................................................................................... 220
11.9 Send and Receive E‑mail..................................................................................... 229
11.10 Setup Options...................................................................................................... 231
12 Web Browser................................................................................... 237
12.1 Connecting to the World Wide Web................................................................... 237
12.2 Changing to another part of KeySoft.................................................................. 237
12.3 Logging on........................................................................................................... 238
12.4 Navigation............................................................................................................ 239
12.5 Moving from Page to Page or Site to Site........................................................... 242
12.6 Page Management................................................................................................ 242
12.7 Application Management..................................................................................... 244
12.8 Favorites............................................................................................................... 247
12.9 Tables................................................................................................................... 249
12.10 History................................................................................................................. 249
12.11 Downloading....................................................................................................... 251
12.12 How to Download a file...................................................................................... 251
12.13 Re-analyzing a Web Page.................................................................................... 252
13 Chat................................................................................................ 253
13.1 Setting up Instant Messaging Service Options.................................................... 253
13.2 Signing on to Instant Messaging Service............................................................. 253
13.3 Instant Messaging Conversation Initiated by User.............................................. 254
13.4 Instant Messaging Conversation Initiated by Receiving
Instant Message.......... 254
13.5 Changing Availability Status............................................................................... 255
13.6 Changing Action when Contact Availability Status
Changes............................. 255
13.7 Changing Action when New Message Arrives.................................................... 255
13.8 Adding a Contact................................................................................................ 255
13.9 Reviewing Contact Information.......................................................................... 256
13.10 Deleting a Contact............................................................................................... 256
13.11 Renaming an Instant Messaging Contact............................................................ 256
13.12 Changing the Contact List Filter (online, by type,
etc.)...................................... 256
14 Connectivity..................................................................................... 259
14.1 Understanding Connectivity Concepts................................................................ 259
14.2 Connection Configurations.................................................................................. 260
14.3 The Connectivity Menu....................................................................................... 260
14.4 Using a Wireless Connection............................................................................... 261
14.5 Wireless Options.................................................................................................. 264
14.6 Dial up and LAN Connections............................................................................ 265
14.7 Active Connection Details................................................................................... 268
14.8 Review an existing connection configuration...................................................... 268
14.9 Glossary of terms:................................................................................................ 270
14.10 Troubleshooting................................................................................................... 270
14.11 Firewalls............................................................................................................... 271
14.12 Bluetooth............................................................................................................. 271
14.13 Accessing the Network through your BrailleNote BT......................................... 273
14.14 Connecting your BrailleNote to a PC.................................................................. 276
14.15 Troubleshooting ActiveSync................................................................................ 280
14.16 KeySync............................................................................................................... 280
14.17 File Synchronization............................................................................................ 287
15 File Manager.................................................................................... 289
15.1 Selecting Files Folders and Drives....................................................................... 289
15.2 Checking the Spelling of Folder or File Names................................................... 290
15.3 The Browse Files Option..................................................................................... 290
15.4 Document and File Types.................................................................................... 291
15.5 Zipping files......................................................................................................... 292
15.6 Folder Manager.................................................................................................... 293
15.7 Opening Files using File Manager........................................................................ 295
15.8 Changing the Order of File Lists......................................................................... 295
15.9 Selecting Multiple Files........................................................................................ 296
15.10 Copying a File...................................................................................................... 297
15.11 Erasing a File........................................................................................................ 298
15.12 Renaming a File................................................................................................... 298
15.13 Moving a File....................................................................................................... 298
15.14 Protecting a File................................................................................................... 299
15.15 Groups of Files and Wild Cards.......................................................................... 299
15.16 What is a Directory.............................................................................................. 300
15.17 Creating Renaming and Erasing Sub‑Directories................................................ 303
15.18 File Translation..................................................................................................... 305
15.19 Translation Menu................................................................................................. 306
15.20 Importing Files..................................................................................................... 306
16 Utilities Menu................................................................................... 319
16.1 Backup or Restore Files....................................................................................... 319
16.2 Pronunciation Dictionary..................................................................................... 321
16.3 Date and Time Set............................................................................................... 324
16.4 Application Programs........................................................................................... 325
16.5 Miscellaneous Options......................................................................................... 325
16.6 Key Management................................................................................................. 326
16.7 Security................................................................................................................ 326
16.8 Installing New KeySoft Versions........................................................................ 328
17 Media Center................................................................................... 329
17.1 Media Player........................................................................................................ 329
17.2 Audio Recorder................................................................................................... 335
17.3 FM Radio............................................................................................................. 340
17.4 Internet Radio...................................................................................................... 343
18 Database Manager........................................................................... 345
18.1 Overview.............................................................................................................. 346
18.2 KeyBase Menu..................................................................................................... 347
18.3 Exporting data..................................................................................................... 354
18.4 Creating a new Database..................................................................................... 354
18.5 Sort Orders........................................................................................................... 361
18.6 Record Title......................................................................................................... 362
18.7 Associated Database Name................................................................................. 363
18.8 Database File Management.................................................................................. 364
19 Games............................................................................................ 367
19.1 Starting a Game................................................................................................... 368
19.2 Entering Commands............................................................................................ 369
19.3 Leaving a game.................................................................................................... 371
19.4 Saving Games...................................................................................................... 372
19.5 Reading Previous Moves..................................................................................... 372
19.6 Status Line........................................................................................................... 373
19.7 Single Key Mode................................................................................................. 374
19.8 Downloading and Playing More Games.............................................................. 375
19.9 Selecting Games for Children.............................................................................. 375
19.10 Freely Available Games....................................................................................... 375
19.11 Commercial Games.............................................................................................. 375
19.12 Hints and Walkthroughs...................................................................................... 375
19.13 Internet Resources............................................................................................... 376
19.14 History of Text Adventure Games...................................................................... 376
20 Command Summary......................................................................... 379
20.1 General Commands.............................................................................................. 379
20.2 Word Processor.................................................................................................... 386
20.3 Book Reader........................................................................................................ 393
20.4 Calculator............................................................................................................. 396
20.5 Planner................................................................................................................. 404
20.6 Address List......................................................................................................... 408
20.7 E‑mail................................................................................................................... 409
20.8 Database Manager................................................................................................ 411
20.9 Games.................................................................................................................. 413
20.10 Unicode Characters.............................................................................................. 415
20.11 Web Browser....................................................................................................... 415
20.12 Chat...................................................................................................................... 418
20.13 Stopwatch............................................................................................................ 419
20.14 Media Player........................................................................................................ 419
21 Index............................................................................................... 451
Please
note that the information found in this user guide applies to both the
BrailleNote and the VoiceNote. However, because the VoiceNote does not have a
Braille display or Thumb keys, VoiceNote users should disregard any references
to these features.
Welcome
to the BrailleNote/VoiceNote Apex BT, an innovative personal productivity
system, from HumanWare. The BrailleNote Apex BT incorporates a Braille style
keyboard, a Braille display, high quality responsive speech and a suite of
powerful applications running under the Windows CE operating system, all
packaged into a truly portable system. This User Guide tells you all about
them. The VoiceNote Apex BT provides the same features and functionalities as
the BrailleNote, but without the benefit of a Braille Display or set of Thumb
keys.
Note: For
ease of reading, the BrailleNote Apex BT and VoiceNote Apex BT will be referred
to as the BrailleNote throughout most of this user guide.
Carefully
unpack your BrailleNote. Save the box and packing materials for future use.
Your BrailleNote package comprises the following items:
BrailleNote
Apex BT;
AC
adapter;
Slim
line carrying case;
Earphones; (except in Australia)
USB
cable;
USB
serial adapter cable;
Audio
CD containing a "Getting Started Tutorial;"
Getting
Started Guide in ink‑print;
Command
summary in ink‑print and embossed Braille;
BrailleNote companion CD.
BrailleNote GPS full version.
Concise Oxford Dictionary and Thesaurus
User Guide in ink‑print
Braille Manual
Software Maintenance Agreements
USB external modem.
The
BrailleNote is a compact portable Personal Organizer with an ergonomic Braille
keyboard, a Braille display and a scroll wheel. The Braille display's cells are
comprised of 8 dots, allowing for both the display of 6 dot and 8 dot Braille.
Each cell of the Braille display has an associated cursor routing button. Four
thumb keys on the front of the BrailleNote BT supplement the Braille display and
provide convenient navigation control.
You will
also find an audio output socket for earphones and an input socket for a
microphone. A VGA port is also included.
The
BrailleNote also has synthesized speech output that can be used in conjunction
with the Braille display or on its own.
The
BrailleNote runs on AC power or batteries. Indications of battery and charger
status are displayed on the Braille display and spoken.
The
BrailleNote BT has USB 2.0 host and client ports, a Bluetooth transceiver, WI‑FI
capability, and ethernet port. It also has 8 GB of flash memory that retains
information indefinitely, even if the batteries run flat.
The Secure Digital (SD) card slot allows for
additional storage, and the 3 USB host ports can be used to plug in devices such
as keyboards, embossers, printers, card readers, external hard drives and USB
thumb drives. For information on compatible devices, see our website at
www.humanware.com.
A multi‑purpose
program, called KeySoft, running under the Windows CE
operating system, is especially designed for people with a visual impairment.
KeySoft provides the following functions:
A word
processor called KeyWord that is powerful yet surprisingly
simple to learn. KeyWord lets you work in Braille or text, and format the same
document for printing and embossing. KeyWord has most of the features of an
office word processor, including unlimited text insertion, search and replace,
indents, clipboard operations, spell check and so on.
An e‑mail
program called KeyMail that lets you send and receive
electronic mail, using a secure connection if required. You can also send and
receive attachments with your e‑mail.
An internet
browser called KeyWeb, that allows you to search and use
the world wide web and also read locally stored html documents.
A chat
program called KeyChat that allows you to send and receive
instant messages.
A Media player that plays a range of audio format files and allows you to record and
play back memos. It also provides you with an FM Radio that can be
automatically tuned and have multiple stations preset.
A
calendar, scheduler and planner called KeyPlan. Your entries may include alarms
that sound even if the BrailleNote BT is switched off.
An
address list manager called KeyList that sorts your entries and allows
flexible searching. Addresses can be copied into letters and e‑mail.
A
synchronization tool called KeySync that works in conjunction with KeyPlan
and KeyList to keep their records up to date with MS Outlook on a PC.
A 10
digit scientific calculator called KeyPlus. Support is provided for Nemeth, UK
and Unified English Braille (UEB) mathematics.
A book
reader called KeyBook that enables you to read Braille books, or
books in any standard text format including Microsoft Word and DAISY format.
Books opened in KeyBook are protected from accidental
editing.
You can
access books from Bookshare.org via KeyWeb, and read them using KeyBook.
A Keyboard Learn function that helps you to learn the keyboard layout and the available
quick key functions.
A File Manager that allows files to be copied, renamed, protected, deleted and
translated.
A program
called ActiveSync that allows the BrailleNote BT disk structure
to be viewed and managed on a PC running Microsoft Windows.
A
Database Manager called KeyBase that allows you to store a wide
range of information including recipes, bank records, a catalog of CDs in your
CD collection and so on. KeyBase comes with 9 different databases. If you
cannot find exactly what you need from the list of supplied databases, you can
develop new databases and modify the definition of existing databases.
A Games
application that enables you to play fun text adventure games, also known as
Interactive Fiction. These games are played using text‑based input and
output
A Braille Terminal that allows the BrailleNote to act as a Braille display and keyboard for
PCs running screen readers such as Window‑Eyes or
JAWSÒ.
A Clock, Calendar and Stopwatch.
A Network Client option that lets you use a connection between the BrailleNote and a
network to access the rest of the network from your BrailleNote.
You can
switch easily between these KeySoft functions, which are fully integrated so
you can transfer information between them.
KeySoft
has both forward and back Braille translators, so a text document can be
imported into the BrailleNote and translated automatically into an uncontracted
(grade 1) or contracted (grade 2) Braille document, and vice versa.
It is
also possible to connect a stand‑alone monitor directly into the
BrailleNote's VGA port, bypassing the need for a computer. A sighted teacher,
parent or colleague can view in real time the work being done on the
BrailleNote.
Alternatively,
a feature called KeyView allows you to connect the
BrailleNote to a computer for the purpose of displaying the BrailleNote's
output on the computer's screen. Using KeyView, a sighted person can view in
real time the work being done on the BrailleNote, including the Braille on the
Braille display and an immediate translation from Braille to text. KeyView
provides a transparent interface between the print and Braille reader.
Information
can be transferred to and from another computer such as a PC or Apple Macintosh,
or specialized equipment such as a self‑contained scanning system.
The
BrailleNote BT supports the following Braille codes: American English Braille
(US), British Braille (UK), Australian Braille, British Braille 2004 (UK 2004),
Unified English Braille (UEB), Braille Français Unifié (BFU), Parisian and
Canadian French.
Computer
Braille is also available for direct interaction with print codes.
As
standard, the following languages are supported: English, French, Spanish,
German and Italian.
BrailleNote
BT has a one‑handed Braille input keyboard mode, providing convenience
for people restricted to the use of one hand.
The BrailleNote is supplied in a slim line wrap around leather carry case. To open the case, lift the flap on the front edge. Fold back the case to allow operation. You can use your BrailleNote while it is in its carry case. On the front edge of the BrailleNote BT you will find 4 buttons called thumb keys. These keys should face you.
To remove
the BrailleNote from the carry case, please follow these steps:
1. On a flat surface, open the case by lifting the flap off the front edge. Do not fold it under the unit.
2. Lift the velcro flap on the
underside of the right side.
3. Unfasten the small velcro tab
located at the right corner of the rear edge. This allows you to open up the
corner of the case, giving you access to the device.
4. Carefully pull out the unit from the
case.
To
reinsert the unit into the case:
1. Hold the unit with the right hand,
and hold the flap on the right edge of the case open with your left hand.
2. Slide the BrailleNote into the case
and close the right edge velcro flap and fasten the right corner.
3. You can close the top flap if you
don't intend on using the unit.
Important:
Magnets are embedded in the top flap. Do not place credit cards near the flap.
The four
keys facing you are normally operated by your thumbs so we call them “Thumb
keys” to differentiate them from the main keyboard keys. They are used in
conjunction with the Braille display when reading and navigating menus and
lists. They can be operated using your thumbs without moving your fingers from
the Braille display discussed in the next section.
The thumb
keys can be set up for left‑handed or right‑handed operation. You
can also create a custom thumb key set up to suit your personal preference as
discussed in 5.4.14 Thumb Key Set. The factory setting is right‑handed.
To turn the thumb keys on and off, please refer to 5.15 Front Thumb Keys On/Off.
The thumb
keys are named as follows: PREVIOUS, BACK, ADVANCE and NEXT. In the right‑handed configuration the key functions are assigned
from left to right in that order with PREVIOUS on the left and NEXT on the right. For the left‑handed configuration the functions are
assigned in the reverse order with PREVIOUS on the far right and NEXT on the far left.
If you
put your thumbs on the thumb keys and drop your fingers, they will be
positioned on or about the Braille display. The electronic Braille display is
comprised of identical eight dot cells that can display any Braille symbol.
Each dot of the Braille display is, in fact, a pin that is controlled
electronically. To display a dot the pin is raised and the pin is lowered when
there is no dot. When the display is off all dots are raised slightly and are
somewhat spongy to touch. The Braille display is able to be refreshed; it can
be written and re‑written repeatedly.
If you
move your finger to the top of a Braille cell, you will notice that there is a
raised round button above it. This is the touch cursor for that cell. It is
especially useful when editing. In KeyWord, for example, when you press a touch
cursor button, the cursor moves to that cell. You can then edit the character
displaying on that cell, if any. This is discussed in chapter 3.
The touch
cursor can also be used to select an item from a menu or list.
From the
front edge of your BrailleNote, move your hand along the left side of the case
and towards the rear and you will come upon a rocker type power switch. To
switch the BrailleNote on, press the power switch near the front of the rocker.
A power on message is displayed, the content of which will depend on where the
BrailleNote was when you last switched off. To switch off, press the power
switch near the rear of the rocker.
Every
time you switch the BrailleNote BT on, its operation resumes in exactly the
same place as it was when you switched it off. If you are not sure if the
BrailleNote BT is on or off, feel the position of the power switch.
If you
don’t use the BrailleNote BT for approximately 10 minutes it will enter
hibernate mode, where the power drawn from the battery is the same as if the
unit was switched off. Pressing any key will end the hibernate mode. If you
want the Braille display to come up without typing, press BACKSPACE with ENTER.
If your
BrailleNote BT displays "Battery is low," or "Battery is critical" or does not come to life, you should
plug in the AC adapter. The power socket is located at the rear of the
BrailleNote BT's right edge. Locate the socket then the small plug on the end
of the AC adapter cable. Plug the small AC adapter plug into the socket. Plug
the AC adapter into a wall socket. The message "AC adapter on" is displayed to confirm battery
charging is in progress.
When the
unit is powered on, the amber LED on the rear edge of the unit will light up.
If the AC cord is plugged in and the battery is recharging, this LED will
blink. It will turn off when the unit is powered down.
If the
BrailleNote BT does not start, wait 30 seconds or so and try switching it off
then on again. If this does not work then press the Reset button. The
BrailleNote BT immediately beeps to confirm that it has been reset. After about
10 seconds, KeySoft displays a sign on message and resumes from the Main Menu.
For information on how to reset, please see 1.12 Resetting the BrailleNote BT.
On the
top surface of the BrailleNote BT you will find the Braille keyboard. It is
like a Braille writer, with eight keys and a space bar. The two extra keys on
the extreme left and right are for your little fingers. The left‑hand key
is called BACKSPACE, or sometimes dot 7, and the right‑hand key is called ENTER, or dot 8. The single space bar is in the usual place.
In this
user guide, key presses are described in the following way. The instruction:
Press H means that you should press the
dots for the letter H, which are 1, 2, and 5, then release them. This instruction may also be presented as:
Press dots 1‑2‑5.
The order
in which you press the keys does not matter. The character is typed when the
keys are released.
You will
also encounter instructions such as: "press SPACE with H". This means that you press the space bar
as well as dots 1‑2‑5, and then release them. This may
seem very strange at first, because you are probably accustomed to pressing the
space bar by itself to create a space between words. In KeySoft, the space bar
pressed by itself produces a space in the same way but in addition, it is used
in combination with other keys to obtain many KeySoft commands. Similarly, the BACKSPACE and ENTER keys can be used on their own or in combination with other keys.
The
Scroll Wheel is a feature that allows you to intuitively perform a set of
actions without using the Braille keyboard. Its general use is described in
this section. You will find that there are specific uses for the Scroll Wheel
in the various applications. The different ways to use the Scroll Wheel are
listed in the Command Summary in the respective application sections.
The
Scroll Wheel is situated in the middle of the top surface of the BrailleNote.
It is located between dots 1 and 4, right above the Space bar. The Scroll wheel
is in fact a combination of three distinct components: the four arrow keys, the
Wheel and the Center button.
The four
arrow keys are in fact a multi‑purpose circular button around the wheel.
There are four raised markers indicating up, down, left and right. Each of
these acts as a separate button.
General
use of the arrow keys
In Menus
or Lists, at the Folder name prompt, and list of Folders prompt, the UP arrow will act as the ESCAPE command (Space with E).
In Menus
or Lists, at the Folder name prompt, and list of Folders prompt, the DOWN arrow will call up the Contextual help feature
(Space with H).
The LEFT arrow will bring you to the top
menus and lists (Space with L).
The RIGHT arrow will bring you to the end of menus and
lists (Space with dots 4‑5‑6).
The wheel
has 6 raised lines. You can use your finger to scroll the wheel to the left or
to the right. The wheel was designed to provide incremented scrolling, meaning
that it will only turn in short steps to ensure accurate selections.
General
use of Wheel
In menus,
lists and at the List of Folders prompt, turning counter‑clockwise will
move you backwards. At the Folder name prompt, it will allow you to access the
Drive list. (Back thumb key)
In menus,
lists and at the List of Folders prompt, turning clockwise will move you
forward. At the Folder name prompt, it will allow you to access the Folder
list. (Advance thumb key)
Note that
in certain applications, you can toggle between different navigation levels by
pressing the Down arrow.
The
Center button is located in the middle of the wheel.
General
use of the Center button
In Menus
or Lists, at the Folder name prompt, and list of Folders prompt, the Center
button acts as the Enter function (dot 8).
The Reset
button is located just behind the Power switch. The Reset button is recessed to
avoid accidental operation, so you may need to use a pointed object to press
it.
Details
of when and how to reset the BrailleNote are mentioned in context throughout
this User Guide.
Appendix
C Troubleshooting deals with this topic in detail. Resets are also described in
Reset Topics in the online index.
You can
listen to the BrailleNote BT using either the built‑in stereo speakers,
or earphones. If earphones are plugged in, the speakers are automatically disabled.
The
headphone socket is on the left hand side of the unit, the first one you
encounter as you slide your hand from front to back. The next socket is used
for microphone. You will not damage the unit or any peripheral if you select
the wrong socket. Note that there is a tactile dot above and under the
headphone socket.
To
increase the volume, press ENTER with dot 4. To decrease the volume, press ENTER with dot 1. You can hold down the ENTER key and keep tapping the increase or decrease
keys to move several steps up or down the volume scale.
The
speech supplements the Braille display. You might prefer the Braille display
when editing text, reading detailed material or accessing notes during meetings
but prefer speech for reading longer documents such as novels when reading for
pleasure. For information on how to turn on and off the speech and Braille
display, please see 5.4.1 Turning the Braille Display On and Off and 5.6.1 Speech On or Off.
To use
the earphones, adjust the volume to a comfortable level after fitting the
earphones and while the BrailleNote BT is speaking. The BrailleNote BT will
also work with a wide range of other popular ear‑ and headphone styles.
Learning
to use the BrailleNote BT is easy because the User Interface is very
consistent. Similar operations in different parts of KeySoft are carried out in
similar ways. This section covers the concepts behind the way KeySoft operates.
At any
point in KeySoft you can get information about the options that are available.
To do this, press SPACE with H. KeySoft help is context sensitive,
which means that you are only given help relevant to your current situation.
Remember to press SPACE with H for Help when you need it. It does
not affect your work in any way, and after you have finished reading the Help
message, you are returned to the point at which you selected Help.
While
using help, you can press the command offered to execute that command. This
applies to both single help messages and lists of commands.
If a help
message cannot fit on the Braille display, use the ADVANCE thumb key to read further along and use the BACK thumb key to review.
The
Braille grade used for displaying help messages can be selected. The factory
setting is Grade 2 Braille. You can change the setting as described in 5.4.6 Preferred Reading Grade.
Whenever
KeySoft requires input from you, a brief message called a prompt is displayed.
If you are unsure how to respond, press SPACE with H for help. Where possible, KeySoft offers
reasonable suggested choices.
BrailleNote
BT provides prompts in Braille, speech or both together. The factory set up
turns on both the Braille display and speech and the following discussion
assumes that both are on. You can read the Braille display or listen to the
voice or do both. When this User Guide states that the BrailleNote BT "displays a message" it is referring to both the message
appearing on the Braille display and being spoken. You will notice that the
prompt that appears on the Braille display is often in shorter form than the
announced version, which is the one quoted in this User Guide. For example, the
BrailleNote BT will announce, "Folder name? Press ENTER for General" while it displays, "Folder name? General".
You can
turn off one or other of the outputs; refer to 1.18.1 Turning the Braille Display On or Off and 1.18.2 Turning Speech On or Off.
Generally
the prompts displayed in Braille are identical to what is spoken. Sometimes
there are slight differences because what is appropriate in speech does not
need to be displayed in Braille. Also, because the Braille display has a
limited length, Braille output is limited to the number of whole words that fit
on the display. If a prompt is longer than the Braille display or you are
reading a long passage of Braille, you can scroll the Braille display to see
the next group of words by pressing the ADVANCE thumb key. In the following discussion it is
assumed that you will scroll to read the full prompt as necessary. Remember you
can also scroll back to see the previous display by pressing the BACK thumb key.
To help
reading longer messages and prompts you can move the Braille display one word
at a time. To move the Braille display one word to the left, press PREVIOUS together with BACK. To move the Braille display one word to the
right, press PREVIOUS together with ADVANCE.
You can
return to the previous prompt by pressing PREVIOUS at any time.
If you
miss hearing a prompt when it is spoken the first time, don't worry. You can
listen to it again by pressing SPACE with R.
KeySoft
gives detailed spoken prompts and messages to help you learn the system. To
prevent these messages slowing down an experienced user, speech is cut off
automatically by the next keystroke.
KeySoft
uses a series of menus to provide a quick and easy way of performing many
complex functions. Each menu contains a list of options from which to choose.
For example, the Main Menu allows you to select the Word Processor, Planner,
Address List, and so on. The selection of items is described in 1.16 The KeySoft Menus.
Many of
the more frequently used functions are also available via short‑cut key
combinations. These are mentioned in context throughout this user guide, as
well as being listed in the Command Summary.
Another
concept used throughout KeySoft is that of exiting what you are doing and
taking one step back to the previous option point.
You can
do this by pressing SPACE with E particularly while using the
keyboard, or the PREVIOUS thumb key particularly when you are using the
Braille display.
You can
switch from one KeySoft task to another with a simple key sequence. For
example, you can switch from the Word Processor to the Planner, and then return
to the same point in your document. For information on how to do this, refer to 1.19 Switching Between Tasks.
KeySoft
assumes that you want to create Braille documents, so that is the suggested
choice when you go into the Word Processor and Email etc.
You can
select the language that you want to work in and the Braille code for the
language you are working in. For example, if you are working in the English
language, then you can select US, UK, Australian, UEB or UK2004 Braille Codes.
You can also select the Braille grade for keyboard input.
You also
have the option of generating text documents directly.
The entry
point to KeySoft is the Main Menu, which contains 17 items. You can display
each of these items in turn, and select one.
When you
have done this, you are generally presented with another menu. The system may
extend to 3 or 4 levels of sub‑menu. This structure is an important
aspect of KeySoft. Items are grouped together for easy location, so a huge range
of functions can be found from one starting point, the Main Menu.
For
example, if you start at the Main Menu and choose the Word processor option,
you are presented with the KeyWord menu. This contains the following items:
Create a document, Open a document, Emboss a document, Print a document, and
Setup options. These all relate to word‑processing.
If you
choose to Emboss a document, you are presented with a further choice of
Embossing, or Setting up the embosser, and so on.
You can
read through any menu using only the thumb keys and Braille display.
Consequently, you can keep your hands on the Braille display avoiding the need
to go back and forwards between the Braille display and keyboard.
The thumb
keys perform the following functions:
To step forwards through a menu ‑ press the ADVANCE thumb key. Menu items are displayed
one at a time.
To step back through a menu ‑ press the BACK thumb key. Menu items are displayed one at a time in
reverse order.
To select a menu item ‑ press the NEXT thumb key.
To exit a menu ‑ press the PREVIOUS thumb key.
When
KeySoft displays the option you want, press the ENTER key. Don't worry about getting in over your
head, because you can always back out of a selection by pressing SPACE with E for exit on the keyboard.
When you
have selected an item from the Main Menu, you are generally presented with
another menu, from which you can again select an item. To display a Help
message describing your options at any point, press SPACE with H. To return to the previous menu,
press SPACE with E. To go directly to the Main Menu,
press SPACE with dots 1 to 6.
As well
as moving through the menus an item at a time as described in the previous
section, you can take a keyboard shortcut directly to a menu item by typing its
first letter. This automatically selects the item that starts with that letter.
KeySoft takes you straight to the action selected.
For example, if you are at the Main Menu and you want to go to the Word processor, you can press W. KeySoft goes straight to "KeyWord Menu". Press O and the "Open a Document" option is selected and KeySoft goes straight to the "Folder Name" prompt. This is a real time saver.
Most
people hate reading User Guides. They would much rather just have a go, on the
presumption that if the product is any good, it should be obvious how it works.
If that's
you, then this is your section. We'll go through two simple demonstrations: in
the first we'll create a basic word processor document, and in the second we'll
do an addition with the calculator. You should only need the simple commands
that have been introduced so far.
If you
are not keen on jumping in at the deep end, don't panic. It's not essential to
follow these demonstrations, because after this part we'll revert to normal
manual mode, and describe in detail all the wonderful things that the
BrailleNote BT can do.
Important: The BrailleNote BT can be used immediately
when you first receive it. For its first use however, it is recommended that it
be plugged into an electrical outlet to ensure that the battery is fully
recharged. For additional information on charging the battery, please see 2.1.1 Charging the Battery.
The aim
of this first exercise is to write a very simple document with the word
processor.
To reach
a common starting point, go to the Main Menu by pressing SPACE with dots 1 to 6. Your BrailleNote displays: "Main menu."
To get to
the word processor, press W. Your BrailleNote displays: "KeyWord menu."
To Create
a document, press C, for Create, and your BrailleNote
displays: "Folder name? General,"
KeySoft
is asking which part of its filing system you want to use, and is offering the
"General" folder. This is fine for now, so follow the prompt and
press ENTER. KeySoft then displays: "Document to create?"
You are
being asked to provide a name for the new document, so Braille a name such as:
"test." You can do this in Grade 1, as: ‘t e s t’, or in Grade 2 as:
‘t e’ followed by the ‘s t’ sign. A capital sign is optional because KeySoft
does not take them into account when finding documents.
When you
have typed the name, press ENTER. Your BrailleNote displays: "Top of document. Blank."
This
means that you have created a new document named “Test,” and the cursor is
sitting at the top of it. The Braille display is completely blank.
You are
now free to Braille whatever you like. For this demo, just Braille a simple
sentence such as: "This is a test of my new BrailleNote BT." You can use Grade 1 or Grade 2 as
you wish. Braille the first word and press SPACE. The characters are displayed on the Braille display as you Braille.
The cursor, dots 7‑8, appears to the right of the last character
Brailled. This shows where the next character will be entered. Each word is
spoken when the space bar is pressed. Complete your sentence.
That's
all we'll write for now. To finish this little exercise, press SPACE with E. Your BrailleNote BT displays: "KeyWord menu." You are back at the Word processor
menu, and your new document has been automatically saved. If you press SPACE with E again you arrive back where you
started, at the Main Menu.
You might
also like to try out the Calculator, which you can do without any extensive
knowledge of the BrailleNote BT. From the Main Menu, go to the Scientific
Calculator by pressing S. You hear: "KeyPlus. Zero." On the Braille display, just 0,
number sign followed by the letter J, is displayed.
This
means that the Calculator is ready. If someone has previously used the
Calculator and it displays a number other than 0, you can clear it by pressing BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
The
Nemeth Braille Code for Mathematics, the UK Braille Mathematics Notation and
Unified English Braille (UEB) are supported.
Let's try
calculating 2 plus 3. The BrailleNote BT knows that you are using the
Calculator, so you don't need to use any number signs. The numbers 1 through 9
and zero are just the letters A through J. Input the following key sequence
without using the SPACE bar in between entries. First
Braille 2, then Braille the plus sign for your
code. If you are using Nemeth, the plus sign is dots 3‑4‑6. If you are using UK Braille, the plus sign is dots 2‑3‑5. For UEB, use dots 2‑3‑5. Finally, Braille 3. Complete the calculation by pressing ENTER. The number 5 will be displayed.
You can
review the calculation by pressing the PREVIOUS and NEXT thumb keys together. The Braille display will show 2 + 3 = 5. Pressing the PREVIOUS and NEXT thumb keys again will return to just displaying the answer. If the
speech is on, the speech will mirror the content on the Braille display.
To
complete the exercise, press SPACE with dots 1 to 6, to return to the Main Menu.
Some
useful general functions are available wherever you are in KeySoft. These
functions may be accessed from the Options Menu, or often more conveniently via
a Quick Command sequence.
The
general functions allow you to control the configuration of Time, Date, Braille
settings and so on. You could be using the Word processor, or using the
Calculator, or reading a menu when you request one of these functions. After
display of the requested function you are returned to the place from where you
initiated the request.
The Quick
Commands typically use the SPACE, BACKSPACE or ENTER key in combination with another
letter. For example, ENTER with T displays the current time.
Not all
items on the Options Menu have an associated Quick Command key combination.
The
Options Menu can be accessed from anywhere in KeySoft by pressing SPACE with O. You use the Options Menu in the
same way as the Main Menu. For example, you can review the menu list by
pressing the SPACE and BACKSPACE keys on the keyboard.
The
Options Menu contains the following items. Where applicable, the equivalent
Quick Command is also given.
Date; ENTER with D
Time
Options; For
Time press ENTER with T
For
Stopwatch press ENTER with W
Grade
of Braille for Keyboard entry;
Braille
Options;
Keyboard
settings; BACKSPACE with ENTER with K
Review
voice; BACKSPACE with ENTER with R
Connectivity;
Visual
display;
Next
appointment; ENTER with N
Power
and Battery status;
User
Guide; BACKSPACE with ENTER with H
Insertion; ENTER with I
Spell.
Repeat and spell; ENTER with S
Hear
punctuation. Repeat with maximum punctuation; ENTER with H
Move
to another task; SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5
Front
thumb keys, turn them off
Also
included are the speech settings. These include a list of items that tell you
how to adjust the volume, speed and pitch of KeySoft's speech, the 2 media
player volume commands, memo playback, pausing and resuming playback of media
and muting/unmuting streamed audio.
The
"Insertion" item is displayed only when it is appropriate to insert
such things as the date or time such as in KeyWord.
As with
all KeySoft menus, to select an item, move through the menu until the required
item is displayed, and then press ENTER. Alternatively, from anywhere in the menu, press the initial letter of
your choice. This does not apply to the speech settings, which are discussed in 1.18.5 Setting Volume and Pitch.
The
characteristics of the BrailleNote's voice can be changed anywhere in KeySoft.
This is discussed in 1.18.4 Setting the Keyboard Voice.
We will
now deal with some of the more commonly used items in the Options Menu. All the
functions in the Options Menu are detailed in Chapter 5.
To turn
off the Braille display, hold down the NEXT thumb key, press SPACE, then release both keys. The same key combination turns the Braille
display on again.
Note that
if the Braille display is turned off when speech is off, speech is forced on.
This avoids having both Braille and speech off simultaneously.
The
function to turn the Braille display on and off is also available from the
Options Menu, under Braille Display Options.
There are
three speech options: Speech On, Speech on Request and Speech Off. If speech is
currently on, hold down the PREVIOUS thumb key, press SPACE, then release both keys to select Speech on
Request. KeySoft displays: "Speech on request."
To select
the next option, Speech Off, press the same key combination again. KeySoft
confirms that speech is off by displaying "Speech off" only on the Braille display. To
turn Speech On again, press that key combination again. KeySoft displays: "Speech on."
You are
returned to where you started with Speech On.
When the
Speech on Request option is selected, KeySoft only speaks when you use a command
that is a specific speech command. For example, in KeyWord, the word processor,
when you move forward word‑by‑word using SPACE with dot 5, nothing is spoken. However if you
use the dedicated "Speak Word under Cursor" command, SPACE with dots 2‑5, the word under the cursor is
spoken.
Note that
if speech is turned off when the Braille display is off, the Braille display is
forced on. This avoids having both Braille and speech off simultaneously.
The
function to select Speech On, Speech on Request, or Speech Off is also
available from the Options Menu, under Review Voice.
The
BrailleNote BT may be forced to start in one of three modes when it is switched
on. You may choose to start with Braille only, speech only, or both Braille and
speech.
This
feature is very convenient if, for example, you have previously been using both
Braille and speech, but you are now attending a meeting and for privacy you
wish to start in the Braille only mode.
When your
BrailleNote is turned off, and before you turn on the switch, hold down one of
the following key combinations and continue holding it while you turn your
BrailleNote on.
Speech
only: dot 2;
Braille
only: dot 3;
Speech
and Braille: both
dots 2 and 3.
The first
of these settings determines how KeySoft speaks what you type. Press SPACE with O, then K for Keyboard. KeySoft displays: "Keyboard voice? Words."
The
options are as follows:
To turn
off speech altogether, press F followed by ENTER;
To spell
words as they are typed, press S followed by ENTER;
To speak
whole words, press W followed by ENTER;
To both
spell and speak words, press B followed by ENTER;
Or just
press ENTER to leave the selection unchanged.
The
suggested setting is "Words."
You can
request help, using SPACE with H for a reminder of these options.
When you
have set the Keyboard Voice, you are then asked to set your preferred typing
Braille grade for each language on your BrailleNote. For information on how to
select your Braille Grade, please see 5.5.1 Preferred Keyboard Braille Grade. When you have set this, KeySoft
displays "Do you wish to be advised when a non‑preferred braille code or grade is required?"
Finally
you are asked whether you wish to use 6 or 8 dot Computer Braille.
The
characteristics of BrailleNote BT's voice can be changed anywhere in KeySoft,
as follows:
To
increase the volume, press ENTER with dot 4; (This command changes the overall
volume on the BrailleNote, including the volume of the media player.)
To
decrease the volume, press ENTER with dot 1; (This command affects the overall
volume, including the volume of the media player.)
For
faster speech, press ENTER with dot 6;
For
slower speech, press ENTER with dot 3;
For
higher pitch, press ENTER with dot 5;
For lower
pitch, press ENTER with dot 2.
There are
32 volumes, 16 speeds and 16 pitches, and they change one step at each key
press. A reminder of the commands is given in the Options Menu, at the end of
the list.
As we
have already mentioned, you can get KeySoft to say a prompt again by pressing SPACE with R if you didn't quite catch it. To
repeat the prompt with variables such as file names or folder names spelled
out, press ENTER with S.
To reveal
the most detail, you can repeat the last prompt with full punctuation and
spaces. To do this, press ENTER with H (Hear Punctuation).
After
either command you are returned to your original place in KeySoft.
The
BrailleNote BT Power & Battery status can be obtained at any time. Press SPACE with O, then P.
KeySoft displays the battery charge level as a percentage of fully charged, and whether the AC Adapter is On or Off. For more details, please refer to 2.1.2 Checking Power Status.
KeySoft
allows you to move directly from one KeySoft task to another without returning
to the Main Menu. You can switch between the Word processor, Scientific
Calculator, Planner, Address List, E‑Mail, etc. For example, if you are
writing a document and you need an address, you can switch directly to the
Address List, look up the address, and then return to the Word processor. You
are placed back at the same point in your document.
The
following hot keys are available for switching tasks:
To select
the Word Processor press BACKSPACE with ENTER with W;
To select
the Scientific Calculator press BACKSPACE with ENTER with S;
To select
the Database Manager press BACKSPACE with ENTER with D;
To select
the Games press BACKSPACE with ENTER with G;
To select
the Planner press BACKSPACE with ENTER with P;
To select
the Address List press BACKSPACE with ENTER with A;
To select
the E‑mail system press BACKSPACE with ENTER with E;
To select
the Book Reader press BACKSPACE with ENTER with B;
To select
the Internet browser, press BACKSPACE with ENTER with I;
To select
the Chat (instant messaging), press BACKSPACE with ENTER with C;
To select
the Media Player, press BACKSPACE with ENTER with M;
To select
the FM Radio, press BACKSPACE with ENTER with F.
To select
the Braille Terminal option, press BACKSPACE with ENTER with T.
There is also a Task menu available. To access this, either:
1. Press SPACE with O for the Options menu then M for Move to another task, or
2. Press SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5.
KeySoft displays: "Task Menu."
You can
make a selection from the Task Menu in any of the usual ways, for example:
1. Review the menu items using SPACE or ADVANCE and select one by pressing NEXT or ENTER or,
2. Press the initial letter of the
task; for example, W for Word Processor.
Remember
that, if necessary, you can always get back to the Main Menu by pressing SPACE with dots 1 to 6.
Are you
feeling tired of typing long website addresses, phone numbers that are too hard
to remember and complicated addresses?
The
ability to copy and paste text, is yet another useful feature of KeySoft. You
can easily copy and paste a website address from KeyWord or KeyMail when you
encounter the address prompt in KeyWeb. You can also copy and paste phone
numbers and addresses from KeyMail or KeyList fields.
To copy
and paste entries within KeyList, KeyMail and KeyWeb, use the following
commands:
Copy to
the clipboard: BACKSPACE with K
Paste
text into a field: BACKSPACE with V
There are several ways to get help from KeySoft. At any point in KeySoft you can get information about the options that are available by pressing SPACE with H. You can also select "Keyboard Learn" from the Main Menu. This is a good way of familiarizing yourself with the keyboard layout and Quick Commands available at any point within KeySoft. In Keyboard Learn, KeySoft displays the function of the keys and the key combinations that are always available. For example, pressing ENTER with T will give the response “display the time.” To exit help, press SPACE with E.
BrailleNote
BT provides a one‑handed mode for users restricted to the use of one hand
for Braille input. To turn on this mode, hold down BACKSPACE while switching on your BrailleNote BT, and keep holding it down until
"One‑handed mode" is displayed. This mode stays in effect until
it is deliberately turned off.
If one‑handed
mode is on, the BrailleNote BT will advise this each time it is powered on, and
will also advise what to do to return to the standard two‑handed mode.
To type a
character in one‑handed mode you can press the dots at any time and in
any order. When you have pressed all the required dots, press SPACE, and the character is entered. To enter the
letter J, for example, you might press dot 2 first, and then dots 4 and 5 separately or together. After
releasing the keys, press SPACE, and J is entered. To speed input the concluding SPACE may be performed in conjunction with key input. For example, to enter
the letter J, you could press dot 2 first, and then dots 4‑5 and the SPACE bar together.
A command
that includes SPACE can be obtained by pressing SPACE both before and after the other keys. For
example, to return to the Main Menu, press and release SPACE, then press and release dots 1 to 6 in any
combination or order, then press and release SPACE again.
To make a
space between words, press SPACE twice, after pressing SPACE once to enter the last character typed.
The
operation of the thumb keys remains the same as in two‑handed mode.
To return
to two‑handed mode, hold down the ENTER key while switching on the BrailleNote BT, and
keep holding it down until KeySoft starts normally.
Before
you switch off your BrailleNote BT, it is good practice to return to the Main
Menu first. This ensures your current work is saved. If you don't do this, and
subsequently the battery becomes discharged, the current version of your work
will be lost. That's fairly unlikely, but it's good insurance for the cost of
one keystroke.
If you
have storage cards and/or an external memory drive, you should consider backing
up your work regularly. It's a common thing to do with any computer. It
minimizes the amount of data you could lose should a computer or software
"crash" occur. You can back up all your working files by using the
Back up function in the Utilities menu, as described in
16.1.1 Backing Up.
The Time
and Date commands are available from anywhere within KeySoft.
To
display the current day and date, press ENTER with D.
To
display the current time, press ENTER with T.
If the
date or time is incorrect you can set new values, and set how you prefer them
to be displayed using the “Date and Time Set” option in the Utilities Menu.
The
BrailleNote’s internal battery has an autonomy of 30 days. It will keep correct
time after performing resets or if the main battery goes flat.
To set
the Date and Time, follow this procedure. Remember that on‑line help is
available at any point by pressing SPACE with H, and that if you wish to leave a displayed
value unchanged, just press ENTER. You may exit at any point by
pressing SPACE with E.
1. Return to the Main Menu by pressing SPACE with dots 1 to 6.
2. Press U to go to the Utilities Menu.
3. Press D to go to the Date and Time set option.
4. Choose your preferred date format.
For USA format where the date is in the form month/day/year press S, or for UK format where the date is in the
form day/month/year press K. To save your entry, press ENTER.
5. Choose your preferred time format,
12 or 24 hour. For a 12‑hour clock press A, for a 24‑hour clock press B then complete your entry by pressing ENTER.
6. Select your Time Zone. To cycle
through the list of Time Zones, press SPACE with dots 3‑4. Alternatively press the initial letter of the Time Zone. Complete your
entry by pressing ENTER.
7. Select your Daylight Saving Setting.
If you are currently in Daylight Saving Time, press Y. If you are not, press N. Press ENTER.
8. Enter the current time and press ENTER. For instructions on how to enter the time in
the format you have selected, press SPACE with H.
9. Enter the current date and press ENTER. For instructions on how to enter the date in
the format you have selected, Press SPACE with H.
10. Enter the day of the week that you would like the week to start on. Press S for Sunday, or M for Monday.
After
setting the time and date you will be returned to the Utilities Menu.
Note: If you use ActiveSync, it is possible to have the BrailleNote's time and date automatically set to be the same as the time and date on your PC when you connect. If you choose this option, it is very important that your BrailleNote and PC are set to the same Time Zone. See 14.14 Connecting your BrailleNote to a PC.
While you
can manually change the time on your BrailleNote Apex BT, the internal clock
will automatically be adjusted to the correct time for your time zone when you
connect to the internet, without any operations required. Therefore, when
travelling, it is important to change your time zone, otherwise, the unit will
display the incorrect time after you've connected to the internet. The internal
clock will keep correct time, even after performing a reset.
The internal clock also has bearing on time‑based licenses. For instance, it is important to note that you must synchronize the time on the internet at least once to ensure the activation of time‑based licenses. Also, if the battery fails and you are not connected to a power outlet, all time‑based licenses will be affected. Permanent licenses such as Keysoft will not be affected.
The
BrailleNote provides many user definable options. As you get to know more about
how it works, you can change the way it behaves to better suit your personal
preferences. The following items will be of principal interest:
Speech ‑
volume, rate, and pitch;
Time and
date correctly set, and in preferred format;
Keyboard
voice setting ‑ off, words, characters, or both words and characters;
Review or
reading voice settings ‑ punctuation settings, numbers or digits;
Preferred
English Braille Code ‑ US, UK, Australian, Unified English Braille (UEB),
or UK2004;
Braille
Code settings for additional languages;
Braille
grade for keyboard input; grade 1, 2 or computer Braille;
Calculator
Braille Code; Nemeth, UK, UEB, BFU, French or German;
Computer
Braille table ‑ US or UK;
Computer
Braille 6 dot or 8 dot;
Preferred
cursor shape on Braille display ‑ There are separate settings for
Standard and Computer Braille;
Preferred
Braille reading grade (There are separate settings for each language).
Thumb key
layout;
Spelling
checker dictionary language; UK or USA English;
Some of
these items have already been covered in this chapter, but for convenience,
Appendix A of the User Guide provides additional assistance and, if
appropriate, a reference to the relevant section in the User Guide. The next
section explains how to use the Electronic User Guide to read a particular
section of the user guide. After reading this next section, you could use the
Electronic User Guide to read Appendix A, User settings for the BrailleNote BT.
This User
Guide is built into KeySoft, so that you can look it up any time you want.
Using either the Table of Contents or the Index to locate a reference, the User
Guide will take you directly to the topic you wish to read.
Alternatively,
the entire User Guide is available in several PC friendly formats on the CD‑Rom
that came with your BrailleNote BT. This gives you the option of working
through a chapter trying things out on the BrailleNote BT while reading the
user guide on a PC, printing or embossing a copy etc.
The rest
of this section concentrates on the on‑board User Guide, how to access it
and how to use it.
The text
of this user guide is stored in your BrailleNote BT and is available for
reference at any time. It is accessed through the Options Menu, or by the quick
command BACKSPACE with ENTER with H. You can look up a topic in the
Table of Contents or Index, and read that section of the user guide. When you
are finished with that section, you can return to the Table of Contents or
Index or exit the user guide. You are returned to your original place in
KeySoft when you exit.
To refer
to the User Guide press SPACE with O for the Options menu, then U for the User Guide.
If this
is the very first time you have accessed the Electronic User Guide your
BrailleNote BT displays: "Access Table of Contents or Index?"
To select
the Table of Contents, press T or to select the Index, press I. KeySoft confirms your selection.
If you
have accessed the User Guide before, your BrailleNote BT prompts: "Continue reading (reference)?" where "reference" is the
last topic accessed. If you press Y to continue you are returned to that topic. If
you press N you go to the Table of Contents or
Index.
The Index
is in alphabetical order. To review the listings, press SPACE or BACKSPACE. To jump to the items starting with any
letter, press that letter.
Once the
desired item has been found, press ENTER to select it. If the item has sub‑indexes, repeat the selection
procedure.
Once you
have entered the User Guide at a particular place, the following review
commands are available for reading the content:
To read
from the start of the previous sentence, press SPACE with dot 1;
To read
from the start of the current sentence, press SPACE with dots 1‑4;
To read
from the start of the next sentence, press SPACE with dot 4;
To read
from the start of the previous paragraph, press SPACE with dots 2‑3;
To read
from the start of the current paragraph, press SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6
To read
from the start of the next paragraph, press SPACE with dots 5‑6;
To skip
back one section, press SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3;
To
advance one section, press SPACE with dots 4‑5‑6;
To go
back to the Table of Contents or Index press BACKSPACE;
To exit
the User Guide and return to your original place in KeySoft press SPACE with E.
To
continuously read a section of the User Guide using speech, select your
starting point from the Table of Contents or Index as discussed above, then
press SPACE with G. To pause reading, press BACKSPACE with ENTER.
You can
issue the review commands while reading is in progress or after it has stopped.
If you give a command while reading is in progress, reading begins from the new
position. This provides a very convenient method of quickly panning through a
section of the User Guide. If you are reading continuously, you are able to
jump forward or back through the text by sentence or paragraph without halting
the continuous reading function.
To read
the User Guide continuously from the Braille display, select your starting
point and press SPACE with dots 1‑2‑4‑5‑6. To stop the Braille display
advancing, press PREVIOUS and NEXT together. You can adjust the rate at which the Braille display
advances. Press PREVIOUS to slow down and NEXT to speed up the refresh rate.
As an
alternative to accessing the Electronic User Guide through its Table of
Contents or Index, you can also read the User Guide as a number of KeyWord
documents. Each chapter and appendix is a separate KeyWord text document.
These
documents are stored on the "Flash Disk" drive in a folder called
"Manual".
If you
wish to read the User Guide like a book rather than look up specific
references, simply open the chapter or appendix in the Book Reader like any
other book file.
There is
a simple version check built into the User Guide. Simply access the Index, and
select the "Version" entry in the usual way. When you press ENTER it will display "This User Guide is for the BrailleNote BT using version x.x of KeySoft." If the model name or version is not
what you expected, contact your distributor.
This User
Guide is for the BrailleNote BT using version 9.5 of KeySoft.
To start
with, go to the Main Menu by pressing SPACE with dots 1 to 6. KeySoft displays: "Main Menu."
To
display the first item of the Main Menu, press SPACE. KeySoft displays: "Word Processor."
You could
select the word processor at this point, but our present object is to review
all the items in the Main Menu. So, press SPACE repeatedly, pausing to read and listen to each
of the 17 options in the menu, which are:
Word Processor;
Planner;
Address List;
E‑mail;
Internet;
Chat;
Media Center, which includes the Media Player,
audio recording options and the FM Radio;
Book Reader;
Scientific Calculator;
Database Manager;
Games;
File Manager, which allows files to be copied,
translated, etc;
Utilities, which is a group of general purpose
functions;
Terminal for Screen Reader, which allows the BrailleNote BT to
act as a Braille display for other computers;
Keyboard Learn, which helps you to learn the
Braille keyboard functions;
For Information press SPACE with I, which provides information about the BrailleNote BT such as the serial
number and software version.
For the Options Menu, press SPACE with O, anywhere.
The last
item is: "End of Menu." Having stepped forward along the
menu by pressing SPACE repeatedly, you can step back by
pressing BACKSPACE repeatedly.
When
using speech, if you don't want to hear a complete announcement, you can cut it
off and move to the next item by pressing SPACE or BACKSPACE. This speech cut‑off occurs
at all points in KeySoft.
To obtain
system information press SPACE with I when in the main menu. The
following items will be announced.
Copyright
Keysoft version
Serial number
Hardware revision
Operating system
1‑Mac address WIFI
2‑Mac address Bluetooth
3‑Mac address Ethernet
Braille translation copyright
Xbase database technology copyright
The text adventure Games...
Decompression of bookshare books...
Open SSL...
PDF to
text utility
Victor reader Soft version
Keysync plug in copyright
The
information function is available throughout the system and will provide
contextual information relative to the application currently in use.
KeySoft
includes an application on all Apex units called KeyMaps. In partnership with
Sendero Group, KeyMaps brings the first included completely accessible mapping
experience for those with visual impairments.
Using
only your Apex, you can:
·
Download
maps of your chosen country;
·
Find
a specific address or point of interest;
·
Look
up phone numbers and additional information for points of interest;
·
Virtually
walk around a chosen location;
·
Create
and learn routes from one point to the next.
As the KeyMaps application contains its own user documentation, this document serves as a basic introduction to the application. To access the KeyMaps user guide, do the following:
1. From within KeyMaps, press the Help command (Space with H).
2. Press I to select the information center.
3.
Press
U for user guide.
Once you
choose the “Navigation” option from the Apex’s main menu, or by pressing N, the application will be launched and you will be asked to register to
obtain a license. You must follow the registration steps as the license is
necessary to download your different maps and use the product. To
complete the registration process, your Apex must be connected to the Internet.
Each user can download their country’s map freely. If you would like to
download any additional countries, or to purchase a license for outdoor use of
the KeyMaps application, please contact your local HumanWare office.
Note: The
KeyMaps application is an English only application and runs using the English
speech regardless of your system language.
By now
you should have a good basic knowledge of the BrailleNote Apex BT and KeySoft.
The entire User Guide is stored in the BrailleNote BT so you can read each
chapter at your leisure.
The User
Guide can be read using your BrailleNote BT as previously described. A good
starting point is to browse through the Table of Contents, as this will provide
you with an appreciation of the topics covered in the User Guide.
Please
read the next chapter, which concerns practical hardware matters like the
battery and the different ports and sockets. To read chapter 2, follow the
procedure discussed in the previous section. You will find chapter 2 in the
Table of Contents so you can select it from there and start reading.
After
Chapter 2, most of the remainder of the User Guide is all about KeySoft and you
can pick and choose what to read. If you are new to KeySoft, you might want to
work through Chapter 3, which introduces the basic Word processor functions.
You might then want to read Chapter 5, which deals with the functions available
via the Options Menu, or Chapter 7 for advanced word processing features.
Chapter 4 covers the book reader, and how to download books from Bookshare.org,
if this site is available in your area. And chapter 6 covers how to emboss or
print documents. Alternatively, you can read Chapter 8 on the Calculator,
Chapter 9 on the Planner, or Chapter 10 on the Address List.
If you
are interested in using e‑mail or accessing the internet, and/or using
the other connectivity options the BrailleNote BT offers, read Chapter 14 on
Connectivity, then Chapter 11 on E‑mail, or Chapter 12 on the Web
Browser, depending on your interest and requirements.
Chapter
13 covers the Instant messaging feature, which allows you to use the
BrailleNote Apex BT to communicate with others.
Chapter 15
describes use of the File and Folder Manager, and the translation of files from
Text to Braille and other formats. Chapter 16 covers the Utilities menu, where
topics like backing up, restoring files and software upgrades are discussed.
Chapter
17 covers the Media Player and audio recording facilities. It also includes how
to access the FM Radio.
Chapter
18 covers the Database Manager.
If you
are keen for a bit of a distraction from your work or want to sharpen your
mind, read Chapter 19 to learn how to play games on your BrailleNote BT.
Chapter
20 provides a convenient listing of all the keyboard commands for the
BrailleNote BT. These are categorized under general commands as well as
commands for each of the applications of KeySoft.
You might
find it tedious to read a User Guide, but we have endeavored to make sure it is
full of useful information, and it's surprising what sticks in your memory.
When people say, "I didn't know you could do that!" it usually means
that they haven’t read the User Guide.
And remember;
please make frequent use of BrailleNote BT’s superb Help that you can access at
any point by pressing SPACE with H. It's a valuable source of
information, whatever part of KeySoft you are using.
End of
Getting Started Chapter.
This
chapter provides a general overview of the BrailleNote Apex BT's various
hardware features.
The
BrailleNote Apex BT can operate from its internal removable rechargeable
battery or from its AC adapter. The length of time you can run the BrailleNote
BT from a fully charged battery is typically between 10 and 12 hours before it
becomes flat. Activities like embossing, e‑mailing and using ports or
wireless connectivity increase the drain on the battery. Storage cards and USB
devices that draw their power from the BrailleNote BT's battery, also reduce
the available battery life.
Important: The BrailleNote BT can be used immediately
when you first receive it. For its first use however, it is recommended that it
be plugged into an electrical outlet to ensure that the battery is fully
recharged. For additional information on charging the battery, please see 2.1.1 Charging the Battery.
The
BrailleNote BT warns you if the battery is getting low. When the battery gauge
indicates that the battery is down to 10% full or less the following warning is
displayed periodically: "Battery is low."
If
possible, connect the AC adapter to re‑charge the battery now. You
typically have about 2 hours of battery life remaining. If the battery
continues to run down and becomes nearly flat, KeySoft displays the following
message: "Battery is critical."
If this
message is displayed you should act within the next minute or your BrailleNote
BT may switch itself off. The time available to switch off may be as little as
1 minute but it is typically 5 to 10 minutes if you are not using high current
accessories. You have two options. You can connect the AC adapter and carry on
working indefinitely, or you can save your current work and switch off. To save
your work, just return to the Main Menu. If the BrailleNote BT switches itself
off, it cannot be switched on again until it is powered from the AC adapter.
If the
battery becomes flat, the BrailleNote will switch itself off and will not
switch on again until you connect the AC adapter. If you connect the AC adapter
within an hour or two you will not lose work that was in progress and your
BrailleNote will resume where it left off. However, if you leave it longer, any
unsaved work may be lost. It is therefore important to heed the battery
warnings!
If you
plug a USB device into the BrailleNote BT and the battery does not have
sufficient power, you will receive the following message: "The battery is low. There may not be enough power to operate this USB device. You should plug in the AC adaptor."
Your
BrailleNote BT automatically manages its power usage to give you the maximum
life from the battery. It will enter into hibernate mode after about 10 minutes
of inactivity and stay in that mode until you next press a key. You can help by
switching off your BrailleNote BT when you are not going to be using it for a
while. Remember that you can switch your BrailleNote BT off and on without
affecting your work in any way and your BrailleNote BT resumes from where you
were when you switched off.
To charge
the battery, simply plug the AC adapter in and the BrailleNote BT looks after
the battery charging itself. There is no chance of overcharging and damaging
your batteries, so don't be afraid to leave the AC adapter connected at all
times. Once the battery is fully charged, only a very small amount of power is
used. Leaving the AC adapter connected ensures that the BrailleNote BT remains
fully charged ready for when you next need to use it on battery power.
If the
battery is flat and the AC adapter is connected, the battery is fast charged in
about 4 hours. Charging takes less time if the battery is only partially
discharged. Note that you can charge the battery and use the BrailleNote BT
simultaneously, however it may take up to 8 hours to reach full charge. To ensure
that the battery charges correctly, only charge in ambient temperatures between
41 and 95 degrees Fahrenheit, that is, 5 to 35 degrees Celsius.
If the
ambient temperature is too high, there is a risk that the battery will not
charge. We therefore recommend that if the temperature is nearing 95 degrees
Fahrenheit, that is, 35 degrees Celsius, leave your BrailleNote BT to charge in
a cool place with the carry bag lid open. There is no danger in doing this, and
no harm can come to your BrailleNote BT!
To connect
the AC adapter, locate the power socket on the right edge and to the back of
the BrailleNote BT. Insert the plug on the AC adapter cable into the socket,
and plug the AC adapter into a wall socket. The BrailleNote BT displays: "AC adapter on."
When the
battery is charging, if the AC supply is interrupted, or the AC adapter is
disconnected the BrailleNote BT displays: "AC adapter off.”
The
messages are both spoken and appear on the Braille display, assuming both
speech and Braille are on. Of course, if speech is off, the message only
appears on the Braille display. If the Braille display is off the message is
only spoken.
You can
check the state‑of‑charge of the battery and whether the AC adapter
is connected from anywhere in KeySoft by pressing SPACE with O, then P.
First,
the battery state‑of‑charge in
percent is displayed: “Level c percent,” where c is the battery's state‑of‑charge.
Then the
AC adapter status is displayed: "Adapter (status),"
where "status" is either "on" or "off." After
these messages are displayed, you are returned to your original place in
KeySoft. To clear the battery status message from the Braille display, press ADVANCE.
Like all rechargeable batteries, as the BrailleNote BT battery ages, its capacity reduces. The battery is designed to provide approximately 300 charge cycles before seeing a noticeable reduction in capacity. To optimize battery life, it is recommended that you only recharge when the battery is nearly depleted, followed by a full recharge. Note: to protect the battery and reduce the number of charge cycles, the battery will not recharge if you start recharging a battery that is almost fully charged (above 90%). Please contact HumanWare to obtain replacement batteries.
The
removable battery is accessible from the underside of the BrailleNote BT. While
keeping the thumb keys in front of you, flip the unit to the side. Near the
center of the underside is the battery latch. It has three raised ridges. To
remove the battery, apply pressure to the latch and push to the right. The
battery, located just above the latch will raise. At this point you can remove
the spent battery.
The new
battery can only be inserted the correct way. It is rectangular in shape. There
are two tabs along one of the long edges. We will call this the top edge. There
is a protuberance on one of the short edges. This protuberance only fits at one
place in the battery opening. This is the right edge of the battery.
To insert
the battery, find the proper battery orientation. Insert battery's top edge
first, then lower the battery into the opening. The protuberance on the right
side should fit into the corresponding opening. The battery should snap into
place. If there is any resistance, you likely have the battery upside down.
If you
store a fully charged BrailleNote for more than two weeks, the battery will
become completely flat. If the battery was less than fully charged prior to
storing the BrailleNote, the time needed for the battery to become fully flat
will be shorter. This is because the battery self discharges internally and
because the BrailleNote BT draws a very small amount of current, even when it
is switched off. When the battery becomes completely flat, the battery gauge
may become inaccurate.
If you
intend to leave the BrailleNote switched off for more than a few days, fully
charge the battery beforehand, or leave the AC adapter connected, if
convenient. If you intend to store a BrailleNote for more than two to three
weeks without the AC adapter connected, ensure your work is saved by returning
to the Main Menu, and fully charging the battery before putting the BrailleNote
into storage.
When you
take a BrailleNote out of long‑term storage, first connect the AC adapter
and recharge the battery BEFORE switching the BrailleNote BT on. If it does not
resume normally, press the Reset switch with a pointed object. The BrailleNote
will beep to confirm that it has been reset. Wait a few seconds while the
BrailleNote initializes itself. If the battery has gone quite flat, you will be
prompted to reset the time and date and so on. Press ENTER several times if you want to leave that for
later or refer to Appendix C, which describes the procedure for initializing
the BrailleNote.
Place the
BrailleNote BT in front of you with the keyboard oriented as you would use it.
The many
sockets and connectivity ports are arranged around the sides and back of the
BrailleNote BT. Starting from the front of the left side, and working around to
the back, you will find:
The small
record button, the audio output socket for earphones, the audio input socket
for a microphone, the power switch and the recessed reset button.
Reach
beyond the keyboard to the back of your BrailleNote BT and investigate the
layout of the back of your BrailleNote BT.
From the
left there are three horizontal USB host ports. Next is the SD card slot. Near
the middle of the rear edge are three LED indicators. They are blue, green and
amber in colour. These are for Bluetooth and Wi‑Fi functionality and the
last one serves as a power/charging indicator. Keep moving to the right and you
will notice the VGA port and finally, the Ethernet port.
Down the
right side of the unit, you will find the AC adapter socket. It is identified
by a raised ridge found under it. Finally, you will find the USB client port. It
is much smaller in size and has a different shape than the USB host ports. It
is set flush into the panel and is oriented so that the wider side is facing
down.
Each of
these ports is discussed in more detail directly following this section.
Please
note that if you inadvertently or deliberately remove a card or a plug from the
BrailleNote BT while it is active, that is while data is being passed through
the connection, it may result in a loss of data, an error message, or even in
some cases, corruption of the file or software.
The USB
client port is located on the right edge of the unit, next to the AC power
connector. It is a completely different shape to the USB host ports, being small
and shaped a little like a miniature 9 pin port set flush into the panel. It is
oriented so that the wider side is facing down.
The
primary purpose of this port is to connect your BrailleNote BT to a PC via
ActiveSync. For details on how to do this, refer to 14.14.2 Connecting using USB.
The three
ports on the left side of the rear edge are the USB host ports. They are lined
up one next to the other. USB host ports on the BrailleNote BT allow you to use
the BrailleNote BT with a range of USB‑compatible devices including:
External
drives,
External
modem,
USB
memory drives,
Some USB
printers, and
An
external memory card reader.
Each of
the three ports has a power supply of 500 milliamps. Make sure that a device
plugged into a port does not require more than this. When
operating on battery, available current from all USB host ports simultaneously is
limited to 500 milliamps. This means that only low current devices (like a
keyboard or a thumb drive) can be connected at the same time on the USB host
ports. This limitation does not apply when the Apex is connected to the Power
Adaptor.
The USB
host ports can also be used with the included USB serial adapter and an
appropriate nul modem serial cable to emboss using the serial port of an
embosser or work in Braille terminal mode using a USB host port on your
computer. As well as this, you can plug in a USB qwerty keyboard, as discussed in 2.5.1.1 Connecting to a USB keyboard.
On the
left side of the unit, there is a microphone input socket, an audio output
socket and a record button.
The
microphone input socket takes a high impedance electret microphone with a 3.5mm
plug. There is also a built in microphone.
The audio
output socket is stereo and works with most head or earphones with a 3.5mm
plug. It will also connect to a set of mini speakers, as used with a PC.
Remember that these will also need to be plugged in to a wall socket.
On the
right corner of the rear edge you will find an opening that is similar to a
phone jack. This is the Ethernet port. This is where you plug in a standard
network cable.
On the
right side of the rear edge, next to the Ethernet port, is the VGA port. This
is where you can plug in a VGA screen.
Near the
middle of the back edge, to the right of the USB host ports, there is a card
slot for Secure Digital cards, also known as SD cards. These cards are only
32mm x 24mm x 2mm big i.e. less than a quarter of the size of a CompactFlash
card, and yet can store several gigabytes of information. The SD card slot supports
up to 2 gigabytes SD cards and 4 to 32 gigabytes SDHC cards of all classes. For
up to date information on the latest developments, check out our website;
www.humanware.com.
The
BrailleNote BT uses SD cards for memory only. It does not support SD accessories
such as wireless or Bluetooth cards.
The SD
card is about the size of a postage stamp, and only 2mm thick. One corner is
cut off at a diagonal, which makes it easy to orient it by touch. The short
edge of this cut off corner is the end that is inserted into the SD card slot.
You will notice that on one surface of the card, there is a row of ridges along
that edge; this side faces down.
On each
long edge is a notch. If you hold the card as if you were going to insert it,
i.e. with the cut off corner and ridged end toward you, along the left side the
notch is small, only 2mm long and 1mm deep. However on the right side, the
notch is longer and houses a sliding lock mechanism. When the slider is pushed
toward you, the card is unlocked and is read/write. When the slider is pushed
away from you, the card's memory is read only.
SD cards
should be inserted with the BrailleNote BT switched on. When you do so the
BrailleNote BT displays: "Card ready." Push it gently in until you hear it click.
To remove
an SD card, push it in gently until it clicks then release it. The card will
pop out far enough for you to grasp and remove it. If the card is removed with
the power on, BrailleNote BT displays: "Please wait..." and after a few seconds the prompt "Card removed" will confirm that the card is
disengaged.
The SD
card slot is treated as a drive by KeySoft. To access files on the SD Card, at
any file prompt, go to the drive list and press S for SD card. Proceed as normal. Likewise if you wish to save a file to
the SD card. If you find that you can't save a file to the card, check the
sliding lock mechanism on its left edge, as this may be in the "read‑only"
or "locked" position, which is away from the end that goes into the
slot first.
The
BrailleNote has a feature that allows you to format your SD cards. Formatting
an SD card will delete all of the files found on it.
To format
an SD card, please follow these steps:
1. Insert the SD card into the SD card
slot.
2. From the Options menu, access the
Support Information item by pressing SPACE with I.
3. Press S to access the Format SD card
option.
4. When asked if you really want to format
your SD card, press Y.
A message
will inform you when the operation is completed.
As mentioned earlier, there are a range of devices available to work with the BrailleNote BT, that offer a broad range of data storage options, as well as printer access. These are all discussed in turn below.
As well
as the Braille keyboard, you can use a normal QWERTY keyboard for input into
your BrailleNote BT. This works with keyboards with two types of connection ‑
USB and Bluetooth. First we will look at how a qwerty keyboard interacts with
the BrailleNote BT, and then at how to connect to a USB keyboard. To connect to
a Bluetooth keyboard, simply follow the instructions in
14.12.2 Pairing with another Bluetooth device.
The
QWERTY keyboard can be used to create or edit KeyWord text (kwt) or other types
of text documents. The Braille keyboard still operates, so you can swap between
them if you wish. The Braille display will also behave as normal, as its
Braille grade is set separately to input.
USB is
one of the standard connection types available for modern keyboards. It is a
flat, narrow rectangular plug, as opposed to the round PS2 type plug that is
also common.
USB keyboards
are readily available and usually very reasonably priced. If you have a PC, it
may have a USB keyboard already.
Simply
plug the keyboard into one of the USB host ports on the recessed back panel of
your BrailleNote BT, and you are ready to go. We recommend that you plug in the
USB keyboard while you are in the Main Menu.
There is
a range of storage devices that work with the BrailleNote BT. Which ones you
wish to work with will probably be determined by the other technology you are
using and what storage media works best with it.
In all
cases, when the device is plugged into one of the USB host ports on the back of
the BrailleNote BT, it will appear on the drive list as whatever name the
device provides. When at a file or folder prompt, simply select that drive.
Here is
some background information on various types of storage device:
USB
Memory drive: Sometimes known as a USB key, stick or thumb. This is a small
device with a USB plug set into one end of it. They vary in shape, size and
storage capacity. These devices are convenient as they don't have cables, are
highly portable, and can be used with a PC without the need for an external
card reader, unlike the CompactFlash, PC and SD cards.
External
card reader: There are card readers available that can be used with the
BrailleNote BT as well as a PC. There are card readers for all the types of
storage cards, and some take more than one kind.
When
plugged in, these storage devices show up in the drive list as Hard Drive.
To
display the current time, press ENTER with T. To access the current time through
the time menu, press SPACE with O, then T, then C for Clock.
After the
time is displayed you will be returned to your original place in KeySoft.
The
visual display options allow a sighted teacher, parent or colleague to view in
real time the work being done on the BrailleNote. You can connect a standard
VGA monitor or use KeyView, a visual display application for the PC. You can
also wirelessly transmit your visual display to a smart phone or tablet using
the Apex’s Wireless VNC capability.
All text that
is displayed on the Braille display, or that is spoken, appears on the VGA
monitor or on the KeyView screen. With KeyView, if you have a Braille display,
a visual representation of the display is also shown on the KeyView screen.
To use the VGA display option, connect a VGA monitor into the VGA port located at the back of the BrailleNote Apex BT. To activate the display, follow these steps:
1. Select the Options Menu on your
BrailleNote, by pressing SPACE with O.
2. From the Options Menu, select "Visual Display" by stepping through the menu until
you get to Visual Display and pressing Enter, or by
pressing V.
3. Press V to
open the visual display then Enter.
KeyView
is fully functional with other adaptive PC‑based software such as screen‑readers
and magnifiers. It is colour independent and uses the settings on your PC.
Note:
KeyView works as a visual display for all versions of KeySoft.
You will need:
§ The KeyView program KeyView‑Setup.exe.
This file is on the KeySoft version 7.5 (or later) program CD that comes with
your BrailleNote, and is also available as a download from
www.humanware.com/support/braillenote/software.
§ A PC running Windows ME, 2000, XP or
Vista.
§ A way of connecting the BrailleNote to the PC. This can be either:
§ Through the USB client serial link.
For this you need the USB cable supplied with your BrailleNote, and a USB host
port on your PC.
or
§ Bluetooth. For this your PC must be
Bluetooth enabled. If your PC does not have integrated Bluetooth functionality,
you will need to use a Bluetooth USB dongle. These are inexpensive and can be
bought from a local computer store. Check and follow the installation
instructions that come with the adapter, and install any required software
before installing KeyView.
§ Adaptive software for your PC, or
sighted assistance as you will need to respond to some messages on your PC in
order to install KeyView.
To
install KeyView on your PC:
1. Put the KeySoft program CD into your
PC, or download the KeyView set up program from the HumanWare website.
2. Double‑click on the KeyView
set‑up program.
As
each window in the installation program is presented to you, select Next to
continue. Note that in general, there is no need to change the options that are
presented to you.
A KeyView
icon is placed on your desktop, and HumanWare is added to your Start Menu with
the KeyView option listed.
Before
you can start KeyView, you need to connect your BrailleNote to the PC that is
running KeyView.
If you
are using a USB serial link cable, connect the cable between the back of your
BrailleNote and your PC.
If you are using Bluetooth, refer to 14.12 Bluetooth. You need to use an ActiveSync pairing.
To use KeyView:
1. Select the Options Menu on your
BrailleNote, by pressing SPACE with O.
2. From the Options Menu, select "Visual Display" by stepping through the menu until
you get to Visual Display and pressing Enter, or by pressing V.
3. If you are using a USB client serial link cable to connect your BrailleNote and your PC, press U then ENTER. If you are using Bluetooth, press B then ENTER.
4. Start KeyView by clicking on the
KeyView icon on your desktop, or by opening the Start menu and selecting
HumanWare, then KeyView.
5. A window will prompt you to select
the serial port that the BrailleNote is attached to. Choose the APEX virtual
USB COM port and click OK.
6. If no text appears in KeyView, refer
to Troubleshooting section 2.7.2.6 Troubleshooting.
If you
wish to connect by way of a USB client connection, it is important to uncheck the
"Allow USB connections" option in ActiveSync/Connection Settings.
If
however you want to connect using a USB serial connection, this time uncheck
the "Allow connections to one of the following".
When
using a screen reader or magnifier software, you can move the KeyView cursor in
order to review the screen, however this does not affect the KeySoft cursor.
See also your screen reader, or magnifier software manuals for further
information on using the cursor.
You can
select text using the standard Windows commands and copy it to the clipboard,
and then paste it into other Windows programs.
If you
want to turn the Braille Display off, open the Options Menu in KeyView and
select "Braille Display". Select "Braille Display" again
from the Options Menu if you want to turn it back on. If a VoiceNote is
attached, this option is greyed out, and no braille display is available on the
screen.
1. I have followed the instructions, and still can't get KeyView to work. What should I do?
If
you are using a serial connection:
§ make sure that you are using the USB
cable that was supplied with your BrailleNote.
§ check your cable connection and that
you have plugged it into the USB port on your PC.
§ check that you have selected the
correct port in KeyView. To check or change the port, exit KeyView and restart
it.
If
you are using Bluetooth:
§ check your connection.
§ check that no other program is using
the Bluetooth port.
2. Can I use any cable to connect the
BrailleNote to my PC?
No, you MUST use the one supplied with your BrailleNote. HumanWare can supply additional cables if required. Contact your local sales office.
3. Can I see a wide range of
international characters with KeyView?
Yes,
if you are using KeySoft 9, or later. The characters that can be displayed are
determined by the font used in your PC. If you use a character that is not in
that font, a square box is displayed instead of the character.
4. Can I use ActiveSync to surf the web
and transfer files while using KeyView?
Yes,
but you can't use the same port for both, at the same time.
The
visual display can be a terminal or a PC, laptop or hand‑held computer
running terminal emulation software. The terminal or terminal emulation software
must emulate a DEC VT100 or an ANSI terminal.
For PC's
running Windows, "HyperTerminal" is provided as part of the
communications accessories and can be used as the terminal software. To
facilitate the use of HyperTerminal as the remote Visual Display for your
Notetaker, a program shortcut is provided on the CD‑Rom supplied as part
of the Notetaker package.
In the
following discussion when we refer to a terminal, we mean either a dedicated
terminal or a PC running terminal emulation software.
The
following procedure might require the help of a technician if the terminal is
unfamiliar to you. The procedure involves connecting the BrailleNote BT to the
terminal using a cable and setting up the terminal to communicate at a certain
speed and format. This can be done manually for some terminals. Or if the
terminal is intelligent, done by the terminal itself as it automatically
detects the serial speed and format. The necessary settings are:
bit rate:
38400 bps.
parity:
none.
data
bits: 8.
stop bits: 1.
1. To connect BrailleNote BT's serial
port to a terminal, first plug one end of the USB serial adapter cable into one
of the BrailleNote BT's USB ports. Attach a serial cable to the other end of
the USB serial adapter.
2. Plug the other end of the cable into a matching socket on the terminal. If the terminal has a 25 pin D type connector instead, use the 9 pin to 25 pin adapter. Ensure the terminal is switched on.
3. Finally, direct the BrailleNote BT to drive the USB serial port by selecting the remote visual display output as described below. Now, when the BrailleNote BT displays something such as a prompt the terminal should also display the corresponding prompt. If the terminal responds when the connected BrailleNote BT displays something but the terminal's display is not intelligible then the speed and/or format are probably not right. Correct the settings and retry.
4. Ensure that the COM port that you
are going to use for this connection is not being used by another software
application or hardware device.
The last
step towards providing a visual display is to have your BrailleNote BT send
text to the serial output. Press SPACE with O, then V for Visual display. KeySoft displays: "Visual display, Currently off."
The
options are:
To send
the visual display to the USB Serial port press U then ENTER;
Or just
press ENTER to leave the selection unchanged.
To turn
the visual display off again after use, press F for OFF then ENTER.
Use the
USB serial port if you are using a standard computer terminal or a PC running a
terminal emulator program.
Today’s
modern tablets and smart phones have applications which allow them to function
as portable visual displays for other electronic devices. The BrailleNote Apex
has the ability to transmit its visual display over a wired or wireless channel
called VNC. Smart phones or tablets running such a VNC viewing application can
then display the Apex’s content visually on the device’s screen for a sighted
teacher or assistant.
Make sure
the wireless Internet of the Apex is turned on. To transmit your Apex’s visual
display via the wired or wireless Internet connection, follow these steps:
1. Select the Options Menu on your
BrailleNote, by pressing SPACE with O.
2. From the Options Menu, select "Visual Display" by stepping through the menu until
you get to Visual Display and pressing ENTER, or by pressing V.
3. Press W to choose the wireless connection and press ENTER.
4. If you are not currently connected
to the Internet, choose one of your connection configurations and press ENTER.
You will
hear a message and feel it on your display saying, “VNC server running on IP
address xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx. Do you want to set a password to secure the
connection?” Make note of this IP
address as you will need it for your tablet or smart phone’s visual app. If you
would like to set a password, press Y and enter a password to secure the
connection. Note that this password will need to be entered on your tablet or
smart phone. If you do not want to type a password, simply press N.
Now that
your Apex is sending its visual display signal wirelessly, you must download an
app on your smart phone or tablet to receive this signal. Since the Apex is
using a standard VNC signal to send its visual display, there are many VNC apps
which can receive this signal for standard tablets or smart phones. Below are
some that are recommended for Apple’s iOS devices, Android tablets or smart
phones:
·
VNC
Viewer: Free on the App Store
·
Remotix
VNC & RDP: $19.99 on the App Store
·
Android
VNC: Free on the GooglePlay Store
Once you
download one of these apps, you simply need to add a new connection. It will
ask you for the IP address of the connection. Enter the IP address you took
note of from your Apex. It will then ask for a name. It is recommended to use
something like “BrailleNote School” or “BrailleNote Home” to clarify the
location of the connection in case you want to use it again.
Once you
have completed the set up and have tapped on the new BrailleNote connection,
you will be prompted for a password if you required one. Once you enter it, you
will immediately begin seeing your Apex’s visual display on the tablet or smart
phone. You will also receive messages on your Apex when the VNC signal has been
connected or disconnected.
The BrailleNote or VoiceNote can act like a remote
Braille line or terminal. You can then run a screen reader, for example Window
Eyes, JAWS, or HAL on a desktop PC, using the BrailleNote or VoiceNote as its
Braille display and controller. Additionally you can pair the BrailleNote or
VoiceNote with common mobile devices such as iPhones or iPads. The BrailleNote
will show the contents of the screen reader on its display and allow you to
control the computer or mobile device with its keyboard. Since the VoiceNote
has no display, it simply is used as a keyboard for the connected tools.
To access
the Braille Terminal, either go to the Main Menu and press T, or from anywhere, press BACKSPACE with ENTER with T. KeySoft prompts "Braille Terminal Port? Currently Bluetooth". To select USB client, press U. To select Bluetooth, press B. To select USB serial, press S. Once the type of connection has been
selected, press ENTER and KeySoft displays: "Braille Terminal." Note that the USB serial option will
only be made available if the USB serial adapter cable is plugged into the
BrailleNote.
It is
likely that a dialog box will appear on your PC that requests permission for
the BrailleNote to connect. "Braille Terminal" will not be announced until you have
authenticated the connection from the PC. To activate this connection, you must
first pair your BrailleNote BT to the PC. Please consult the following section 14.12.1 BrailleNote BT Supported Services, as well as 14.12.2 Pairing with another Bluetooth device, and 14.12.3 Setting up Bluetooth on your PC for additional information on
pairing.
You can
use the USB host port of the BrailleNote to connect the device to a serial port
of your computer. Use the USB serial adapter cable supplied with your
BrailleNote with the appropriate serial cable.
BrailleNote
BT cannot be used for its normal functions while it is acting as a remote
Braille display, however, you can use the "Change Task" option to
temporarily leave the Braille Terminal. For example, during a screen reading
session, you may wish to temporarily switch to the Planner to add an
appointment, and then switch back to using the Braille Terminal mode. To exit
the Terminal for Screen Reader mode, press SPACE with E and you are returned to the Main Menu.
You
should plug in the AC adapter if you intend to use your BrailleNote BT as a
remote display for an extended period.
Important:
Before using the USB client connection for the first time, you will need to
install a special driver on your computer to enable communication. Please
consult the software section of the Apex support page for driver installation
information.
Each cell
of the Braille display has eight pins. For each pin there is a special crystal
that lifts the pin to make a dot, and allows the pin to drop when there is no
dot. The pins have to be able to move freely. In normal use dirt unavoidably
accumulates on the display and around the touch cursor buttons. To prevent the
pins from jamming, the display and touch cursor should be cleaned regularly.
Cleaning the Braille display is not straightforward. We recommend that you send
the BrailleNote BT back to an authorized BrailleNote BT service center every
twelve months to clean the Braille display.
Making sure that your hands are always clean is a good start towards minimizing problems with your Braille display. We suggest that once per week you wipe the surface of the Braille display using a soft damp cloth. The cloth should be squeezed hard to ensure that all excess moisture has been removed. Use only warm water on the cloth.
Apart from cleaning the case, the BrailleNote BT needs no special maintenance. The internal battery should last typically 18 months before needing replacement. Keep beverages like tea and coffee away from the BrailleNote BT. Periodically wipe the case down with a warm damp cloth. Don't use any cleaning compounds.
End of Hardware Chapter.
This
chapter introduces the basics of KeyWord, the word processor part of KeySoft,
and describes how to create, read and edit a document. Advanced aspects of
KeyWord, including creating documents with more complex formats, and quickly
making extensive changes to a document, are covered in Chapter 7.
In the
following discussion, the general terms "announcements,"
"prompts" and "reading" apply to any of the outputs
available in the BrailleNote family of products. If your model is a VoiceNote,
they refer to audio output only. For BrailleNote models, they can refer to the
Braille display, the audio output, or both.
A word
processor is like a sophisticated Braille writer or typewriter. The difference
is that you do not have to get the document right first time. You can add,
delete and change things to your heart's content, and all the time your work is
stored in BrailleNote BT's memory. You only need emboss or print your document
when you are entirely satisfied with it.
There are
other advantages too. You can make changes at a later date, and you can keep
all the various versions. It's easy to make copies of documents, and filing and
retrieving is much simpler than with hard copy.
Besides
writing documents, KeyWord is useful just for reading documents such as e‑mailed
documents that have originated elsewhere. These can be read directly without
translating them to Braille.
When you
start to compose a document, KeyWord assumes that you want to do it in Braille,
so the layout and format are for a Braille page, as it would appear when
embossed. This doesn't mean that you are committed to a Braille document,
however. You can send it to an ink printer or another computer or e‑mail
it, and KeySoft automatically translates it into a suitable format.
Alternatively,
you have the option of creating a text document directly, with a layout and
format for an ink‑print page. A text document requires the use of
Computer Braille, which is discussed in 7.16 Computer Braille. A text document may be printed
directly or embossed using automatic Braille translation.
You can
also create an image of your printing document in a JPEG format. These files
can then be emailed or transferred to a pc and printed from there. This is
similar to the Print‑to‑PDF functionality widely available on
desktop computers. The JPEG files are stored in the flash disk of your device.
Once the files are printed, these can then be transferred to a PC or emailed to
the recipient for further attention.
Unlike
some other word processors, KeyWord allows you to work with the layout of a
document as it will be embossed or printed. This means that you are working
with the actual layout while you are editing, and you do not have to make
allowances for any effects of formatting commands.
KeyWord
allows you to format a document for embossing and independently format the same
document for printing. The two sets of formatting controls are independent.
Consequently the layout of a document, either Braille or text, can be precisely
controlled without making changes between embossing and printing. The document
remains unchanged when you send it to an embosser or printer.
To select
the word processing functions, start from the Main Menu and press SPACE repeatedly until "Word processor" is displayed, and then press ENTER. Alternatively, just press W. If you have the Braille display on, you can
also use the ADVANCE thumb key to step through the menu
and the NEXT thumb key to select an item.
KeySoft displays: "KeyWord Menu."
Press SPACE to display the first item in the KeyWord Menu,
which is: "Create a document."
As the
prompt suggests, you use this option when you want to create a new document.
Press SPACE again, and KeySoft displays the
second item, which is: "Open a document."
You use
the "Open" option to read an existing
document, or to make changes to one.
Documents are the most common type of file you will use on the BrailleNote BT. You must give each document a unique name enabling KeySoft to distinguish one document from another. For example, when you use KeyWord to write a letter, that letter is stored as a document. Every document name should indicate what type of information it contains. A document name can be up to 250 characters long, including spaces. It cannot contain the following characters: \ / : * ? " < > |
When you
have been using your BrailleNote BT for a while you could very easily
accumulate several hundred documents, and it could become tedious to find any
particular one. To make life easier, documents can be organized into groups
called "Folders." Initially, there are folders named
"General," and "My Books," together with a number of others
which KeySoft uses. Besides these, you can create as many new folders as you
wish.
If you
have a lot of files to organize and are comfortable with the concept, you might
want to create a directory structure of folders, where there is more than one
layer of folders. Details about how to do this and all other aspects of folder
and file management are covered in Chapter 15.
Folders can contain both Braille and text documents. Folder names can be up to 250 characters long, and can consist of any Braille signs except those for the following characters: \ / : * ? " < > |
Documents
can be stored by different pieces of hardware in the BrailleNote BT, called
disk drives, or just drives. BrailleNote BT incorporates a type of memory
called flash memory. The associated drive is referred to as a Flash Disk. It
provides fast, secure storage, retaining its contents even if the battery is
flat. It is the memory you normally use to save your documents. You can copy,
rename, erase or edit and re‑save documents to the Flash Disk.
You can
also add external drives to the BrailleNote BT.
There is
a way of selecting a drive in KeySoft generally, which is not restricted to
KeyWord. If you are at a prompt for a file name or folder name, and you have
not had the opportunity to select a drive, then press BACKSPACE. KeySoft displays: "Drive? (Last drive used)."
To step
through the list of available drives press SPACE. The list comprises the Flash Disk, SD card and Network if they are
connected. To select a drive, either step through the list of available drives
press SPACE or ADVANCE then press NEXT or ENTER, or just type the first letter of the
drive name.
Several
documents are provided with KeySoft. If you want to read one of them, how do
you select it? From the KeyWord menu, select "Open a document." Or
press BACKSPACE with ENTER with W to go directly there. KeyWord
displays: "Folder name? Press ENTER for (name)," where the word "name"
between the brackets is really the name of the last folder used.
To select a document you must first select the appropriate folder. There are three different methods of doing this:
1. To select the offered folder, just
press ENTER. This is the folder that was last
used.
2. To look through the list of
available folders, press SPACE or ADVANCE repeatedly. When the name of the
folder you require is displayed, select it by pressing NEXT or ENTER. You can move back along the list
by pressing BACKSPACE repeatedly.
While
scanning the list you can quickly relocate to an alphabetical position in the list
by pressing a letter. For example, pressing T puts you at the beginning of the list of folders starting with T. If you keep on pressing T, you cycle through all the names starting with
that letter.
3. Type the name of the folder you require, and press ENTER. With this method, remember that you must type
the name exactly or this will not work.
You can
change the current drive by pressing BACKSPACE at the "Folder name?" prompt. The Flash Disk is assumed
here. If another drive was previously selected, a drive prompt is given as
described in 3.4.4 Changing the Current Drive above.
When you
have selected a folder, KeyWord asks: "Document to open? Press ENTER for (name)," where (name) is the name of the last
document you accessed.
Just like
folder selection, the same three methods are available for selecting a
document. Select the offered document by just pressing ENTER, or review the list of documents by pressing SPACE repeatedly and select a document by pressing ENTER, or Braille the document name and press ENTER.
This
selection procedure is significant because it is general throughout KeySoft,
and is not restricted to just opening a document.
In the
next section we talk about creating a document, but first we discuss names.
Each document must have a unique, meaningful name so that it can be stored and
later retrieved by specifying its name. You can use whatever name you like,
with up to 250 Braille characters and spaces, in Grade 1 or Grade 2 as you
wish.
If you
have several documents on a similar subject, you may find it helpful to put the
common part of the name first. For example, you might have:
"Club
minutes, January,"
"Club
minutes, February,"
and so
on. These document names would be grouped together alphabetically for easy
location. If the months are put first, the documents are scattered through the
list of documents.
Documents
can be grouped into folders to make them easier to find. As an example, the
documents just mentioned might all be put into a folder called "Club
minutes 2001." If you do this, it may then be easier to name your
documents without the common part of the name, for example, "January"
and "February". The rules for naming a folder are the same as for
naming a document.
Some characters are reserved and you may not use them in a document name. They are: \ / : " < > | * and ?.
We now
create a trial document. From the Main Menu, select the Word Processor option.
From the KeyWord menu select "Create a document." KeySoft prompts: "Folder name? General."
The
General folder is fine, so press ENTER to accept KeySoft's suggestion. You
are then asked: "Document to create?"
Type in
the name: "Sample", with or without a capital sign as you wish, and
press ENTER. KeySoft says: "Top of Document. Blank."
The
Braille display is blank. You are now at the top left‑hand corner of an
empty Braille document.
Press a
character. Why are there two dots on the Braille display below and to the right
of your character? It's the BrailleNote BT's standard Braille cursor. The
cursor shows where the next character will go. It is discussed in more detail
below.
Without
worrying about mistakes, Braille half a dozen sentences, using either Grade 1
or Grade 2. Each character is displayed on the Braille display as you Braille
it. Each word is spoken only when you have pressed the space bar to complete
the word. You can change the Keyboard Voice so that KeySoft speaks each letter
as it is Brailled, or both words and letters, or nothing at all. How to change
the Keyboard Voice was discussed in
1.18.4 Setting the Keyboard Voice.
You may
also notice that you can Braille indefinitely without worrying about the right
margin. This is because KeyWord automatically starts a new line if it cannot
fit another word onto the current line. This process is known as word wrapping.
The start of a new line is shown on the Braille display as dots 1‑2‑4‑6, followed by the letter L. You probably know dots 1‑2‑4‑6
as the grade 2 contraction "ed." It is also the dollar sign in computer Braille. The symbols $l indicate a line break. There are many of these special format
indicators that start with "ed" or $ such as this. They are described in
more depth in 3.12 Format Indicators.
Also
notice that when you fill the Braille display KeySoft automatically moves so
that there is room to show the last complete word at the right of the display.
Start a
new Braille paragraph by pressing ENTER to start a new line, followed by two spaces, and Braille a few more
sentences. Places where you have pressed ENTER to start a new line are shown on the Braille display as dots 1‑2‑4‑6 or "ed" followed by the letter p. This is also discussed again later.
When you
have finished Brailling, press SPACE with E. Your document is saved, and you
are returned to the KeyWord menu.
It is
possible to quickly create a document to immediately start writing. From the
KeyWord menu, select “Quick Notes”,
or just press Q, and you will be placed in a blank document where you can
immediately begin writing. This cuts down on the time to provide a traditional
location and name for the file.
Alternatively, from anywhere in KeySoft, press BACKSPACE with ENTER
with Q
to start a Quick note.
Quick
Notes are saved in the Quicknotes folder on your flash disk. Each note is
labeled with the time and date at which it was created.
We now
discuss the various commands for reading a document. We recommend you open your
"Sample" document, or the "Demonstration Document" that comes with KeySoft, so that
you can practice using the reading commands. The "Demonstration
Document" is found in the "General" folder. Open the document as
explained in 3.5 Opening a Document.
Reviewing
the document by reading the Braille display is, of course, quite different from
listening to the document so these two methods are discussed separately below.
First we discuss reviewing using the Braille display.
Note: If you are ever unsure which document you are reading, press SPACE with I then F for file name. This will display the name of the document.
When
reading a document, KeySoft avoids breaking the last word by leaving the last
few cells blank.
The
Braille display provides a window into the document. You can step this window
forwards or backwards through the document using the thumb keys. ADVANCE steps forward one window and BACK steps back a window. After reading across the
display press ADVANCE to display the next window.
Repeat
the procedure to read through the document. You can go back if necessary by
pressing BACK. You can also move the display to
the left or right a word at a time. To move the display back a word in the
document, press PREVIOUS with BACK at the same time. To move the display forward a word, press PREVIOUS with ADVANCE.
The
function of the PREVIOUS and NEXT thumb keys is defined in the Braille Display Options. For information
on how to change the setting, refer to 5.4.4 Function of Previous and Next thumb Keys.
The
default setting is Up and Down, and using this setting PREVIOUS steps directly up and NEXT steps directly down where the document has
text organized in columns or tables. When text is arranged in sentences the
cursor moves to the same place in the line directly above or below.
The
function of PREVIOUS and NEXT can also be set to move back or forward by sentence or paragraph. By
changing the cursor movement mode within the document, these thumb keys
commands move by line rather than sentence, and section rather than paragraph.
Cursor movement modes are discussed in 7.6 Cursor Movement Modes.
To return
to the top of the document, press SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3. KeySoft displays a window of text
starting at the very first symbol in the document.
To jump
directly to the end of the document, press SPACE with dots 4‑5‑6. KeySoft displays a window of text
ending with the last symbol in the document.
Experiment
with the thumb to become familiar. Try reading your "sample" document
or the "Demonstration Document" in this way.
You can set your BrailleNote BT to automatically advance the display without you having to press ADVANCE all the time. Each Braille window is displayed for a time before the next window is displayed. You can set the speed to suit your particular preference. To start the automatic advance press SPACE with dots 1‑2‑4‑5‑6. Press NEXT to speed up and PREVIOUS to slow down the display rate. You can stop by pressing PREVIOUS and NEXT or BACKSPACE with ENTER simultaneously. Re‑start by pressing SPACE with dots 1‑2‑4‑5‑6 again.
When you
are reading sentences or paragraphs, you may be simply listening to the text,
or checking it in detail for errors. You can choose to hear the amount of
detail you require by setting the punctuation level. You may also choose
whether numbers are spoken as words or as digits.
You use
the keyboard to enter commands when listening to BrailleNote BT's speech. To
listen to a document without stopping, press SPACE with G, for "Go." KeySoft continues reading to the end of the
document unless you stop by pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER. You can start and stop as you wish
with these two commands.
To return
to the top of the document, press SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3. KeySoft says: "Top of document." and announces the first word of the
document.
To jump
directly to the end of the document, press SPACE with dots 4‑5‑6.
Experiment
with the Go, Stop, Beginning and End commands until you are happy that you
understand their effects.
There are several other important commands for moving around the text.
There is an important convention here:
To move
back and read something, use the
left‑hand keys;
To move
forward and read something, use the right‑hand
keys;
To read
something without moving, use both
left and right‑hand keys.
For
example, try the commands for reading characters:
To move
back a character and read it, press SPACE with dot 3;
To read
the current character, press SPACE with dots 3‑6;
To move
forward a character and read it, press
SPACE with dot 6.
This
convention also applies to reading whole words, as follows:
To move
back a word and read it, press
SPACE with dot 2;
To read
the current word, press SPACE with dots 2‑5;
To move
forward a word and read it, press SPACE with dot 5.
You may
be able to guess the next triplet of commands:
To move
back a sentence and read it, press SPACE with dot 1;
To read
the current sentence, press SPACE with dots 1‑4;
To move
forward a sentence and read it, press
SPACE with dot 4.
You may
have noticed another scheme in use. The outer fingers, on dots 3 and 6, are used to read small elements,
or characters. The inner fingers, on dots 1 and 4, are used for larger elements like
sentences. A similar convention applies for previous, current, and next
paragraphs:
To move
back a paragraph and read it, press SPACE with dots 2‑3;
To read
the current paragraph, press SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6;
To move
forward a paragraph and read it, press
SPACE with dots 5‑6.
You can
follow a sentence or paragraph read command with another sentence or paragraph
read command to immediately change the prose being read.
Try
reading your "Sample" document or the "Demonstration
Document" with these commands. You can refresh your memory by pressing SPACE with H, for Help, and opening the
"Review Commands" list. Alternatively you can enter the Announce Key
mode by pressing SPACE with W and practice the review keystrokes.
When
using several review commands one after the other, you do not have to wait for
speech to finish, nor do you have to release SPACE after each command. Here is an example where we move back several words
and then move forward a character at a time. First press, and hold down, SPACE with either thumb. Now, with SPACE held down, tap dot 2
several times, to move back several words. With the SPACE still held down, tap dot 6
several times to move forward several characters. Finally release the SPACE bar.
The BACKSPACE and ENTER keys operate in the same way when they are used for deleting and
formatting text as described later. You will find this feature very convenient
to use and easy on your wrists.
The
Review Voice settings determine when KeySoft speaks and how much detail KeySoft
includes when reading. When you hold down the PREVIOUS thumb key, press SPACE and release both keys, KeySoft displays the current Review Voice. The
options are; Speech On, Speech On Request, and
Speech Off.
The
Review Voice settings can also be accessed by pressing SPACE with O then R, anywhere in KeySoft. KeySoft might prompt: "Speech? Currently on."
The
options are as follows:
To have
speech and sounds on, press N for ON.
To have
speech on Request, press R.
To turn
off speech and all sounds except alarms, press F for OFF.
When the
Speech on Request option is selected, KeySoft only speaks when you use a
command that is a specific speech command. For example, in KeyWord, the word
processor, when you move forward word by word using SPACE with dot 5, nothing is spoken.
However
if you use the dedicated "Speak Word under Cursor" command, SPACE with dots 2‑5, the word under the cursor is
spoken.
After
selecting the speech setting above, or pressing ENTER to leave the current level unchanged, KeySoft displays: "Volume Level?" To change the speech volume level,
type a number between 1 and 5 press ENTER, 1 is the lowest and 5 is the loudest. To leave
the volume setting unchanged, press ENTER.
KeySoft
displays "Punctuation level? (number)."
where the
word "number" shown in brackets is really an actual number from 1 to
5. At level 1, no punctuation is announced. At level 5, all characters are
spelt out, along with all punctuation. The default setting is 2. The
intermediate levels are described in
5.6.3 Punctuation level. This setting applies whenever you
are editing or reviewing documents or text.
To leave
the setting unchanged, press ENTER. To select a particular punctuation
level, press a number from 1 to 5, then press ENTER.
KeySoft
then prompts: "Number Format? (Words)."
where the
word shown in brackets is really the currently selected option either "Words" or "Digits." The options are W, for numbers spoken as words, or D, for numbers spoken digit by digit. If you
select the word format, the number 1942 is spoken as “nineteen forty two,” since it is assumed to be a date.
The sequence $25.15 is spoken as “twenty five dollars and fifteen cents.”
If you
select the digits option, the number 1942 is spoken digit by digit. The choice
is a matter of personal preference.
To leave
a setting unchanged, just press ENTER, or press W or D for the option you prefer, followed by ENTER. You are returned to the point at which you selected the Review Voice
settings.
When you
read a character by pressing SPACE with dots 3‑6, it is sometimes difficult to
distinguish between letters that sound similar. If you press SPACE with dots 3‑6, twice, when you are using text or
Braille Codes, other than UEB, KeySoft expands the current character into its
"military call sign", if the character is alphabetical, for example A ‑ Alpha, B ‑ Bravo, etc.
When you are using UEB, the second press of SPACE with dots 3‑6, speaks the Braille context of the symbol under the cursor. For example, if the cursor is on dot 1‑5 in the sequence 4‑5, 3‑4, 1‑5, the "e acute" will be spoken on the second press. A third press will give the military call‑sign.
If you
press SPACE with dots 2‑5 twice, KeySoft spells the current
word.
In a
Braille document three presses of SPACE with dots 2‑5 causes KeySoft to spell a
translated version of the word. If the word in question contains one or more
grade 2 contractions, those contractions are expanded to their equivalent
characters and the expanded word is spelt out. For example, the word
"time" is spelled as "dot 5 T" on the second press but "t i m e" on the third press.
The
following discussion is applicable when reading the Braille display and when
listening to a document.
You can
position to the start of the current line by pressing SPACE with dots 1‑3. To move to one position past the
last word in the line, press SPACE with dots 4‑6.
If you
are reading a document that you don't wish to alter, you can avoid having to
press SPACE with all the reading commands. To
enter this Review‑Only Mode, press SPACE with X.
You can
then use all the reading commands without needing to press SPACE. For example, to read the current word, just
press dots 2‑5. This mode continues until you
press SPACE with X again or exit the word processor.
The
cursor is an important concept because many KeyWord commands use the cursor as
a reference to determine where to apply the command. It is also very important
to understand exactly where the cursor is in your document so that your changes
occur as you intend. Otherwise you may find the changes you make are wrong.
The
cursor is a pointer to a single character in a document. The cursor is normally
indicated on the Braille display as two dots below the usual six dot Braille
cell; dots 7 and 8. This is the factory setting form
of the cursor. To find out how to change the form of the cursor, refer to 5.4 Braille Display Options. When you are using speech you can
tell which character the cursor is on by pressing SPACE with dots 3‑6. You can use the read current word,
sentence and paragraph commands to determine the context of the cursor.
Editing
takes effect at the cursor position. Whether you are using the Braille display
or listening to the voice, if you want to edit the document, you must position
the cursor at the point you want the change to start. The cursor indicates the
position in the document where the next character will appear when it is
Brailled. The character is inserted at the cursor position and everything to
the right, including the cursor, is shifted one character to the right to make
room. Pressing BACKSPACE deletes the character immediately
to the left of the cursor, and everything to the right of the cursor is moved
one character to the left to fill the vacated space.
Remember that the buttons immediately behind each cell of the Braille display comprise the touch cursor. To position the cursor at a particular cell you only have to press the cursor button associated with that cell. This is convenient to start editing at that point. First find the Braille cell in the Braille display where you want to start editing. Now move your finger directly above that cell and away from yourself until you feel a vertical ridge that curves upwards slightly. Press this and you notice a tactile action that confirms your press. Read the cell again. You find that the cursor is now positioned at the cell because dots 7 and 8 are displayed, assuming that you are using the standard cursor form. It is as simple as that.
Having
the cursor always displayed on the Braille display can make reading awkward,
but it is needed for editing. KeySoft provides several Braille display modes to
suit the situation. When you first enter KeyWord, Automatic mode is the
default. You will probably use this mode most of the time when you are
Brailling and/or proofreading. Here the cursor is turned on automatically when
you are editing and turned off when you are reading. Reading with the ADVANCE and BACK thumb keys leaves the cursor position unchanged so that you can read
the context without losing your place.
You can
always bring the cursor to a particular cell in any of the following ways:
Press the
touch cursor directly behind the cell;
Press SPACE with dots 3‑6 to read the current character or SPACE with dots 2‑5 to read the current word;
Bring the
cursor to the first cell of the display by pressing BACK and ADVANCE together.
Some format indicators are displayed only if the cursor is on the indicator, others are displayed always. Format indicators are discussed later in 3.12 Format Indicators.
In
KeyWord you use the Braille display for three purposes:
Reading.
For example, your own notes, or a document someone has given or sent you, or an
e‑mail. You are interested in just reading the text as efficiently as possible.
You are not interested in how the author has laid out the text as long as you
can tell where paragraphs begin. You definitely don't want a cursor getting in
the way of your reading.
Editing
and proofreading. Here you need to move the cursor around the document and read
all detailed formatting information.
Checking
the layout for printing or embossing. You want to check what the margins,
indents, tabs, centering, and so on, will actually be like before you convert
your document to a format that can be embossed or printed. For example, when
editing, a tab appears as a special marker. This is so that you know it is a
tab rather than just several spaces. In layout mode the symbol disappears and
the display shows how the tab will appear on paper.
To allow
you to use the Braille display efficiently for each of these purposes, KeyWord
has four Braille display modes. You can check which mode you are in and change
the mode using the Braille Display Options in the Options menu. Alternatively
you can check or change the mode by pressing the PREVIOUS and NEXT thumb keys together. The first press
displays the current mode; subsequent presses cycle through the modes.
Automatic
mode is the default setting for KeyWord. This is a combination of the reading
and editing modes and you will probably use this mode most of the time when you
are Brailling and/or proof reading. Here the cursor is turned on automatically
when you are editing and turned off when you are reading. Reading with ADVANCE and BACK leaves the cursor position unchanged so that you can read the context
without losing your place. You can always bring the cursor to a particular
position by using the touch cursor or bring the cursor to the first cell of the
display by pressing BACK and ADVANCE together. Detailed information such
as format indicators are displayed only if the cursor is on the indicator.
Use this
mode for straight reading. In this mode the cursor is never displayed but
always resides on the left‑most cell of the display. The only formatting
indicated is what is necessary for reading, such as new line indicators and
tabs. The format indicator for displaying new lines and tabs is by default
based on those recommended by the Braille Authority of North America. If
desired you may change the method by which new lines are indicated. This is
covered in more detail in 3.12.3 New Line Indicator.
In this
mode the cursor is always on and all formatting information is displayed.
In this
mode the document is laid out on the Braille display in the same way as it will
appear on paper when it is printed, in the case of text documents, or embossed,
in the case of Braille documents. Each line starts with a Braille format
indicator, $p, $f, or $l to show whether it is the first line of a page,
paragraph, etc. The line is then shown complete with margins, indents, etc.,
and ends with another Braille format indicator. The display is not word wrapped
and does not wrap around lines. Each press of ADVANCE or BACK moves the display by exactly one display width along the line or starts
a new line. The NEXT and PREVIOUS thumb keys move the display up and down.
To tell
you how a document is formatted, KeySoft places special format indicators at
particular points in a document. These format indicators are both spoken and
displayed on the Braille display. You may have encountered a number of special
groups of symbols on the Braille display when you were reviewing your
"Sample" document. They tell you how the document is formatted. When
displaying format indicators KeySoft follows the guidelines set for literary
Braille format established by the Braille Authority of North America.
When
using speech, format indicators are identified by their names. If the cursor is
positioned over an indicator, the name of the indicator is displayed. On the
Braille display, if the cursor is positioned under a format indicator, it
appears under each of the characters of the format indicator.
Format
indicators are groups of symbols that always start with a computer Braille
dollar sign, $. In US computer Braille this is dots 1‑2‑4‑6 which is the same as the grade 2
"ed" contraction. In UK computer Braille it is dots 4‑5‑6. There is always a space before the $ and another space after the group of symbols.
The symbol or symbols following the $ determine what the format indicator is showing.
For
example, the new line indicator, which usually indicates the end of a
paragraph, is a space followed by the dollar sign, followed by the letter p,
and terminated by a space.
Common
format indicators are:
LINE
BREAK: KeySoft automatically started a new line because there wasn't any more
room on the current line. A line break indicator is shown as the dollar sign
followed by the letter l, $l. KeySoft
automatically word wraps meaning that it starts a new line if it runs out of
room on the current line. A line break indicator is inserted into the text
showing you where a new line is started. The line break indicator is announced
as "line break".
NEW LINE:
A new line was started by pressing ENTER. A new line is shown as the dollar sign followed by the letter p, $p.
Often a new line indicator marks the beginning of a new paragraph. The new line
indicator is announced as "new line".
PAGE
BREAK: KeySoft started a new page because the previous page was full in much
the same way that word wrap starts a new line when the previous line is full.
The page break indicator always appears in conjunction with a line break or new
line indicator in a document and is indicated by the addition of an f for new form after the $l or $p indicators. For example, $lf or $pf. The page break indicator is announced as "page break." The position of a page break varies
as you add or delete lines of text.
NEW PAGE:
The start of a new page is forced by pressing SPACE with P. The new page indicator is shown in Braille as
the dollar sign followed by the letter f for form, $f. The new page indicator is announced as "new page."
Don't
forget that all of the indicators have a space before them and after them.
The
positions of block markers, place markers and a range of other formatting
markers described in this chapter and in Chapter 7, are also indicated in a
document. The full set of format indicators used
by KeyWord is below. If you don't recognize all of them or what they do, don't
worry as they are all mentioned in context elsewhere in the user guide.
Line
Break: $l.
New
Line: $p.
Page
Break: $lf
or $pf.
New
page: $f.
Place
marker: $plc
New
layout: $nl
Indent: $i
Tab: $t
Tab 2: $t#2
Center
line: $c
Right
Justify Line: $r
Paragraph
Style: $sp
Heading
style: $h
Sub
heading: $h#n
Outline
style: $ou
Line
style: $sl
Identical
to Source: $si
Ink
print layout: $nli
Ink
print Indent: $ii
Ink
print exclusion: $xis
End
ink print exclusion: $xie
Translation
option: $txi
Ink
print page setting: $psi
Top
Block Marker: $blt
Insert
date: $dtp
Binding
space: $bsp
Start
Underline: $fsu
End
Underline: $feu
Font
start: $fsn
Font
end: $fen
New
Braille Layout: $nlb
Braille
indent: $ib
Braille
only inclusion: $ob
Start
Braille exclusion: $xbs
End
Braille exclusion: $xbe
Braille
Grade 0 indicator : $g#0.
Braille
Grade 1 indicator : $g#1.
Braille
Grade 2 indicator : $g#2.
Math
Braille Code indicator: $gm
Braille
page setting: $psb
Braille
Translation Indicator: $txb
Extended
character: $ch
Extended
symbol: $m
Table
start: $tb
Table
row: $tr
Table
end: $t
dots 1‑2‑3‑4‑5‑6
Image
without description: $im
Link
start: $
dots 2‑4‑6
Link
end: $
dots 1‑3‑5
If you
wish to introduce changes to the layout or presentation of a document, you may
need to locate format indicators such as layout indicators, font indicators,
underline indicators, etc. If you want to change the format of paragraphs, you
may need to locate new line indicators.
The Find
command, SPACE with F, and the Find and Replace command, BACKSPACE with F, can be used to locate any of these
format indicators. To go to the next occurrence of the selected format
indicator, press SPACE with N.
You can
use the following command sequences to search for these indicators, and also to
insert Format indicators into a document when entered at the "Replace
with?" prompt:
New
Line: SPACE with dots 2‑6.
New
Page: SPACE with P.
New
Layout: BACKSPACE with L.
Underline
On: ENTER with U N.
Underline
Off: ENTER with U F.
Font
On: ENTER with F.
Font
Off: ENTER with F.
Center
Line: ENTER with C.
Right
Justify: ENTER with R.
Indent: ENTER with I.
Start
Braille or ink‑print exclusion: BACKSPACE with ENTER with dots 3‑4.
End
Braille or ink‑print exclusion: BACKSPACE with ENTER with dots 2‑6.
Translation
Options indicator: BACKSPACE with ENTER with O.
Text
or Braille only inclusion: SPACE with ENTER with C.
Text
or Braille layout: BACKSPACE with ENTER with L.
Style
of presentation indicator: BACKSPACE with S.
Template
Menu: BACKSPACE with ENTER with dots 2‑3‑4‑6.
Change
Braille grade: BACKSPACE with G.
When
reading large amounts of text you may find the new line indicator annoying. It
is possible to change the way in which new lines are indicated.
This
option is available within a document, an e‑mail, or within the Planner.
It determines how the start of a new line or paragraph is shown on the Braille
display.
For
linear Braille format where the start of a new line is indicated by the
Computer Braille "dollar sign" then p, (dots 1‑2‑4‑6 p), press L.
For the
new line or paragraph to start at the beginning of the display after a one cell
indent, press A.
For the
beginning of the display after a two cell indent, press B.
For the
beginning of the display with no indent, press N.
For two
spaces anywhere they happen to fall on the display, press dots 2‑3.
For three
spaces anywhere they happen to fall on the display, press dots 2‑5.
For just
one space anywhere it happens to fall on the display, press dot 2.
We have described how to create a new document and review its contents. This section introduces the basic text editing commands. The most common forms of editing are deleting or inserting characters, words, or sentences. These commands are described here, along with searching, search and replace, defining pages, and moving to particular points in a document. Advanced word processing commands are covered in Chapter 7.
To insert
a character, word, sentence, or any amount of text, you need only to position
the cursor at the point where you want to insert the text, and start Brailling.
No special command is required because KeyWord is always in the insert mode.
Text is
inserted at the cursor position. The character that was at the cursor, and all
following characters, move to the right to make room. Experiment with this by
inserting some words in your "Sample" document.
There are
seven different delete commands available with KeyWord, allowing for the
deleting of sections of text from one character to the whole document.
Delete current character ‑
Press BACKSPACE with dots 3‑6.
This
deletes the character under the cursor. A short beep is sounded followed by
announcement of the new character under the cursor. This command is also
available by holding down SPACE and pressing D twice. The text to the right of
the character is all moved one character to the left to fill the gap. The
cursor is now placed on the next character and this character is displayed.
Delete last character ‑
Press BACKSPACE.
This
deletes the previous character, that is, the last character entered if you are
typing. The character deleted is displayed followed by a short beep.
Delete current word ‑
Press BACKSPACE with dots 2‑5.
This
deletes the word under the cursor together with any following spaces. A short
beep is sounded and the text to the right of the word is all moved to the left
to fill the gap. The cursor is now on the first character of the next word and
this word is displayed. If the cursor is on a space, all spaces up to the
beginning of the next word are deleted and the cursor is placed on that word.
Delete previous word ‑
Press BACKSPACE with dot 2.
The word
before the cursor is deleted, together with any following spaces.
Delete to end of sentence ‑
Press BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
KeySoft
prompts you to make sure that you really mean to delete such a significant
amount of text. If you press Y, all text will be deleted from the
cursor position to the end of the current sentence. The cursor will be placed
on the first character of the next sentence.
Delete to end of paragraph ‑
Press BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
KeySoft
prompts you to make sure that you really mean to delete such a significant
amount of text. If you press Y, all text will be deleted from the
cursor position to the end of the current paragraph. The cursor remains in the
same position.
Delete to end of document ‑
Press BACKSPACE with dots 4‑5‑6.
KeySoft
prompts you to make sure that you really mean to delete such a significant
amount of text. If you press Y, all text will be deleted from the
cursor position to the end of the document. The cursor remains in the same
position.
There is
no specific command to delete all text from a document, but this can easily be
done by pressing SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3 to move to the top of the document
and then pressing BACKSPACE with dots 4‑5‑6.
Note that
the keys used to delete a particular section of text correspond to the commands
for reading the same section of text except that the BACKSPACE key is used in place of the SPACE key.
In
summary, the full set of delete commands is:
Delete
current character, BACKSPACE with dots 3‑6;
Delete
previous character BACKSPACE;
Delete
current word, BACKSPACE with dots 2‑5;
Delete
previous word, BACKSPACE with dot 2;
Delete
to end of sentence, BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4;
Delete
to end of paragraph, BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6;
Delete
to end of document, BACKSPACE with dots 4‑5‑6.
In case
it is not obvious, if you press one wrong key while you are typing, you will
want to delete the character to the left of the cursor position, not the blank
which is currently under the cursor. For this reason you should use BACKSPACE if you have just made a single typing mistake.
Use BACKSPACE also to correct mistakes during
entry of file names, search strings, etc.
For the
same reason, if you realize that the word you have just typed is wrong when
KeySoft echoes it, use the delete‑previous‑word command to remove
it.
On
reading your document again, you may find a word misspelled. When using speech
it is often simpler to delete the word and retype it correctly, followed by a
single space, rather than delete one or two characters and correct on a letter
by letter basis.
You can
force a new page in your text manually at any point you choose by putting the
cursor where you definitely want a new page to start, such as the start of new
chapters and pressing SPACE with P.
KeyWord
breaks the remaining text into pages automatically, so that the maximum number
of lines fit onto each page.
When you
have finished editing the document, check that it breaks into pages to your
satisfaction. You can examine each page break to verify that important text is
not split between pages. If you are not satisfied, you can force a new page
before a page break by pressing SPACE with P.
To
examine each page break, you can move to the start of the next page by using
the "Go To" command, SPACE with dots 1‑2‑6, followed by SPACE with dot 4. You can also move back a page at a
time by pressing SPACE with dots 1‑2‑6, followed by SPACE with dot 1. The "Go To" command is
described further in 3.18 Going to a Specified Position.
To cancel
a new page, move to the position where the "New Page" indicator is
displayed, and use the "delete‑current‑character" command
to delete it.
If at any
time while in a document, you wish to check the file name or word count, press SPACE with I. This will give you the Information
Menu, with two items, File name and Word Count. Select an option in the usual
manner.
If you
select File name, the name will be displayed. If you select Word count, KeySoft
will display "Please wait…" and after a brief pause, the total
word count.
The
Search Command allows you to find a particular string of text within a large
document. The term "string" refers to a sequence of characters which
may be part of a word, a whole word, or 2 or 3 words. Searches may be either
backwards or forwards from the current cursor position.
Press SPACE with F to initiate the search. KeySoft
prompts: "Search forward or back?"
Press F to search forward from the current cursor
position. KeySoft displays: "Find?"
The last
string searched for, if any, is offered as a suggestion.
Press ENTER to select the suggested text, or type the text
string to be found, and press ENTER. KeySoft starts to search the
document. If the text is found, the cursor jumps to the first occurrence of
that text.
KeySoft
displays: "Found (word)"
where
"word" is the first word of the text string that was entered. If the
text string cannot be found, KeySoft displays: "Cannot find (string)."
Either
press ADVANCE or PREVIOUS to return the display to the document.
If you
want to carry on searching forward for the next occurrence of the same text,
press SPACE with N. In a large document the search may
take a few seconds.
If searching for a particular e‑mail, use the binding space command ENTER with B to put spaces between words. This is not necessary in other contexts.
You can
search back from the current cursor position by pressing B, instead of F, at the Search Forward or Back prompt. The rest of the procedure for
searching back is the same as that just described for searching forward.
The
Search string can be up to 50 characters long and it can contain words
separated by spaces.
Either
upper or lower case letters may be used as the search process will locate text
regardless of capitalization.
It is
also possible to search for special indicators such as New Line or New Page
markers, printer control markers, underline markers, etc. For information on
the way to specify these markers, refer to 3.12.2 Searching for Format Indicators.
In
addition to searching for a particular word or string of characters, you can
also replace one string with another. Only whole words are replaced. This is
useful, for instance, if you discover you have misspelled a word which is
frequently used throughout a lengthy document.
The
command for "Find and Replace" is BACKSPACE with F. This command is followed by F for a forward search, or B for a back search. KeySoft prompts: "Find? (Search string),"
where
"search string" is the text string used last time a search was made.
The very first time you use your BrailleNote BT or if you reset it, there is
nothing to display. Type the new word or words to find and press ENTER, edit the previous search string and press ENTER, or just press ENTER to search for the same string again.
KeySoft
prompts: "Replace with (replacement text),"
where
"replacement text" is the last entry you made here. Type up to 50
characters of replacement text and then press ENTER, edit the previous replacement text and press ENTER, or just press ENTER to replace the same text as last time. KeySoft then prompts: "Replace all or first?"
To avoid
the problem of words which happen to be embedded in other words, KeyWord
replaces whole words only.
If you
want to replace all occurrences, forward or back as appropriate, with the new
text, press A. To replace just the first
occurrence, press F.
If the
word you are searching for does not occur within the document being searched,
KeySoft displays: "Can't find (search string)," where search string is the text
string used.
It is
important to remember whether you are searching forwards or backwards in a
document. The "Can't find" message means that a word cannot be
found in the direction that is currently being searched. For instance, if you
search forward from the middle of a document, you will miss an occurrence in
the first half.
KeySoft
always remembers the most recent search and replacement text, and these become
the new suggested strings. Special indicators such as New Line Marker and New
Page Marker can be replaced in the same way.
To check
where the cursor is currently positioned, press SPACE with wh sign (dots 1‑5‑6). KeySoft responds with the page number, line number and column number of
the cursor position. To return the Braille display to the document, press
either ADVANCE or PREVIOUS.
Used in conjunction with the cursor movement commands, this is a useful way of checking your page layout for printing or embossing. For example, you can position the cursor on the first character of a particular line by pressing SPACE with dots 1‑3, and then check the cursor position to find out which column this line starts on. This enables you to check margin settings.
The
cursor can be moved to any chosen page, line or column with the "Go
To" command. To do this, press SPACE with dots 1‑2‑6, then enter a page, line and column
position in the document, and press ENTER. This command is very flexible, and you can make
entries such as the following:
C6 moves the cursor to Column 6 on the
current line. P3 moves the cursor to Page 3, Line 1,
Column 1.
P 5 L10 moves the cursor to Page 5, Line 10, Column 1.
You can
also go to the top of the next or previous page by pressing SPACE with dots 1‑2‑6, followed by SPACE with dot 4 or 1.
Up to 26
positions in a document may be marked with Place Markers, enabling instant
future reference. Place Markers are identified by letters. Typically, you might
put a place marker where you are editing a document. You can then move to
another part of the document, and return quickly to the edited text.
Place
Markers are not retained in non‑KeyWord documents when they are saved.
A Place
Marker is announced as "Place Marker c," where c is a letter which names the Place Marker. It does not affect the
document format and is not embossed or printed.
A Place
Marker is displayed on the Braille display as $pla where a is the letter of the alphabet which
identifies the place marker. It does not affect the document format and is not
embossed or printed.
Position
the cursor at the point you wish to mark, and press BACKSPACE with D. KeySoft prompts: "Define Place Marker. Letter?"
Press a
letter, such as A, to name the Place Marker. KeySoft
displays: "Place A."
When you mark your document with a place marker, you may be surprised to
see the cursor, usually dots 7 and 8, under each of the four characters of the
place marker. KeySoft treats the place marker as a single object which cannot
be split so it marks the whole group.
Press SPACE with J. KeySoft prompts: "Jump to Place Marker. Letter?"
Press the
letter corresponding to the Place Marker. The cursor is placed just to the
right of the Place Marker itself.
Locate
the Place Marker you wish to delete, using the Jump to Place Marker command.
This places the cursor just to the right of the Place Marker, so delete the
marker by pressing BACKSPACE.
The
Spelling Checker can be used in the Word processor or Planner. It finds typing
and spelling mistakes in the current document by looking up each word in a
dictionary of 65,000 words.
The
Spelling Checker can check the whole document or part of a document. Select the
Spelling Checker by pressing SPACE with dots 1‑6, the ch sign. If the Spelling Checker has not
been used since KeySoft was installed, you are asked to install the language.
There is an American English spelling dictionary and a United Kingdom English
spelling dictionary available. Press SPACE or ADVANCE until your dictionary of choice is
displayed, and select it by pressing NEXT or ENTER.
The
Spelling Checker menu contains 6 items:
Document
Check: check
the whole document;
Lookup
Word: lookup
any word;
Word
Check: check
the word under the cursor;
Paragraph
or Section Check: check
paragraph or section;
Check
from Cursor: check
from cursor to end of document;
Select
language. Press SPACE with dots 3‑4 to move through the list of
available choices.
If the
Spelling Checker finds a word which is not in its dictionary, it displays the
word and then: "Option?"
There are
7 possible actions at this point. You may wish to press SPACE with H for assistance. After you have
selected your action, checking continues. When the checking has finished, you
hear the total number of words checked and the number of unknown words found.
The cursor then returns to its original position.
The seven
options are now discussed.
If you
want to hear the word again, press SPACE with dots 2‑5. On the first press the word is
spoken. On the second press the word is spelled out. This sequence repeats on
subsequent presses.
You can
also review the word in context at the "Option?" prompt as follows:
1. To read the current sentence, press SPACE with dots 1‑4.
2. To read the current paragraph, press
SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
If Line
Reading mode has been selected, these two commands speak the current line or
section instead. You can set the Reading Mode at the "Option?" prompt by pressing SPACE with M. Reading modes are discussed in 7.6 Cursor Movement Modes.
To skip
the current occurrence of the word and leave it unchanged, press SPACE with dot 5. If the word occurs elsewhere, the
Spelling Checker queries it again.
To leave
all instances of the word unchanged, press I, for Ignore. Use this option to ignore a name or specialized word which
occurs throughout the document, but is not recognized by the spelling checker,
and which you do not wish to add to the dictionary.
To add
the current word to the user dictionary, press A. The word will never again be displayed as an
unknown word when the Spelling Checker is used. Use this option for names,
technical terms, etc which you often use. For more information on the User
Dictionary, refer to 3.20.10 The User Dictionary.
To
correct the word being queried, press C, and KeySoft displays: "Enter replacement."
Type the
replacement word or edit the existing word, and press ENTER. The Spelling Checker looks up your entry in its
dictionary before accepting it. If it can't find it, the Spelling Checker asks
for confirmation by prompting: "Word not found in dictionary. Use?"
Press Y to use the new word, or N and then re‑enter the correction.
If you
correct a missing space between two words, KeySoft checks each separate word
before accepting your correction.
In case
the word you are correcting occurs more than once in the document, the Spelling
Checker also asks: "Correct all or first?"
To
correct this and all subsequent occurrences of the word in the document, press A, for All. To correct only this first instance,
press F, for First.
When
making corrections, don't worry about capital signs or capital letters because
the Spelling Checker leaves them as they are.
To obtain a "Suggestions list," press S. This is a list of words which resemble the original, and may be reviewed by pressing SPACE or ADVANCE or BACK or BACKSPACE. The following 3 options are then available:
1. To display the original word, press I. In speech, subsequent presses alternately
spell out and speak the word.
2. To replace the misspelled word in
your document with the current suggestion, press NEXT or ENTER. You are given the option of
replacing all occurrences or just the first one.
3. To spell out the current suggestion
using speech, press SPACE with O, then S.
If you
don't like the suggestions, press SPACE with E to go back to the "Option?" prompt.
This
option allows you to browse the dictionary, word by word, until you have found
the correct spelling. You can then replace the misspelled word with the correct
one.
At the "Option?" prompt, press L, and KeySoft asks: "Word to look up? Press ENTER for (word),"
where
"word" is the unknown word. You normally press ENTER to select the unknown word. Alternatively, you
can enter a possible alternative spelling, or just the first few letters,
followed by ENTER.
You are
then placed at the word in the dictionary which most closely matches the
letters you have typed. To browse through the dictionary until you find the
word you are looking for, use SPACE or ADVANCE or BACK or BACKSPACE.
There are 4 options here, similar to the Suggestions options. These are:
1. To replace the misspelled word in
your document with the current dictionary word, press NEXT or ENTER. You are asked whether you want to
replace the first occurrence or all, in case there are multiple occurrences.
2. To return to the "Word to lookup?" prompt, press SPACE with E. You can then type another
alternative spelling, or press SPACE with E again to return to the "Option?" prompt.
3. To display the original word, press I. In speech, subsequent presses alternately spell
and speak the word.
4. To spell the current word in the
dictionary, press SPACE with O, then S.
To exit
from the Spelling Checker, press SPACE with E. The cursor is placed at the point
where the Spelling Checker was interrupted. To restart the spelling check from
where you left off, press SPACE with dots 1‑6, the ch sign, then C.
You can
look up any word, and browse the spelling dictionary, without having first
found the word with the Spelling Checker. From anywhere in the document, press SPACE with dots 1‑6, the ch sign, then L, and KeySoft prompts: "Word to look up?"
Type the
word, or just the first few letters, and press NEXT or ENTER. You are placed at the word in the
dictionary which most closely matches the letters you have typed, and the word
is displayed. To browse through the dictionary until you find the word you are
looking for, use thumb keys SPACE or ADVANCE or BACK or BACKSPACE.
There are
three options available while browsing through the dictionary, as follows:
1. To insert the current dictionary
word into your document at the present cursor position, press NEXT or ENTER. No spaces are included, so you may
need to add a space if the word is inserted in a sentence. No capital signs are
included so you may need to add these, if necessary.
2. To return to the "Word to lookup?" prompt, press SPACE with E. You can then narrow down the options
by typing more starting letters, or enter a different word. To return to the
document, press SPACE with E again.
3. To spell the current word in the
dictionary, press SPACE with O, then S.
When you
use the "Add to dictionary" option, the new word is stored
separately in a KeyWord text document called "User dictionary." The
words are arranged one per line. You can review the User Dictionary using
KeyWord, and correct or remove words. If you edit the User Dictionary, use only
lower case letters and apostrophes.
The User
Dictionary is saved in the "Dictionaries" folder.
Documents
in KeyWord's native format, as well as Microsoft Word, RTF, or WordPerfect
documents precisely specify their contents and formatting. However, the
contents and formatting of documents containing plain ASCII text and the
formatting of plain Braille documents are not at all precisely defined, so it
is necessary to give you control over how KeyWord interprets them. This is done
through a list of options presented when you open such a document. The initial
settings for these options are either the ones you established last time you
opened the same document, or if you have never opened the document before, settings
that KeyWord assumes are most appropriate for the document and therefore
usually you will not need to make any changes. So that you can tell whether or
not you have opened this document before, the wording of the prompt changes
from "Review the options?" to "Review previous options?" accordingly. To continue and open
the document without reviewing the options, just press ENTER. To review the options, press Y.
The
options given when opening a document are as follows:
“Is this a Braille or Text document?”
If the
name extension is .brl or .brf indicating that it will be a Braille file, then
this option will have already been set to Braille. When open, these documents
default to a reading grade of contracted Braille, regardless of the preferred
reading grade set, as most Braille documents are in contracted Braille.
If the
document is not .brf or .brl but contains Braille, then select
"Braille" by pressing B. Otherwise select "Text"
by pressing T. Follow either entry with ENTER.
“Language for document?”
If more
than one language is installed, you will be asked to select the language used
for this document.
“Use Line or Paragraph format when opening the document? currently Paragraph.”
When
opening a document, it is important that KeyWord knows the difference between
the ends of lines within a paragraph and the end of the paragraph itself.
Without this knowledge, paragraphs might be run together, or each line within a
paragraph may be taken as the end of a paragraph, causing the speech to pause in
the wrong places, and stopping the proper reformatting of lines within a
paragraph when a change is made. Plain text or plain Braille documents use the
same "control characters," for example, "carriage returns"
and "line feeds" to show where lines within paragraphs end as they
use to show where a paragraph ends. This option allows you to control how
KeyWord interprets these control characters to distinguish between ends of
lines and end of paragraphs.
The
option you choose here depends on the way the document you are opening is
formatted:
The
Paragraph format option assumes that a single carriage return and/or line feed
character sequence, that is not followed by an indent of more than one space,
denotes the end of a line within a paragraph and is therefore removed so that
KeyWord can reformat the paragraph within the margins that you have set. A
sequence of two or more carriage return and/or line feed characters or a single
sequence followed by an indent is interpreted as being the start of a new
paragraph and is substituted for KeyWord's New Line markers. This option is the
initial setting when you first open a document and is the one that you will
need for most prose type documents.
The Line
format option retains every carriage return and/or line feed sequence as a New
Line in KeyWord. Use this setting when opening documents containing lists or
documents where each paragraph is formatted as one long line.
To retain
"Paragraph" format when opening the document, just press ENTER. To select "Line" format, press L followed by ENTER.
“Use Line or Paragraph format when saving the document? Currently Paragraph.”
In a
similar way to the previous option for opening documents, this option controls
the use of carriage returns and line feeds when a plain text or plain Braille
document is saved. Paragraph option puts carriage return/line feed sequences
only where New Line markers occurred while the document was being edited. Line
option puts them where either Line Break indicators or New Line markers occur.
If you
are saving a document for use again in KeySoft or for transferring to another
word processor, use Paragraph format. This will ensure that all paragraphs,
headings, list, etc. are properly formatted when the document is opened next
time. However each paragraph will appear as one long line, so if you are saving
the document for use on a system which may not be able to handle this, then
save using Line format.
To retain
"Paragraph" format when saving the document, just press ENTER. To select "Line" format, press L followed by ENTER.
You may
have worked out that if you open a document using Paragraph format and then
save it using Paragraph format, then you must open it next time using Line
format. KeyWord changes the setting automatically for you so that if you have saved
a document using paragraph format, next time you open it, the opening setting
will be Line format.
Whether
or not KeyWord uses Line Feed control characters in addition to Carriage Return
characters is controlled by the "Use of Line Feed characters?" option in the ASCII Translation
Options in the Translation Menu. The use of the ASCII End of File character is
controlled by the "Use of End of File character" option in the same list.
"Extended character set? Currently ANSI.”
More than
one system has been used for extended characters, therefore you must tell
KeyWord which one to use for this document. The options are the
"ANSI" character set, UTF8 or the "MSDOS" character set. If
you don't know which one to use, try one and if the extended characters do not
come out correctly, try the other. For the "MSDOS" set press M followed by ENTER. For the "ANSI" set press A followed by ENTER.
KeySoft
will now display: "End of list."
When you
are ready to open the document, press SPACE with E.
“Extended ASCII character option? Currently Retain.”
The
standard ASCII character set uses numbers between 0 and 127 to denote each
character within the set. It does not make provision for accented characters
and other special symbols, so where necessary this is done by extending this
set with numbers greater than 127. This option controls how KeyWord interprets
these characters.
Sometimes
extended characters occur not because they are accented characters or special
symbols, but because the file has been transmitted through a communications
system that has added a "parity bit" which in effect has added an
offset to some of the characters. To adjust for this, use the "Convert to
standard ASCII" option, by pressing C, followed by ENTER.
Sometimes
the extended characters are used purely for visual effects such as boxes around
paragraphs, etc. In these cases the document will be easier to read if the
extended characters are removed altogether, use the "Ignore" option
for this.
To retain
the extended characters when the document is opened, select "Retain."
KeySoft has the capability to access Microsoft Word
2007 or later documents with the DOCX extension.
To open DOCX files in Keyword, follow this procedure:
1. From the Word Processor menu, choose to open a document.
2.
Find on which drive the DOCX file is
located.
3.
Locate the folder on the selected
drive.
4.
Select the DOCX file and press Enter.
KeySoft will ask if you want to view or edit this document.
If you press V at the prompt, KeySoft will convert the
DOCX file into a format rich web page, placing your cursor immediately in the
KeyWeb's internet browser application. The benefit with viewing a DOCX document
in this fashion is that the majority of the original formatting will be
preserved, and you will be able to use KeyWeb's navigation capabilities to
browse the document by heading, skim through tables cell by cell, or access
imbedded links from within the document. Remember that when viewing a document
in this fashion, it is in a read-only mode and no editing can occur.
If you press E at the prompt, KeyWord automatically
converts the DOCX file to a simpler text format for one to edit the
information. When you receive the "Review the options prompt", you
have all the translation capabilities that have been listed above. Simply
pressing Enter here will open the simplified text document for editing.
Alternatively you could choose to convert this file at this prompt to a KeyWord
Braille file.
Note that if you have already edited the DOCX file
once, and press Enter on the DOCX file a second time, KeySoft will ask if you
wish to open the previously converted file to continue editing, or re-convert
the file. Press O to open the existing file, or C to re-convert it.
Documents sent to you in the accessible portable
document format (PDF) can be converted to text content and opened in KeyWord. To do so, follow this procedure:
1. From the Word Processor menu choose to open a document.
2. Find on which drive the PDF file is located.
3. Locate the folder on the selected drive.
4. Select the PDF file to convert by pressing Enter on it. It takes some
time to convert a PDF file to text, you may hear progress beeps.
5. When the file is converted, the text file will be opened by KeyWord.
Note that this applies to PDF files with imbedded
text, not PDF image files. If your document is blank when it converts, it is
most likely an image file.
There is
no significant limit to the size of a document, but as it gets bigger, some
operations take longer to perform. For instance, when you press SPACE with E to exit a document, a delay of
several seconds may occur. Moving to the top or bottom of a document may also
take a few seconds. In such instances KeySoft displays: "Please wait", or "Repositioning," depending on the situation.
Keystrokes are not actioned until such an operation has been completed. If
necessary, divide large documents into two or more smaller ones to speed the
editing of the text.
There may
be times when you are working with two or more documents. This can happen when
you are modifying a document and need to refer often to the original. While you
can close one document by pressing SPACE with E, opening the other can involve several
keystrokes.
There is
a quicker way. From the current document, press SPACE with dots 1‑2‑5‑6. This closes the current document,
and places you at the "Document to open?" prompt. KeySoft then offers the name of the
document which was opened before the last one. To open this, press ENTER. This means that you can switch back and forth
between your two most recent documents just by pressing SPACE with dots 1‑2‑5‑6, followed by ENTER.
This
scheme also works if you are working with several documents, because the
document name that KeySoft offers when you press SPACE with dots 1‑2‑5‑6 is just the first in a list. If you
press SPACE with dots 5‑6, KeySoft offers the next most recent
document, and you can work down the list towards progressively older documents.
You can also work back up the list by pressing SPACE with dots 2‑3. When you find the one you want,
press ENTER.
To
provide fast access to recently used documents and folders, SPACE with dots 5‑6 is available at most document and
folder prompts throughout KeySoft.
You set
your default working language in the Utilities Menu.
1. Go to the Main Menu by pressing SPACE with dots 1 to 6.
2. Select the Utilities option, by
stepping through the Main Menu until you get to Utilities and pressing Enter,
or by pressing U anywhere in the Main Menu.
3. From the Utilities Menu, select the
Language options list by stepping through the list and pressing Enter, or by
pressing L.
KeySoft
displays:
"Working language? Press ENTER for (language name)."
4. Press SPACE with dots 3‑4 to move through the list of
languages available. To select a language, press ENTER, or press the initial letter of that language, for example for French,
press F and then press ENTER.
KeySoft
displays:
"Default Speech Language? Press ENTER for (language name)."
5. Press SPACE with dots 3‑4 to move through the list of
languages available. To select a language, press ENTER, or press the initial letter of that language, for example for English,
press E and then press ENTER.
KeySoft
displays:
"Imported Data should be labeled as which Language? Press ENTER for none."
You can
change the language settings at any time from the Utilities Menu.
End of
Word Processing Chapter.
The
BrailleNote has a book reader called KeyBook. It enables you to read electronic
books in the following formats: KeyWord text and Braille, Microsoft Word, ASCII
text, RTF, PDF and plain Braille files with a BRF or BRL extension. KeyBook has
the same reading commands as KeyWord, but KeyBook does not allow the book
contents to be modified.
If the
book is in text format, KeyBook can transcribe the text into your preferred
reading grade instantly, as you read. For example, if your preferred reading
grade is Grade 2 Braille, KeyBook automatically displays the book in Grade 2 as
you read. However, the underlying text is still in its original form, and you
can examine it in computer Braille, at any time, should you wish.
After
selecting KeyBook from the Main Menu, KeyBook displays: "Read book in which folder? Press ENTER for My Books."
Press ENTER. If this is the very first time a book is
read, the book name must be selected from the list of books in the Books
folder. Press SPACE repeatedly to display the list;
then press ENTER when "A Christmas Carol" is displayed.
KeyBook
prompts: "Review the options?" Press ENTER to accept the default options, and the book will load. For more
information about reviewing the options, see 4.8 Reading Books Stored on Other Drives.
Note: If a book has been read before, KeyBook will
prompt: "Book name?” Press ENTER for a Christmas Carol."
To load the book, press ENTER. Once the book is loaded, the beginning of the text will display and, if the speech is on, KeyBook announces: "Top of document." You are now ready to start reading.
The same
commands that are used in KeyWord also apply to KeyBook. The following commands
can be used to read using the Braille display:
To
advance the display forward by one width, press ADVANCE;
To move
the display back by one width, press BACK;
To move
the display forward by a chosen amount of text, press NEXT.
You can
set the amount of text at sentence, paragraph or line in the "Function of PREVIOUS and NEXT thumb keys" option as described in 5.4.4 Function of Previous and Next thumb Keys.
Likewise,
to move the display back by the chosen amount of text, press PREVIOUS.
The
following commands control the automatic Braille display advance mode:
To start
the display advancing automatically, press SPACE with dots 1‑2‑4‑5‑6
press again to stop;
To stop
the Braille display advancing, press BACKSPACE with ENTER
together;
To
decrease the speed of advance of the Braille display, press PREVIOUS;
To
increase the speed of advance of the Braille display, press NEXT;
To move
the display back a word, press PREVIOUS with BACK;
To move
the display forward a word, press PREVIOUS with ADVANCE;
To turn
the Braille display on or off, hold down the NEXT thumb
key, press SPACE, then release both keys. This was
described in more detail in 1.18.1 Turning the Braille Display On or Off;
To turn
speech on or off, first press PREVIOUS, then SPACE and then release both keys. This was described in more
detail in 1.18.2 Turning Speech On or Off;
To route
the cursor to the beginning of the Braille display, press BACK
with ADVANCE.
To cycle
through the four Braille display modes, press PREVIOUS with
NEXT repeatedly. The Braille display modes are discussed in 3.11 Braille Display Modes. The Factory setting is
"Automatic." Leave it this way until you are acquainted with 3.11 Braille Display Modes. To change the text document
reading grade, press ADVANCE with NEXT repeatedly.
This only applies to a book in text format. The options are your preferred
Braille grade, 6 dot computer Braille or 8 dot computer Braille.
Alternatively,
for on the fly translation to your preferred reading grade, press P. For 6 dot computer Braille, press F.
For 8 dot computer Braille, press H.
When you
are reading, the cursor is hidden because it serves no useful purpose. However,
in the automatic Braille display mode, when you are reviewing character by
character, the cursor is shown to indicate the current character. For grade 1
or grade 2 Braille, the cursor is both dots 7 and 8 by default. For computer Braille
the cursor is dot 8 only. Remember that KeyBook
automatically displays the book in your preferred grade of Braille if the
original book is in text format. If you move the cursor onto a word, however,
that word is displayed in computer Braille. This gives you a one‑to‑one
correspondence between the Braille display and the word you are reviewing. Of
course, if the original book is in Braille there is no change as you move the
cursor.
When the
cursor is under a format indicator, the cursor spans all of the cells of the
indicator.
KeyBook's
reading commands are the same as KeyWord's, but KeyBook does not allow the book
to be edited. This feature prevents intentional or unintentional modification
to the text of the book being read.
The
following commands can be used to listen to the book that has been opened:
To go
forward reading, press SPACE with G.
Note that
while you are continuously reading, you can skip back or forward by sentences
or paragraphs without stopping the continuous reading function. This feature is
extremely useful if you want to quickly browse forward or back from your
current reading position.
To stop
reading, press BACKSPACE with ENTER together.
The
following 6 commands can be used both while KeyBook is continuously reading and
when you are reviewing:
To
move back a sentence, press
SPACE with dot 1;
To
hear the current sentence, press
SPACE with dots 1‑4;
To
move forward a sentence, press
SPACE with dot 4;
To
move back a paragraph, press
SPACE with dots 2‑3;
To
hear the current paragraph, press
SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6;
To
move forward a paragraph, press
SPACE with dots 5‑6.
The other
commands available when reviewing are:
To go
to the beginning of the book, press SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3;
To go
to the end of the book, press SPACE with dots 4‑5‑6;
To
find a text string in the book, press SPACE with F. This command is described in 3.16 Searching a Document.
To
move back a character, press
SPACE with dot 3;
To
hear the current character, press
SPACE with dots 3‑6. (Press this command once to hear the character spoken. Press it again,
and if the character is a letter, you will hear its "call sign" e.g.
Alpha for A, Bravo for B etc.)
To
move forward a character, press
SPACE with dot 6;
To
move back a word, press
SPACE with dot 2;
To
hear the current word, press
SPACE with dots 2‑5. The first time you press this
command, the word is spoken. The second time the word is spelled out;
To
move forward a word, press
SPACE with dot 5;
To
enter Announce Key Mode, press SPACE with W;
To
query the cursor position, press
SPACE with wh sign (dots 1‑5‑6);
To go
to any page, line, or column, press
SPACE with dots 1‑2‑6. This command is described in 3.18 Going to a Specified Position.
Besides
accepting the SPACE with dot combinations, KeyBook also accepts
the commands without the SPACE because the meaning is clear. This
is the same as KeyWord's "review only" mode that was discussed in 3.9.2 Selecting Review‑Only Mode.
This is
quite a long list to remember, but assistance is always available by pressing SPACE with H.
KeyBook
has a group of block commands. These commands are the same as KeyWord's block
commands. To go to the block commands menu, press SPACE with B. The block commands are described in 7.5 Block Commands.
To open
another book, press SPACE with dots 1‑2‑5‑6. KeyBook prompts: "Book name? Press ENTER for (book title)" where book title is the name of the
last book read. You can type the name of the book that you want to load or
review the list of books in the current folder by pressing SPACE or ADVANCE. You can then select the book you
want by pressing NEXT or ENTER. Note that this will close the
first book. You will need to reopen the previous book if you wish to return to
it.
If you
want to change the folder, press BACKSPACE at the "Book name?" prompt. KeySoft displays: "Folder name? (Last used folder)."
To step
through the list of folders, press SPACE or ADVANCE. This procedure was described in
more detail in 3.21 Opening ASCII and Plain Braille format
Documents. When you have selected a folder,
KeyWord asks for the book name as before.
To obtain
information on an open document, press SPACE with I. This opens up the Information menu, at which
point you can obtain information regarding File name and Word Count.
Books in
KeyWord's native format, as well as Microsoft Word, RTF and WordPerfect format,
precisely specify their contents and formatting. However, the contents and
formatting of books in ASCII text or plain Braille are not at all precisely
defined, so it is necessary to give you control over how KeyBook interprets
them. This is done through a list of options presented when you open such a
book. The initial settings for these options are either the ones you
established last time you opened the same book, or if you have never opened the
book before, settings that KeyBook assumes are most appropriate for the book.
Because of this, you usually won't need to make any changes. So that you can
tell whether you have opened this book before, the wording of the prompt used
changes from "Review the options?" to "Review previous options?" accordingly. To continue and open
the book without reviewing the options, just press ENTER. To review the options, press Y.
The
options given when opening a book are as follows: “Is this a Braille or Text document?.”
If the
file extension is .brl or .brf (plain Braille) then this option will have
already been set to Braille. If not, you must respond to the question before
moving on.
If the
book contains grade 1 or grade 2 Braille, then select "Braille" by
pressing B. Otherwise select "Text"
by pressing T. Follow either entry with ENTER. KeySoft then prompts: "Use Line or Paragraph format when opening the document? currently Paragraph."
When
opening a book, it is important that KeyBook knows the difference between the
ends of lines within a paragraph and the end of the paragraph itself. Without
this knowledge, paragraphs might be run together, or each line within a
paragraph might be treated as a separate paragraph. This would cause the speech
to pause in the wrong places, and make it impossible to skim by paragraph. Plain
text and plain Braille books use the same "control characters," for
example, "carriage returns" and "line feeds," to show where
lines within paragraphs end. This option allows you to control how KeyBook
interprets these control characters to distinguish between ends of lines and
ends of paragraphs.
The
option you choose here depends on the way the book you are opening is
formatted:
The
Paragraph format option assumes that a single carriage return or carriage
return/line feed pair that is followed by one or no spaces, denotes the end of
a line within a paragraph. This end of line marker is removed so that KeyBook
can reformat the paragraph within the margins that you have set. A sequence of
two or more carriage return and/or line feed characters or a single sequence
followed by an indent of two or more spaces is interpreted as the start of a
new paragraph. This option is the default setting when you first open a book,
and is the one that you will need for most prose books.
The Line
format option retains every carriage return and/or line feed sequence as a New
Line in KeyWord. Use this setting when opening books containing lists, or
poetry, or books where each paragraph is formatted as one long line.
To retain
"Paragraph" format when opening the book, just press ENTER. To select "Line" format, press L followed by ENTER. KeySoft then prompts:
"Use Line or Paragraph format when saving the document? Currently Paragraph."
Because
KeyBook does not allow the text within a book to be modified or added to, just
press ENTER to confirm the prompted option.
KeySoft then prompts: "Extended ASCII character option? Currently Retain."
The most
common writing system used by computers is ASCII. In this system, each letter,
number, and commonly used punctuation mark is represented by a number between 0
and 127 (Since the system was developed in the U.S., "commonly used"
means commonly used in the U.S.) There is no way to represent accented
characters and other special symbols, so the system has been extended with
numbers greater than 127. The Extended ASCII option controls how KeyBook
interprets these characters represented by numbers greater than 127, so‑called
"extended characters."
Sometimes
extended characters occur not because they are accented characters or special
symbols, but because the file has been transmitted through a communications
system that has added a "parity bit" which in effect has added an
offset to some of the characters. To adjust for this, use the "Convert to
standard ASCII" option, by pressing C, followed by ENTER.
Sometimes
the extended characters are used purely for visual effects such as boxes around
paragraphs, etc. In these cases the book will be easier to read if the extended
characters are removed altogether; use the "Ignore" option for this.
To retain
the extended characters when the book is opened, select "Retain" by
pressing R, or press ENTER as this is the default setting. If you select
Retain, another option is presented: KeySoft prompts: "Extended character set? Currently ANSI."
More than
one system has been used for extended characters; therefore you must tell
KeyWord which one to use for this book. The options are the "ANSI"
character set and the "MSDOS" character set. If you don't know which
one to use, try one and if the extended characters do not come out correctly,
try the other. For the "MSDOS" set, press M followed by ENTER. For the "ANSI" set, press A followed by ENTER.
KeySoft
will now prompt: "End of list."
When you
have made all your selections, press SPACE with E.
The Flash
Disk is shared by the other programs like KeyWord and KeyMail, and its contents
are preserved much like files on a conventional hard drive. There is an empty
folder called My Books provided on the Flash Disk. Many users who have a large
collection of books prefer to keep these on a storage card.
We have
previously discussed the selection of files and folders within KeyBook, but we
haven't described the selection of a drive. You can change the current drive at
any time that you are prompted for a folder name by pressing BACKSPACE. For example when you select KeyBook, it
prompts: "Read book in which folder? (Books)."
Press BACKSPACE. KeyBook then prompts: "Drive? Press ENTER for (last drive used)."
You can
select the last drive used by pressing NEXT or ENTER, or you can review the list of drives by
pressing SPACE repeatedly. You can select a drive
by pressing ENTER when the required drive is
displayed, or by typing a letter.
To select
the Flash Disk, press F.
To select
a storage card, press S for SD.
For an
external drive, step through the list of drives and select it from the list.
After you
have selected a drive, KeySoft prompts: "Read book in which folder? Press ENTER for none."
Select
the folder in the usual way. When you have selected a folder, KeyBook asks for
the book name as before.
Another
way of storing a large book library is to do so on a PC or laptop. There are
several methods available for transferring files to and from a PC, including
ActiveSync, using Network client, or a card reader attached to your PC. These
are all discussed in the Connectivity chapter of this user guide.
You could
transfer the book or books to the "My Books" folder on the Flash
Disk, create your own folder, or leave them stored on a memory card.
Exit
KeyBook in the usual way by pressing SPACE with E to take you back to the Main Menu. The book is
closed when you exit. To reopen the book from anywhere in the Main Menu, press B, then ENTER a number time depending on where you are in the system. You are
returned to the place where you were last reading.
Remember
that you can switch to another task while using KeyBook, as described in 1.19 Switching Between Tasks. For example, to make an entry in
the Planner, press BACKSPACE with ENTER with P. When you have completed your
entry, press BACKSPACE with ENTER with B to return to KeyBook. The
BrailleNote BT may beep once or twice, indicating it is busy preparing to
resume from where you were when you switched tasks.
Bookshare
is an online service that provides electronic format books that are both in and
out of copyright. It is possible to access Bookshare books via KeyWeb on your
BrailleNote BT, and read them using KeyBook. Bookshare's public domain content
is available to anyone, but copyrighted material is available only to members.
For
information about Bookshare, who is eligible to join and how to join, check out
www.bookshare.org, or for more specific URLs, please refer to Appendix B. Note
that a URL (Uniform Resource Locator) is another name for a website address.
HumanWare expects that persons utilizing the Bookshare service from their
BrailleNote BT will honor the criteria for usage outlined in their membership
agreement with Benetech.
In this
section on how to access Bookshare, it is assumed that you have already set up
your BrailleNote BT to use KeyWeb, and are a member of Bookshare and have
created access codes and passwords etc. Be assured that the Bookshare site is
very user friendly and set up to be easily accessible using a screen reader
like KeyWeb. For information on how to use KeyWeb, please refer to Chapter 12.
When
first downloaded from the site, Bookshare books are "packed" into a
special compressed format. This compressed file will have a .bks, .bks2 or .zip
file extension, regardless of what book format you have chosen.
Once the
book is downloaded, it is then possible to "unpack" the compressed
file into its normal format such as .brf or .txt. Once this is done, you can
then delete the compressed file (.bks, .bks2, or .zip). To make this clearer,
you could think of the compressed file as the bag that Bookshare put your book
into, and once you have taken it out of its bag, you can throw the bag away.
All
copyrighted Bookshare books are password protected to help prevent them from
being used or distributed in ways contrary to the terms and conditions of
membership. To unpack the book, you need to enter your password. Books that are
in the public domain, that is, out of copyright, do not require a password even
though the prompt will still come up. In these cases, you can still enter your
password, or just press ENTER to pass over the field.
Bookshare has books in several electronic formats, some titles in more than one format. The BrailleNote BT supports books in brf, txt, PDF and DAISY formats, but not HTML format. If you download a book in an unsupported format, KeyBook will allow you to unpack it, but before the process is complete, it will prompt to say that the format is not available. Books can only be "unpacked" in KeyBook.
The
Bookshare.org home page is already set up as a favorite in KeyWeb. However if
you intend to use Bookshare regularly, it might pay to set up the login page as
a favorite instead. For information on how to do this, refer to 12.8.1 Adding a Favorite page.
If you
are already a Bookshare member and have packed or unpacked books on your PC,
you can simply transfer them to your BrailleNote BT via ActiveSync, and open
them in KeyBook. The only difference to the procedures below is that when you
open KeyBook, you will have to select a folder or drive in the usual way, as it
will not default to the correct location.
Follow
the steps below to use KeyWeb to download a book from Bookshare.org.
1. Go to KeyWeb on your BrailleNote BT by either pressing I in the Main Menu, or BACKSPACE with ENTER with I anywhere. KeyWeb will prompt you for a URL.
2. Select Bookshare from your
favorites. The BrailleNote BT will connect to the web and you will be in the
Bookshare homepage.
3. Navigate to the Login page and log in using your member details. You will end up in a personalized welcome page.
4. Locate the book that you wish to
read, and download it in a supported format (all books are available as brf;
public domain ones are also in txt), and download it to the folder and drive of
your choice. For Download instructions refer to 12.12 How to Download a file.
Note: All
books downloaded from Bookshare will have a .bks2 or .zip extension depending
on user preferences. It is recommended that .bks2 extensions be selected to
allow the Book reader to recognize these files as books.
Follow
the steps below to unpack your book:
1. Go to KeyBook by pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER with B.
2. KeyBook will offer you the folder into which you downloaded the book as default. Press ENTER, and it will offer you the book as the default file. If you downloaded several books, it will offer the last one downloaded. To select the book, press ENTER again.
3. KeyBook prompts: "Folder for unpacked Bookshare book? Press ENTER for My Books." Either press ENTER straight away or select another
file location.
4. You will be prompted for your
Bookshare.org password. Type it in and press ENTER, or if no password is required, simply press ENTER.
5. The book will now unpack. There will be some progress beeps during this time. When complete, KeyBook prompts: "Delete the original packed Bookshare book?." Press Y.
Note 1: If the book format is not supported,
KeyBook will tell you at this point and return to the main menu.
Note 2: If there is not enough memory available to unpack the book, KeyBook will prompt – "Could not save unpacked Bookshare book. Disk is full."
6. KeyBook displays the name of the file, including the file extension, for example, "Harry_Po_b_fl.brf". To open it, press ENTER.
7. KeyBook will ask "Review the options?" as it does for every book in a non‑native
KeySoft format the first time. As the file will have been set up automatically
with the correct settings, press ENTER or N.
8. The book is now ready to read. If
you exit the book before completing it, KeyBook will bookmark it for you and
the next time you open it, it will open to the same place.
Note: If instead
of downloading books directly onto your BrailleNote BT from Bookshare, you have
transferred them from a PC or they are on a storage card, the same procedure
applies. The only difference is that at step 2, you would navigate to the
appropriate location, then continue as above.
KeyBook
can read DAISY books. DAISY is an acronym which stands for "Digital
Accessible Information SYstem".
DAISY
books have several advantages over other talking books:
1. Some books are narrated by an actual
human narrator, not just a computer generated voice.
2. Some books contain text which you
can read on the Braille display or search.
3. The structure allows quick and easy
navigation through the book. For example, moving by chapter or page. Each book
includes its own structure thereby making navigation the most suitable for that
particular book.
The
majority of DAISY books that are currently available, contain audio only.
However, there are a number of books, for example, books from bookshare, which
contain text only and others which contain both audio and text.
Throughout
the description of the DAISY Book Reader, it has been assumed that you are
familiar with the existing functionality of KeyBook.
KeySoft
has fully integrated support for the special AudioPlus formatted books provided
by RFB&D to its members in the United States. The BrailleNote now
automatically recognizes these books and prompts you to enter your personal
identification number to access the book.
Although
DAISY books are made up of many files, KeyBook allows you to search for books
by just selecting the book title.
As
typical for any other type of electronic book, begin the search for a DAISY
book by first selecting KeyBook from the Main Menu and then selecting the
folder containing the book you want to read.
The most
recently read book will be offered as the default. If you want to read a
different book, press SPACE at this point. A list of all the
books in the current folder will then be presented.
Once a
DAISY book has been loaded, you can listen to the book using the following commands:
To start
listening: press SPACE with G.
To stop
listening: press BACKSPACE with ENTER.
You can
change the volume by using the following commands:
To
increase the volume: press ENTER with dots 4‑6.
To
decrease the volume: press ENTER with dots 1‑3.
Note that
these volume control commands are relative to the main volume. This means that
to turn the volume up further or decrease it, you will need to increase or
decrease the main volume using the following commands:
To
increase the main volume: press ENTER with dot 4.
To
decrease the main volume: press ENTER with dot 1.
It is
also possible to alter the speed and tone of the narrator using the following
commands:
To speak
slower: press
ENTER with dot 3.
To speak
faster: press
ENTER with dot 6.
To increase
speech tone: press
ENTER with dot 5.
To
decrease speech tone: press ENTER with dot 2.
The
structure of a DAISY book is arranged into levels. There are a maximum of six
levels of navigation available, although many books contain only 2 or 3. Each
level provides an increasingly more precise way to navigate the content within
DAISY books. For example, level 1 may be a chapter heading; level 2 sub
headings within the chapter and level 3 paragraphs. Using these levels
effectively allows you to quickly gain access to any position within the book.
As well
as the above levels, other options may be available depending on the type of
book you are reading. For instance most books also allow you to move by phrase
or page and audio books also allow you to jump by 1 minute intervals.
These
levels and other navigation items such as page, phrase and time jump are
referred to as DAISY elements.
As was
mentioned in the overview, you can navigate through the book using the
available DAISY elements. You navigate the book by first selecting an element,
for example level 1, and then use the forward or back commands to skip to the
previous or next level 1 positions. If you wish to move by a different element
simply select it and then the forward and back commands will move by the new
element.
Use the
following commands to navigate using the DAISY elements:
To move
forward by the currently selected element: press SPACE with dots 4‑6.
To move
back by the currently selected element: press SPACE with dots 1‑3.
To select
the element to be used for navigation, press SPACE with T. Note that the first time you press this
command, the current element will be displayed. Press this command repeatedly
to cycle through all the available elements for that book until the element you
require is displayed.
KeyBook
can list all the headings in a book in the hierarchy dictated by the book level
structure. In most cases this is simply the Table of Contents.
To access
the List of Headings, press SPACE with V.
Generally,
all the headings at Level 1 will be displayed first. If any of these headings
contain sub headings, that is, Level 2 headings then the text "has subheadings", will be displayed. If you press ENTER at this point, you will be shown the list of
Level 2 headings. Once you have found the heading for the section you want to
read, press ENTER and you will be taken to that
position within the book. Note that the heading you are currently closest to
will be displayed when you first enter the List of Headings.
If the
book contains text, the standard KeyBook commands to browse by sentence,
paragraph, line, section, word and character can be used.
There are
two reading modes available for DAISY books, "sentence and paragraph"
and "line and section". The current mode determines the functionality
of the following commands:
To move
forward one sentence or line: press
SPACE with dot 4.
To move
back a sentence or line: press
SPACE with dot 1.
To read
the current sentence or line: press
SPACE with dots 1‑4.
To move
forward a paragraph or section: press
SPACE with dots 5‑6.
To move
back a paragraph or section: press
SPACE with dots 2‑3.
To read
the current paragraph or section: press
SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
To move
forward a word: press
SPACE with dot 5.
To move
back a word: press
SPACE with dot 2.
To read
the current word: press
SPACE with dots 2‑5.
To spell
the current word: press
SPACE with dots 2‑5 twice.
To move
forward a character: press
SPACE with dot 6.
To move
back a character: press
SPACE with dot 3.
To read
the current character: press
SPACE with dots 3‑6.
To change
the current reading mode: press
SPACE with M.
The
standard KeyBook commands to find text can be used in all books containing
text.
To find
text in the book, press SPACE with F. Press F (for forward) or B (for back), type the text you wish to find, and press ENTER.
To find
the next occurrence of the text: press
SPACE with N.
It is
also possible to jump directly to a particular page number. This is only
supported if the book is broken into a page structure and fortunately the
majority of DAISY books are structured this way.
To go to
a page, press SPACE with dots 1‑2‑6. Type P for page, then type the required page number and press ENTER.
As
previously mentioned, most currently available DAISY books are audio only. In
audio only books, you will hear a narrator (that is, the recorded voice
included with the book.) In books containing text only, you will hear the
KeySoft text to speech voice. With these types of books, the voice used is
predetermined and therefore not controllable.
However,
some books contain both audio and text and you can choose to listen to either
the recorded narrator or to the text to speech voice. You do this by turning
the narrator on or off (to toggle the narrator on or off, press ENTER with V.) If the narrator is on, the
recorded voice supplied with the book will do the reading. If you turn the narrator
off, the voice that reads the book will be determined by your current KeySoft
voice settings.
Note that
if you have KeySoft speech turned off, you will still be able to read the book
using the braille display.
You can
use the Braille Display to read DAISY books containing text. This allows you to
read a book, even if the audio (the recorded narrator or KeySoft text to speech
voice), is turned off.
All the
commands included in the previous DAISY Book Reader sections, will update the
Braille Display. For example, if you press SPACE with dot 4 to move to the next sentence, the
next sentence will be displayed with the Braille cursor placed at the beginning.
Similarly, if you press SPACE with dot 5 to move forward by one word, the
Braille cursor will be advanced to the next word.
When
reading DAISY books, the BACK and ADVANCE thumb keys will allow you to read back or
forward through the book. The PREVIOUS and NEXT thumb keys can be programmed to move by either:
1. DAISY element. For example, level or
phrase, or
2. Paragraph or section or sentence or
line. Note that this option is dependent upon the Reading Mode you have
selected, such as, sentence and paragraph or line and section.
To change the function of the PREVIOUS and NEXT thumb keys, go to the Options Menu and select Braille Options by pressing SPACE with O followed by B. Use SPACE to scroll down the list of Braille Options, until "Thumb key set" is displayed. Scroll through the options using SPACE with dots 3‑4, until the function you want is displayed and then press ENTER. To exit the Braille Options, press SPACE with E.
As with
all other types of books, it is possible to use Place Markers in your DAISY
book and these are retained when the book is closed.
Place
Markers, or bookmarks as are often called, are handy for a number of reasons
including keeping track of your progress as you read a book or the location of
information you wish to find again. For example, you are reading a book about
dog breeds and are particularly interested in any information on Poodles which
are mentioned in Chapters 6, 8 and 24 of your DAISY book. Since you are keen to
re‑read these chapters, you will add three Place markers to your book.
Place
Markers are identified by the letters, A to Z.
To define
a Place Marker, press BACKSPACE with D, from any position in the book and
enter a letter that you wish to associate with that Place Marker, in this case,
"P" for Poodles.
To jump
to any defined Place Marker, press SPACE with J, followed by the identification letter for
that Place Marker.
As well
as being able to add Place Markers to a DAISY book, you also have the option of
inserting Text Notes. These can be just a few words, a sentence or a whole
paragraph long. Text Notes allow you to add notes to a DAISY book as you are
reading it. This is a useful feature if you want to make comments at a
particular point in the book.
To insert
a text note, press BACKSPACE with N. Enter the identification number of
the text note that you want to insert and press ENTER. Try to use meaningful numbers if possible, for example text note 1
could refer to chapter 1, text note 12 could represent chapter 12 or chapter 1;
sub heading 2. You can use any number between 1 and 9999. You then need to type
the required text and press ENTER.
To view a
text note, press BACKSPACE with N. Enter the identification number
and press ENTER. The text note will be displayed
and you will be taken to the appropriate position within the book. You have the
option to edit the text if you wish and it will be saved when you press ENTER. If there is no note for the number you have
entered, a new one will be created for the current position within the book.
To delete
a text note, press BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6. Upon doing
so, the note will be deleted and you will return to your position in the book.
For DAISY books that contain text, the existing KeySoft clipboard functions are available for you to use when you need to copy information from a DAISY book. See Block Commands 7.5 Block Commands for further details.
It is
possible to obtain information regarding the book you are reading. There are
two types of information available; book information and current position
information.
Book
information provides details such as the book title, the number of pages in the
book, total time to read the book using the narrator etc. The actual details
available may vary from book to book.
To obtain
book information: press SPACE with I.
Current
position information provides details such as the current heading for the
section you are in and the page number. Again, the actual information available
may be different depending on the book you are reading.
To obtain
current position information: press SPACE with wh sign (dots 1‑5‑6).
Press SPACE with E to get back to the book.
DAISY
books are available from various sources. For example, they are distributed on
CD and are able to be downloaded from the Internet. DAISY books can be quite
large (some books are 600‑700MB), if you find that your books take up too
much space on of your BrailleNote BT, we recommend that you use large capacity
external media, such as an SD card to store your DAISY books.
In
managing DAISY books, it is very important that you are aware of the following:
1. A DAISY book is made up of several
files, none of which may include the actual title of the book.
2. All files in a single book must be
managed as a whole.
3. The File Manager allows you to open,
copy and delete DAISY books by their title.
4. You cannot rename or move DAISY
books.
5. To have the titles of the DAISY
books listed in a list of files, change the file view to 'List of All Books' or
'List of DAISY Books', by repeatedly pressing SPACE with X until the desired view is displayed.
6. Never rename or delete individual
files that make up a book or you risk rendering the book unreadable.
Note that
some of the files making up a DAISY book can share the same name as files in
other books. Therefore, if you decide to copy book files individually, you must
ensure that all the files making up a book are stored together in a folder
unique to that book. Copying files for a book into a folder that already
contains another book, will result in files being overwritten and both books
being rendered unreadable. Consequently, is best to use the File Manager to
manage your books since it will ensure the above rules are followed.
The
BrailleNote can play recorded books from Audible.com. Audible books are
recorded audio books. To obtain Audible books, you have to be a member of the
Audible service and use the Audible manager to authorize your BrailleNote to
play the protected Audible books. The BrailleNote supports Audible format 4 and
Audible Enhanced books. Visit www.audible.com to register or get information.
When you
install the Audible Manager, you will need to select BrailleNote as the device
to be used with the Audible manager.
When
running Audible Manager, make sure you are connected to the Internet. With
Audible Manager running you are now ready to activate your BrailleNote SD card
(or any other type of storage used with the BrailleNote such as Compact Flash,
USB drives).
For
complete description of activation procedure, please consult the FAQ on our
website.
You must use Audible Manager with the BrailleNote connected to transfer your Audible books to the BrailleNote. An easy way to do this is to arrow down to the book you want in the Audible Manager library list. Then press the applications key on your keyboard and from the resulting context menu, select the "Add to Humanware BN option". Audible Manager will place the Audible book .aa file in the Audible folder of the SD card. Audible books will not play on the BrailleNote if they are not located in the Audible folder. Use the DAISY commands to read Audible books.
NLS
(National Library Service) is an American library program that provides braille
and audio materials to eligible borrowers in the United States.
To play
NLS books on the Apex, you must first become a member of the NLS Bard services
and apply online to the NLS BARD web site to register the BrailleNote Apex.
Once you have registered your BrailleNote Apex, HumanWare will contact you by
email and send you the authorization for your BrailleNote. The NLS audio books
can be downloaded by NLS patrons from the NLS BARD site to the PC.
Once you
have downloaded your books from the NLS web site to your computer, you can
transfer them to your BrailleNote using a USB stick or SD card. NLS books
arrive compressed in the ZIP format. Use the BrailleNote to unzip the files to
a location of your choice, and then open them in KeyBook, just as you normally
would any Daisy book.
Alternatively, you can download your NLS books from
the NLS Bard web page found at http://nlsbard.loc.gov
directly to your BrailleNote Apex using its KeyWeb internet browser. Simply
navigate to the NLS library site, log in, select your book, and download it as
you would download any other file in KeySoft.
Nimas
books are also supported by the BrailleNote. Nimas Books are text only books.
The commands used for Reading and navigating NIMAS books are the same as for
DAISY books. You can also navigate Nimas books using standard text commands.
End of Book
Reader Chapter.
This
chapter discusses the functions listed on the Options Menu, which was
introduced briefly in 1.18 General Functions. A number of these functions are
discussed in other sections of this User Guide as appropriate, and the main
purpose of this chapter is to summarize all the Option Menu functions in one
place.
The
Options Menu comprises general functions that are available wherever you are in
KeySoft. You could be using the Word processor, sending or receiving e‑mail,
using the Calculator, or reading a menu. After using one of these functions,
you are returned to the place you were at previously.
To access
the Options Menu from anywhere in KeySoft, press SPACE with O, and KeySoft will prompt: "Options menu.” You can then review the items by
pressing SPACE or ADVANCE or BACK or BACKSPACE.
The
Options Menu comprises the following items:
Date;
Time Options;
Grade
of Braille for Keyboard Entry;
Braille
display options;
Keyboard
settings;
Review
voice;
Connectivity;
Visual
display;
Next
appointment;
Power
and battery status;
User
guide;
Insertion;
Spell.
Repeat and spell;
Hear
punctuation. Repeat with maximum punctuation;
Move
to another task;
Front
thumb keys, turn them off
Scroll
wheel on / off
Speech
settings.
The
speech settings include a list of items that tell you how to adjust the volume,
speed and pitch of KeySoft's speech, the 2 media player volume commands, memo
playback, pausing and resuming playback of media and muting/unmuting streamed
audio.
To select
an item, move through the menu until the required item is displayed, and then
press ENTER. Alternatively, from anywhere in
the Options menu, press the initial letter of your choice. This does not apply
to the speech settings, which are discussed in 1.18.5 Setting Volume and Pitch.
Selecting
a menu item takes at least two key combinations, for example, SPACE with O then D to hear the date. For really fast access, many items are also available
through quick commands. These are listed in 1.18 General Functions, as well as being mentioned in each
relevant section of this chapter.
Some
items on the Options Menu will always display the same style of information,
for example the time and date functions, while for other options the response
will vary depending on where you are in KeySoft when you select the item. An
example of this is "Calculator Braille Language," which is only displayed when the
Calculator is in use.
The
Connectivity option is discussed in detail in the Connectivity Chapter of this
user guide.
To
display the current day and date, press SPACE with O, then D.
After the
date is displayed, return to your original place in KeySoft by pressing ADVANCE.
The quick
key for this function is ENTER with D.
To
display the current time, press SPACE with O, then T.
There are
two time options available – the clock (current time), and the stopwatch.
To access
time, press ENTER with T.
To
display the current time, press ENTER with T. To access the current time through
the time menu, press SPACE with O, then T, then C for Clock.
After the
time is displayed you will be returned to your original place in KeySoft.
The
stopwatch operates in a similar way to a mechanical stopwatch. It keeps time
down to one hundredth of a second, can be stopped, started or returned to zero,
and the time display can be copied to the clipboard for pasting into documents
or e‑mails.
Once it
has started, the stopwatch will keep running until you press the stop command,
or reset the BrailleNote BT. Even if you switch to another task, or switch the
BrailleNote BT off, it will still keep running in the background, although it
won't display any times automatically. To check on the elapsing time, simply
access the stopwatch by pressing ENTER with W.
The
stopwatch will display the elapsing time.
To access
the stopwatch, press ENTER with W. Or you can press SPACE with O then T, then S for stopwatch. The first time you
use it, the stopwatch will be at zero.
There are
three settings – stop, start and zero. The zero setting resets the time to zero
– however we are not referring to it as reset, as "Reset" has a very
different meaning on the BrailleNote BT already!
To zero
the time, press BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
To start
or stop the stopwatch, press SPACE. This is a toggle command.
To stop
the stopwatch altogether, first stop it by pressing SPACE then zero it by pressing BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
To copy
the time to the clipboard, press BACKSPACE with K. You can do this at any time, even
when the stopwatch is running.
The time
shows on the Braille display as hours, minutes, and seconds in this format: h:mm:ss
The
Braille display updates every second while the stopwatch is running.
When the
stopwatch is stopped, the elapsed time displays to the hundredth second like
this: h:mm:ss.cc
To the
right of the time, the display also shows current status, for example: 1:23:45 Running
or 0:34:21.04 Stopped
When the
stopwatch is returned to zero while stopped, the BrailleNote BT displays "Zero" and the display shows "0:00:00.00"
The
running stopwatch will display the time every minute unless you turn speech
off. For example: "7 minutes" or "3 hours, 46 minutes"
Any other
time, you can hear the elapsing time to the second by pressing SPACE with R. For example: "1 hour, 5 minutes, 48 seconds"
To hear
the same time repeated, press L.
When the
stopwatch is stopped, you can hear the elapsed time by pressing SPACE with R.
If you
are typing a Braille document in Grade 2 and want to enter something that could
be ambiguous, such as a list of last names and initials, you can temporarily
select Grade 1 through this item on the Options Menu. After you have entered
the word or passage, you can switch back to Grade 2.
Another
choice when typing Grade 2 is to switch to computer Braille, perhaps for a file
name such as "program.exe" that contains a period, or for an e‑mail
address. If your preferred Braille grade is Grade 2, KeySoft will occasionally
override your preference and force Grade 1.
To find
out what Braille grade KeySoft is expecting, or to change the current grade of
Braille, press SPACE with O, then G.
This is
the grade of Braille used for prompts, help messages, books and documents. For
Grade 1, press A, for Grade 2, press B, for Nemeth code
in the word processor, press N, and for Computer Braille, press C or just press ENTER to return to your original place in KeySoft.
If you
want to change the grade of Braille and don’t care which grade KeySoft is
expecting, use the following quick keys: for Grade 1, BACKSPACE with A; for Grade 2, BACKSPACE with B; for Nemeth code in the word processor,
BACKSPACE
with N; and for computer Braille, BACKSPACE with J.
To review
the Braille Options list anywhere in KeySoft, press SPACE with O, then B. The list of options presented will depend where
you are in KeySoft when you select the Braille Options. Experiment at the Main
Menu, within a document, and in the Calculator to see how the list of items
changes. The complete Braille Options list comprises the following items:
Braille
On?
Braille
Display Mode;
Show
new lines in Reading Mode as;
Function
of Previous and Next thumb keys;
Cursor
shape for standard Braille;
Preferred
reading grade for each language;
Text
document reading grade;
Braille
code for each language;
Calculator Braille code;
Computer Braille code;
Cursor
shape for computer Braille;
Display
computer Braille using 6 or 8 dots;
Message
display time;
thumb
key set.
After
each item, KeySoft will announce or display the current setting for that item.
You can
move forward or back through the items in the usual way. To change any option,
enter a new setting and press ENTER.
To turn the Braille display on press Y. To turn it off, press N. You can also turn the Braille display on or off by pressing the NEXT and SPACE keys together. Note that if speech is turned off when the Braille display is off, the Braille display is forced on. This avoids having both Braille and speech off simultaneously.
This
option is available within a document, an e‑mail, or within the Planner
and allows you to choose the amount of formatting information that is presented
on the Braille Display and whether the cursor is displayed. There are four
modes; Automatic, Reading, Edit and Layout. You may also cycle through the four
modes by pressing PREVIOUS with NEXT.
The
Braille Display Modes are discussed more fully in 3.11 Braille Display Modes but briefly:
Automatic
mode: press A. The cursor is turned on when you
are editing and off when you are reading.
Reading
mode: press R. Used for reading. The cursor is
never displayed. Only formatting necessary for reading is displayed.
Edit
mode: press E. The cursor is always on and all
formatting information is displayed.
Layout
mode: press L. The document is laid out on the
Braille display in the same way as it will appear on paper when it is embossed.
This
option is available within a document, an e‑mail, or within the Planner.
It determines how the start of a new line or paragraph is shown on the Braille
display.
For
linear Braille format where the start of a new line is indicated by the
Computer Braille "dollar sign" then p, (dots 1‑2‑4‑6 p), press L.
For the
new line or paragraph to start at the beginning of the display after a one cell
indent, press A.
For the
beginning of the display after a two cell indent, press B.
For the
beginning of the display with no indent, press N.
For two
spaces anywhere they happen to fall on the display, press dots 2‑3.
For three
spaces anywhere they happen to fall on the display, press dots 2‑5.
For just
one space anywhere it happens to fall on the display, press dot 2.
This
option is available within a document, an e‑mail, or within the Planner.
The function of the PREVIOUS and NEXT thumb keys can be defined to suit your personal reading preference.
To have
them move Up and Down, press U.
To have
them move by Sentence or Line, press S. Whether they move by sentence or line is determined by the reading
mode, as set via SPACE with M.
To have
them move by Paragraph or Section, press P. Whether they move by paragraph or section is determined by the cursor
movement mode, as set via SPACE with M. Cursor movement Mode is discussed
more fully in 7.6 Cursor Movement Modes.
To save
the settings, return to the Main Menu.
This
setting determines which dots are used to indicate the cursor is in a
particular cell. The default setting for grade 1 and 2 Braille is dots 7 and 8, but you may also choose to have dot 7 only, dot 8 only, dots 1‑2‑3‑4‑5‑6, or all 8 dots of the cell.
To select
the cursor for both dots 7 and 8, press B. For dot 7 only, press G. For dot 8 only, press H. For a 6 dot cell, press F. For a whole 8 dot cell, press W.
This is
the grade used for prompts, help messages, documents, e‑mail, etc. The
factory default is Grade 2.
You set
this grade for each language that you use.
If you
prefer to read in Grade 1, press A. If you prefer to read in Grade 2,
press B. If you prefer Computer Braille,
press C.
This
option is available within a document, an e‑mail, or within the Planner.
It allows you to select how text documents are displayed on the Braille
display. The default setting is the "Preferred reading grade," which
is generally Grade 2. Text documents include BrailleNote BT KeyWord text
documents, Microsoft Word, ASCII text and other forms of text documents that
you may choose to read or edit.
For on
the fly translation to your preferred reading grade, press P. For 6 dot computer Braille, press F. For 8 dot computer Braille, press H. To change the text document reading grade
using the thumb keys, press ADVANCE with NEXT repeatedly.
BrailleNote BT provides a choice of Grade 1/Grade 2 English Braille codes. They are:
§ USA,
§ UK
§ Australian
§ UK 2004
§ UEB
For USA
Braille, press S. For UK Braille, press K. For Australian Braille, press A. For UEB Braille, press E. For UK 2004 Braille, press 4.
For the
French language, the options are:
§ French
§ Canadian
This
setting determines the way grade 1 and grade 2 Braille are represented inside
the BrailleNote BT and when it is embossed. It also controls how Braille is
translated to text, and vice versa. Usually this setting will have already been
set for you before you receive your BrailleNote BT.
This
option is only available within the Calculator. Calculations are displayed on
the Braille display in one of the following notations: Nemeth Braille Code for
Mathematics, UK Braille Mathematics, UEB, French or German.
For
Nemeth code, USA, press N. For UK Mathematics Notation, press
U.
The
BrailleNote BT is supplied with two English Computer Braille tables, USA and
UK. However, the user may create or install additional Computer Braille tables.
For USA
computer Braille, press S. For UK computer Braille, press K. To cycle through all the available Computer
Braille tables, press SPACE with dots 3‑4.
This
setting determines which dots are used to indicate the cursor when Computer
Braille is being displayed. The setting is independent from the cursor shape
used to display standard Braille. The default setting is dot 8, but you may also choose to have dot 7 only, dots 7 and 8 only, dots 1‑2‑3‑4‑5‑6, or all 8 dots of the cell.
To select
the cursor for both dots 7 and 8, press B. For dot 7 only, press G. For dot 8 only, press H. For a 6 dot cell, press F. For a whole 8 dot cell, press W.
The
default setting is 6 dot Computer Braille, but 8 dot Computer Braille is
available for those involved with software programming and other tasks
requiring an extended range of characters.
To
display Computer Braille in 6 dot format, press F. For 8 dot format, press H.
This sets the time in seconds that messages, such as error messages, will remain on the Braille display before the next prompt is displayed. By setting this to 0, the message will remain until you press a thumb key. The time may be set between 0 and 30 seconds.
The thumb
key set can be set up for left‑handed or right‑handed operation.
You can also create a custom key set to suit your personal preference. The
factory setting is right‑handed.
To select
the standard right‑handed set, press R. The function of the thumb keys from left to right is: PREVIOUS, BACK, ADVANCE, and NEXT.
To select
the left‑handed set, press L. The function of the thumb keys
from left to right is: NEXT, ADVANCE, BACK, and PREVIOUS.
For a
custom set, press C, then ENTER. You must then define the function of each of the thumb keys, starting
with the left thumb key. For each thumb key in turn, select its function and
press ENTER.
For a
thumb key to perform the PREVIOUS function, press P. For a thumb key to perform the BACK function, press B. For a thumb key to perform ADVANCE, press A. For a thumb key to perform NEXT, press N. Alternatively, as the thumb key is
announced, press SPACE with dots 3‑4 to review the options.
The thumb
keys in the custom set are set independently of each other, so there is nothing
to stop you from setting all thumb keys to the same function. A good way to
check the function of your custom set is to enter the Keyboard Learn mode from
the Main Menu. You can then press each thumb key to determine its assigned
function.
To review
the Keyboard settings list anywhere in KeySoft, press SPACE with O for the Options Menu, then K. Press SPACE with E to leave the Keyboard settings list and return
to your original place in KeySoft.
The quick
key for this function is BACKSPACE with ENTER with K.
A
detailed explanation of each Keyboard Setting option follows:
The
setting determines the grade of Braille in which you prefer to type. To select
Grade 1 Braille, press A; Grade 2 Braille, press B; and to input Computer Braille, press C or J. To leave this option unchanged, just press ENTER. The factory setting is Grade 2.
If you
have a literary Braille selected and the characters that you want are not
supported, then you will be advised that you need to use Computer Braille.
KeySoft will automatically switch to Computer Braille for you. Computer Braille
is not available if you are using UEB.
The first
of these settings determines how much KeySoft speaks as you type. KeySoft
prompts: "Keyboard voice? Currently Words."
The options
are as follows:
To turn
off speech altogether, press F followed by ENTER;
To spell
words as they are typed, press S followed by ENTER;
To speak
whole words, press W followed by ENTER;
To both
spell and speak words, press B followed by ENTER;
To cycle
through all the items above, press SPACE with dots 3‑4.
Or just
press ENTER to leave the selection unchanged.
The
suggested setting is "Words." If you are learning to type, you may
prefer the "Spell" option or the "Both" option. If you can
type quickly, you might select the "Words" option, or turn off speech
altogether.
You can
press SPACE with H for a reminder of these options.
To be
advised when a non‑preferred code is required, press Y. For no warning, press N. To leave this option unchanged, just press ENTER. The factory setting is Yes.
Using
this setting will cause KeySoft to advise when a Braille code that is different
from the preferred code is required. Your preferred code is the one set as the
default.
When you
are typing in Computer Braille, this setting determines how you will input dots
7 and 8 if they are required. If you select 6 dot Braille, you must press SPACE with U before typing any character that
requires a dot 7. For example, in US Computer Braille, “at” sign used in e‑mail
addresses is written with dots 4‑7. If you have chosen 6 dot entry,
press SPACE with U, then dot 4, to write this symbol.
If you
choose 8 dot Computer Braille, the BACKSPACE key becomes dot 7, and ENTER becomes dot 8. So in the “at” sign example, you
would press BACKSPACE with dot 4 to write the symbol. To have the BACKSPACE and ENTER keys perform their usual functions, simply press SPACE at the same time. So to perform an ENTER, press ENTER with SPACE. The BACKSPACE and ENTER keys only act in this way when you are working in Computer Braille.
To select
6 dot Braille, press F. For 8 dot, press H.
To
examine the Review Voice settings anywhere in KeySoft, press SPACE with O for the Options Menu, then R. Press SPACE with E to leave the Review Voice settings and return
to your original place in KeySoft.
The quick
key for this function is BACKSPACE with ENTER with R.
The
Review Voice settings are:
Whether
the speech is On, On Request, or Off;
The
volume of speech;
The level
of punctuation spoken by the Review Voice;
The
manner in which numbers are displayed;
Whether
the Speech Synthesizer is using KeyNote Gold or Eloquence;
The
speech voice and hyperlink speech voice;
The
volume of the delete and error alert tones;
The
volume of the progress tones.
This
option displays the current speech status; On at all times, On request, or Off.
Press ENTER to accept the prompted option, or
press the appropriate letter followed by ENTER to select your chosen option.
To have
speech on at all times, press N. To have speech only when
requested, press R. To turn all speech and sound off,
with the exception of alarms, press F. These commands have the same effect as cycling through the speech
options by pressing PREVIOUS with SPACE, as discussed in 1.18.2 Turning Speech On or Off.
If you
select Speech on Request, KeySoft only speaks when you use a command that is a
specific speech command. For example, in the word processor, when you move forward
word by word using SPACE with dot 5, nothing is spoken. However, if you
use the dedicated "Speak Word under Cursor" command, SPACE with dots 2‑5, the word under the cursor is
spoken. You can use:
SPACE with G to read continuously;
SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6 to read the current paragraph;
SPACE with dots 2‑5 to read the current word;
SPACE with dots 3‑6 to hear the current character;
SPACE with R to hear a prompt.
Note that
if speech is turned off when the Braille display is off, the Braille display is
forced on. This avoids having both Braille and speech off simultaneously.
For
details on how to change the settings at start up, refer to 1.18.3 Start‑up Braille and Speech Mode.
You can
easily specify whether you want speech only, Braille only or both, when you switch
on the BrailleNote BT. As you turn on the switch, simply hold down one of the
following key combinations:
Speech
only: dot 2;
Braille
only: dot 3;
Speech
and Braille: both
dots 2 and 3.
To select
a different level, press a number between 1 and 5. The Factory setting is 2. To
leave this option unchanged, just press ENTER.
The way
the 5 levels treat punctuation and format indicators is described below.
1. All punctuation is ignored except
for '\'.
2. This is the factory setting. The
following punctuation is pronounced: & / > < * + ^ [ ] | \ = % $ #
3. All punctuation is pronounced except
for: , . ? ! ; : space, and single quotes within words.
4. All punctuation is pronounced except
for single spaces between words and single quotes within words. All special
indicators are announced. Spaces nested between the end of a word and a period,
comma, semicolon or colon are also announced. Capital letters are indicated by
raising the pitch. If the first letter of a word, or all of the word is in
capitals, the pitch is raised for the whole word. If a word contains an unusual
mixture of capital and non‑capital letters, then the pitch is raised even
higher as an alert.
5. All text is spelled. This level is
not recommended for reviewing text, but it can be of use for other
applications. When computer Braille or text is being read, capital letters are
spoken by announcing "CAP" before the letter. If the whole word is in capital letters, the
spelling of the word is prefixed with the announcement "CAP ALL".
For
digits, press D. For words, press W. To leave this option unchanged, just press ENTER.
The
Factory setting is words. For word format, the number 2010 is spoken as “twenty ten,” since it is assumed to be a date.
The sequence $20.15 is spoken as "twenty dollars and 15 cents.”
If you
select the digits option, the number 2010 is spoken digit by digit. The choice
is a matter of personal preference and may depend upon the document with which
you are working.
You have
the option of using either KeyNote Gold or Eloquence for the Speech
Synthesizer.
Note:
KeyNote Gold supports all languages. Eloquence can only speak English and
French. If you have Eloquence selected and you select a language other than
English or French, the pronunciation is incorrect.
To select
Eloquence or KeyNote, press SPACE with O for the Options Menu, then R. Following the Speech Synthesizer prompt, E to select Eloquence or K for KeyNote Gold.
Eloquence
offers a choice of five voices (Adult Male, Adult Female, Elderly Male, Elderly
Female and Child). Press M for Adult Male, E for Elderly Male, F for Adult Female, L for Elderly Female, and C for Child. Eloquence speech is the modern
version of KeyNote Gold. It has clear and smooth diction which makes it
somewhat easier to understand than KeyNote Gold speech.
When
Eloquence is active, you may also choose to have hyperlinks voiced in a different
Eloquence voice when using KeyWeb.
The delete tone sounds when characters are deleted with either the BACKSPACE or any delete option. The delete tone does not sound when the speech is turned off. To change the volume of the tone, press a number between 0 and 6. 0 disables the tone; 6 is loudest. To leave the setting unchanged, just press ENTER. The factory setting is 4.
The error tone sounds when you press an invalid key combination, or make some other error. The delete tone does not sound when the speech is turned off. To change the volume of the tone, press a number between 0 and 6. 0 disables the tone; 6 is loudest. To leave the setting unchanged, just press ENTER. The factory setting is 4.
Progress tones are there to let you know a page is loading or a download is progressing normally. To change the volume of the tone, type a number between 0 and 6. 0 disables the tone, 6 is loudest. To leave the setting unchanged, just press ENTER. The factory setting is 4.
Using and
connecting a visual display is described in 2.7 Visual Display. To select visual display, press SPACE with O, then V.
To find
your next appointment, press SPACE with O, then N for the "Next appointment" option.
The
appointment details are displayed. When you are finished, press ADVANCE to return to the point at which you selected
the Options menu. See also 9.6.2 Checking Your Next Appointment.
The quick
key for this function is ENTER with N.
To
determine the power and battery status, press SPACE with O, then P. See also 2.1.2 Checking Power Status.
To access
the User Guide, press SPACE with O, then U.
Accessing
the User Guide is fully described in
1.26 User Guide.
The
"Insertion" item only appears on the Options menu when you are in a
KeySoft function where insertion is possible. For example, if you are in the
Main Menu, it will not appear, but it will when in a document in KeyWord.
This item
takes you to a menu with several options:
Date,
Time,
Calculator
Result,
Unicode
Character,
The quick
command to go directly to the Insertion Menu is ENTER with I.
To insert
the time, press ENTER with I then T.
To insert
the date, press ENTER with I then D.
After
choosing to insert the date, you are asked if you want to insert the current
date or the printing date. To insert today's date, press T. To insert the printing date, press P, and an "Insert date" marker is
placed in the document. When the document is printed, the date on the day of
printing is automatically inserted.
To insert
the calculator result, press ENTER with I then C.
You are
asked if you want to insert the calculator result or the whole calculation. To
insert the result, press R. To insert the whole calculation,
press C. For example, if the calculation
was 3+4=7, pressing R would enter “7” in the document.
Pressing C would enter “3+4=7” into the document.
To insert
a Unicode character, press ENTER with I then U.
After
choosing to insert a Unicode character, KeySoft will prompt for the character.
Let’s assume you want to enter an "e acute." Type "e acute"
at the prompt for the Unicode character. KeySoft will respond with the
character "cap e acute," so press SPACE to find the next "e acute" character. When the desired
character is displayed, press ENTER to insert the character.
The Quick
Key for inserting a Unicode character is BACKSPACE with dots 3‑5.
For more
information, see also 7.20 Extended Characters.
To repeat
a prompt with the important parts spelled out, press SPACE with O, then S for "Spell."
You are
returned to your original place in KeySoft. This is like repeating an
announcement, but with more detail.
The quick
key for this function is ENTER with S.
This
function works on prompts, and file and folder names.
To reveal
the most detail, you can repeat the last prompt with full punctuation and
spaces. To do this, press SPACE with O, then H for "Hear punctuation."
You are
returned to your original place in KeySoft. See also 1.18.6 Repeating an Announcement.
The quick
key for this function is ENTER with H.
KeySoft
allows you to move directly from one KeySoft task to another without returning
to the Main Menu. You can switch between the Word processor, Scientific Calculator,
Planner, Address List, E‑Mail, etc. For example, if you are writing a
document and you need an address, you can switch directly to the Address List,
look up the address, and then return to the Word processor. You are placed back
at the same point in your document.
The
following hot keys are available for switching tasks:
To select
the Word processor press BACKSPACE with ENTER with W;
To select
the Scientific Calculator press BACKSPACE with ENTER with S;
To select
the Planner press BACKSPACE with ENTER with P;
To select
the Address List press BACKSPACE with ENTER with A;
To select
the E‑mail system press BACKSPACE with ENTER with E;
To select
the Book Reader press BACKSPACE with ENTER with B;
To select
the Internet browser, press BACKSPACE with ENTER with I;
To select
the Chat (instant messaging), press BACKSPACE with ENTER with C;
To select
the Media Center, press BACKSPACE with ENTER with M;
To select
the FM Radio, press BACKSPACE with ENTER with F;
To select
the Database Manager, press BACKSPACE with ENTER with D;
To select
the Games, press BACKSPACE with ENTER with G.
There is also a Task menu available. To access this, either:
1. Press SPACE with O for the Options menu then M for Move to another task, or
2. Press SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5.
KeySoft displays: "Task menu."
You can
make a selection by either:
1. Review the menu items using SPACE or ADVANCE and select one by pressing NEXT or ENTER. or,
2. Press the initial letter of the
task; for example, W for Word Processor.
Remember
that, if necessary, you can always get back to the Main Menu by pressing SPACE with dots 1 to 6.
If you
are traveling in a car or public transport, you may wish to turn off the front
thumb keys to prevent their accidental activation.
press SPACE with O, then F.
This is
an On/Off toggle command; in other words it will alternate between on and off
each time you press SPACE with O, then F. When the thumb keys are off, a beep will sound when any thumb key is
pressed, providing the speech is on.
To
activate or deactivate the Scroll wheel:
Press SPACE with O, then W.
This is
an On/Off toggle command; in other words it will alternate between on and off
each time you press SPACE with O, then W.
The
Options Menu reminds you how to change the speech volume, rate and pitch. The
following commands can be used from anywhere in KeySoft:
To speak
louder, press ENTER with dot 4;
To speak
softer, press ENTER with dot 1;
To speak
faster, press ENTER with dot 6;
To speak
slower, press ENTER with dot 3;
To
increase speech pitch, press ENTER with dot 5;
To decrease
speech pitch, press ENTER with dot 2.
There are
32 volumes, 16 speeds and 16 pitches, and they change one step at each key
press.
This is
the end of the Options Menu.
When you
are using UEB, you can use BACKSPACE with dots 3‑5 to access the UEB Symbols Table.
The UEB
Symbols Table list is then displayed. This is a list of symbol categories, for
example "Punctuation Symbols". To browse the list, press SPACE repeatedly, or BACKSPACE to go back, or type the initial letter of a table
name. When you locate the table you wish to browse, select it by pressing ENTER. The selected list of symbols and their Braille
Codes is displayed. Browse the list to find the character you want and either
memorise the Braille Codes, exit the table, and then type them, or to have the
codes automatically inserted, press ENTER.
You can
also Search for a UEB symbol by pressing SPACE with F. If you are in the Table List, all tables will
be searched. If you are in a table, only that table will be searched. At the "Find" prompt, type all or part of the
symbol, and press ENTER. A list of matching symbols is
displayed.
For
example, typing "colon" will find both "colon" and
"semicolon". You can browse the search results list to find the
symbol that you want to use. You can now either memorize the Braille Codes,
exit the table, and then type them, or to have the codes automatically inserted
by pressing Enter.
When you
type in response to a KeySoft prompt, you can edit your input with KeyWord
commands. You might read on the Braille display what you have typed before you
press ENTER. If you find a mistake, you can use
the touch cursor to position the cursor on the character where you want to
start editing. You can edit your input with these standard commands:
Delete
character before cursor: BACKSPACE;
Delete
character at cursor: BACKSPACE with dots 3‑6;
Delete
word at cursor: BACKSPACE with dots 2‑5;
Delete
word before cursor: BACKSPACE with dot 2;
Delete
to end of entry: BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
You can
also use these commands to edit the last‑used entry that KeySoft offers
at various points. For example, you may have two documents named: "Expenses Quarter 1," and "Expenses Quarter 2." Let's assume you had previously
been working with "Expenses Quarter 1." When you go to open the second
document, KeySoft prompts: "Document to open? Expenses Quarter 1."
Instead
of typing a whole new name, you could use the review and edit commands to
change the "1" into "2". Find "1," press the
associated touch cursor button, then press BACKSPACE with dots 3‑6 to delete the character at the
cursor and press 2. You are done entering the document
name. Press ENTER, and the document "Expenses Quarter 2" will be opened.
Note that
an existing string can be edited only if your first action is a reading or
editing command. If you press even one letter, the whole existing string is
replaced by your new entry.
When
using speech, you can make use of the SPACE with dots 2‑5 and SPACE with dots 1‑4 commands to review the prompt.
End of
General Functions Chapter.
If an
embosser or printer is connected to your BrailleNote Apex BT, you can emboss or
print documents and e‑mail, as well as parts of the planner and address
list.
The
embossing option can be used for either Braille or text documents, the latter
being automatically translated before embossing. Similarly, the print option
can be used for text or Braille documents.
You can
also create an image of your printing document in a JPEG format. These files
can then be emailed or transferred to a pc and printed from there. This is
similar to the Print‑to‑PDF functionality widely available on
desktop computers. The JPEG files are stored in the flash disk of your device.
Once the files are printed, these can then be transferred to a PC or emailed to
the recipient for further attention.
Set‑up
options are provided for both embossers and printers, and the use of test
documents is described. The selection and operation of embossers and printers
is outside the scope of this user guide.
You can
emboss or print from the BrailleNote BT's USB ports, or the Bluetooth
transceiver. Selecting the appropriate connection for your embosser or printer
hardware is described later, in
6.7.6 Embosser Port.
USB is
now the universal standard for connecting to printers. Simply plug the USB
printer into one of your BrailleNote BT's USB host ports, and select USB as
your printer port, as explained in
6.7.6 Embosser Port.
Although
the BrailleNote BT does not have a parallel port, it is still possible to use a
printer or embosser that only has a parallel connector. Using an Inside Out
Networks ‑ Edgeport /421 multi‑interface converter, you can print
to a parallel printer or embosser by plugging in the USB cable of the converter
to the BrailleNote BT, and the parallel cable of the printer into the converter
hub. The Inside Out Networks ‑ Edgeport /421 multi‑interface
converter requires a special driver to work on the BrailleNote BT, but as this
is already in the software, you will not need to reload it.
If using
this converter with a parallel port printer or embosser, you must select USB as
your printer port.
To use a
Bluetooth printer with your BrailleNote BT, first you will need to get the
Bluetooth connection working.
1. Go to the Options Menu by pressing SPACE with O, then C for the Connectivity Menu.
2. Select Bluetooth and press ENTER. KeySoft prompts: "Bluetooth on? Currently Yes/No." Press Y.
3. KeySoft prompts: "Search for devices?" Press Y. KeySoft displays, "Searching for Bluetooth devices, please wait..." This may take a few seconds during
which you will hear progress beeps.
When
the search is complete, KeySoft will display: "List of Bluetooth devices."
4. Select the printer from the list.
5. Now you have an active Bluetooth
pairing set up, go to the Embossing Set‑up list and select Bluetooth as
your printing port, as discussed in 6.7 The Embosser Set‑up List.
The
procedures for printing and embossing are exactly the same, except for the
prompts that refer to either "print" or "emboss." To avoid repetition, we only
discuss embossing.
To emboss
a document, start at the KeyWord Menu and select "Emboss a Document." KeySoft prompts: "Emboss or Set up embosser?"
The
Emboss option leads to a series of prompts to select and emboss a document. The
Set Up option allows the BrailleNote BT to be matched to the embosser. Details
on the set up process are in 6.7 The Embosser Set‑up List.
Assuming
that the embosser has already been set up, you can proceed to emboss a
document. Press E for Emboss, and KeySoft prompts: "Folder name?"
If the
document you want is not on the current drive, select a new drive, then choose
the folder and file names. KeySoft prompts: "Embosser ready?
When you
reach the "Embosser Ready?" prompt for the first time in a session, it is a
good idea to turn the embosser off, then on again. This ensures that its memory
is cleared, and avoids spurious characters at the top of the page.
To emboss
just one copy of the whole document, press Y for Yes. Embossing starts and you are returned to the KeyWord menu.
If an
embosser connected using the USB serial adapter cable produces random
characters or nothing at all, the communications parameters are wrongly set.
These can be changed from the Embosser Set Up List. This list is explained in 6.7 The Embosser Set‑up List.
If you
only want to emboss certain pages, or you want several copies, then reply to
the "Embosser Ready?" prompt by pressing N for No. There follows a list of 3 settings that
you may want to change:
1. KeySoft prompts: "Start page number?" Enter the page number to start
embossing from and press ENTER. The suggested setting is the first
page. To check the page number range for the document, press SPACE with H.
2. After this setting, KeySoft prompts: "Finish page number?" Enter the page number to finish embossing at and press ENTER. The suggested setting is the last page.
3. KeySoft prompts: “Number of copies? Press Enter for one" The suggested setting is one. Type
the number of copies you require and press ENTER.
KeySoft
prompts: "Embosser Ready?" Press Y and the embosser should start immediately.
KeySoft
provides a means of pausing or abandoning output from BrailleNote BT to an
embosser. However many modern embossers store large amounts of data in their
memory. This allows your BrailleNote BT to transfer the data almost
instantaneously. Your chances of stopping the transfer of a large amount of
information once started are slight. You are left with the only option of
turning off the power to the embosser to flush the unwanted data. However if
your embosser does not have a large memory, the ability to pause or abandon
embossing is still useful. To pause or abandon embossing once started, you must
select the "Emboss a Document" option from the KeyWord menu again.
KeySoft now prompts: "Embossing (name)," where name is the name of the document being
embossed. To emboss another document, press ENTER. To pause embossing, press SPACE. KeySoft displays: "Embossing of (name) Paused."
To
restart embossing, press SPACE again.
To abandon embossing the current document, press BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4 followed by SPACE with E to exit. You are returned to the KeyWord Menu.
You may
wish to emboss or print all documents with a certain group of characters in
their names. To accomplish this, wild card characters can be included in a
document name. For details of wild card use, refer to 15.15 Groups of Files and Wild Cards.
As an
example, entering the document name "NOTES," followed by the single character wild card,
which is SPACE with dots 2‑3‑6, would cause all these documents to
be selected:
NOTES1;
NOTES2;
NOTES3.
You can
also emboss or print all the documents in one folder. To do this, proceed as
for a single document, but at the document name prompt, press SPACE with dots 3‑5, which is the multi‑character
wild card. Remember that HELP provides a convenient list of the
options available.
When you
first connect an embosser or printer to the BrailleNote BT, you should review
the embosser/printer set‑up list and change any settings as necessary.
You need to know about the paper size, the type of feed, and so on. If you plan
to use an embosser with a serial interface, you will also need to know its
serial communications parameters before you can complete the setup.
Once you
have set up KeySoft for the embosser the first time, it is strongly recommended
that you emboss a test document as described in 6.9 Testing the Embosser.
To check
or change the Embosser Set‑up List, start at the "Emboss or Set‑Up?" prompt and press S for Set up. KeySoft prompts: "Embosser Set‑Up List."
To move
along the list without changing values, press SPACE or ADVANCE repeatedly. To move back along the
list without changing values, press BACK or BACKSPACE repeatedly. You can change settings
by entering an appropriate new setting and pressing ENTER. The items in the Embosser Set‑up List
are as follows:
These two prompts are for the length and the width of the paper used in
the embosser, measured in embossed lines and cells. Typical values are 25 and
40, but if you are not absolutely sure, use the test document described in 6.9 Testing the Embosser to determine what these settings
should be.
The
factory setting for this item is Yes.
For
automatic sheet feeding or continuous stationery, leave this item at the
factory setting of No. If you have to feed individual sheets into the embosser,
you should set it to Yes. When you are actually using the embosser, load a new
sheet when prompted to do so, and press ENTER to continue.
If your embosser embosses both sides of the paper, you should set this item to "Yes". Otherwise, leave it set to the factory setting of "No." If you want to emboss a particular document single‑sided, the appropriate setting should be changed in the Document Layout list, not here. This is described in 7.3.2 Layout of a Braille Document.
This
defines the position of the left margin of the embossing, in cells from the
left edge of the paper. It is like an overall left margin which affects all
embossing. The factory setting is zero. Values from 0 to 50 are allowable.
Following the prompt: "Embosser braille table?", press SPACE with dots 3‑4 to step through the available tables, for example, KeySoft 6‑dot English Embosser. Press ENTER to make your selection.
You can
select any of the following ports on the back of your BrailleNote BT as the
embosser port:
USB port;
press U then ENTER. KeyWord displays: "USB."
Bluetooth
port, press B then ENTER. KeyWord displays: "Bluetooth." Note: You can only select Bluetooth as a port
when there is an active Bluetooth pairing as discussed in
6.3 Printing with Bluetooth.
File,
press F then ENTER. KeyWord displays: "File."
If you
choose the USB port, this is the end of the Embosser Set‑up List. Exit
the list by pressing SPACE with E, confirm any changes you have made,
and you are placed back at the "Emboss or Set‑Up?" prompt. If you have made any changes, you are
strongly advised to use the test document to check the embosser set‑up.
If you
plan to use an embosser connected to BrailleNote BT using the USB serial
adapter cable, press S at the "Embosser Port?" prompt. There are others items in the Embosser
Set‑up List, relating to the serial connection, as follows.
You can
type a standard baud rate to suit the embosser, or to step through the
available rates, press SPACE with dots 3‑4.
The
options are N, E, or O, for None, Even, or Odd parity respectively. Press ENTER to complete the entry. “Number of Data Bits?”
The
options are 7 or 8. Press ENTER to complete the entry.
Responses
are S for software handshaking, or H for hardware, then press ENTER to complete the entry. This setting determines
the way in which the embosser instructs KeySoft to start and stop the flow of
data so that it can keep up. Software handshaking is sometimes known as
XON/XOFF handshaking.
This is
the end of the Embosser Set‑up List for the serial port option. To exit
the list, press SPACE with E. You are asked to confirm any
changes you have made and you are then returned to the "Emboss or Set‑Up?" prompt. If you have made any changes, you
should use the test document to check the embosser set‑up.
When a
Braille translation is involved during printing or embossing, you can decide
whether to include page breaks you inserted in the original document into the
new one. For example, if the Braille document contains 6 pages each marked by "New Page" markers, these same 6 pages can be
printed on the ink printer. This feature may either be on a document‑by‑document
basis or can be set to apply to all newly created documents.
To access
this feature on a document‑by‑document basis, open the document and
go to the Format menu, Ink Print Settings, Translation Options, and move
through the list to the "Suppress New Page Markers" item. Set the "Suppress new page markers" to "No" which means that new page markers in a Braille
document will cause new pages in the print document.
If you
want this to be the default setting for all newly created documents, from the
Main Menu go to the File Menu, Translate File, Back Translation Options. The "Suppress New Page Markers" option is the sixth item in this
list. Set it to "No." if you want a one‑to‑one
correspondence between Braille pages marked with a new page marker and the
translated print page.
Once KeySoft
has been set up for the embosser, it is strongly recommended that you carry out
a test. This can be very instructive because embossers behave in various ways,
and may have internal settings which are not obvious. Common problems are
incorrect page length or width settings, which result in lines occasionally
overflowing onto the next line, or pages with only one or two lines embossed on
them.
The only
foolproof check is a real test. KeySoft is supplied with two test documents for
this purpose, and we strongly recommend that you use them when the embosser is
first connected, or if changes are made to its set‑up.
To emboss
the first test document, start from the Main Menu and press W for the Word processor, then E for Emboss a document, and E for Emboss. Select the General folder, and
then the document called "Embosser Test A." Proceed to emboss this
single page and examine the result. The first line consists of a repeated
sequence of the letters A to J. The number of repeats in the top line, plus the
last character, indicates how many cells can be embossed across the page. For
example, if there are 3 full repeats, and the last letter is I, you know that
39 cells can be embossed across the width of the page.
Sometimes
an embosser cannot emboss the far left‑hand side of the page, and misses
the first one or two cells, so you should also check that the first character
of the first line is the letter A. If not, note how many cells are missing and
put this number in the Page Offset setting in the Embosser Set‑up list.
Then repeat "Embosser Test A" to find the true embossed width of the
page.
Now
emboss the second document, called "Embosser Test B." This consists
of two pages, with a number at the beginning of each line. The lines are
numbered sequentially. Check the number on the last line on the first page,
which might be 24, for example. This is the number of lines that can be
embossed on a page.
Return to
the Embosser Set‑up list and set the Paper Length and Paper Width to the
values determined in the tests. This completes the Embosser set‑up. You
should not need to change the settings in the Embosser Setup List, or carry out
the embosser test again, unless a different type of embosser or paper is used.
This list
contains similar items to the embosser set‑up list, with some
differences. There is no double‑sided option, and there is an additional
item called "Printer Type," which determines how the font
commands embedded in your text are translated for the printer. The "standard" option is programmed into KeySoft
and this is suitable for most printers if you do not require any special fonts.
If you require Bold and Italics to be printed you should choose a driver
appropriate to your printer. If you want to change the Printer Type, press Y and ENTER, and KeySoft prompts: "Printer name? Press ENTER for (name)"
Select a
printer name in the same way as choosing a file name, by pressing SPACE repeatedly to review the list of files and
selecting one by pressing ENTER. If your printer model is not in
the list, it will probably print special fonts correctly if you select "HP
DeskJet and LaserJet." Check the list of supported HP printers on our website.
If your HP printer is supported, you can select "HP Generic USB".
If you
wish to print jpg images, when asked for "Printer type", select
"generic jpeg printer".
When
prompted with "capture jpeg files in which folder?", you will need to
determine where the image files will be saved.
Select
the drive and folder where you want these images to be saved.
You will
be returned to the "print or setup printer" prompt, at which point
you can return to usual printing steps.
Note that
when printing images, each page will have its own file. For example, printing a
3‑page document called "test.doc" will produce test1.jpg,
test2.jpg and test3.jpg in the selected directory.
There are
two printer test documents that may be used to check the printer set‑up,
in a similar way to the embosser. You may require sighted assistance to check
the results of this test.
Print the
first document, called "Printer Test A." Check the top line, which consists of the
repeated sequence of the digits 1 through 9 and zero. Use the number of full repeats and the final
digit to determine the number of printable columns across the width of the
page. If a number of digits are missing at the start of the line, set the Page
Offset to this number and run "Printer Test A" again to determine the printable page width.
Print the
second test document, called "Printer Test B," and count the number of lines that can be
printed on a page.
Return to
the Printer Set‑up list, and set the Paper Length and Paper Width to the
values determined in the tests. This completes the tests. You should not need
to change the settings in the Printer Setup List, or carry out the printer test
again, unless a different type of printer or paper is used.
End of
Embossing and Printing Documents Chapter.
This
chapter describes the advanced features of KeyWord that allow you to create
documents with more complex formats, and quickly make extensive changes to a
document. It also discusses the ink‑printing of Braille documents and
handling documents of differing types, such as text or Microsoft Word.
Although
the KeyWord functions covered in this chapter are often complex, you will find
that often the default format settings will cover your document formatting
needs. We suggest that you read the overview presented in the next section,
then read only the sections of specific interest to you. As you become more
familiar with KeyWord, revisit specific sections to maximize your understanding
and use of the BrailleNote Apex BT.
This
chapter starts by defining the difference between "Braille" and
"text" documents and how the BrailleNote BT handles them. A Braille
document is prepared for reading in Braille, either embossed or refreshable. An
ink‑print document is prepared for presentation in ink‑print
format.
Because
this User Guide concerns the BrailleNote BT fitted with a Braille style
keyboard, we assume that you will primarily be working with Braille documents.
For this reason, Braille documents are covered first. Towards the end of the
chapter we look at working with text documents.
First we
look at how to control the format of a Braille document, covering Line layout,
Page settings, and commands for centering and justifying Braille.
This is
followed by the parameters associated with taking a Braille document, and
performing the "on‑the‑fly" translation of this document
to provide output to a standard ink printer.
Following
that is a section on Block commands, looking at the capability to quickly
manipulate large blocks of text and generate form letters.
Next are
several sections on ways to make it easier to read a document's content,
inserting dates, times and calculator results, binding spaces and pasting
details from the Address list.
Saving a
document to the same or a different disk drive is covered next, along with
abandoning the document without saving changes. The procedure to save documents
as different document types is also discussed.
KeyWord's
ability to create and open text documents is looked at next, together with the
"on‑the‑fly" translation of these documents for Braille
embossing.
Finally,
there is saving and restoring default format settings for a document and Unicode
character support for extended characters.
It is
worth remembering that for a BrailleNote or VoiceNote fitted with a Braille
style keyboard, the default factory setting creates all new documents in Braille
format. Conversely, for a BrailleNote or VoiceNote with a computer style
keyboard, the default factory setting creates a text document. If you don’t
wish to use these default settings, you have the option of selecting your own
desired document type from the Setup Options in the KeyWord menu.
For
convention, documents created by BrailleNote BT and stored in KeyWord Braille
format, are referred to as Braille documents. BrailleNote BT can also create
and open documents that have other file types. For example, text documents,
Microsoft Word, Rich Text Format, ASCII, WordPerfect 5.1 for DOS, and KeySoft
Version 2 Braille and text.
For the
purposes of this chapter, the term text document encompasses all file types
except Braille documents. That is, KeyWord Text, Microsoft Word, Rich Text
Format, ASCII, WordPerfect 5.1, and KeySoft Version 2 Text documents are all
considered to be text documents.
Text
documents are often created to share information via the ink‑print
medium, or via a computer screen. As such, the page and line layout of a text
document is often related to standard paper sizes handled by ink‑print
printers.
Braille
documents, on the other hand, are usually created with the intention of being
embossed on Braille paper, or read on an electronic Braille display.
One of
KeyWord unique features is the ability to open and create documents of
different types. Documents created on the BrailleNote BT are predominantly
KeyWord Braille documents. These documents can be 'seamlessly' shared with
other products in the BrailleNote family, output to a Braille embosser, printed
on an ink print printer or saved as a JPEG image for sharing purposes. Printing
a KeyWord Braille document is as simple as choosing the print option rather
than the emboss option from the KeyWord Menu.
KeyWord
can save documents to any of the file types listed earlier. These documents can
be reviewed and edited using standard commands. Because KeyWord can open these
differing document types, you can directly open a Microsoft Word document, for
example:
Text
documents can be opened or created, and reviewed and edited from the
BrailleNote BT Braille style keyboard. Text may be input using 6 or 8 dot
computer Braille and BrailleNote BT provides computer Braille tables for both
the US and British conventions. Printing or embossing a text document is as
simple as choosing either the printer or embosser option from the KeyWord Menu.
The
format of a Braille document, that is a document prepared for reading on the
BrailleNote BT or embossing, is determined by the settings in the Layout List,
Page Settings List, and by individual commands for centering and justifying
Braille text.
The
settings associated with taking a Braille document and performing the "on‑the‑fly"
translation of this document to properly formatted print are determined by the
items in the Style of Presentation List, and the Ink‑print Settings Menu.
The
preparation of "Template documents" for use with the address list and
print files is controlled from the Template Menu. All of these menus and
options are available from the Format menu.
Commands
and settings to format Braille text are grouped under the Format Menu. To
access the Format menu while you are editing a document, press SPACE with "t h e" sign, which is SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6. As usual with menus, you can review
the menu by pressing SPACE or ADVANCE repeatedly and select an item by
pressing NEXT or ENTER, or just press an initial letter.
For really fast access, many items are also available through Quick Commands.
These are key combinations using SPACE, or BACKSPACE, or ENTER. The Quick Commands for the Format Menu are listed in the Command
Summary, Chapter 20.
In the
following discussion a paragraph is defined as a group of words that ends with
a new line indicator.
The
Format menu for a Braille document comprises the following 7 items:
Layout:
Review and change options that control the layout or formatting of the Braille
document, such as tabs, indents, page numbering, etc.
Center a
line: Center a line or paragraph.
Right
Justify a line: Align a line or paragraph so that each line ends at the right
margin.
Style of
presentation: Used when a Braille document is translated and reformatted into a
text document, for example, before being printed. They allow you to control the
way paragraphs, headings, etc. are formatted in the text document independently
of the Braille document's formatting.
Ink‑print
settings: Review and change options that affect the way a Braille document is
translated or reformatted as a text document.
Page
settings: Review or change the page layout of the Braille document.
Template
menu: Options for preparing a Template Document to use with the Address List.
Each of
these items is discussed in detail in this chapter.
The
Layout option presents a list of settings that determine the layout of a
Braille document, such as the left and right margins. You can change a layout
setting at any point in a document. The setting takes effect from the last new
line indicator and a new layout indicator appears immediately after the new
line indicator to indicate that one or more layout settings have changed at
that point. On the Braille display the new layout indicator is shown as dollar sign nl. The dollar sign is the same as the ed sign, dots 1‑2‑4‑6.
Remember
that this indicator is never embossed; it is there to indicate that the layout
changes at this point. It is the effect of the layout change that you will see
when you emboss the document not the indicator itself. You can always check the
layout on the Braille display using the Layout Mode.
The New
Layout affects only settings that you actually change. Settings that you do not
change continue as they were in the previous paragraph. A change to a setting
applies from that point until the end of the document, or until the same
setting is changed again. Whether or not a setting has been changed in the
current paragraph is indicated by the word "changed" or
"unchanged" in the prompt for each setting. For example, if you
change the Left Margin, it is displayed in the form: "Left Margin 12. (changed).”
The word "changed" indicates that settings earlier in
the document do not affect the left margin of this or subsequent paragraphs.
For example, a document has a suggested left margin of 10, and it contains 3
paragraphs. Assume that you change the left margin of the second paragraph to
15, so it is announced as "changed.” The left margin for paragraph 1 is 10, and the left margin for
paragraphs 2 and 3 is 15.
If you
now set the left margin of the first paragraph to 12, the left margins are 12,
15, and 15 for paragraphs 1, 2 and 3 respectively. Notice that the margins of
the second and third paragraphs have remained at 15.
Now if
you need to change the right margin for the whole document, move to the top of
the document and use the Layout List to make the change. The new right margin
applies to the whole document. New Layout does not affect it in the second
paragraph because only the Left Margin was changed at that point.
To check
or change Layout settings, position the cursor anywhere in the paragraph where
you require the change and either enter the Format menu by pressing SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6 and select the "Layout" option, or press BACKSPACE with L. KeySoft displays: "Layout List.”
You can
review the settings by pressing SPACE. Make changes by Brailling a new
value when the current one is displayed, followed by ENTER. If a setting has been changed in a paragraph,
you can clear it so that the setting in the preceding paragraph continues to
take effect. To do this, use the Clear Field command, SPACE with dots 3‑5‑6.
The
Layout List for a Braille document consists of the following items:
Indent
first line of paragraph;
Indent
rest of paragraph;
Tab
stops;
Line
Spacing;
Emboss
page numbers;
Page
number position;
Emboss
both sides of the paper;
Left
margin;
Right
margin;
Word
wrap.
The items
in the Layout List are now discussed.
These
settings allow a number of indenting styles to be set up. For example, they can
provide the Braille convention of starting each paragraph with two spaces,
indent a whole paragraph, or provide a "hanging indent" where the first line of a paragraph
starts at the left margin but subsequent lines are indented.
Indent
First Line causes just the first line of each paragraph to be indented from the
left margin by a chosen number of cells. Indent Rest of Paragraph causes all
lines in a paragraph, except the first, to be indented by a chosen number of cells.
A whole paragraph can be indented by setting Indent First Line and Indent Rest
of Paragraph to the same number of cells. Remember that if these settings are
changed, the changes apply for the remainder of the document or until the
settings are changed again.
To change
a setting, type the required number of cells and press ENTER. A number sign is not required.
The
settings for Indent First Line and Indent Rest of Paragraph are entirely
independent of the Tab Settings that can also be used to indent a paragraph.
The
indent indicator is dollar sign i. Remember the dollar sign is the same as the ed sign,
dots 1‑2‑4‑6.
Tabs
provide a way of moving the cursor to predetermined positions on the line, and
are mainly used to align columns of text. There are 10 tab stops, numbered 1 to
10. The first is measured in cells from the left margin, then each subsequent
stop is measured from the previous one. Each tab stop has an initial setting of
3 cells, so the actual positions are 4, 7, 10, 13, etc.
Suppose
you are editing and the cursor is at cell 8. Insert a tab indicator by pressing
SPACE with T, and the cursor will move to the
next Tab stop, which is cell 10. If you then start typing, the text starts at
cell 10. If you do the same on subsequent lines, a column of text is formed,
starting at cell 10. The Tab appears on the Braille display as dollar sign t. When the Braille display is in
Editing Mode or when the cursor is on a tab indicator the dollar sign t expands to show the tab number, for
example dollar sign t#2. If you want to see the effect the
tab will have on an embossed version of the document, use the Braille display's
Layout Mode.
To review
the tab stop settings, enter the Format menu by pressing SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6 and select the Layout option. Press SPACE repeatedly until "Tab stops" is displayed, and press ENTER. You can then review the tab settings by, once
again, pressing SPACE repeatedly. To determine which
column number a particular tab falls on, you can press SPACE with wh sign (dots 1‑5‑6) while reviewing the tab list.
When
setting up tabs, first determine the number of columns you need and the maximum
width each column must be. Now set Tab 1 to the width of the first column, Tab
2 to the width of the second column, and so on. If you later need to adjust the
width of a particular column, simply change the setting for that particular tab
stop. The width of all other columns remains the same, but if you increase a
tab setting, check that you have not pushed a high‑numbered tab stop off
the page. To change a Tab stop, move to the tab stop number that you want, as
if you were reviewing the setting, then type the required value and press ENTER; a number sign is not required. Make any other
changes you require and then press SPACE with E.
Any tab
stop can be defined as an "Indenting Tab.” Indenting tabs allow you to inset either a
whole paragraph, or all but the first line of a paragraph. They are most often
used when creating numbered lists and outlines, where the first line of each
paragraph starts with a number followed by a tab and the rest of the paragraph
is indented underneath that tab. The indent created by an Indenting Tab applies
only to the paragraph containing the Tab. Forcing a new line by pressing ENTER releases the indent and the text continues
back at the left margin. This is the main difference between Indenting Tabs and
indents created using the settings described in 7.3.2.1 Indent First Line and Indent Rest of Paragraph.
To set
any particular Tab stop to be an Indenting Tab, type the letter I before the value. For instance, typing: "letter sign (dots 5‑6), I, number sign (dots 3‑4‑5‑6) 5,” after the value of Tab 1 is
displayed, makes Tab 1 an indent 5 cells in from the left margin. With an
indent set in this way, you can inset a paragraph by 5 cells by pressing SPACE with T once at the start of the paragraph
and the entire paragraph is indented 5 cells.
The
Indenting Tab indicator is shown on the Braille display as dollar sign t while in Reading Mode. When the
Braille display is in Editing Mode or when the cursor is positioned on an
Indenting Tab indicator, it expands to dollar sign ti#n where n is the indent value.
Presenting
data in columns within the available page width is not always possible in
Braille. Where this is the case, columns are often denoted by a semi‑colon
and a space. You could do this by simply typing a semicolon after each column
entry, but if you also want to translate the document into print with columns
instead of semicolons, Tabs must be used. To provide for this, a special Semi‑colon
Tab is available. This appears as a "Tab" in the Braille document that always takes up
two cells. When the document is embossed, a semicolon and a space are embossed.
When the document is translated to a text document, the text is lined up in
columns. If you want to use this convention, set each Tab stop by typing the
letter S, and no number.
The
Semicolon Tab indicator is shown on the Braille display as a semicolon while
reading. When the Braille display is in Editing Mode or when the cursor is
positioned on an Indenting Tab indicator it expands to dollar sign t; or dollar sign, t, semicolon.
This
allows single or double line spacing to be selected. To change the setting,
type S for single, or D for Double.
You can
choose to have pages automatically numbered or not as you wish. Press Y or N as required. If you do not want a number on the first page of a
document, turn off the page numbering at the start of the first page, and then
turn it on at the start of the second page.
If you
choose to emboss page numbers, they can be placed in one of 6 positions on the
page. You can select the top or bottom line by pressing T or B, then select left, center or right by pressing L, C, or R. If there is no top or bottom margin
to accommodate the page number, the center position is not available, and a
clearance of two spaces is put between the page number and the text when the
left and right positions are used.
If you
have selected the double‑sided option in the Embosser Set‑up List,
you can choose whether to emboss the current document on one side or both sides
of the paper. This choice is not presented if your embosser is set up as single‑sided.
This option would normally be set at the beginning of a document. If you want
to change this setting part way through a document, the safest way is to force
a new page then change the setting at the beginning of the new page. The
results may be unpredictable if the setting is changed in the middle of a page.
This is the position of the left edge of the embossing, counted in cells from the extreme left embossing position. A left margin of 0 means that embossing starts as far left as the embosser can go. The left margin is usually set at 0 when a new document is started. No number sign is needed when entering a value.
This is
the position of the right edge of the text, counting back from the last cell
position on a line. The assumed value is 0. No number sign is needed when
entering a value.
This is
the process by which text automatically continues on the next line when there
is not enough space for another word on the current line. The initial setting
of Word Wrap for a new document is "On" and, unless you plan to write computer programs using KeyWord, you will
probably always leave it switched on. Computer programmers may want to switch
it off and use a very large Paper Width setting to avoid carriage returns being
inserted automatically in their program lines.
If word
wrap is switched off, a beep sounds 10 cells before the right margin is
reached, and you must decide where to start a new line by pressing ENTER. To change the word wrap setting, press N to switch it On or F to switch it Off.
This is
the last item in the Layout list. Methods of reverting to initial settings and
changing initial values used for new documents are discussed in 7.19 Initial Format Settings in a Document.
When you
change one or more layout settings, a New Layout indicator appears at the start
of the paragraph to indicate that the layout has changed at that point. The new
layout indicator was introduced in
3.12 Format Indicators. Remember also that a paragraph is
a group of words that ends with a new line indicator. You can locate Layout
markers with the Find command, SPACE with F, using the search string BACKSPACE with L. A Layout indicator can be deleted
like any other character. This has the effect of canceling all changes made by
the new layout, leaving all layout settings the same as they were in the
previous paragraph.
The
layout indicator appears on the Braille display as $nl
This
group of settings applies to the entire current document. The Page Settings
List contains 5 items, as follows:
First
page number;
Paper
length;
Paper
width;
Top
margin;
Bottom
margin.
You can
change the Page Settings at any point in the document, and the change applies
to that whole document. Either enter the Format Menu by pressing SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6, and select the "Page settings" option, or press BACKSPACE with P. KeySoft displays: "Page Settings list.”
This is a
list of the current settings for that document. You can review the values by
pressing SPACE repeatedly. Make changes by typing
a new value when the current one is announced, followed by ENTER. To return to the document, press SPACE with E. If you have made changes, KeySoft
prompts: "Confirm changes?"
Press Y to confirm the new settings, or N to abandon the changes. You are then returned
to the document.
The Page
Settings List for a Braille document consists of the following 5 items:
This is
the number that appears on the first page of the document, if you choose to
have your pages numbered. When you create a new document this is set to 1, but
if your document was just one chapter of a larger document, you might want to
start numbering at a higher number.
Suppose
you had typed a large report as two separate documents. The first document
might contain pages 1 to 12, and the second, pages 13 onward. The first
document would be printed with a "First Page Number" of 1, the second with 13.
These
settings define the length and width of the paper that is used when this
document is embossed.
Usually
you will use your standard Braille paper when embossing a document and you will
have already set the Page Length and Page Width settings in the Embosser Setup
list to the correct values for this Braille paper, as discussed in 6.7 The Embosser Set‑up List. In this case, leave the Paper
Length and Width settings in the Page Settings List set to the standard
embosser settings. If you later change the size of the Braille paper you are
using in your embosser, you only have to change the settings in the Embosser
Setup List. However, if you always want to use a special Paper Length or Page
Width for a particular document, then change the settings for that document
here accordingly.
If the
Paper Length is set to the standard embosser settings when you review the Page
Settings list, the following prompt is displayed: "Paper length? Using the standard embosser setting of x.”
This
indicates that the setting is the same as the value in the Embosser Setup list.
If you change the setting here in the Page Settings List, the prompt is: "Paper length? l,”
where l
is the paper length in lines. In this case the embosser setting is being over‑ridden
for this document. To reset the paper length or width to match the value in the
Embosser Setup list, use the Clear Field command, BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
These are
the number of blank lines left at the top and bottom of the page when
embossing. The initial values for a new document are both zero.
These are
the last items in the Page Settings list. The method of changing the initial
values is discussed in 7.19 Initial Format Settings in a Document.
You can
position a line of text mid‑way between the left and right margins. To do
this, place the cursor anywhere on the line, and either press SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6 for the Format menu, then C for Center, or press ENTER with C. The line of text is centered
horizontally. To maintain the centering effect with long lines, text in excess
of 90% of the usable page width overflows onto the next line. Centering applies
to the whole of a paragraph.
To
indicate centered lines a special indicator dollar sign c appears at the beginning of the line.
A line of
text can be right‑justified so that the last character is positioned on
the right margin. To do this, place the cursor anywhere on the line, and either
press SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6 for the Format menu, then R for Right Justify, or press ENTER with R. Right justification applies to the
whole of a paragraph. A line cannot be both centered and right justified; it
can only be one or the other.
To indicate a right justified lines a special
indicator dollar sign r appears at the beginning of the
line.
When you
compose a Braille document, you normally follow Braille layout conventions.
However, when you come to translate a Braille document to a print text document
as described in Chapter 15, you may want to use different layout conventions
for ink print text, especially if you intend to print out the document on a PC.
For example, new paragraphs can be indicated differently, attributes such as
bold can be used, and even the text itself can be different in places. You
could translate the Braille document into a text document, and then use KeyWord
to format the text document according to ink‑print conventions, before
printing it. However that task would soon become tedious, especially if you
then modify the Braille document and have to repeat the entire process. You
would also have a Braille and a text version of the same document, and these
could easily get out of step if you make modifications.
KeySoft
therefore allows you to control the ink‑print layout from within the
Braille document, so that it can be translated directly from source and is
formatted in ink‑print completely independently of its Braille
formatting. The Format menu contains two items for this, called: "Style of Presentation,” and "Ink‑print settings.”
KeySoft
allows you to indicate various ink‑print styles. These do not affect the
layout of the Braille document, but when you print it, or translate it to a
text document, KeySoft uses the indicated styles to translate the layout from
the Braille convention to an ink‑print convention. For example, in
Braille you might have sub‑headings on a new line and indented 4 spaces.
In ink‑print, however, you might want a sub‑heading in bold print
with a blank line before and after it.
There are
6 styles of presentation that cover the presentation styles found in most
documents. These are as follows:
Paragraph;
Heading;
Sub‑heading;
Outline;
Lines;
Identical
to source.
To check
or change a style, locate the cursor anywhere in the paragraph and press SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6 for the Format menu, then S for Style of presentation, or press BACKSPACE with S. KeySoft displays the style of the
current section of text. If you wish to leave the Style unchanged, press ENTER. Alternatively, you can review the available
Styles by pressing SPACE repeatedly and choose a new Style
by pressing ENTER, or press the initial letter of your
choice. Settings apply from the start of the current paragraph following a New
Line indicator, and a change is indicated by a "Style" indicator. There are different indicators for
each style.
Use the
styles by marking the beginning of each part of your document according to its
style, whether it is a heading, subheading, paragraphs of text, an outline or
numbered list, or just single lines of information, such as the address at the
top of a letter. When you then print or translate the document, the styles are
used to reformat each part appropriately. While the names represent typical
uses, the format produced by each style can be altered to suit your taste or
purpose.
Setting
styles is best done as you are Brailling the document, but you can always go
back and set them later. Get into the habit of doing it and you will have
perfectly formatted print documents.
The
Styles are now described.
This is the initial style for a new document style. While paragraphs in Braille might start on a new line indented by two spaces, paragraphs in a text document might have no indentation, and be separated by a blank line. While this is the formatting convention for paragraphs, the options described in 15.20.8 Reviewing and Setting Back Translation Options, allow you to change it to suit your needs. The paragraph style indicator is $sp.
Regardless
of how a heading is formatted in Braille, in ink‑print a blank line is
placed both above and below the heading and it is centered and in bold font. If
a heading takes up more than one line, each subsequent line is also centered
and in bold font. A blank line in Braille produces a blank line in ink‑print.
The heading style continues until another style indicator changes it, or two or
more blank lines are encountered. In the latter case the style reverts to
"Paragraph.” Once again, this is the suggested formatting convention for
headings. It can be changed by altering the options described in 15.20.8 Reviewing and Setting Back Translation Options. The heading style indicator
is dollar sign h.
In print
format, a blank line is left before and after a sub‑heading. The sub‑heading
is bold, and starts at the left margin. Sub‑headings can take up more
than one line, but the first blank line returns the style to "Paragraph.”
This
style is used where you have numbered paragraphs or an outline. Usually each
item starts on a new line, with subsequent lines belonging to that item being
indented. This format is retained in ink‑print, and a blank line is left
between items whether or not there is a blank line in Braille. Another style
indicator or two or more blank lines terminates Outline Style, and in the
latter case the style reverts to "Paragraph.”
The
outline style indicator is $ou.
This
style is used to show that the print text is a series of separate lines all
starting at the left margin. It might be used for the address at the top of a
letter, for example. Each New Line in Braille starts a New Line in print. Each
blank line in Braille causes a blank line in print. This style stays in effect
until another style indicator is encountered, or two or more blank lines causes
the style to revert to "Paragraph.”
The line
style indicator is $sl.
You can
use this style to preserve the formatting of a section in a Braille document
when it is translated. This style continues in effect until another style is
encountered.
The
Identical to Source style indicator is dollar sign si.
The
Identical to Source style indicator is $si.
These
settings can be used when you are editing a Braille document to control the
format of the document when it is translated to a text document. To access the
Ink‑print settings menu when you are editing a Braille document, press SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6 for the Format menu, then I for Ink‑print settings. You can review
the list and select an item in the same way as all KeySoft menus. The Ink‑print
settings menu contains the following 6 items:
Layout;
Inclusion;
Start ink‑print
exclusion;
End ink‑print
exclusion;
Translation
options;
Page
settings.
These
items are discussed now.
The
settings for a Braille document, such as left and right margin, are accessed
from the Format menu by selecting Layout. In contrast, when you are preparing a
Braille document for printing or translation, you may need to check or change
the settings that are used for ink‑print. These can be accessed from the
Format menu by selecting Ink‑print Settings, and then Layout, or by
pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER with L.
The Ink‑print
Layout list contains a similar group of settings to the Braille list, including
indents, left and right margins, tabs, page number enabling, line spacing and
word wrap, but the values are for print. The initial values for new documents
are Left and Right Margins of 10 columns, or one inch, and Tab Stops of Indent
5.
An
additional setting in the Ink‑print Layout list is Justification. This
style is used in most printed newspapers and magazines, and spreads the words
out so the last character of each line is at the right margin. It gives the
text a tidy appearance, with both sides of the text being straight, but spacing
between some words is increased. It is a matter of preference which way you set
this option. The initial setting is off. To change the setting, press N for On or F for Off.
Values
that you set in the Ink‑print Layout are used when your Braille document
is translated to a text document. They do not affect the layout of the Braille document.
A change to the ink‑print layout is shown in a Braille document by the
indicator $nli. An ink‑print indent indicator is $ii.
You may
want to include text or formatting commands in the print version that are not
required in the Braille version. For example, you could add an explanatory
note, underline a word, or force a new page. To do this, either select the "Inclusion" option in the Ink‑print
Settings Menu, or press BACKSPACE with ENTER with J. KeySoft prompts: "Ink‑print‑only inclusion?"
In
response to this prompt, type the text that you want to appear in the print
version and press ENTER. You can also include the following
formatting commands:
New
line: press
SPACE with en sign, dots 2‑6;
New
page: press
SPACE with P;
Tab: press
SPACE with T;
Center
line: press
ENTER with C;
Right
justify line: press
ENTER with R;
Underline: press
ENTER with U;
Font: press
ENTER with F.
There is
a description of the last two items, Underline and Font, in
7.17.2 Underlining and 7.17.3 Font.
You can
review the document for inclusion markers, and delete them like any other
character. To review or edit the text of an inclusion, position the cursor on
the inclusion marker and select the Inclusion option again.
Conversely,
there may be text or formatting commands in the Braille document, such as the
description of a table layout, which you may want to exclude from the print
version. This is done by marking the start and end of the text or formatting
commands you want excluded, as follows: With the cursor at the required point,
either select "Start ink‑print exclusion" from the Ink‑print settings
menu or press BACKSPACE with ENTER with dots 3‑4. KeyWord marks the position with a
special "Start ink‑print exclusion" indicator $xis. Now type the text or formatting
commands that you do not want to appear in the print version, and either select
"End ink‑print exclusion" from the Ink‑print Settings
Menu or press BACKSPACE with ENTER with dots 2‑6. KeyWord marks the position with a
special "End ink‑print exclusion" indicator $xie.
Note that
you can also add these markers to existing text, if you wish.
This
group of 9 settings affects the way in which the current Braille document is
reformatted when it is translated to a text document The Translation option
indicator is $txi. Settings apply from the start of the current paragraph, and
can be changed at chosen points throughout the document. The initial values are
covered in 15.20.8 Reviewing and Setting Back Translation Options, as well as other translation
settings that are not available while editing.
To access
the print translation options, either select the "Translation options" from the Ink‑print Settings
Menu, or press BACKSPACE with ENTER with O. The settings are as follows:
What type
of paragraph boundary is used in the source document?
Interpret
larger boundaries as paragraphs also?
New Line
translation option?
Convert
font indicators to Braille typeforms?
Include
two spaces between sentences?
Suppress
New Page markers?
Include a
blank line between items in outline style?
Revert to
Paragraph Style After How Many Blank Lines?
Translation
find and replace.
The last item
allows you to replace a particular formatting sequence with another, as part of
the translation process. For example, the Braille document might use 3 spaces
anywhere on a line to indicate the start of a new paragraph, and New Line
indicators in the text document could replace these.
To set up
this sequence, at the “Find?”
prompt press the binding space command ENTER with B, three times, followed by ENTER.
This sets
up the "Find?" string of 3 spaces, then at the “Replacement for 3 spaces?” prompt type:
SPACE with dots 2‑6 followed by ENTER.
This sets
up the "Replacement?" string of one New Line.
When you
translate a Braille document to a text document, a group of page settings is
used for the entire text document. To access the Ink‑print Page Settings,
select "Page Settings" from the Ink‑print Settings
Menu. KeySoft displays: "Ink‑Print Page settings list."
This is a
similar group of settings to the Braille list, comprising first page number,
paper size, and top and bottom margins. The initial values for Page Length and
Page Width follow the values in the Printer Set‑up List, and a prompt
indicates if a setting is changed. The initial top and bottom margins are 6
lines, or one inch, suitable for print. The Ink‑print Page Settings
indicator is $psi and it is positioned at the top of the document.
Values
that you set here are used in the translated versions of your Braille document.
The
ability to manipulate blocks of text is an invaluable editing aid because it
lets you mark a passage and delete it, move it, or copy it. This saves typing
time and avoids the introduction of new typing errors. Blocks can be moved from
one location to another within a document, copied repeatedly throughout a
document, or transferred from one document to another. A block can be copied
from one KeySoft task to another. For example, you can copy text between the
Word Processor, Planner, E‑mail, Address List, Database Manager, and
Games.
A
"block" of text means any continuous section of text. A block can be
any size from a single character, a few words, a sentence, a couple of paragraphs,
all the way up to an entire document. You define a block of text by marking one
end and then moving the cursor to the other end of the block. If you want to
keep the block marked for future reference you can insert markers at each end
of the block. You can then move or copy the marked block in a three‑step
procedure:
1. Move or copy the block to the
clipboard;
2. Move to where you want to insert the
block;
3. Paste the clipboard to the required
place in the text.
The
clipboard is simply a temporary storage place for the block of text. It is
provided automatically when you use a command that requires the clipboard. The
word "paste" comes from the old practice of
cutting out a section of printed text from its page and pasting it back in a
different place.
This menu
provides all the commands needed to mark a block and manipulate it. These Block
Commands are accessed through the Block Commands Menu, which you can enter by
pressing SPACE with B. There are 13 items in the menu, in
order as follows:
Append
block to clipboard;
Copy
block to clipboard;
Delete
block;
Insert
file;
Move
block to clipboard;
Paste
clipboard;
Read
block;
Store
block;
Top
marker insertion;
Bottom
marker insertion;
Erase
file and exit Keyword;
Zap,
erase the block markers;
Grade.
Correct Braille grade of block.
Items on
the menu can be selected in either of the usual ways.
Before performing any block operation, you must define the block. Marking the top and bottom of the text you wish to manipulate does this, or alternatively you can mark one end of the block of text and move the cursor to the other. Follow these steps to mark a block:
1. Move the cursor onto the first
character you want included in the block.
2. Enter the Block Commands Menu by pressing SPACE with B.
3. Select the "Top marker insertion" option. You are returned to the document and a marker appears in the document to indicate the top of the block. The marker is $blt.
4. Now move the cursor just past the last character you want included in the block. You are now ready to enter the Block Commands Menu and move, copy, or delete the block of text. Alternatively, you can enter a bottom block marker, so that the chosen block remains defined. The marker is $blb.
Another
way of marking a block is with a Quick Mark command. These commands
automatically mark a character, word, sentence, line, paragraph or section.
Just position the cursor, select the Block Menu and use the following commands:
Mark
character under cursor, press
SPACE with dots 3‑6;
Mark
word under cursor, press
SPACE with dots 2‑5;
Mark
sentence under cursor, press
SPACE with dots 1‑4;
Mark
paragraph under cursor, press
SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
The
selection of sentences and paragraphs can be changed to lines and sections by
the Reading Mode, as described in
7.6 Cursor Movement Modes.
Although it is called "Top of Block" it does not matter which way around you mark a block of text. Only one block can be marked within a document at a time. To move the block marker, just mark a different position. You can check the position of the block marker by reviewing the text with commands such as reading forward a word using SPACE with dot 5. You can perform other editing functions without affecting the block marker. It is even saved with a document.
You can
have KeySoft speak a block of text to check that you have marked it correctly.
To read a block, press SPACE with B, for the Block Menu, then R, for
"Read.” KeySoft says, "Block read,” speaks the text in the block and
returns you to the Block Menu. Like the other reading commands, you can press BACKSPACE with ENTER at any time to stop the cursor at
that point, or press SPACE with E to abandon the reading and move the
cursor to its final position.
This
command allows you to copy a block of text to the clipboard. To do this, first
mark the block of text you wish to copy. Then enter the Block Commands Menu,
select the "Copy block to clipboard" option and the marked block of text
is copied into the clipboard replacing any text already in there. The original
text and the cursor position remain unchanged.
Block
commands can take a few seconds if a large block of text is involved.
This
command is similar to "Copy Block to Clipboard.” The difference is that the marked
block of text is added to, or appended to, the current contents of the
clipboard instead of replacing it. This allows you to build up a phrase or a
list of items in the clipboard. To append a block to the clipboard, first mark
a block of text. Then enter the Block Commands Menu, select "Append block to clipboard,” and the marked block of text is
copied into the clipboard and placed after any existing contents. The original
text, including the block markers and the position of the cursor remains
unchanged.
This
command allows you to remove or cut a block of text from its place in the
document, and put it into the clipboard. To do this, first mark the block you
wish to move. Then, enter the Block Commands Menu, select "Move block to clipboard" and the marked block of text is
removed from the document and placed in the clipboard replacing any text
already there.
This
command allows you to copy the contents of the clipboard into a document.
Before using the "Paste" command, you should have copied or
moved the required block of text into the clipboard. To paste the clipboard,
position the cursor at the exact spot that the first character of the text in
the clipboard should appear. This can be in the original document, or you can
exit the original document and select another.
Enter the
Block Commands Menu, select "Paste block,” and the text in the clipboard is inserted at the cursor position. The
cursor is on the first character of the pasted block, and the word under the
cursor is spoken. There is no block marker in the pasted text.
The
original text and the cursor position remain unchanged by the pasting
operation. This allows you to paste the same block of text to various places
without needing to copy or move the block to the clipboard again.
The
contents of the clipboard are preserved while you carry out any other functions
with the BrailleNote BT. For example, you can copy a passage to the clipboard,
select the Planner, then return to the Word Processor and the clipboard
contents are unchanged.
If
necessary, the contents of the clipboard are translated to suit the type of
document it is being pasted into. This means that you can directly paste a
section of a text document into a Braille document, for example, and the text
is translated into Braille of the grade in use at the insertion point.
This
function completely removes a marked block from your document. It is useful for
deleting large amounts of text. To delete a block, first mark the block of text
you wish to delete. Then enter the Block Commands Menu and select "Delete block.” KeySoft prompts: "Delete block. Sure?” To confirm the deletion, press Y, or, if you decide not to delete the block,
press N.
When you
paste a passage into an existing document, make sure that any spaces at the
beginning or end are correct. The most common problems are too few spaces at
the beginning, or too many at the end. The marked block can contain formatting
indicators like New Page indicators, and these are copied or moved and pasted
with the block. The exceptions are indicators such as Line Break and Page
Break, which are only relevant to the original document. After doing a Block
Move, Copy, Delete, or File Insert, you should check the document layout to
ensure that it has not been upset by the block manipulation.
This
command allows you to store a block of text in another file, instead of in the
clipboard. The other file may already exist, or you can create it as part of
the Store Block process. To store a block, first mark the block of text you
wish to store. Then press SPACE with B for the Block menu, followed by S, for "Store.” KeySoft prompts for the drive, folder and name
of the file to store the block in. Select these in the usual way.
If you
are storing the block in an existing file, you are offered the options of
appending the block to the bottom of the file, or replacing the complete file.
You can
store a block of text directly to a file of another type if you wish. This
might be a text document when you are editing a Braille one, or it could be a
Microsoft Word document, for example. To create a file of another type press SPACE with X repeatedly at the file name prompt
until the type of file you are looking for is displayed. To select an existing
file, type its name or use the list of files to find it. In the list of files
you can change the type of the file displayed by pressing SPACE with X repeatedly. To change between
Braille and computer Braille entry at the file name prompt, press SPACE with X repeatedly. Braille is suitable for
entry of KeyWord document names and computer Braille is suitable for entering
the name of any file.
If you
need information about the selection of a directory or file name, you can find
this in 15.17 Creating Renaming and Erasing Sub‑Directories. When storing to an ASCII file,
KeySoft uses the options in the ASCII Translation Set Up List, as described in 15.20.7 Reviewing and Setting ASCII Translation Options.
The
process of storing a block does not remove that block from the current
document.
The
Insert File command allows you to insert the complete contents of another
document into your existing document at the current cursor position. This
feature is useful if you wish to send the same letter to a number of different
people, as described in 7.5.13 Merging Documents . To insert a file, position the
cursor at the point where you want the first character of the inserted file to
appear, select the Block Menu, and then press I, for "Insert.” KeySoft prompts for the drive,
folder and name of the file to insert. Select these in the usual way.
As well
as inserting KeyWord documents you can insert a file of any type supported by
KeySoft, for example, a Microsoft Word document. If you need information about
the selection of a directory or file name, you can find this in 15.17 Creating Renaming and Erasing Sub‑Directories. When inserting an ASCII file,
KeySoft uses the options setup in the ASCII Translation Set Up List, as
described in 15.20.7 Reviewing and Setting ASCII Translation Options.
After the
file insert, the cursor is positioned immediately after the inserted text. That
is, the file is inserted as though it had just been typed.
The Insert File feature is useful for merging a form letter into a number of letters, each addressed to a different person or company. In fact, this feature makes the preparation of any document that contains some standardized text and layout much easier. Follow these steps to generate personalized memos:
1. Prepare a document containing the
text that is common to all recipients;
2. Open another document for the first
memo. Type the first person's name and any personal text;
3. Now insert the common text in the
memo by positioning the cursor at the appropriate point and pressing SPACE with B, then I. Follow the procedure outlined in the previous
section to select the document containing the common text. Then save this memo,
and open another document for the next memo.
This option provides a convenient method of completely removing a file and its contents. If you are unsure as to whether you wish to delete a particular file you can open the file, and after determining it is no longer needed, delete it using the Erase File option on the Block menu. This saves you from having to exit the file and delete it using the File Manager. KeySoft will request confirmation before removing the file.
If required, the Block Markers can be removed after a block function has been completed. To erase, or "zap,” the block markers, enter the Block menu by pressing SPACE with B, and select the "Zap" option. The cursor position remains unaltered.
This menu
item allows you to change the Braille grade assigned to a block of text after
you have already typed it. Imagine you want to type an e‑mail address in
the middle of a document. You change to computer Braille to do this, but forget
to change the setting back to contracted Braille. Everything is fine on the
Braille display, but on review with speech, or e‑mailing the text, the
text that KeySoft recognizes as computer Braille but is actually contracted
Braille comes out looking very strange indeed.
To use
this function, first mark the block of text. Go to the Block Commands menu by
pressing SPACE with B, then press G. KeySoft will prompt you for the Braille grade
you wish to assign to the block. Select your Braille grade using A for grade 1, B for grade 2, or C for computer Braille. You will then be returned to the document, where
the block is now in the correct Braille grade.
KeySoft
has a range of specific moving commands designed to make moving around a
document quick and accurate. These were listed in 3.8.2 Listening to a Document. When you are reading text organized
in sentences and paragraphs, then commands to move the cursor by sentence or
paragraph are very useful. For example:
SPACE with dot 4 moves the cursor to the beginning
of the next sentence;
SPACE with dots 5‑6 moves the cursor to the beginning
of the next paragraph.
However
when working with poetry or lists, it would be more convenient to move by a
line at a time than by sentence. To allow the most efficient cursor movement
for the text you are working with, KeySoft provides 3 cursor movement modes; sentence
and paragraph, line, and column. When you change the cursor movement mode, the
moving commands themselves don't change, just the way in which they direct the
cursor to move around the text.
To change
the cursor movement mode while in a document, press SPACE with M repeatedly, until you get to the
one you want. These affect the operation of the SPACE with dot 1, SPACE with dot 4, SPACE with dots 2‑3 and SPACE with dots 5‑6 reading commands. They also affect
what is spoken by these commands and by the BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6 and BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4 commands.
The
default cursor movement mode is Sentence
and Paragraph.
When in Line Reading Mode:
SPACE with dot 4 reads the next line; SPACE with dots 5‑6 reads the next section. Likewise, SPACE with dot 1 reads the previous line and SPACE with dots 2‑3 reads the previous section.
In Line
Mode, the word "section" has a specific meaning. The Current Section
starts at the last blank line before the cursor, and continues until the first
blank line after the cursor. Similarly, the Next Section starts at the first blank line after the
cursor, and continues until the following blank line. Line Mode is useful when
you are concerned with the layout of the document. Among other purposes, it's a
good way of checking for blank lines.
The third
Reading Mode is called Column Mode, and acts as follows:
SPACE with dot 4 moves the cursor down a line but
keeping it in the same column. It reads the current word on this line;
SPACE with dots 5‑6, reads the next section.
Column
Mode is effective for reviewing text that is laid out in a table. It allows you
to move up or down a column in a table, reading entries one at a time.
Although
we have only given two examples, the current cursor movement mode affects all
reading commands that relate to sentences and paragraphs. This is also true for
deletion commands. For instance, in Sentence and Paragraph mode, BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4 deletes to the end of the sentence,
but in Line Mode it deletes to the end of the line. The cursor movement mode
also affects the Quick Mark commands in the Block Menu.
It is
possible to move the cursor to the first position on the next line without
inserting a New Line in the document. To do this, press: SPACE with dots 4‑5.
KeySoft
will move the cursor to the next Tab position and display the word under the
cursor.
If speech
is on KeySoft says "New Line,” or "Line Break,” followed by the first word on the
next line.
It is
possible to move the cursor to the next tab position without inserting a tab
into the document. To do this, press: BACKSPACE with T.
Note that
this command jumps to the next tab position, regardless of whether there is
actually a tab indicator in the text.
You can
insert the time, date or calculator result directly into a document instead of
typing them. With the cursor in the appropriate place in your current document,
press ENTER with I. In the Insert Menu select Date,
Time, or Calculator result as required.
If you
select the date, KeySoft prompts: "Insert today's date or printing date?"
If you
press T, KeySoft inserts today's date. If
you press P, KeySoft puts in a special "Insert date" indicator $dtp, and the current date is substituted
whenever the document is embossed or printed, or when it is used as a template
file.
If you
choose to insert from the Calculator, KeyPlus prompts: "Insert result or whole calculation?"
Press R to insert the Result or C to insert the whole calculation.
The most
recent result from the calculator is inserted into the document, which saves
you having to remember and re‑type it. If you select C, the whole calculation is entered, for example
“3 + 7 = 10.”
There is one additional item on the "Insertion Menu,” named "Unicode character.” This allows the insertion of extended characters from the Unicode character tables. See also 7.20.1 Inserting Extended Characters.
A binding
space is simply a space that binds the words on either side of it to each other
in a way that a normal space cannot.
You can
use a binding space to keep two words together on the same line, so that they
cannot be split apart by the text breaking at the end of the line at a normal
space. For example, it would be undesirable for a first initial and a last
name, such as T. Brown, to appear on separate lines.
The other
place where binding spaces are useful is in the search function when searching
for an e‑mail ‑ you need to use binding spaces instead of normal
spaces in a string of words to be searched for. In other contexts of search
and/or replace, this is not necessary.
Pressing ENTER with B produces a "binding space.” It is shown as $bsp on the Braille
display.
A person's name and address, or other details, can be copied from an address list and inserted into your current document. Refer to 10.10.1 Copying to a Text or Braille Document.
While you
will usually work with documents on the Flash Disk, KeyWord allows documents to
be created or opened directly from any drive available on the BrailleNote BT.
If you want to open or create a document on a different drive, follow these
steps:
From the
KeyWord Menu, select Open a Document or Create a Document. At the "Folder name?” prompt, press BACKSPACE. KeySoft prompts: "Drive? (Flash Disk).”
Either
type the name of the required drive, press SPACE repeatedly to review the list of available drives and press ENTER to select one, or press the hotkey for the
drive you want. KeySoft returns to the "Folder name?" prompt. You can now follow the
prompts to select the required folder and document name in the usual manner.
When editing a document on a removable disk or storage card, do not remove the
disk or card containing the document until after you return to the KeyWord Menu
or the Main Menu.
If you
change to a drive other than the Flash Disk, KeySoft reminds you that you are
not using the default drive each time you create or open a file. It does this
by prompting for the drive, in addition to the folder and document name
prompts.
Changes
to a document are saved automatically when you finish editing it and return to
the KeyWord menu or Main Menu, or when switching to another document with the
command SPACE with dots 1‑2‑5‑6. However, it is good practice to
save a document regularly while you are editing it, especially if you are
editing the document for a long period of time. For example, you might delete a
significant passage by accident. You can recover by quitting without saving, as
described in 7.14 Quitting a Document, and then opening the document
again. This puts you back to the last version that you saved.
To save
the current document, press SPACE with S. If the document has not been changed
since the last time it was saved, KeySoft displays: "Document has not been modified"
If this
message is displayed and you do not wish to continue saving the document, you
can return to the Word Processor by pressing SPACE with E. If the document has been changed, no
such message is given.
KeySoft
then prompts: "Document name? (name)"
where (name) is the name of the current document. You can
either overwrite the original document by pressing ENTER then Y for Yes, or write the changed document to a new name by typing a new
document name and pressing ENTER. If you choose the first option, the
new one replaces the old document. If you choose the second option, a new copy
of the document is created under the new name, and the old document remains
unchanged.
If you
wish to save the document to a different folder, press BACKSPACE at the "Document name" prompt and you will be asked for
the Folder name, which can be selected as usual.
You can
also change the type of document at this point. For example, if you are editing
a Braille document you can save a copy as a text document or as a Microsoft
Word document and so on. To save a document as another file type, press BACKSPACE with X at the "Document name?" prompt. Repeat the BACKSPACE with X command until you hear the file
format you wish to save in.
If you
save the document using a different name or file type, KeySoft gives you the
option of opening the saved document or continuing to edit the original
document. This is convenient if you want to make copies of the document with
different formats without having to re‑open the original document.
If you
have a large number of documents and the Flash Disk is almost full, there may be insufficient space available to save the
current document. In this case you will be given the option of saving to a
storage Card, or deleting documents in the Flash Disk to make room.
Changes
to a document are saved when you press SPACE with S, or automatically as you return to the KeyWord
menu or Main Menu, or when switching to another document. Sometimes you may
need to quit the Word Processor without saving the changes made since the
document was last saved. For example, you may have made some incorrect
alterations and want to abandon your changes.
To do
this, press BACKSPACE with Q, for Quit. If changes have been
made, KeySoft prompts: "Lose changes. Sure?"
If you
really wish to quit without saving the document, press Y. To cancel the command and return to the Word
Processor, press N.
So far,
we have assumed that our base document is a Braille document, written in grade
1 or grade 2 Braille, and having about 40 characters per line and 25 lines on a
page. The alternative is a text document written in computer Braille and
formatted for print, having around 66 print characters per line and 55 lines on
a page, suitable for printing on letter or A4 size paper.
Braille
and text documents can be stored in the same folder, so you review all document
names when you review the contents of a folder. Remember that you can check the
type of document by pressing SPACE with I when its name is displayed.
To create
a text document, press SPACE with X repeatedly at the "Document to create?" prompt, until the prompt "Create a text document" is displayed. Type the document
name, and press ENTER. KeySoft prompts: "This is a text document. Computer Braille is required. Top of document. Blank."
You may
then enter your text into the file using computer Braille. Choose the
appropriate US or British computer table from the Braille display options in
the Options Menu. If you are unfamiliar with computer Braille, a brief overview
is provided in 7.16 Computer Braille.
When you
receive a document, such as an e‑mail or a Microsoft Word document (as an
e‑mail attachment perhaps) you may find it easier to read and even edit
the document as a text document. The advantages of leaving the document as a
text document rather than translating the document into Braille are:
It saves
initial translation time and effort;
It avoids
translation errors;
It
eliminates any loss of formatting during translation.
This is
especially true if the document is to be exported from the system as a text
document, for instance by e‑mailing it to sighted people.
When a text document is opened, the Braille
display displays it in your preferred Braille grade. KeySoft translates from
the underlying document as required without altering the document, so you have
the advantage of being able to read the document in grade 2 Braille. However,
if you need to edit the document, you must use computer Braille.
On the
BrailleNote BT, whether in editing or automatic mode, if you move to a word it
is displayed in computer Braille, regardless of where the cursor is. If you
route the cursor to a word, no matter where in the word, it appears under the
first character, and the word appears in computer Braille. You can then route
it to any other character as desired. In this way you are able to view the
exact keystrokes that make up the word.
If you
choose to open or create a text document, KeySoft advises: "This is a text document. Computer Braille is required.”
If you
don't know computer Braille, don't be put off, because it's not as bad as it
sounds. Computer Braille signs for the lower case letters are exactly the same
as grade 1. We'll come back to capitals shortly.
Numbers
in computer Braille are similar to grade 1 and 2, except that the dots are
lowered by one row and no number sign is used. For example, number 1 becomes dot 2, and number 2 is dots 2‑3. Punctuation marks are certainly different
from grade 1 or grade 2. For example, to obtain a period in US computer Braille, press dots 4‑6. In UK computer Braille a period is dots 2‑5‑6. A full list of Computer Braille
characters for both the US and United Kingdom conventions can be found in
Appendix D.
There are
two sorts of computer Braille: 6‑dot and 8‑dot. In 6‑dot, a
capital letter is obtained by pressing SPACE with U before the letter. If you press SPACE with U twice, capitals continue until you turn them
off by pressing SPACE with U again.
Alternatively,
you can employ 8‑dot Braille. The two keys that we have been calling BACKSPACE and ENTER are used in 8‑dot Braille for dot 7 and dot 8 respectively. These
two dots are the bottom two of the 4 by 2 dot cell used for 8‑dot
Braille. There is no separate capital sign. Instead, you get upper case by
adding dot 7 to each letter sign. For instance,
capital A is dots 1‑7. Since dots 7 and 8 are used for characters in 8‑dot
Braille, the ENTER and BACKSPACE functions have to be obtained in a different
way:
For ENTER, press SPACE with ENTER, and for BACKSPACE, press SPACE with BACKSPACE.
In all
KeySoft commands that use BACKSPACE or ENTER, you must add SPACE if you are using 8‑dot
Braille. For example, the command to delete the current word is usually BACKSPACE with dots 2‑5. When you are using 8‑dot
Braille, however, you must press SPACE with BACKSPACE with dots 2‑5 to delete the current word.
You can
choose 6 or 8‑dot computer Braille through the Options menu. Press SPACE with O, then K for Keyboard Settings. Press SPACE repeatedly until KeySoft asks: "Use 6 or 8 dot computer Braille?."
Enter 6 or 8 without a number sign.
The last
prompt in this list asks you for the computer Braille language you wish to use.
The choices are "USA computer Braille,” or "UK computer Braille" and this setting applies to both 6
and 8 dots computer Braille. While the dot combinations for the letters of the
alphabet are the same in both languages, the dot combinations for numbers and
most punctuation characters is different. For example, an asterisk is obtained
in USA computer Braille by pressing dots 1‑6. In UK computer Braille an asterisk
is dots 3‑5. Appendix D lists the computer
Braille codes for both languages.
In
chapter 4 we discussed the review cursor in relation to reading a book with
KeyBook. We explained that for grade 1 or grade 2 Braille, the standard cursor
is both dots 7 and 8. For computer Braille the cursor is dot 8 only.
KeyWord
requires text documents to be edited in computer Braille, regardless of what
reading grade you have set for the Braille display. If you place the cursor on
any character in a word, the display of the word reverts to computer Braille.
This gives you a one‑to‑one correspondence between the underlying
text and the Braille display. It expands contractions as you review a word
character by character and the cursor changes to reflect that.
When the
cursor is under a format indicator, the cursor spans all of the cells of the
indicator.
KeyWord,
like KeyBook, can translate text into your preferred reading grade instantly,
as you read. For example, if your preferred reading grade is grade 2 Braille,
KeyWord automatically translates the book into grade 2 as you read. The
underlying text is still in its original form, however, and you can examine it
in computer Braille, at any time, should you wish.
You can choose the Braille grade for viewing text files from the Braille Display options off the Options Menu while in a text file. The factory default is set to “Preferred Reading Grade,” which in turn is set to grade 2. For more information, refer to 7.17.5.1 Braille Grade.
The
format of a text document, that is an ink‑print style document, is
determined by the settings in the Layout List, the Page Settings List, and by
individual commands for centering, justifying, underlining, and changing font
types.
The
settings associated with taking a text document, and performing the "on‑the‑fly"
translation of this document to create a Braille document that will emboss
properly, are determined by the items in the Style of Presentation List, and
the Braille Settings Menu.
The
preparation of "Template documents" for use with the address list and
text files is controlled from the Template Menu.
The
Format Menu that is presented while you are working on a text document is
similar to that for a Braille document but there are some differences because
text documents are formatted for printing on an ink‑printer.
In the
same way as you can include ink‑print formatting information in a Braille
document that is used when the document is translated, Braille formatting
information can be included in a text document.
The
Format menu for a text document contains the following items:
Layout: refer to 7.17.1 Layout of a Text Document.
Underlining:
refer to 7.17.2 Underlining.
Center a
line: This item centers a line or paragraph. It operates in the same way as the
format item for centering a line of Braille described in 7.3.4 Center a Braille Line.
Right
justify a line: This item aligns a line or paragraph so that each line ends at
the right margin. It operates in the same way as the format item for right
justifying a line of Braille described in 7.3.5 Right Justify a Braille Line.
Style of
presentation: Styles of presentation are used when a text document is
translated and reformatted into a Braille document, for example, before being
embossed. They allow you to control the way paragraphs, headings, etc. are
formatted in the Braille document independently of the text document's
formatting. They are described in
7.17.4 Style of Presentation linked to a Text Document.
Braille
settings: This item allows you to review and change options that affect the way
a text document is translated or reformatted as a Braille document. It is
described in 7.17.5 Braille Settings linked with a Text Document.
Page
settings: This item allows you to review or change the page layout of the text
document. It contains the same options as the Page settings for Braille
documents described in 7.3.3 Page Settings for a Braille Document.
Template menu: This item contains options that are used when preparing a Template Document for use with the Address List. This is described in 10.9 Templates.
Layout
allows you to review and change options that control the layout or formatting
of the text document, such as tabs, indents, page numbering, etc.
The items
in the Layout List for a text document have initial values that are appropriate
for ink‑printing. The Left and Right Margins are both set to 10, and the
Tab Stops are set to Indent 5. A justification option is included.
Justification is explained in 7.4.2.1 Ink‑print Layout.
The
Layout List for a text document, together with the factory default settings, is
as follows:
Indent
first line of paragraph. Default
setting 0;
Indent
rest of paragraph. Default
setting 0;
Tab
stops. Default
setting Indent 5;
Line
Spacing. Default
setting single;
Print
page numbers. Default
setting No;
Page
number position. Default
setting Bottom Center;
Justification. Default
setting Off;
Left
margin. Default
setting 10;
Right
margin. Default
setting 10;
Word
wrap. Default
setting On.
Underlining
can be switched on or off at any point in the text. When switched on, it
continues until an "Underline Off" command is encountered.
To check
or change the underline status at any point, either press SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6, for the Format menu, and U for Underlining, or press ENTER with U. KeySoft prompts: "Underline is off."
Press ENTER to leave it off, N to turn it on, or F to turn it off. You can underline
as you type, by turning it on, typing the word or passage, and then turning it
off. Alternatively, you can place the cursor at appropriate points in existing
text and turn underlining on or off.
The
Underline Start indicator is placed in the text at the point where you turn
underlining on, and similarly an Underline End indicator is placed at the point
where the underlining is turned off. The Underline start indicator appears as
$fsu (font, start, underline)on the Braille display and the Underline End
indicator appears as $feu (font, end, underline).
To remove
underlining, use the Search command with the search string ENTER with U, N to position the cursor at the
Underline On indicator. Press BACKSPACE with dots 3‑6, to delete the indicator. Repeat the
action using the search string ENTER with U, F to remove the Underline Off
indicator.
If
underlining is on, KeySoft displays: "Underline on."
each time
you press ENTER to start a new line, to avoid large
sections of text being underlined unintentionally.
Most
printers can produce special fonts, such as italics, bold, elongated,
compressed, and subscripts, to enhance the appearance of a printed document.
KeySoft allows fonts to be changed within a text document. A single letter is
used to select each font. For instance, I signifies italics, B for bold, E for elongated.
Before
using the Font commands you should select the driver appropriate to your
printer from the Printer Setup in the KeyWord menu. If the driver is not
installed, you will not hear the font type. For example "Font B" would be spoken, rather than "Bold.”
To check
or change the font at any point, either press SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6 for the Format menu, and F for Font, or press ENTER with F. KeySoft prompts: "Font."
Type a
letter to select the required font. KeySoft prompts: "Font (p) is off."
where (p) is the letter designating the chosen font.
KeySoft describes the font, if it is implemented by the current printer type,
as selected in the Printer Set‑up list 6.7 The Embosser Set‑up List.
To turn
the font on, press N. To turn it off, press F. To leave the font unchanged, press ENTER.
More than
one font can apply to a passage of text. Font commands are announced in the
text when the cursor passes over them, and can be deleted like any other
character.
The Font
Start indicator is shown on the Braille display as dollar sign fsn where n is the type style letter.
The Font End indicator is shown on the Braille display as dollar sign fen where n is the type style letter.
You can
attach a style to a section of a text document, and this has an effect only
when you emboss the document, or translate it to a Braille document. This is
the converse of the Styles of Presentation described in 7.4.1 Style of Presentation. The same 6 style names are
available, but their actions are suited to formatting a Braille document.
To check
or change a style, locate the cursor anywhere in the paragraph and press SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6 for the Format menu, then S for Style of presentation. KeySoft displays
the style of the current section of text. If you wish to leave the Style
unchanged, press ENTER. Alternatively, you can review the
available Styles by pressing SPACE repeatedly and choose a new Style
by pressing ENTER, or press the initial letter of
your choice. Settings apply from the start of the current paragraph following a
New Line indicator, and a “Style”
indicator indicates a change.
These
styles are as follows:
This is
the initial style for new documents. A section with the "Paragraph" style starts in Braille with a new
line and an indent of 2 spaces. Blank lines in print are ignored in Braille.
The Paragraph Style indicator is shown on the Braille display as $sp.
A blank
line is placed above and below a heading. Each new print line starts a new
Braille line. A blank line in a heading causes a blank line in Braille. Two or
more blank lines in a heading cause the style to revert to "Paragraph."
A heading
is centered in Braille. A print line can produce more than one Braille line, so
a centered heading could fill the page width. This would destroy the centering
effect, so lines longer than 90% of the page width overflow onto the next line.
The Heading indicator is shown on the Braille display as $h.
This
style starts in Braille with a new line and an indent of 4 spaces. A sub‑heading
may contain more than one line, but a single blank line terminates the style and
reverts to "Paragraph" style.
The Sub‑heading
indicator is shown on the Braille display as $h#n where n is the level of the sub‑heading.
For example, the first level sub‑heading would be indicated by $h#1, the second level by $h#2 etc.
This
style is used for simple numbered lists or more complex outlines and produces a
first line that starts at the left margin, with the rest of the text indented.
Blank lines in the text are suppressed in Braille and two or more blank lines
cause the style to revert to "Paragraph.” The Outline indicator is shown on the Braille display as $ou.
This
style is for a series of separate lines all starting at the left margin. Any
overflow onto the following line is indented by 2 spaces. The "Lines" style might be used to format the
address at the top of a letter, for example. Two or more blank lines causes the
style to revert to "Paragraph.” The lines style indicator is shown on Braille display as $sl.
Use this
style to preserve the layout of a section in a text document when its
corresponding Braille document. This style continues in effect until another
style is set. The Identical to Source indicator is shown on the Braille display
as $si.
When you
are working with a text document, you may want to put in formatting that only
has effect when the document is embossed, or translated to a Braille document.
This is the purpose of the Braille Settings option in the Format Menu.
To access
the Braille settings menu when you are editing a text document, press SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6 for the Format menu, then B for Braille settings. You can review the list
and select an item in the same way as all KeySoft menus.
The
Braille settings menu contains the following 8 items:
Layout;
Inclusion;
Start
Braille exclusion;
End
Braille exclusion;
Braille
Grade;
Page
Settings;
Translation
options;
Control
Translation.
These
items are the counterparts of the Ink‑print settings available for a
Braille document. Most of them are similar to the Ink‑print settings
discussed in 7.4.2 Ink‑Print Settings linked with a Braille
Document. Please refer to that section for a
description of the Layout, Inclusion, and Exclusion options. Bear in mind, that
because the settings now relate to a Braille page, the values presented are
those for embossing. The initial values for new documents are; Left and Right
Margins 0 cells, and Tab Stops of 3.
Remember,
values that you set in the Braille Layout are used when your text document is
embossed on a Braille printer, or translated to a Braille document. They do not
affect the layout of the text document. A change to the Braille layout is shown
in a print document by an indicator $nlb.
When a
text document is embossed or translated into a Braille document, your preferred
reading grade setting is used. This setting is in the Braille options of the
Options Menu. However, you may need to over‑ride this grade for a
particular passage, for example, if your document contains an e‑mail
address and your Braille code doesn't support the email address format, you
will want computer Braille used for the e‑mail address when the document
is translated into Braille.
To have a
word or passage appear in a different grade, select the Braille grade option,
select the required grade, type the relevant passage, and then repeat the
procedure to restore the grade. This option can also be used to change the
grade into which a passage of existing text is translated. The Braille grade
setting appears on the Braille display as $g#n where n is the grade: 0, 1, or
2.
This
group of settings applies to the entire current text document if it is
embossed, and consists of the same 5 items as the Page Settings for a Braille
document, namely:
First
page number;
Paper
length;
Paper
width;
Top
margin;
Bottom margin;
The
suggested values for Paper Length and Width follow the values in the Embosser
Set‑up List, and a prompt indicates if a setting is changed. A Braille
Page Settings indicator $psb is positioned
at the top of the document.
This
group of 11 settings affects the way in which a particular presentation style
in a text document appears in the corresponding Braille version. Settings apply
from the start of the current paragraph, and can be changed at chosen points
throughout the document. The initial values are covered in Chapter 15, as well
as other translation settings that are not available while editing.
To access
the Braille translation options in a text document, press SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6 for the Format menu, then B then T, or just press BACKSPACE with ENTER with O. KeySoft displays: "Braille translation options list.”
The
settings are as follows:
What type
of paragraph boundary is used in the source document?
Interpret
larger boundaries as paragraphs also?
New line
translation option?
Convert
font indicators to Braille typeforms?
Suppress
multiple spaces?
Suppress
New Page markers?
Ignore
Tabs?
Include
capital signs?
Suppress
blank lines in Outline style?
Revert to
paragraph style after how many blank lines?
Translation
find and replace.
The last
item allows you to replace a particular formatting sequence with another, as
part of the translation process. For example, the text document might use two
New Line markers to separate paragraphs, and these could be replaced by 3
spaces in Braille. The Braille Translation Options indicator is dollar sign txb. To set up this sequence, at the “Find?” prompt type:
SPACE with dots 2‑6, two times, followed by ENTER.
this sets
up the "Find?" string of 2 new line markers, then
at the “Replacement for 2 new lines?” prompt type:
ENTER with B, 3 times followed by ENTER.
this sets
up the "Replacement?" string of 3 Spaces.
To create
a different type of document, select "Create a Document" from the KeyWord Menu in the normal
manner. When KeySoft prompts "Document to Create?", press Backspace with X repeatedly until the document type
you wish to create is displayed.
These
are:
Text
(KeyWord format);
ASCII
Text;
Braille
(BRF);
Microsoft
Word;
Rich text
format (RTF);
WordPerfect;
KeySoft Version
2 Braille;
KeySoft Version
2 text;
Computer
Braille table;
Create a
Braille document;
For
further information on document and file types, refer to
15.18 File Translation
You can
also change the default document type; this is discussed in 7.2 Document Types.
If you
have changed one or more settings in a Layout list, you can reach a point in
the document where you want the settings to revert to their initial values.
That is, the value they were at the start of the document. To do this, ensure
that the cursor is at the appropriate place, and from anywhere in the Layout
list, press BACKSPACE with R, for Revert. This causes all the
settings in the Layout list to revert to the values that they had at the start
of the document.
The
initial settings that KeySoft uses when you create a new document have been
chosen to suit most situations, but you can set up different initial settings
if you wish. For example, you may decide that you want a right margin of 8
columns in all the text documents you create from now on. To do this, open or
create a text document, and change the right margin setting in the Layout list.
Then, from anywhere in the Layout list, press BACKSPACE with S. This saves all the current values
including the new right margin, as the initial settings that are used when you
create a Braille document.
To change
the initial Page Settings, alter the required setting and then from anywhere in
the Page Settings list, press BACKSPACE with S. Remember that there are separate
initial settings for Braille and text documents, which you can change by
opening the appropriate document and carrying out this procedure.
The text
characters represented, in the standard 63 dot combination Braille set, or for
that matter on the typical QWERTY keyboard, only represent a tiny proportion of
the total characters available. These include currency indicators like pounds
and Euros, accented letters like e acute and c cedilla, character sets for other
languages such as Arabic and Japanese and a whole range of specialist
characters for use in sciences, math, phonetics etc. totaling around 35,000.
Those characters not represented in your standard character set are referred to
as the extended character set.
As a way
of managing this enormous character set, a standard called Unicode exists.
Unicode assigns a unique numeric code to every character. This allows for use
in coding and programming, formatting, and an easy way to enter characters once
you know the character code. For more information on Unicode Tables, have a
look at www.unicode.org.
Extended
characters are useful in a wide range of situations.
For
studying languages, economics, math, just about any subject with its own
symbols or characters.
For
commercial use, inserting copyright or trademark symbols etc.
For
everyday use of words borrowed from other languages, people and place names,
correspondence with friends.
You may
use certain characters frequently, or just occasionally, and there are various
ways you can set up your use of characters depending on the level of usage.
Use of
extended characters is not confined to documents. You may also use them in e‑mail
addresses, file names, and within the address list etc.
Unicode
characters only work in text documents. If you wish to use an extended
character in a Grade 2 document, you will need to change to computer Braille.
There are three different ways of inserting an extended character. These methods are suitable for different levels of use:
§ Searching and selecting the
character from the Unicode tables – For the first or only time you look up a
character and if you don't know its code, you will need to do this to search
for it. There are two methods of doing this detailed later in this section.
§ Typing in the character code – This
is quick and easy for characters you use occasionally and can remember the code
for.
§ Setting up a key combination –
assigning a dot combination to the character. This is a good way to manage
frequently used characters.
This
search is based on the name of the character, for example "e acute" or "Euro‑currency sign.”
Follow
these steps to insert an extended character using the name search:
1. When the cursor is at the place
where you wish to enter the character, press BACKSPACE with dots 3‑5. KeySoft will prompt for the
Unicode character. If you have used this function before, it will offer the
previously selected character. If you want to select it, press ENTER. If not, continue to Step 2.
2. Type in the name, or part of the
name, of the character, then press ENTER.
3. KeySoft will respond with a selection, either the character you want or the first one to fit your search criteria. If it is the one you want, press ENTER. If not, view the next search match by pressing SPACE with N repeatedly until you do find it and then press ENTER. This will insert the character.
Let's
assume you want to enter the word "resume" with the letter "e" showing as "e acute,” but you don't know the character code for "e acute.”
Type the
letter "r,” then press BACKSPACE with dots 3‑5. KeySoft will prompt for the
Unicode character. We know that we want to enter an "e acute,” so type in "e acute,” then press ENTER. KeySoft will respond with "Cap e acute,” and using this as your starting point you can
search for all members of the "e acute" character family by pressing SPACE with N. In this instance "e acute" will be the next character prompted.
Press ENTER, and the extended character for "e acute" will be entered into your document.
Continue
typing "sum,” then press BACKSPACE with dots 3‑5 again to enter the last "e
acute.” KeySoft will prompt the previously chosen extended character, which in
this instance happens to be "e acute,” so you just have to press ENTER, followed by SPACE to complete the word.
Unicode
characters are grouped into tables according to type. For example, there is a
Unicode table for Greek characters, for General Punctuation, for Superscripts
etc. You have the choice of searching for a table then for a character within
it. This is useful if you are not sure which character you want but you are
aware of its general type.
Follow
the steps below to browse for a character using the Unicode tables.
1. When the cursor is at the place where you wish to enter the character, press BACKSPACE with dots 3‑5. KeySoft will prompt for a Unicode character.
2. To browse the list of Unicode
tables, press SPACE repeatedly, or BACKSPACE to go back, or type the initial letter of a
table name to narrow down the selection and browse from there.
3. When you locate the table you wish
to browse, select it by pressing ENTER.
4. At this point you can either browse
the whole table by pressing SPACE or BACKSPACE repeatedly, or type the initial letter of a
character name to narrow down the selection and browse from there.
Note: While reviewing a table, you can display the
numeric code of the character you are currently viewing by pressing SPACE with I.
If you
are already within the Unicode tables and wish to search for a Unicode
character by name, press SPACE with F and you will then return to the "Unicode character?" prompt. To search again for the
next matching Unicode character description for within the Unicode tables,
press SPACE with N. If there are no more matches you
will remain on the current Unicode character. Once you have completed your
search, press ENTER to select the Unicode character.
This
method is easy if you already know the character code i.e. the numeric code
assigned to it.
Follow
the steps below to search for a character using the Unicode tables.
1. When the cursor is at the place where you wish to enter the character, press BACKSPACE with dots 3‑5. KeySoft will prompt for a Unicode character.
2. Type the numeric code, and press ENTER. The character will be inserted into the
document. (You can, if you prefer, use the hexadecimal value of the code in the
form "0x….").
You may
assign a computer Braille dot combination to any extended character so that
when the document is translated to computer Braille, that dot combination will
be used.
Assigning
a dot combination follows a similar pattern to assigning a key combination:
Search
the Unicode tables for the character to which you wish to assign a dot pattern
and when you locate it, press SPACE with D. Press A to assign a computer Braille dot combination. If the Unicode character
has already been assigned you may press R to reassign a dot combination, leaving the original dot combination
free. Assigned dot combinations can be removed by selecting U. Upon selecting A (assign) or R (reassign) you will be asked to
enter the dot combination to assign to the selected Unicode character. Finally,
you will be asked to confirm your dot combination selection. To confirm the
selection, press Y.
Note that
multiple Unicode characters can be assigned to one dot combination. This may be
useful if, for example, you use e acute, e grave, and e macron, you could
assign a dot combination that for you means "e with an accent,” or you might assign the same
combination to all vowels that have diereses. You can use this feature any way
you see fit.
As soon
as a "dot pattern" is assigned to a Unicode character,
a "Custom" Computer Braille table is
automatically added in the "Dictionary" folder. This file is used in place of the previously selected Computer
Braille file.
KeySoft
allows you to assign a key combination to a Unicode character. This is an
excellent idea for characters you use frequently.
While you
may assign any key combination including any of the 63 combinations currently
available, it stands to reason that those already representing characters are
not such a great choice. For example, if you assign dots 1‑4 to e acute, you will no longer have a lower case c! To avoid this happening, we suggest you press SPACE with U at the beginning of each key
combination. This shift function accesses a greater range of key combinations
using all 8 dots. The examples given below assume you have chosen to do this.
The
assignation function is called a macro, and the following steps outline how to
define or change a macro for a Unicode character:
You are
either working in a text/computer Braille document or you need to swap to
computer Braille using SPACE with O then G then C.
1. Enter the Unicode Tables with BACKSPACE with dots 3‑5, and locate the Unicode character
you wish to assign a key combination to using one of the browse and search
methods above, only don't press ENTER.
2. When the character is displayed,
press SPACE with K. If there is no key combination
assigned, it will display, " (Character) is unassigned. Option" where character in brackets is the
actual name of the character.
3. If a key combination is already assigned, it will display, "(Character) is assigned to (key combination). Option" For example, "E acute is assigned to SPACE with U then dots 1,5,7. Option."
4. Press A. The prompt, "Assign, key combination to assign to (Character)?" will display. Press the key
combination you wish to assign to the character, and press ENTER.
KeyWord
prompts, "Assign (key combination) to (character)?" For example, "Assign Space with U and Dots 1,5,7 to e acute?" Press Y for Yes or N for No. If you press N, you will be returned to the beginning of this
step. If you press Y, you will be returned to the same
place in the Unicode tables. From there you can select another character or
exit by pressing SPACE with E.
Note: A
Unicode character can have more than one key combination assigned to it. To
toggle through all the currently assigned key combinations, press SPACE.
If the
Unicode character has already been assigned, at the "Option?" prompt you may press U to unassign or remove it altogether, or R to reassign or change the key combination.
To use
either of these functions, follow steps 1 and 2 above. Then:
To Remove
or unassign the key combination, press U at this point. KeyWord prompts, "Unassign (Character) from (keystrokes), sure?". Press Y for Yes or N for No. If you press N, you will be returned to the
beginning of this step. If you press Y, you will be returned to the same place in the Unicode tables. From
there you can select another character or exit by pressing SPACE with E.
To change
the key combination, press R at this point. KeyWord prompts, "Reassign, Macro to reassign to Character?" where character is the name of the
character. Type the new key combination and press ENTER. KeyWord prompts, "Reassign (keystroke) to (character)?". For example, "Reassign SPACE with U with dots 1,5,7 to e acute?" Press Y for Yes or N for No. If you press N, you will be returned to the beginning of this
step. If you press Y, you will be returned to the same
place in the Unicode tables. From there you can select another character or
exit by pressing SPACE with E.
Once you
have created a key combination as above, you will then no doubt wish to use it
in a document, a file name, address listing etc.
To use it, at the point where you wish to insert the Unicode character, press the key combination you assigned to it. Continue Brailling as normal.
If you
are reading a text document that has been translated to Grade 2 in Braille,
whether you have or haven't assigned a computer Braille dot output combination,
you will see the same thing.
Using the
word cafe as an example: You will observe the letters "caf" on the embossed printout, followed
by "dot 4", then the letter "e". The "dot 4" is the Grade 2 indication for an extended
character.
If you
are reading a text document that has been translated to computer Braille, you
will see either a blank cell if the character is unassigned, or the dot
combination you assigned to the character in computer Braille.
On any
computer Braille character you can find out the name of the character by
pressing the "Read current Character" command SPACE with dots 3‑6, twice.
For users whose Braille code is set to USA, KeySoft’s word processor allows you to switch your Braille grade into Nemeth code, so that you can type math content. When using the Nemeth code, note that the speech will only respond in spell mode, regardless of your review voice setting. This is done to ensure accurate symbol entry.
Anywhere
in a new or existing KeyWord Braille file, you can quickly change to Nemeth
Braille by pressing the hot key BACKSPACE with N. This will produce
the Math Braille flag on the display $gm showing you that anything past this
point is Nemeth Braille. At times the $gm will not show up immediately, so
simply navigating forward or back by character will show you where the Nemeth
Braille begins.
You could
also switch into the Nemeth code with the command BACKSPACE with G to enter
the Braille grade list, or by entering the options menu with Space
with O. Press G for Braille grade in use, and
press N for Nemeth.
As Nemeth
is a very complex Braille code, and many of the same Braille dot combinations
can mean different things depending on the context, KeySoft offers a method for
you to access a list of predetermined math symbols which may not always be the
easiest to write or remember. To access the Nemeth symbol selector, press BACKSPACE
with dots 3-5. You can then select your desired category and choose the
appropriate symbol. KeySoft will insert it correctly for you under your cursor.
Once you
have finished writing your math document in Nemeth code, you can print it directly
with a connected print printer so a sighted person can read it immediately.
KeySoft will do all the translation into readable print for you. Keep in mind
that because print mathematics is often very graphical and many parts of
mathematics are written vertically, certain Nemeth symbols will not translate
directly in to readable print. For those symbols, KeySoft will use printed
abbreviations to represent the math content.
For
Example:
Let’s say
that you wanted to write the equation: 2X plus one half Y = 79. Because KeySoft
needs to represent that you wrote a fraction, it would show to the sighted
person as: 2X + (OpenFrac)1 over 2 (CloseFrac)Y = 79. This ensures that there is no confusion for
the sighted reader when they receive the content in print.
Rather
than printing directly to a print printer, you could also perform your standard
export process to a Microsoft Word document or ASCII text file and either email
the document to a sighted person, or transfer it to a thumb drive to provide
them. All the above translation will occur automatically so there is no issue
reading your .doc or .txt math file.
To
further clarify the abbreviations and symbols on the print copy, KeySoft
provides you a description document located in the general folder called
“Nemeth translation abbreviations guide”. If you would like to attach it to
your print copy of math documents, you can either directly print the KeyWord
version of this file, or a Microsoft Word .doc version is also available in the
General folder.
Writing
math is now possible when using UEB as your chosen braille code. When using UEB
you can either write math as would be expected, or use the UEB symbol list by
pressing backspace with DOTS 3-5. KeySoft will speak the
symbols as soon as they are recognized so you know you have written them
correctly.
If you
choose to print out a document or convert it to a Microsoft Word file, the math
will visually look correct when the symbols are available. For graphical math,
KeySoft uses abbreviations to represent the logical math in a linear format.
End of
Advanced Word Processing Chapter.
The
Scientific Calculator, KeyPlus, can be used for straightforward sums such as
addition and division, and for more complex operations including statistics
calculations and trigonometry.
The
Nemeth Braille Code for Mathematics (Nemeth), the British Braille Mathematics
Notation (UK Braille), and the Unified English Braille Code (UEB) are supported
for the entry and display of calculations. In this chapter, if the command
needed is different for Nemeth, UK Braille and UEB then all the commands are
listed with the Nemeth command first, then the UK Braille command, then the UEB
command.
For
example, to enter the plus sign, the commands are:
Nemeth: dots 3‑4‑6
UK Braille: dots 2‑3‑5
UEB: dots 2‑3‑5
As well
as being displayed in Braille you can have your calculations and results
spoken. The result of a calculation, or a whole calculation, can also be
inserted into a document.
Remember
that you can press SPACE with H for Help at any point.
You can
enter KeyPlus from the Main Menu by selecting Scientific Calculator, or from anywhere in KeySoft by pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER with S. Your BrailleNote BT restores the
display to what it was when you last left the calculator. This might be the
result of a calculation or part of one you were entering. Continue entering the
calculation or, if a result is displayed, starting a new calculation clears the
calculator.
To clear
the calculator to zero, press BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
A
calculation is entered in the same order as it would be typed or spoken,
without any spaces. Numbers are entered using the letters A to J. (If you are
using the Nemeth code, you can also use dropped digits). You do not need to
type a number sign, one is automatically entered for you as soon as you start
entering a number. The four basic operators are represented as follows:
For PLUS,
press:
Nemeth: dots 3‑4‑6.
UK Braille: dots 2‑3‑5.
UEB: dots 2‑3‑5.
For
MINUS, press dots 3‑6.
For
MULTIPLY, press:
Nemeth: dots 1‑6.
UK Braille: dots 2‑3‑6.
UEB: dots 2‑3‑6.
For
DIVIDE, press:
Nemeth: dots 3‑4.
UK Braille: dots 2‑5‑6.
UEB: dots 3‑4.
For a
DECIMAL POINT, press
Nemeth: dots 4‑6.
UK Braille: dot 2.
UEB: dots 2‑5‑6.
For
example, to add the numbers 3 and 5, and then subtract 2, you type:
3 + 5 ‑ 2
Press ENTER, for "Equals", and KeyPlus displays
the answer, which in this case is: 6.
Nemeth
users should note that the answer is displayed in literary Braille.
You can
review the calculation by pressing the previous and next thumb keys together.
The Braille display will show 3 plus 5 minus 2 equals 6 in your selected
Braille code. Pressing previous and next again will return to just displaying
the answer. If the speech is on, the speech will mirror the content of the
braille display.
If you
make a mistake, you can use BACKSPACE to delete entries.
To clear
the result of the previous calculation, enter a new calculation or use the
Clear command which is BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
If the
current calculation started with the result of the previous one, BACKSPACE does not delete that number, because it was
calculated rather than typed. Entering a new calculation clears the last
result.
Try some
simple calculations to get the feel of the calculator.
The
Calculator Help gives a complete list of key combinations. To get help, press SPACE with H. You can also check key
combinations with the "Key Announce" mode, by pressing SPACE with W. In this mode, pressing a
particular key combination causes the resulting function to be displayed.
To return
to the normal calculator function, press SPACE with E.
Remember
that the order for entering numbers and operators is just as you would write
them.
If you
are not sure that you have entered a calculation correctly, you can review the
calculation before pressing ENTER.
When
using a braille display, if the calculation is longer than the braille display,
you can press the PREVIOUS thumb key to move the Braille
display back, that is to the left, one cell at a time, and the NEXT thumb key move the Braille display forward,
that is to the right, one cell at a time. After pressing ENTER to complete the calculation, pressing the PREVIOUS and NEXT buttons together toggles between displaying the result and the details
of the calculation.
When
using speech, there are two review commands available before pressing ENTER. They are:
To hear
the whole calculation, press SPACE with dots 1‑4.
To hear
the last number or operator entered, press SPACE with dots 2‑5.
When you
type a calculation, KeyPlus beeps if you make a mistake, such as: 3 + *
Press SPACE with H to find the reason. In this case,
KeyPlus displays: "Value Expected"
Other
messages indicate different errors. You may want to review the calculation
after an incorrect entry, by pressing SPACE with dots 1‑4, to find out where you are.
The
maximum number of decimal places that are displayed can be set from 0 to 9. This
is done by pressing:
Nemeth: SPACE with dots 4‑6.
UK
Braille: SPACE with dot 2.
UEB: SPACE with dots 2‑5‑6.
followed
by the desired number of digits. This does not affect the internal precision of
calculations, but only the number of digits that are displayed.
For
example, to set the number of decimal places to 4, enter the calculation
precision command, as listed above.
KeyPlus
prompts: "Decimal places currently (current setting)."
Type 4 and press ENTER. If you are checking the precision, just press ENTER to leave the current setting unchanged.
The basic
operations provided are: Addition, Subtraction, Multiplication, Division,
Negation, Percent, Parenthesis and Fractions.
Addition,
subtraction, multiplication and division operations have the normal order of
precedence. That is, expressions inside brackets are evaluated first, then
division and multiplication, followed by addition and subtraction.
Parentheses,
or brackets, are used to change the order in which an equation is evaluated. For
example, the equation: 3 + 4 * 5 is evaluated by adding 3 to the product of 4
and 5. The answer is 23.
If you
want the addition of 3 and 4 to occur first and the result to be multiplied by
5, insert parentheses around the 3 + 4, as follows: ( 3 + 4 ) * 5 = 35.
To enter
a left parenthesis, press:
Nemeth: dots 1‑2‑3‑5‑6.
UK Braille dots 1‑2‑6.
UEB dots 1‑2‑6.
To enter
a right parenthesis, press:
Nemeth dots 2‑3‑4‑5‑6.
UK Braille: dots 3‑4‑5.
UEB: dots 3‑4‑5.
Parentheses
can be placed wherever a number can occur. You can use up to 6 levels. If you
try to open more than 6 levels, or close more than are open, KeyPlus beeps.
The
negation operator is used to enter negative numbers. It is represented by SPACE with dots 3‑6. For example, to calculate 5 divided by negative 2, type: 5 /SPACE with dots 3‑6 2 followed by ENTER. Note that the negation operator is not the
same as the subtraction operator, which is just dots 3‑6.
Percent
is a special operator that automatically evaluates the calculation without the
need to press ENTER as well. To enter the percent
operator, press:
Nemeth: dots 1‑4‑6.
UK
Braille: P, (dots 1‑2‑3‑4).
UEB: P, (dots 1‑2‑3‑4).
The
following examples show how the percent operator can be used.
To
calculate a 20% mark‑up on 56, type:
5 6 + 2 0 % which gives the result 67.2.
To
calculate a 10% mark‑down on 45, type:
4 5 ‑ 1 0 % which gives the result 40.5.
To
calculate what percentage 17 is of 20, type:
17 / 20 % which gives the result 85.
That is,
17 is 85% of 20.
To
calculate 30% of 180, type:
180 * 30% which gives the result 54.
To get
the percentage from the fraction 1/2, type:
1 BACKSPACE with dots 3‑4 / 2% which gives the result 50.
This
section covers working with fractions and mixed numbers in KeyPlus. It also
describes how to convert fractions to decimals, decimals to fractions, how to reduce
fractions to the simplest fraction, and convert mixed numbers to fractions and
vice versa. You can use fractions in any KeyPlus calculation.
Note that
the calculator memory can hold fractions and mixed numbers as well as decimals.
This
section explains how to enter fractions.
For
Nemeth and UEB and UK Braille, to enter a fraction:
1. Enter the numerator (the top number
in the fraction).
2. Press BACKSPACE with dots 3‑4 to add the horizontal line between the numerator and denominator. KeyPlus announces "over"
3. Enter the denominator (the bottom
number in the fraction). UK Braille users should note that the denominator is
entered using upper digit keys, not lower digits.
A mixed number is the combination of a whole number, and a fraction. For example, 6 1/2.
For Nemeth, to enter a mixed number:
1. Enter the whole number and press SPACE. KeyPlus announces "and".
2. Enter the numerator (the top number
in the fraction).
3. Press BACKSPACE with dots 3‑4 to add the horizontal line between
the numerator and denominator.
4. Enter the denominator (the bottom
number in the fraction).
For UK
Braille and UEB, to enter a mixed number:
1. Enter the integer or whole number and press the number sign (dots 3‑4‑5‑6). KeyPlus announces "and".
2. Enter the numerator (the top number
in the fraction).
3. Press BACKSPACE with dots 3‑4 to add the horizontal line between
the numerator and denominator.
4. Enter the denominator (the bottom
number in the fraction), using upper digits.
This
section covers how to convert a fraction into several different forms and vice
versa
The
conversion hot key is used for all conversions except reducing a fraction to a
simplest fraction and converting a fraction to a percentage.
The
conversion key can be used in two ways. You can enter it either:
§ straight after a number, in which
case it operates on that number, or
§ after calculating a result. In this
case it operates on the result.
The
conversion hot key is SPACE with dots 3‑4.
To
convert a decimal to a fraction, press SPACE with dots 3‑4. KeyPlus prompts: "Fraction option?".
The
conversion key can be used in two ways. You can enter it either:
§ straight after a number, in which
case it operates on that number, or
§ after calculating a result. In this
case it operates on the result.
To
convert a fraction to a decimal, press SPACE with dots 3‑4. KeyPlus prompts: "Fraction option?". Select the Decimal option by
pressing D.
The
result of an equation involving a fraction is always displayed in its lowest
terms, for example 2/4 is displayed as 1/2. To directly convert any fraction to
its lowest terms, type the fraction and press ENTER.
To
convert a mixed number to an improper fraction, press SPACE with dots 3‑4. KeyPlus prompts: "Fraction option?". Select the Improper Fraction
option by pressing I.
To
convert an improper fraction to a mixed number, press SPACE with dots 3‑4. KeyPlus prompts: "Fraction option?". Select the Mixed Number option by
pressing M.
To
convert the displayed fraction to an equivalent fraction, press SPACE with dots 3‑4. KeyPlus prompts: "Fraction option?". Select the Equivalent Fraction
option by pressing E. KeyPlus will then prompt: "Factor for equivalent fraction?". Enter the number that you want
both the numerator and denominator to be multiplied by, and press ENTER. The equivalent fraction is then displayed,
and replaces the original fraction.
To
convert a fraction to a percentage, refer to 8.3.4 Percent.
To take
the reciprocal of a fraction, press SPACE with dots 3‑4. KeyPlus prompts: "Fraction option?". Select the Reciprocal option by
pressing R. The reciprocal is displayed, and
replaces the original fraction.
Statistical
operations in KeyPlus, allow you to enter a set of numbers, and KeyPlus then
calculates their mean (average), median, mode, standard deviation, minimum,
maximum, etc. You can review the statistical results, insert them into
documents, or use them in calculations, etc. You can also review the data in
the order you entered it, in numeric order or as a frequency table. The data
set can be edited to correct mistakes and can be saved in a file for later use,
to share, or export for use in a database or spreadsheet. You can paste in a
set of numbers copied from a document, as well as being able to import data
from databases and spreadsheets.
There are
two menus for Calculator Statistics ‑ the Data Set Menu and the
Statistical Functions Menu/Statistical Functions Review List. The Data Set Menu
is where data sets are reviewed, saved, loaded and cleared. It also provides
you with the option to turn Data Entry on or off and to paste data from the
clipboard into the data set. The Statistical Functions Menu/Statistical
Functions Review List is for performing numerous statistical operations, such
as finding the mean and the sum of values.
The Data
Set Menu is accessible from anywhere in KeyPlus. To go to the Data Set Menu,
press BACKSPACE with S. The Statistical Functions
Menu/Statistical Functions Review List is also accessible from anywhere in
KeyPlus. To go to the Statistical Functions Menu/Statistical Functions Review
List, press S.
To
perform statistical operations, KeyPlus needs a set of numbers to operate upon.
To avoid confusing these numbers with other numbers in KeyPlus, these numbers
will be referred to as "values", and the set of values KeyPlus
operates on is called "the data set." The number of times a value
occurs is called the "frequency" of the value. When you put a value
and a frequency together, you get a data item. Note that the maximum number of
data items allowed in a data set is 5000.
Once you
have entered a set of values, they remain in KeyPlus until you either
purposefully clear the data set, or load another data set in its place.
In order
to add each individual value one at a time, you will need to turn Data Entry
on. Data Entry is turned on using the first item in the Data Set Menu. To enter
the Data Set Menu, press BACKSPACE with S. Move to the first menu item by
pressing SPACE and KeyPlus will display: "Data entry is off. Turn it on." To turn it on, press ENTER. KeyPlus will display: "Data entry on, N is 0." "N is 0" means there are currently no values in the data set.
You are now back in KeyPlus with the Data Entry on. When you press ENTER after typing a number or performing a
calculation, the number or result of the calculation will be added to the data
set. Alternatively, you can toggle data entry on/off using the hotkey, SPACE with D.
While
Data Entry is on, “N is …” is always displayed after the calculator result. This
tells you the total number of values in the data set and reminds you that Data
Entry is on. If at anytime you want to check that the Data Entry Mode is on or
off, press SPACE with I. KeyPlus will display: "data entry is on, N is (xx)" or "data entry is off."
Once you
have finished entering values or if you need to use the calculator for another
purpose, turn Data Entry off again. To do this, enter the Data Set Menu and
move onto the first item. You will notice that it is now "Data entry is on. Turn it off." To turn it off, press ENTER and you will be returned to the Scientific
Calculator.
There are
4 ways to type individual values into the data set:
1. Entering a single number:
You
can type numbers, for example, type 73 and press ENTER. KeyPlus displays: "seven three equals seventy three", and then pauses before "N is 1", followed by "73 N is 1" is displayed. This shows that the
number 73 has been added to the data set and it now contains one value.
2. Entering the result of a
calculation:
You
can enter the result of a calculation directly into the data set. For example,
type 3 * 6 and press ENTER. KeyPlus displays: "three times six equals eighteen", and then pauses before "N is 2", followed by "18 N is 2" is displayed. This shows that the
number 18 has been added to the data set, which now contains 2 values.
3. Entering a number and how often it
occurs:
If
you know a particular number occurs more than once, you do not have to enter it
multiple times because you can tell KeyPlus in one entry what the number is and
how often it occurs. The number of times a number occurs is called the
frequency of the number. To enter a number and its frequency, type the number,
the frequency command, and then the number of times it occurs. For example, to
input "5", ten times, type "5", the frequency command,
"10" and press ENTER. KeyPlus displays: "five frequency ten" and then pauses before "N is 12", followed by "5; 10 N is 12" is displayed. This shows that the
number 5 has been added ten times to the data set, which now contains 12
values.
A
value followed by its frequency is called a data item.
The
frequency command is:
Nemeth:
dots 4‑5‑6.
UK Braille:
dot 6
UEB: dot 6
It is
displayed in Braille as a semicolon.
4. Pasting numbers from the clipboard:
You
can paste either a single number from the clipboard or a set of numbers.
A
single number can be pasted into the calculator using the standard paste
command, BACKSPACE with V. If any invalid characters are
included, KeyPlus will display: "Value is out of range." Invalid data items include alphanumerical
words, such as ninety‑one; spaces; and mathematical operations.
To paste in a set of numbers use the "Paste clipboard into data set" option in the Data Set Menu. The numbers must be separated by commas. For example, if you are reading a worksheet or text book that instructs you to "Calculate the mean of the following numbers: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5", copy just the numbers, commas, and spaces, to the clipboard, switch to the calculator, enter the Data Set Menu, and select the "paste clipboard into data set" option. If any invalid characters are included, KeyPlus will display: "Discarded invalid data items. N is xx."
You can
import data from a file that has been saved in Comma Separated Values (CSV)
format. Most spreadsheets and databases have this as an option when saving or
exporting data. Note that in this file, the data items must be listed so that
the value comes before the frequency. For example:
73,2
58,2
38,1
The data
is presented in a list with one value and in its associated frequency per line.
Also, the numbers are written in digits rather than words. Note that you do not
need to include the frequency on each or any line. For example, your list could
include:
73,2
58
38,1
or
73
58
38
When
importing data, any lines containing invalid data are ignored and importing
continues.
If any
invalid data items are included, KeyPlus will display: "Discarded invalid data items, N is xx." Otherwise, KeyPlus will display: "N is xx."
To start
the process of importing data, you will need to access the Data Set Menu. To do
this, press BACKSPACE with S and select the "Load another Data Set" option.
If the
data set has been modified prior to being loaded, KeyPlus will display: "Existing data set has been modified. Save?." If you would like to save the modifications, press Y. You will be prompted to select the file in
which to save the data set and the data set will be saved.
KeyPlus
will then prompt: "Name of data set to load?". Type a file name or select the
file containing the data set and press ENTER. KeyPlus will prompt: "Replace existing data set or append new data to existing data set?". If you select "replace", the existing data set will be
cleared before the selected data set is loaded. If you select "append", the loaded data will be added to
the existing data set.
All the
existing data items in the current data set will now be added or replaced and
KeyPlus will prompt: "N is xx" and at the same time, a series of progress
beeps may be heard if there is a reasonable amount of data items to add or
replace. Note that the "xx" in "N is xx", represents the new sample size,
which will either be the size of the imported data set, or the total of the
previous sample size combined with the sample size of the imported data,
depending on whether you choose the "Replace" or "Append"
option.
As
described above, when Data Entry is on the result of a calculation is added to
the data set when you press ENTER. There is a way to perform
calculations while Data Entry is on, without entering the result into the data
set. To find the result of a calculation without entering it into the data set,
press dots 1‑2‑3‑4‑5‑6 (Nemeth), dots 2‑3‑5‑6
(UK Braille and UEB) instead of ENTER. If you then want to add the result
to the data set, press ENTER.
The
purpose of clearing the data set is to allow you to begin with a new set of
data items. To clear the data set, go to the Data Set Menu by pressing BACKSPACE with S and select the "Clear Data
Set" option. If the data set has been modified prior to being cleared,
KeyPlus will display: "Existing data set has been modified. Save?." If you would like to save the modifications, press Y. You will then be
prompted with: "Name of data set to save?." Type an appropriate name for the data set and press ENTER. KeyPlus will display: "Clear Data Set. Sure?." To clear all the existing data items in the data set, press Y. If you have performed any statistical
calculations, these will also be cleared at this point.
KeyPlus
uses the data you enter to calculate the values for the following statistical
functions. Also listed is the hot key that you use for each function in the
Statistical Functions Review List and the Statistical Functions Menu.
1. Sample size (N); hotkey N.
2. Arithmetic mean; hotkey M.
3. Median; hotkey D.
4. Mode; hotkey O.
5. Minimum; hotkey I.
6. Maximum; hotkey X.
7. Sample Standard deviation; hotkey S.
8. Population Standard deviation; hotkey P.
9. Sum of values; hotkey V.
10. Sum of the square of the values;
hotkey Q.
For
definitions of the above statistical functions, refer to 8.4.10 Definitions of Statistical Terms.
At any
time while you are entering data or once you have finished, you can review the
results of the statistical functions by pressing S. What happens next depends on whether or not Data Entry is on.
When Data
Entry is on, the Statistical Functions Review List is displayed and you can
review the statistical results an item at a time by pressing SPACE repeatedly, or jump directly to a particular
result by pressing its hot key.
When Data
Entry is off, the Statistical Functions Menu is displayed. This allows you to
review the statistical results by pressing SPACE repeatedly, as well as to select any result for use in a calculation.
To select any result for use in a calculation, either press ENTER when the result is displayed or enter the menu
and press the hot key. For example, to calculate the mean plus 2 times the
standard deviation, follow these steps:
1. In the calculator ensure Data Entry
is off and the calculator is cleared.
2. To enter the mean, select the
Statistical Functions Menu by pressing S. You can then either move along to “Mean” and press ENTER or just press the hot key for mean, which is M. You will be returned to the calculator with
the mean inserted into your calculation.
3. Enter “plus 2 times” and insert the
standard deviation by selecting the “Sample standard deviation” from the
Statistical Functions Menu again. You will once again be returned to the
calculator and the sample standard deviation will now be inserted into your
calculation.
4. Finally press ENTER to obtain the result.
To use a
statistical result in another KeySoft application, use the clipboard. Simply
review the result in the Statistical Functions Review List or the Statistical
Functions Menu and copy the value to the clipboard by pressing BACKSPACE with K. Insert the result and paste the
clipboard into the Word Processor, via the Block Commands Menu. Otherwise, move
to the application in which you want to insert the result and paste the clipboard
by pressing BACKSPACE with V.
It is often easy to accidentally enter the wrong items or add data that is already in the data set. Also, you will often want to review your data using a method that differs from how the data was entered. KeyPlus offers three different ways to review your data:
1. The order you entered the data.
2. The frequency order.
3. The numeric order.
KeyPlus
has a Data Set Review Mode in which you can review the data, and if Data Entry
is on, make changes. To enter the Data Set Review Mode, go to the Data Set Menu
by pressing BACKSPACE with S and select Review Data Set. KeyPlus
displays: “Data Set Review Mode. Entry Order” followed by the last data entry. To
exit Data Set Review Mode and return to your calculation, press SPACE with E.
You can
review your data using the following commands:
To go to
the previous data item, press BACKSPACE.
To go to
the next data item, press SPACE.
To go to
the first data item in the data set, press SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3.
To go to
the last data item in the data set, press SPACE with dots 4‑5‑6.
To find
to a specific number in the data set, press SPACE with F, followed by the number and press ENTER.
To find
the next occurrence of the same number in the data set, press SPACE with N.
To change
the order in which the data items are presented, press SPACE with V. KeyPlus will prompt: "View data in which order? Currently Entry Order." Select the order you require. There are 3
options:
1. Entry Order (hotkey E) ‑ lists the data items in the order
that data was entered.
2. Frequency Order (hotkey F) ‑ lists the data items by frequency, in
descending order. This lets you review your data set in a frequency table
format. For details on how to generate a frequency table, refer to 8.4.9 Generating a Frequency Table.
3. Numerical Order (hotkey N) ‑ lists the data items by numerical
values, in ascending order.
If you
change the order in which your data items are presented, KeyPlus will prompt: "Sorting data set items, please wait…Data set sorted."
While
reviewing your data, you may discover an incorrect entry that you want to edit
or delete. To edit or delete data, Data Entry must be on and you must be in
entry view.
To edit
the current data item, use KeySoft’s editing commands to make the cursor
appear. Move the cursor, insert or delete, as required. When you have completed
the edit, press ENTER. The item in the data set is now
changed.
To delete
the current data item, press BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4. KeyPlus will provide a
confirmation prompt and if you confirm the deletion, will delete the current
number and the frequency it occurs from the data set. It will then display the
next data item. For example, if the current item is “5 frequency 4”, "Delete 5 frequency 4. Sure?", will be displayed. If you press Y, the data item will be removed, and the unit
will display the next data item in the list.
Saving
data sets to files means that you can have multiple data sets and whichever one
you require when you need it. You can also share data sets with other
BrailleNote users and transfer them to PC or other systems to use from within
spreadsheets or databases. You can insert them into documents as frequency
tables, and so on.
To save
the data set, go to the Data Set Menu by pressing BACKSPACE with S and select "Save Data
Set". If you have not previously saved a data set, KeyPlus will prompt: "Destination folder name? Press ENTER for Calculator Data Sets." Calculator Data Sets is offered as a handy place to keep your data. It
is first created when you save a data set for the first time. Select this
folder or another in the usual way. To change the drive on which this data set
will be saved, press BACKSPACE. KeyPlus then prompts: "Name of data set to save?." If the data set was previously saved, KeyPlus will provide you with the
most recently used data set name. Select the name offered by pressing ENTER or type an appropriate name for the data set
and press ENTER. Note that a series of progress
beeps may be heard if there is a large number of data items to save. The data
set will be saved and you will be returned to the calculator.
Data sets
are saved in Comma Separated Values (CSV) format files. The first line of the
file contains the words "Value" and "Frequency" separated
by a comma and each subsequent line contains a value and a frequency separated
by a comma. When you save a data set, the order of the data in the CSV file is
the same as the order you currently have set for Review Mode.
A
frequency table can be automatically made up from the data set.
To review
your data set in a frequency table format, enter the Review Mode by selecting
"Review Data Set" from the Data Set Menu. KeyPlus displays: “Data Set Review Mode. Entry Order” followed by the last data entry.
You now need to change the view to Frequency Order. To change the order in
which the data items are presented, press SPACE with V. KeyPlus will prompt: "View data in which order? Currently Entry Order." Type F or "frequency" to select
the Frequency Order. The data items are now ordered by frequency, in descending
order.
You can then save the data items using the save option (as described in 8.4.8 Saving the Data Set). Once saved, go to the document and use Block Insert (that, is the "Insert a File" option in the Block Commands Menu) to insert the CSV file into your document or to the clipboard. You can now reformat the data, as required.
As you
probably know, Statistics is a mathematical science pertaining to collection,
analysis, interpretation and presentation of data.
Below are
the terms that you will need to be familiar with in order to effectively use
the statistics function of KeySoft.
VALUE: A
value is a number that is a measurable amount or quantity. In statistics, a set
of values is what makes up a data set.
FREQUENCY:
The frequency is the number of times a value occurs and is represented by the
letter N.
DATA
ITEM: A data item is made up of a "value" and a
"frequency".
DATA SET
as represented by the symbols left set or opening curly brace, a group of
numbers with commas in between them and right set or closing curly brace to
close the set, that is {,,,}: The section of a population which is observed.
For
example, the number of goals scored in a hockey tournament is represented by
the following data set:
{0, 0, 0,
0, 1, 1, 1, 2, 2, 2, 2, 3, 3, 3, 3, 3, 4, 4, 4, 5, 5, 5}
We can
represent the above data set as follows:
Number of
goals = 0; Frequency = 4
Number of
goals = 1; Frequency = 3
Number of
goals = 2; Frequency = 4
Number of
goals = 3; Frequency = 5
Number of
goals = 4; Frequency = 3
Number of
goals =5; Frequency = 3
It is
often faster to enter a data set into the calculator by entering the value and
frequency together. For example, rather than typing the value of 0 four times,
we can type the value of 0 followed by a frequency separator, followed by the frequency.
Once the
above data is entered into the calculator, we can access the statistical
functions menu to find out the average score, the most common score, how many
games were played, etc.
MAXIMUM:
The maximum is the highest value in the data set.
MEAN as
represented by the Greek letter symbol, mu, italicized x with a bar above it, m
or mean values: For a data set, the mean is the same as the average. It is the
sum of all the values divided by the number of values. For example, the mean or
average of 2, 3, 3, 5, 7 and 10, is 30 divided by 6, which is equal to 5.
MEDIAN:
In statistics, a median is the middle number in a group of numbers. At most,
half the numbers in the group have values that are greater than the median, and
half have values less than the median. For example, the median of 2, 3, 3, 5, 7
and 10, is equal to 4.
MODE: The
mode is the value that has the largest frequency. For example, the mode of 2,
3, 3, 5, 7, and 10, is 3. Note that there may be more than one mode in the data
set or no mode at all if every number occurs to the same frequency. Where there
is more than one mode, use the Frequency Order in review mode to view them.
SAMPLE
SIZE as represented by the letter N:
The sample size is the total number of values in the data set.
POPULATION
STANDARD DEVIATION as represented by sigma, sigma with subscript n, or
italicized x with sigma and subscript n:
The population standard deviation is a measurement of the variability of data
in a population. In statistics, Population refers to a set of potential
measurements or values, including not only cases actually observed but those
that are potentially observable.
SAMPLE
STANDARD DEVIATION as represented by italicized s, sigma with subscript n minus
1, or italicized x with sigma and subscript n minus 1: The sample standard
deviation is a measurement of the variability of data in a sample. A sample
differs from a population in that it is the part of a statistical population
which is actually observed. Note that this type of standard deviation is the
most commonly requested when the standard deviation is required in an equation.
SUM OF
VALUES as represented by capital sigma italicized, italicized x followed by
subscript n: The sum of values is the total you get when all the individual
values in the data set are added together.
SUM OF
THE SQUARE OF VALUES as represented by capital sigma italicized with italicized
x followed by superscript two and subscript n: The sum of the square of values
is the result you get when each individual value is squared (that is,
multiplied by itself) and all the squares are added together.
There are
10 separate memories for storing conversion factors, partial results, etc. They
are numbered 0 to 9. The commands for memory number 1, for example, are as
follows:
Clear
memory 1: press SPACE with K, then 1.
Store
number in memory 1: press SPACE with S, then 1.
Add to
memory 1: press SPACE with A, then 1.
Recall
contents of memory 1: press SPACE with M then 1.
Display
contents of memory, but do not use in calculation: press M, then 1.
These
commands are now discussed in more detail.
This operation clears the particular memory immediately, and can be used at any time when you are entering a calculation or when a result is displayed. For example, to clear memory 5, press SPACE with K, KeySoft prompts "Clear which memory?". Type 5. You are returned to your calculation.
This
completes the current calculation and stores the result in a memory. For
example, to calculate the result of 3 + 5 and store it in Memory 4, type: 3 + 5 SPACE with S 4.
When you
press SPACE with S, the letter S is displayed on the
Braille display and "Store memory" is spoken.
The
resulting value of 8 is stored in memory number 4.
This
completes the current calculation and adds the result to the existing contents
of a memory. For instance, after the previous example, Memory 4 contains 8. Now
to calculate 9 divided by 5, and to add the result to Memory 4, press : 9 / 5 SPACE with A 4.
When you
press SPACE with A, the letter A is displayed on the
Braille display and "Accumulate memory" is spoken.
The calculation is evaluated, resulting in 1.8. This is then added to Memory 4, to give a value in Memory 4 of 9.8. (Assuming Memory 4 already contains 8).
This is
used to recall the value in a memory and insert it into the calculation. For
example, to divide the contents of Memory 4 by 5, and store the result in
Memory 1, press: SPACE with M 4 / 5 SPACE with S 1.
When you
press SPACE with M, the letter M is displayed on the
Braille display and "Recall memory" is spoken.
The
calculation is evaluated, resulting in 9.8 / 4 = 2.45. This is stored in Memory 1.
This is
used to display the value in a memory at any time without affecting the current
calculation. For example, to display the value in Memory 4, press M. KeyPlus prompts "Display which memory?" Type 4. The value in Memory 4 is displayed as "Memory 4: 9.8" To return to the calculation, press
ADVANCE, or continue entering it.
Trigonometric,
logarithmic and exponential functions are available, as well as squares, square
roots, powers and roots.
The
trigonometric functions can be calculated in either degrees or radians. To
select degrees press T, then D, to select radians press T, then R. A setting stays in effect until it
is superseded by another.
A two‑character
sequence is used to select a trig function. Sine, cos and tan are preceded by T, and the inverse functions are preceded by SPACE with T. In both cases a menu is displayed.
For sine:
press T, then S.
For
cosine: press T, then C.
For
tangent: press T, then T.
For arc
sine: press SPACE with T, then S.
For arc
cosine: press SPACE with T, then C.
For arc
tangent: press SPACE with T, then T.
For PI:
press Y.
For
example, to calculate the sine of 30 degrees, type
T S 3 0
followed
by ENTER. The result "0.5" is
displayed.
(Note:
The result is calculated in either radians or degrees, depending on your
current selection.)
Note that
the function applies only to the number immediately following. If you wanted to
find the sine of the sum of two 15 degree angles, for example, you must put
brackets around the addition as follows:
T S ( 1 5 + 1 5 ) ENTER.
The
result "0.5" is displayed.
To
calculate the Arc Tangent of 2, type:
SPACE with T T 2
followed
by ENTER. The result "63.43495" is
displayed.
To
calculate the cosine of PI radians divided by 3, type:
T, then R T C ( Y / 3 )
followed by ENTER. The result "0.5" is displayed.
The
square root operator precedes its number, while the squared operator occurs
after its number, following the written form.
For
"square root", press:
Nemeth: dots 3‑4‑5
UK Braille dots 1‑4‑6
UEB: dots 1‑4‑6.
For
"squared", press
Nemeth: SPACE with dots 3‑4‑5.
UK Braille: dots 2‑3.
UEB: SPACE with 1‑4‑6.
Examples:
To
calculate the square root of the sum of 3 squared plus 4 squared, type:
Nemeth: dots 3‑4‑5 ( 3 SPACE with dots 3‑4‑5 + 4 SPACE with dots 3‑4‑5) followed by ENTER. The result "5" is displayed.
UK
Braille: dots 1‑4‑6 ( 3 dots 2‑3 + 4 dots 2‑3 ) followed by ENTER. The result "5" is displayed.
UEB: dots 1‑4‑6 ( 3 SPACE with dots 1‑4‑6 + 4 SPACE with dots 1‑4‑6) followed by ENTER. The result "5" is displayed.
Very
large or very small numbers are often expressed in scientific notation as a
power of 10. For example, the number 4000 is equal to 4 * 1000, which may be
written as 4 * 10 to the power of 3. This number can be entered into a
calculation by pressing: 4 x 3 ‑ where x is the letter x.
Similarly,
the number 0.05 can be entered by pressing 5 x SPACE with dots 3‑6 2.
These
functions are assigned as follows:
x to the
power of y, press:
Nemeth: dots 4‑5.
UK Braille: dots 3‑4‑6.
UEB: dots 3‑5.
If
required by the braille code, KeyPlus automatically adds in the index
termination sign to show when the calculation returns to the base level.
x to the
power of 1/y, press:
Nemeth:
dots SPACE with dots 4‑5.
UK
Braille: SPACE with dots 3‑4‑6.
UEB: SPACE with dots 3‑5.
Once
again, if required by the braille code, KeyPlus automatically adds in the index
termination sign to show when the calculation returns to the base level.
Parentheses
can be used where x or y is a compound expression. For example, to calculate 2
to the power of 6 + 8, type:
Nemeth: 2 dots 4‑5 (6+8) followed by ENTER.
UK
Braille: 2 dots 3‑4‑6 (6+8) followed by ENTER.
UEB: 2 dots 3‑5 (6+8) followed by ENTER.
The result "16,384" is displayed.
The
following log functions are provided:
For log
to base 10: press L. dots 1‑2‑4‑6 L.
For 10 to
the power of: press SPACE with L.
For log
to base e, or natural log: press N.
For e to
the power of: press SPACE with N.
Examples:
To
calculate the log to base e of 10, and save the result in Memory 2, type:
N 1 0 SPACE with S 2 followed by ENTER. The result "2.302585" is displayed.
Now to
calculate e to the power of 2.302585, type:
SPACE with N SPACE with M 2 followed by ENTER. The result "10" is displayed.
Suppose
that you are writing a letter, and you want to do a calculation and include the
result or the whole calculation in the letter. How would you do that?
You could
do the calculation before starting the letter. Alternatively, you could begin
the letter and then use the Task Menu to switch from the Word Processor to the
calculator, do the sum and then switch back to the letter.
When you
get to the point in the letter where you want to include the result of your
calculation or the whole calculation, press SPACE with O for the Options Menu. From the Options Menu,
select the Insert option, then from the Insert Menu, select the Calculator
result or Calculation option. KeyPlus prompts: "Insert result or whole calculation?" For the result, press R, or for the whole calculation, press C.
The most
recent result or calculation from the calculator is inserted into the document,
which saves you having to remember and re‑type it.
End of
Scientific Calculator Chapter.
KeyPlan
is a page‑per‑day planner, which allows you to make notes and
reminders for each day of the year. You can also enter appointments for
particular times, reschedule them, and include an audible alarm with any
appointment. Appointments can be single events or recurring right out until the
year 9999. And all of this information can be shared with Microsoft Outlook's
calendar via a synchronization function we call KeySync, which is discussed in
detail in 14.16 KeySync.
The
commands you use with the planner are similar to those used in KeyWord. Planner
pages are formatted as Braille documents, and you can use grade 1, grade 2, or
Computer Braille as you wish.
To enter
the Planner, select it from the Main Menu by pressing P. This will take you to the KeyPlan Menu. Or you
can open the Planner directly from anywhere in KeySoft by pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER with P.
When you
select the Planner from the Main Menu, your BrailleNote BT displays "KeyPlan Menu."
Open
planner;
Emboss
Planner;
Print
Planner;
Setup
options;
KeyPlan
Maintenance Utility.
If you
want to make entries in the planner or review its contents, choose "Open planner." This option is described first. If
you enter the Planner by pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER with P, you will go directly to the
"Open Planner" option.
When you
select the "Open" option, KeyPlan displays: "Day? Press ENTER for (today's date)."
Before
pressing ENTER, you can choose a different date by
either typing it in as described in
9.3.1 Entering the Date, or by moving around the calendar,
as follows:
By day
back or forward, use SPACE with dot 3 or dot 6;
By
week, use SPACE with dots 2 or 5;
By
month, use SPACE with dots 1 or 4;
By
year, use SPACE with dots 2‑3 or 5‑6.
When the
required date is displayed, press ENTER to select it.
Instead
of moving around the calendar to find the required date, you can Braille a date
as:
25 dec 06, or
dec 25 06.
To avoid
ambiguity, precede each group of numbers with the number sign as shown, which
is dots 3‑4‑5‑6.
You can
use a 3‑letter abbreviation for the month, such as:
25 dec 06.
Or you
can type the month name in full:
25 december 06
december 25 06
You can
also use numbers separated by a number sign in the form:
25 12 06. or
12 25 06, depending on the KeySoft date format
you have set.
If you
omit the year, then the current year is assumed.
When you
have selected or Brailled the date, press ENTER and you are placed in the required planner page. If you have selected
today's date, the cursor is placed at the beginning of the next appointment for
today, if one exists. This allows you to check your next appointment very
quickly. For other dates, the cursor will be at the top of the page, ahead of
any existing entries.
There is a quick way of going directly to today's date from anywhere in the planner. Whatever day you are currently on, if in the Planner itself, return to the calendar by pressing SPACE with E. At the prompt "KeyPlan Calendar. Date? Press ENTER for (date)", type "today" and press ENTER. This will take you directly to today's planner page.
The
planner is laid out as a page‑per‑day desk planner. Each day starts
on a new page. The date appears on the first line. On the next line are any
general notes or reminders that can use as many lines as required. These are
called "all‑day events" and are not associated with any
particular time.
The
scheduled appointments then follow. Each of these starts on a new line, and
begins with a time. The appointment details follow on the same line.
Here is
an example:
"Friday
January 27 2006
All day:
Mike's Birthday.
All day:
Sarah in interviews all day
Don't
forget to clear her voice‑mail.
10:00‑11:00
am Team meeting
12:30‑1:15
pm Lunch with Bob
7:30‑11:00
pm Movies Return of the King
Reading
2, meeting in foyer."
When an
appointment is scheduled or rescheduled, it is placed on the correct page, and
is sorted into time order with other entries.
Notes are
recorded as all‑day events and KeyPlan precedes them with the words
"all‑day:". They are not associated with any
particular time during that day.
To make
notes on any page of the planner, first select the date. The cursor is placed
ahead of any text that may already be on the page. If the page is blank, then
just start typing. If there is already text on the page, check that the cursor
is in the right place before typing. As soon as you start typing, KeyPlan will
automatically schedule an all‑day event for you. You can move the cursor
to a different point in the text by using the cursor movement commands. These
are similar to KeyWord commands.
When you
have finished typing an entry, you do not need to press ENTER unless you require a new line.
If you
have selected today's date, the cursor is placed on a scheduled appointment, if
one exists. You can use the cursor movement commands to move the cursor, or you
can go to the top of the page by pressing SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3.
You can
set up an all‑day event with the properties of an appointment, such as
recurrence, or being marked as busy or out of office. Please note that the
default setting for All‑Day appointments is set to "free" as it
is in MS Outlook. This is because typically people use this function for events
such as traveling, birthdays or other anniversaries, and reminders rather than
actual appointments where they will be busy. Remember that All‑Day means
midnight to midnight, not just 8am to 5pm. This means that the All‑Day
event or appointment alarm will go off at midnight! To prevent this from
happening, either set a warning time so that the alarm goes off the day before,
or schedule a reminder appointment instead.
If you
have already set up the all‑day event, put the cursor into the text.
Select Review or Modify this appointment by pressing BACKSPACE with R. This will give you all of the
scheduling options.
If you
are setting the appointment up from scratch, when scheduling the appointment,
specify an appointment time of L for all‑day. From there
continue as normal. Full directions on scheduling an appointment can be found in 9.4 Scheduling Appointments.
An
appointment is made up of a group of settings that the user defines. These
include date, start time, end time, title, location etc. The process of
scheduling an appointment is basically going through the list of these settings
and defining each setting.
You don't
have to go through all the settings to make an appointment, in fact they are
ordered so that you cover the mandatory settings first and can exit and save by
pressing SPACE with E at any point after you have set the
date, time, and title. Like all lists in KeySoft, you can move back and forward
by pressing BACK or BACKSPACE and SPACE or ADVANCE. However, if you follow the
procedure below, you will see that KeyPlan steps you through the settings
logically and easily. If you wish to change any setting you have made before
exiting and saving, use the back and forward commands to return to the setting
and make the change.
KeyPlan
assumes you wish to schedule the appointment on the date of the planner page
you are currently in, and so jumps directly to the time setting.
To
schedule an appointment in KeyPlan, follow this procedure:
1. From any planner page, select
Schedule an appointment by pressing SPACE with dots 2‑6.
2. KeyPlan prompts: "Appointment time?."
The
way you enter appointment times should agree with the setting of 12 or 24 hour
format, which is displayed when you press SPACE with H. You can enter a time without using
number signs, in the form:
hh:mm where "hh" is hours and
"mm" is minutes, separated by a colon. You can abbreviate an entry
with fewer digits or no colon if it is unambiguous. In 12 hour format, follow
the minutes by a space and then a or p, to denote a.m. and p.m. Note that if you use an abbreviated form for
an a.m. time, for example 7a for 7:00 am, type a letter sign before the a or it
will be read as a 1. And if you forget to type a or p, KeySoft will prompt you to do so.
For an all‑day event, type L instead of a time.
Before
you enter a time, you can change the day or date of your appointment by
pressing BACKSPACE.
KeySoft
prompts: "Appointment Day? Press ENTER for (current day and date)."
A
calendar is being presented. If the offered date is correct, just press ENTER. Otherwise, move around the calendar to the
required date, or type it, and then press ENTER.
3. KeySoft prompts: "End time or length? Press ENTER for (time) 30 minutes." where (time) is the time 30 minutes
after the appointment time. The default length is 30 minutes, but you can
change this. You can type a number by itself for minutes, or follow the number
with h for a number of hours, d for days or w for weeks. For h and d, put a letter sign or space between the number – this is not necessary
for m and w. To enter a finishing time, type the time in the same format as the
appointment time.
Press
ENTER to go to the next field. Note: If
you want to set a different end date, you can either press BACKSPACE as soon as you hear the End Time or length
prompt, or set the end time and then press BACKSPACE twice.
4. KeySoft prompts: "Appointment title?."
Type
the reason for this appointment and press ENTER. If necessary, you can add more notes about this
appointment after you have finished scheduling it.
5. KeySoft then prompts: "Location?."
This
is not a mandatory field. Either type the location and press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.
6. KeySoft prompts: "Recurrence? Press ENTER for once."
For a
one off appointment, press ENTER. For more information on recurring
appointments, refer to 9.5 Recurring Appointments.
7. KeySoft prompts: "Set an alarm on this appointment? Press ENTER for N."
If
you do not, press N. If you want to set an alarm, press Y, and KeySoft prompts: "Warning time? Press ENTER for n (time),"
where
"n" is the suggested interval of time
(for example 30 minutes) and (time) is the actual time at which it would ring
(for example 7:30pm). To change the setting, type either a time in the usual
format, or a number of minutes, or a number followed by h for hours, d for days or w for weeks. For h and d, put a letter sign or space before the letter – this is not necessary
for m and w. Press ENTER.
8. KeySoft then prompts: "Show time as? Press ENTER for busy."
The
options are free = f, tentative = t, busy = b and out of office = o. These settings let you know the
level of availability you will have with this appointment. If you select
"free", you will be able to schedule an overlapping appointment
without any reminders from KeySoft. For the other options, KeySoft will remind
you at the time setting and at the point of saving the appointment, but it
won't prevent you from scheduling it.
9. KeySoft then prompts: "Mark as Private? Press ENTER for No". To mark as Private, press Y.
10. KeySoft prompts: "End of List". At this point, to schedule the appointment, press SPACE with E. KeySoft prompts: "Schedule this appointment?" Press Y or N. KeySoft displays: "Appointment scheduled."
The
time is inserted in the planner page, on a new line, followed by the title and
location. The appointment is sorted into the correct time order for the current
date, and the cursor is placed just after the new entry.
You can
make notes on any appointment at any time by placing the cursor in the time and
title line and pressing ENTER. From there, simply type your
notes. If you have only just scheduled the appointment, the cursor will already
be in the time and title line.
When the
notes are complete, you will exit when you press SPACE with E, which will take you to the top of the day, or
perform any other command such as Scheduling another appointment, using any
"go to" or "move" commands etc.
To make another entry, press SPACE with dots 2‑6 again. The new entry is sorted into order with existing entries. You can set as many appointments as you wish.
A
recurring appointment is one that is repeated in a regular pattern of times
determined by the user. You can schedule your appointment according to dates,
or patterns of days, weeks, months or years – for example an event may be on
the 25th of every month, or on the third Thursday of
every month, or every 25th of March, or every day at 9am, etc.
There is a pattern of recurrence to cover just about every type of recurring
event you could think of.
For the
sake of clarity, we will refer to any use of calendar days as dates – for
example the 6th or the 23rd, and we will use the word "pattern" to describe other
intervals such as the third Friday in the month, or the last Thursday in
November.
Apart
from "once" which of course is not recurring at all, the options for
a recurring event are: Daily, Weekly, Monthly or Yearly. Each of these is
described and relevant instructions given below.
Daily
means any pattern based on a number of days. This could be every day, or every
second day, every 5 days etc.
At the prompt “Days between occurrences? Press ENTER for 1 day(s)". The default setting is 1 day. To change this, type the number of days of your choice. For example, for every second day, type 2.
Weekly
means any recurring event that happens weekly, or in a weekly pattern. For
example, every Monday, every week day, or every second week on a Thursday.
At the
prompt “Recur on which days? Press ENTER for x y z" where x y z are any days you
require, type any of the following, with a space between if more than one (and
in any order):
Sunday =
Su; Monday = Mo; Tuesday = Tu; Wednesday = We; Thursday = Th; Friday = Fr;
Saturday = Sa; every day = v; weekdays = d (Monday through Friday) and weekend
days = e (Saturday and Sunday).
For
example, if your appointment is every Monday, Tuesday and Thursday, you would
type "Mo Tu Th". If it were every Saturday and Sunday, type
"e" for weekend days.
Note: you can type initial letters only for Monday,
Wednesday or Friday as they are the only day names starting with M, W or F. You
can also type more or all of the name of a day, for example, Thurs or Thursday.
At the
prompt “Weeks between occurrences? Press ENTER for n” type the number of weeks if different from the
default n. For example if it occurs weekly, type 1, if it occurs every two
weeks, type 2 etc.
Monthly
recurrence includes dates, or patterns of days or weeks scheduled on a monthly
basis.
For
example, every 20th of the month, or every third Thursday, or the second week,
or even the last weekend day, are all monthly events.
1. When you select Monthly, KeyPlan
prompts: "Recur on day x of the month?" where x is the date you originally selected. To choose this option press Y for Yes then go to step 4, otherwise press N and go to step 2.
2. KeyPlan prompts: “Week of recurrence? Press ENTER for x”.
where x is the correct week for the original date selected. The options are: first, second, third, fourth, last. Either press ENTER, or cycle through the options using SPACE with dots 3‑4, or press the hotkey for your choice. These are: first = 1; second = 2; third = 3; fourth = 4; last = l. No number sign required. Press ENTER.
3. KeyPlan prompts: “Day of recurrence? Press ENTER for x” where x is the day of the week of the original
date selected. Options are the days of the week, weekday, weekend day, or day
(refer to note above). To make a selection, cycle through by pressing SPACE with dots 3‑4 then ENTER.
4. KeySoft then prompts “Months between occurrences? Press ENTER for n” where n is 1 by default. Either press ENTER or type the new number and then press ENTER.
When
setting a yearly recurring event, you have a choice of a date, or a month based
pattern.
You
already selected a date when setting up the appointment initially, for example
every 8 February. KeyPlan prompts: "Recur on February 8 each year? Press ENTER for Yes."
For Yes,
press ENTER as stated.
If you
want to schedule a pattern, press N for No. KeyPlan assumes you have scheduled the
correct month in the beginning. KeyPlan prompts: “Week of recurrence? Press ENTER for x.”
The
options are: first, second, third, fourth, last. Either press ENTER, or cycle through the options using SPACE with dots 3‑4, or press the hotkey for your
choice. These are: first = 1; second = 2; third = 3; fourth = 4; last = l. No number sign required. Press ENTER.
KeySoft
prompts: “Day of recurrence? Press ENTER for x.”
where x
is the day of the selected appointment date. Options are the days of the week,
weekday, weekend day, or day. To make a selection, cycle through by pressing SPACE with dots 3‑4 then ENTER.
Having
set up the pattern, KeyPlan now wishes to know how many times the event will
recur. You have four choices: “End of recurrence? Press ENTER for none”,
"None"
– With this option, the event will recur right out until the end of 9999.
“# occurrences” – with this option, type the
number of times the event recurs in digits, the maximum being 999.
“date”
–With this option, type in the date when you wish the last recurring event to
occur, or to occur before, in usual date format. If the date you select does
not fall in the recurring pattern, the last appointment will be the one
immediately before it. For example, if your appointment is always on the second
Tuesday of the month, but you specify 31 December 2006 as the end date, the
last recurrence will be the second Tuesday of December 2005, which is the 12th.
"length"
– You can specify the length of time by a number of days or weeks. To do this,
type the number and then D or M, for example 6 weeks is 6w and 15 days is 15d. Or, you can press the
relevant hotkey as many times as the number. The hotkeys are: Days = SPACE with dot 6; Weeks = SPACE with dot 5; Months = SPACE with dot 4; Years = SPACE with dot 5‑6. For example, for six months, press
SPACE with dot 4 six times. Press ENTER.
At this
point you will be back into the normal Scheduling appointment procedure.
If you
are using KeySync to synchronize your calendar with MS Outlook's, you will find
that recurring appointments that "come across" from Outlook will take
exactly the same form as above, and you can modify and change them as you wish
in KeyPlan.
It is
very likely that you will want to move through the occurrences of a recurring
appointment, and there are commands to do this that work when the cursor is in
the time and title line of an instance of the appointment.
To move
to the next occurrence of the appointment, press SPACE with N. To move to the previous occurrence, press SPACE with dots 2‑3‑6.
These
notes explain how recurring appointments behave differently to ordinary
appointments in the following circumstances:
In a
recurring appointment, the alarm warning time must be shorter than the interval
between occurrences. For example – recurring appointment is 5pm daily, a
warning time of 25 hours would have the alarm sound before the previous
occurrence of the recurring appointment.
If you
modify just one instance of a recurring appointment in any way at all, it
creates an exception. If later you then modify the date, start or end time,
and/or recurrence interval of all recurrences of that same appointment, the
exception will be overwritten by a normal instance.
When
reviewing or modifying just one instance of a recurring appointment, the
privacy setting is not offered for modification. This is because Outlook
doesn't allow exceptions to this setting. However when reviewing or modifying
all occurrences, then you can change it.
Most
KeySoft review commands are available in the planner, but two groups of commands
are unique:
To read
all planner entries for the:
Previous
day: SPACE with dots 2‑3;
Current
day: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6;
Next
day: SPACE with dots 5‑6.
To
read the planner entries within a particular day:
Previous
entry: SPACE with dot 1;
Current
entry: SPACE with dots 1‑4;
Next
entry: SPACE with dot 4.
These
actions will read one complete appointment, or all‑day event. The
previous and next commands will move the cursor to the beginning of the new
appointment or line.
Repeated
use of the previous or next commands will move the cursor through the planner.
A beep will indicate that there are no more entries to read in the calendar.
Note: The calendar goes out to the year 9999, so it might pay to put an end
time on recurring appointments if you ever want to hear that beep! Note however
that if the cursor is in the notes of an appointment, these commands will take
you to the next, previous or current sentence or line, as they do in KeyWord.
To move
the cursor to the top or the bottom of the current day, press SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3, or SPACE with dots 4‑5‑6.
Likewise,
when in the notes of an appointment, these commands will take you to the top or
bottom of the notes.
To speak
continuously, press SPACE with G.
To stop
the BrailleNote BT speaking at any time, press BACKSPACE with ENTER.
To
confirm the date of the current planner page, and how many days away from
today's date, press SPACE with wh sign (dots 1‑5‑6).
Press
this command again to get the interval of time stated in weeks and days. Note:
These two commands can be used to check how much time there is to go in the
year or how much time has passed, simply by using the 1st January or the 31st
December of the current year as the reference dates.
You can
check the details of your next appointment from any point in KeySoft, without
losing your place in your current activity. To do this, press ENTER with N. This command recognizes appointments
showing their time as busy, out of office or tentative, but not those marked as
free. KeyPlan will tell you whether you have any, any more, no, or no more
appointments for the day, if you are in a current appointment time, when the
next appointment is and on what date and time, and when the next alarm is
scheduled for if it is not associated with the next appointment.
When you
are finished you are returned to the same place in your original activity.
The other
way of checking just your current or next appointment for the current day is to
enter the planner and select today's date in the calendar. This places you at
the current or next appointment of the day, if there is one.
Overlapping
appointments occur when two appointments are scheduled with an overlapping
start or end time. KeyPlan only recognizes appointments as overlapping if
neither are set to show their time as free. As mentioned before, KeyPlan will
warn you that you are about to schedule an overlapping appointment but won't
stop you from doing so. And of course the synchronization process may also
cause overlapping appointments. This is discussed fully in 14.16.5.1 Overlapping Appointments.
While in
the planner, you can find the next or previous occurrence of an overlapping
appointment. The commands are:
Go to
next overlapping appointment: SPACE with dots 3‑4‑5‑6.
Go to
previous overlapping appointment: SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3‑6.
When you
go to the overlapping appointment, KeyPlan will display its date, time, title
and location. To hear the appointment with which it is overlapping, press SPACE with dots 3‑4‑5‑6 again. The same command will take
you to the earlier of the next pair of overlapping appointments.
To
resolve an overlapping appointment situation, simply modify one or both
appointments in the usual way, as described in 9.7.3 Modifying an Appointment.
There are
two quick ways to get information about either a day in the calendar or a
specific appointment. These are by using the information command SPACE with I, and SPACE with wh sign (dots 1‑5‑6).
When the
cursor is in the date line of a calendar page, you can access the following
information:
Press SPACE with I for the number of appointments and
number of all‑day events, when the first appointment starts and the last
appointment finishes.
Press SPACE with wh sign (dots 1‑5‑6) for the date and how many days away
from the current date. Press the command again for the interval of time stated
in weeks and days.
When the
cursor is in an appointment, you can access the following information:
Press SPACE with I for a summary of recurrences and
alarm status.
Press SPACE with wh sign (dots 1‑5‑6) for the date and time of the
appointment and how many days away from the current date. Press the command
again for the interval of time stated in weeks and days.
You may
need to find an appointment whose date you have forgotten. If you remember a
word, name or phrase in the text, then you can use the Find command, SPACE with F, to find it. If the text is found,
you can read the details by pressing SPACE with dots 1‑4, and you can query the date by
pressing SPACE with wh sign (dots 1‑5‑6).
The text
can appear more than once in the planner, so you may not find the required
appointment on the first try. To continue the search, press SPACE with N.
After you have created an appointment or all‑day event, you can edit the text of its notes, review or modify its time, date or other properties, or cancel it altogether. These functions are all outlined in this section.
After you
have made an entry in the planner, you can edit, delete, move or change the
layout of its text. Most of the KeySoft editing commands are available in
KeyPlan. These can be used to make changes to the text of an appointment, but
not to change the time and date of an appointment itself. In the case of
recurring appointments, changes made this way will only affect the appointment
you are in; to change all recurrences you need to use the "Review or
Modify Appointment" option.
As with
the review commands, there are some minor differences to the edit commands. For
example, BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4, which in the Word Processor is "delete to end of sentence," or "delete to end of line," depending on the Reading Mode,
cancels the appointment if the cursor is in the subject line, or deletes to the
end of the line or sentence if the cursor is in a note.
The
marking, cutting and pasting operations that are available elsewhere in KeySoft
also work in KeyPlan. Because the Planner is not just a document, however,
these operations behave a little differently.
You can
copy, cut and paste the title or notes from one appointment to another, but you
can't use this method to move an appointment in total. However you can copy a
whole appointment and paste it into an e‑mail or word document.
You can
also mark an entire appointment or block of appointments and delete it using
the SPACE with B then D Delete block command. It is wise to note, however, that if you use this
function to delete a recurring appointment, it will only delete that one
instance of the appointment. Doing this will use more storage space than
leaving the recurring appointment in the planner.
You can
mark a block and change its language (for multi‑lingual users) and/or
Braille grade as elsewhere in KeySoft, but only one appointment at a time.
The Block
Commands are detailed in 7.5.1 Block Commands Menu and 20.2.8 Block Commands.
This
option allows you to reschedule the date or time, change the recurring pattern,
alarm status, location etc of any appointment. Position the cursor anywhere in
the appointment you wish to modify, and press BACKSPACE with R.
If the
appointment is a recurring one, you will now be asked if you wish to modify
just this one, or all instances. For just this one, press J, for all instances, press A. You will be presented with the same prompts
and steps as for creating an appointment, the difference being that you will be
offered the current appointment's options as defaults at each prompt. Simply
change the ones you wish to change and pass over the others by pressing ENTER.
To cancel
an appointment, position the cursor in the appointment you wish to cancel and
press BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4, or enter the Appointment menu by
pressing SPACE with dots 3‑4, and select "Cancel this appointment."
KeySoft
prompts: "Cancel this appointment (title). Sure?" To cancel, press Y, to abort, press N. If the appointment is part of a recurring pattern, KeySoft will then
prompt: "Cancel all occurrences or just this one?" For all, press A, for just the currently selected instance,
press J.
There are
two ways to select another date. Assuming you are already in the planner, you
can return to the Calendar Day selection prompt by pressing SPACE with E, and then select or Braille the
required date, or you can move forwards or backwards to a different date by
using the "Go to" command, SPACE with dots 1‑2‑6. When you press SPACE with dots 1‑2‑6 KeySoft prompts: "Go where?."
Press F for forwards, or B for back. Follow this with D, W, M or Y, to move a day, week, month or year,
and then press ENTER. You can also put a number and
space before the D, W, M or Y (that is, Day, Week, Month or Year). For example, to move forward 3 days, use the
following:
SPACE with dots 1‑2‑6, f, 3, SPACE, D, ENTER.
To find
where the cursor is currently located, press SPACE with wh sign (dots 1‑5‑6).
Today's
date and day of the week can be checked from any point in KeySoft by pressing ENTER with D.
You also
have the option of typing a number after the D, W, M or Y. If you do not specify forward or
back, information will be taken as an absolute value, for example W 10 will
take you to week 10 of the current year. If you want to go to week 10 of another
year in the future you would type the year before the week. For
instance, Y2008 W10.
When you
schedule an appointment, setting an alarm is one of the steps you go through.
You can set an alarm on an appointment that is already set up through modifying
an appointment.
An alarm
rings at its programmed time, even if the BrailleNote BT is switched off. The
speakers and the headphones sound the alarm. Unlike speech, the speakers sounds
the alarm even if the headphones are plugged in.
If not
acknowledged, the alarm continues ringing for a length of time called the
"Alarm ringing time." It is then silent until:
the "Alarm repeat time" has elapsed, OR;
a key is
pressed, OR;
the
machine is switched on;
In which
case it sounds again. See 9.9.4 Alarm Set Up
The
maximum number of times an alarm can cycle is set to 10. This is to prevent an
alarm causing unnecessary battery drain.
If the
BrailleNote BT was on standby when the alarm sounds, it turns itself on and
brings up the alarm options menu:
To
cancel the alarm: press C;
To
read and hear appointment details without canceling: press R;
To
postpone the alarm for 10 minutes: press
SPACE.
If the
BrailleNote BT is on when the alarm sounds, first acknowledge it by pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER together. You are then
automatically placed in the Alarm options menu.
There are
four items that you can select by pressing their initial letter. They are:
Cancel
the alarm;
Read and
hear the appointment details without canceling;
Postpone
the alarm. A number of minutes will be offered; to change it, type a new number
of minutes (number sign not required).
Go to the
corresponding appointment in the planner. The alarm is cancelled, and the
cursor is placed at the start of the appointment so that you can read its
details.
The
ringing and repeat times have the same values for all alarms. To review or
change the values, first move to the KeyPlan menu. In the KeyPlan Menu select "Setup options" and KeySoft enters the "KeyPlan setup list."
The first
item on the list is alarm volume. KeyPlan displays: "Alarm volume? 24."
To change
the alarm volume, type a new value between 5 and 32 where 5 is quietest and 32
is loudest, and press ENTER. To test the volume, go back to the
alarm volume item and press SPACE with T.
The next
item on the list is the alarm ringing time. KeyPlan displays: "Alarm ringing time? 30 seconds."
This is
the length of time an alarm sounds before it turns itself off. To change the
value, type the required duration in seconds and press ENTER. The value can be between 5 and 600.
A number sign is optional.
The
second item in the list is: "Alarm repeat period? 5 minutes."
This is the period of time for which an unacknowledged alarm will be silent before it sounds again. To change the value, type the required duration in minutes and press ENTER. The value can be between 1 and 60.
Any part
of the planner can be embossed or printed. This section refers to embossing,
but the procedure for printing is the same.
To emboss
part of the planner, first move to the KeyPlan menu, and then select: "Emboss planner." KeyPlan prompts: "Emboss or Setup Embosser?."
The
Emboss option leads to a series of prompts to select the dates to emboss. The
Set Up option allows the BrailleNote BT to be set‑up to match your
embosser. This is the same as the Set Up option presented when embossing a
document and is described in 6.7 The Embosser Set‑up List. If you have already set‑up
your BrailleNote BT for embossing documents, you do not need to set it up
again.
Assuming
that the embosser has already been set up, you may proceed to emboss part of
the planner. Press E for Emboss, and KeySoft prompts: "Emboss from which date? Press ENTER for (date),"
You can
accept the date suggested, or type a different date, or choose the starting
date from the calendar that is being presented.
The next
prompt is: "Emboss up to and including which date?."
Select a
finishing date, or if you prefer, a length of time from the start date. When "Embosser ready?" is displayed, press Y and embossing begins. The default number of
print or emboss copies is one.
If you
want more than one copy, press N, and you are prompted for the number
of copies. Enter a number, press ENTER, and you are placed at the "Embosser ready?" prompt again. Press Y and the embosser should start immediately.
Only
dates with planner entries and the final date in the specified range will be
embossed or printed, and each embossed or print page will show as many days as
will fit.
End of Planner Chapter.
KeyList
is an address list manager. It allows you to enter addresses, phone numbers and
other data against a person's name. You can review and edit the information,
sort it, and copy it to KeyWord or KeyPlan. It is also possible to synchronize
your Address List with an MS Outlook Contacts list – see
14.16 KeySync.
To enter
the Address List from the Main Menu, use the SPACE and BACKSPACE keys to review the items in the menu, until "Address List" is displayed, and then press ENTER. Alternatively, you can select the Address
List from the Main Menu by pressing A.
You can
switch directly to the Address List from anywhere in KeySoft by pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER with A. If you leave the Address List by
switching directly to another application, such as the Word Processor, then
pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER with A will return you to the same point
in the Address List.
BrailleNote
BT displays "KeyList Menu". This menu comprises 6 options as
follows:
Add address.
Look up
address.
Copy
addresses.
Emboss
addresses.
Print
addresses.
Select
KeyList file.
The
following chapter describes these options. If you are using KeyList for the
first time, the address list is empty until you have added some addresses.
This
option allows you to enter contact details; last name, first name, and a list
of other information. Each item of information, such as a phone number, is
called a "field". Up to 25 fields can be associated with a last name
to form a contact "record".
At the
KeyList menu, select "Add address." KeyList displays: "Entry list for Address List."
Move to
the first item in the list by pressing SPACE or ADVANCE, and KeyList prompts you for a Last
name. Type a last name and press ENTER.
You are
then prompted for text to enter into the following fields. For any field other
than the last name field, you can enter text or skip the field by pressing SPACE. The complete list of fields for an address
record is as follows:
Last Name
First
name
Middle
Name
Title
Home
Phone
Business
Phone
Cell
Phone
Home E‑mail
Business
E‑mail
Home Fax
Business
Fax
Street Address
Street
Address Line 2
Street
Address Line 3
City
State or
County
Zip or
Postcode
Home
Country
Business
Title
Company
Name
Department
Business
Street Address
Business
Street Address Line 2
Business
Street Address Line 3
Business
City
Business
State or County
Business
Zip or Postcode
Business
Country
Web Page
Notes
For each
field, type the information and press ENTER. You are then asked for the next field. When you come to the Notes
field, press ENTER to select it. You can then write,
edit or read the notes, and return to the list by pressing SPACE with E.
In general, you can use your Preferred Braille Grade, as set up through
the Options menu, for entering list items. However where your grade is not
appropriate, KeyList assumes a lower grade. For example, for entering the
"Zip or Post Code" field, grade 1 is assumed. If your Braille code
does not support the characters required for a field, you will be advised to
use Computer Braille. Remember that names and addresses may be copied to a
document at some stage, so it is good practice to use capital signs as
appropriate. KeySoft will put one in if you don't.
If you
enter a telephone number, a number sign isn't needed.
All
fields except Last name are optional, so if you wish to skip a field, just
press SPACE to move to the next one.
You can
review the list by pressing BACKSPACE to move back, and SPACE to move forward. When you are satisfied, add
the new record by pressing SPACE with dots 2‑6.
KeyList
displays, "Record added", and you are returned to the
KeyList menu. If you wish to add another record, press A and repeat the previous procedure.
At the
KeyList menu, select "Lookup Address". KeyList displays: "Selection list for Address List".
Move to
the first item in the list by pressing SPACE or ADVANCE, and KeyList prompts: "Last name?"
You are
being asked for data which is used to find matching records. We deal with a
simple case, and return to more complex searches later.
For
example, you may want to review the records of all people called
"Smith". In this case, type "smith" at the last name
prompt, and press ENTER. The first name and last name of
the first person in the address list called "Smith" is displayed. You
can move through the list of "Smiths" by pressing SPACE with dots 5‑6. Each press displays his or her
first name, followed by the last name, in this case "Smith". Only
records which match the selection list are displayed. A beep indicates when
there are no more matching last names.
To review
the other fields in a particular record, press SPACE or ADVANCE repeatedly. Only fields containing
an entry are displayed. The format of each item comprises the name of the
field, such as "Company name", followed by the entry, such as
"Yoyodyne Inc." The movement commands are as follows:
To
move to the previous record: SPACE with dots 2‑3.
To
move to the next record: SPACE with dots 5‑6.
To
move to the previous field: BACKSPACE or SPACE with dot 1.
To
move to the next field: SPACE or SPACE with dot 4 .
To
jump to any field: Press
the first letter of the field name.
For
example, H for Home phone number, Home e‑mail
address or Home fax number.
When
reviewing using speech you can use the following commands:
To
hear the current record: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
To
read the next record: SPACE with dots 5‑6.
To
read the previous record: SPACE with dots 2‑3.
To
hear the next field: SPACE with dot 4.
To
hear the current field: SPACE with dots 1‑4.
To
hear the previous field: SPACE with dot 1.
To
hear the next word: SPACE with dot 5.
To
hear the current word: SPACE with dots 2‑5
(Press
twice to spell current word.)
To
hear the previous word: SPACE with dot 2.
When you
have finished listening to a selection, you can return to the selection list by
pressing SPACE with E. You are asked for another Last
name. If you have finished searching, you can return to the KeyList menu by
pressing SPACE with E again.
The
information which you enter into the Lookup Selection List is used to find
matching records. You may include as much or as little data in the List as you
wish.
For
example, when looking up a telephone number, you might specify just the
person's last name. To start the search, press ENTER and the first person with that last name is displayed. If necessary,
move through the other entries for that last name by pressing SPACE with dots 5‑6, until you locate the one with the
required first name. Then press either H or B to move to the home phone number
field or business phone number field.
You need
only type the first few characters in a field rather than the whole field. For
example, if you just type S in the Surname field, you are able
to access the records of all people whose surnames begin with S.
You can
search for all people who work for a particular company. At the lookup
selection list, don't specify a surname, but press SPACE repeatedly until the prompt: "Company name?" is displayed and then type the company name and press ENTER. You can then use SPACE with dots 5‑6 to move through all the people who
work for that company.
You can
also search for a name fragment within a field, using the multi‑character
wild card for the unknown first part. For example, you may remember a company
as: "Something and Fox, Incorporated". If you press SPACE with dots 3‑5, followed by "fox" in the
company name field, you should have a very short list of records to review.
When
setting up the Lookup Selection List, you can move forward and backward through
the entries without changing their values. Press SPACE or BACKSPACE to do this. To change an entry,
just type the required setting. When the Selection List is to your
satisfaction, start the lookup by pressing ENTER and the first match is displayed.
For
example, you may wish to display all entries in your address list with a last
name of Smith that live in the city of Seattle. To do this type “Smith” in the
last name field, then press SPACE until the City field is displayed.
Type “Seattle”, and press ENTER. All records matching your search
criteria will be presented.
Any
fields used in a Lookup will be offered as a suggestion for the next search,
unless you exit to the KeyList Menu between searches. You may want to blank out
a previously‑used field so it is not used in the next search. To do this,
move to the required field using SPACE with O and press the Clear Field command, SPACE with dots 3‑5‑6.
First we will look at changing an existing field, as would be the case, for example, if you wished to change a person's phone number. From the "Lookup address" option, select the person's record you wish to modify, then move to the field to be changed. Press BACKSPACE with dots 2‑5 or BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4, and you are asked for a new entry for this field. There are three options here:
1. Type a new entry and press ENTER.
2. Edit the old field which is offered
as the suggestion, as described in 5.19 Editing at a Prompt.
3. Clear the field by pressing SPACE with dots 3‑5‑6, followed by ENTER.
This puts
you in an entry list so you can modify or add to any other field as well. You
have the same three options for all the fields and you can change any other
field in the record.
The
second scenario is where you wish to add an additional field to an existing
record. From the "Lookup address" option, select the person's record
you wish to add to, then press BACKSPACE with dots 2‑5. KeySoft will prompt: "Last name? Currently (name)"
Press ENTER to accept the name, then use SPACE to move through the list of fields until you
hear the field you wish to add. Type in the required information and press ENTER. When you are satisfied press SPACE with dots 2‑6 and the modified record will be
stored.
To delete
a record, comprising a last name and all its associated fields, use the
"Lookup" option. Move to any field in the record and press BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
You are
prompted to make sure, so press Y, and the record is deleted from the
address list.
You may
want to create a new record which is similar to an existing one. There is often
less to type if you duplicate an existing record, and then make the required
changes. You might do this, for example, if two people work for the same
company and many of their details are the same. There is a useful function
called "Retrieve last record", which can help here.
Assume
that you have just added a new record for someone who works for a particular
company, and you want to add another similar record for someone else. Select
the Add Address option and when you get as far as the Last name prompt, select
the Block Commands Menu by pressing SPACE with B.
Note that
this is a different menu to the Block Commands menu in KeyWord. Press SPACE and KeyList displays: "Retrieve last record".
KeyList
is offering to retrieve the last record you added, so press ENTER. KeyList prompts, "Last name? Currently Smith". You now have two identical records,
so you should change the fields that are to be different, such as Last name,
First Name, and Title. When you have made the changes, add the new record by
pressing SPACE with dots 2‑6.
If you
need to add other similar records, continue using the retrieve last record
command as necessary. If you want to duplicate an old record, just look it up
first, since the retrieve last record command retrieves the last record which
was looked up, added or copied.
You may wish to insert a name and address, from KeyList into a letter you are typing with KeyWord. This can be done in two steps as follows:
1. Copy the address to the clipboard.
2. Paste the clipboard into the
document.
These
steps are now described. Select KeyList and from the KeyList menu, press L for Lookup, and locate the person's address.
At any field in this record, select the Block Commands Menu by pressing SPACE with B. There is only one item in this
menu, and if you press SPACE the following message is displayed,
"Copy record to clip board". This is the action you require, so
press ENTER.
KeyList
then prompts, "Template name?" for the name of the template that determines
which fields in the record should be copied, and in which order. You can create
your own templates as described later. For the moment, select an existing one
by pressing SPACE repeatedly until "Letterhead template" is displayed and press ENTER.
The
record which you just looked up is copied to the clipboard. KeyList displays, "Record copied to clipboard", and you are returned to your place
in the record. The fields which have been copied to the clipboard are formatted
in a letterhead style.
Now use
KeyWord to create the letter which requires an address. Place the cursor where
you want the address to be inserted and paste the clipboard by pressing SPACE with B, then P. If you review this document, you
will find the selected person's name and address in a letterhead layout.
You may
want to emboss a name and address or phone number, or a selection of them. From
the KeyList menu select "Emboss addresses." KeySoft prompts: "Emboss or Set up embosser?".
If you
haven't previously set up the embosser, press S. The set up procedure is covered in 6.7 The Embosser Set‑up List.
To
proceed with embossing, press E, and KeySoft prompts: "Template name?".
An
address record is a series of fields, whereas an embossed page must have a
specific format. So, to emboss address records, you must specify which fields
you want to emboss, and how they should be arranged. This is defined by a
template, which is a KeyWord document laid out with the required field names in
the required arrangement. A template may also contain text and formatting
information.
There are
two main template categories, namely Braille templates and text templates. To
emboss addresses from the address list, you would use a Braille template.
Conversely to print addresses from the address list, you would use a Text
template. The convention used for naming templates, places the word
"Braille" in front of the Braille templates.
KeySoft
is provided with several ready‑made Braille and Text templates for
copying, embossing or printing. There is a "Letterhead template",
which produces a letter heading in the form:
Line 1:
(first name)space(last name).
Line 2:
(street address).
Line 3:
(street address, line 2).
Line 4:
(city)comma(state)(zip or postal code).
Another
ready‑made template is called, "Phone List template", and
produces a single line for each record in the form:
(last
name)space(first name)
Tab:
(street address)space(street address, line 2)
Tab:
(city)
Tab:
(business phone number).
A new
line is then created.
Select a
template for your purpose. If there is no template which suits what you want to
do, you can modify or create a template as described in 10.9 Templates.
After you
have selected the template, KeyList displays, "Selection list for Address List". If you want to emboss every record,
press ENTER. However, you can select just those
addresses you want to emboss. For example, you might type "Yoyodyne
Inc." in the "Company name" field. When you have set up the
required search field, or fields, start the lookup by pressing ENTER. KeyList displays the number of selected
records, and prompts, "Emboss all selected records?" To do this, press Y. All the selected addresses are embossed, and you are returned to the
KeyList menu.
Alternatively,
you have a further opportunity to choose from the selected addresses. To do
this, press N, and you are presented with the
first matching record. If you wish to emboss this record, press ENTER and this record is embossed. If you do not
want to emboss this record, scan the list, and press ENTER for each record that you do wish to include.
The
procedure for printing an address list, or a selection of it, is very similar
to embossing. From the KeyList menu, select "Print addresses". KeySoft prompts: "Print or Set up printer?"
If you
haven't already set up the printer, press S. The set up procedure is covered in 6.10 The Printer Set‑Up List. To proceed with printing, press P, and follow the prompts to select a template
and choose which address records to print.
Templates are used for copying, embossing and printing. You can use the templates as they are supplied, or you can modify them, or create new ones. The procedure for creating a new template is described.
It is
important to note that a template can be either a Braille or a text document,
and the right one must be used for the purpose. If you want to emboss a Braille
document, or insert into a Braille document, then a Braille template is
required. Conversely, if you want to print, or insert into a text document,
then a text template is needed.
Suppose
that you wish to copy records from an address list into some business letters.
You might want a template which puts your own address at the head of the
letter, followed by the date, and then the recipient's name and address. We
will assume that the letters will be Braille documents, which could be printed
later. In this case you will need a Braille template.
From the
KeyWord menu, press C to create a new document. At the "Folder name?" prompt, select "KeyList", which is
the folder where templates are kept. At the prompt: "Document to create?" type a suitable name such as:
"Business template". Unless you specify otherwise a Braille template
is created. If you had wanted a text template, press SPACE with X at the prompt for "Document to create?" until "Create a text document" is displayed.
Now
compose this document in the way you want the record to be formatted. The
layout is for a business letter, so first type your own address, followed by a
blank line.
Next,
insert the date by pressing SPACE with O, followed by I, then D. KeySoft prompts, "Insert today's date or printing date?" Select the Printing Date option by pressing P. This causes the date to be updated each time
you use the template to emboss or print Address List records. The Today's Date
option inserts today's actual date, that is the date you created the template
document.
The text
you have typed so far will be reproduced each time you use this template. Now
we want to copy a recipient's first name from the address list. Place the
cursor where you want the name to go, and select the list of available field
names as follows:
Select
the Template menu by pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER with dots 2‑3‑4‑6, and then select the Insert Field
option.
KeySoft
prompts, "Insert field from which database?" Select "KeyList's Address list" by pressing A. You are then presented with the "Field selection list." This is a list of all the field
names in an address list. Press SPACE or BACKSPACE repeatedly to review this list and find the
field you want, which in this case is: "First name." Press ENTER to select it. You are returned to the document, a "First name
field" marker is inserted, and the cursor is placed just after it. Now
when a record is copied into a document using this template, a person's First
Name appears in the marked position.
To put a
space after the first name, press SPACE. To include the last name next, follow the same procedure which you
used to select the first name, but select the "Last name" field instead. This places a "Last name
field" marker after the space.
Start a
new line by pressing ENTER, and continue to compose the
recipient's address, using field names from the list. A template may include
whatever punctuation, formatting commands or text that you wish, and these are
included with the fields that are specified by the template. The field
indicator is shown on the Braille display as $fld followed by the field name.
Other
layout rules to remember are:
1. When using a template, KeyList
filters out lines which only contain blank fields. For example, the original
record may have a blank "Country" field. If your template contains a
"Country" field name on a line by itself, a blank line will not be
generated.
2. If you want a blank line to be
generated when it contains only blank fields, start the line in the template
with a marker to indicate "Force Inclusion of Line", by pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER with dots 2‑3‑4‑6, then F.
3. Part of a line in a template can be
marked with suppression markers. If the field or fields between the markers are
blank, everything between the markers is suppressed when the template is used.
To insert these markers, press BACKSPACE with ENTER with dots 2‑3‑4‑6, for the Template menu, and choose Start or End Conditional Suppression.
For an example of the use of suppression markers, see the "Letterhead
Template" in the KeyList folder.
4. To put a comment line in a template,
start the line with a comment marker. To do this, press BACKSPACE with ENTER with dots 2‑3‑4‑6 for the Template menu, and choose:
"Mark comment line". The contents of the comment line are not
included when the template is used.
5. Records can be printed to fill the
page, in a layout suitable for a phone list. Alternatively, they can be printed
one per page, to suit envelopes and form letters. In the latter case, a
"New Page" marker is required at the end of the template.
When you
have finished the template, you can review it as you would review any other
KeyWord document. Markers are spoken with character or word review commands.
In the
template, fields appears to have a particular length, but the actual field
lengths are substituted when you use the template. For example, the "First
name" field appears to be 13 characters long in the template, but only 4
characters result if the address list field contains the name "John".
If you create a new template or modify an existing one, you should check the resulting layout to ensure that it is what you intended. You can do this by copying a record into the clipboard, using the new template, and pasting the clipboard into a blank document. You can then review the layout.
KeyList
allows you to copy a sub‑set of the address list, such as all people who
work for Fox Corporation, into a chosen file. At the KeyList menu select "Copy addresses". KeyList displays: "Copy addresses to a document or an address list?"
You have
the option of copying the addresses to a KeyWord document, or to another
address list file used by KeyList or KeyMail.
To copy
to a document, press D, and you hear prompts for a
destination folder name and document name. Select an existing Braille or text
document, or create a new one.
When you
have entered the destination document name, you are prompted, "Template name?" This determines the fields to be copied and their format on the page.
The offered template is either a Braille or a text document, to match the type
of destination document you have chosen. To accept the suggested template,
press ENTER, or press SPACE repeatedly to review the list of available
templates, and choose one by pressing ENTER.
You are
then placed in the KeyList Lookup function, at the prompt: "Selection list for Address Notebook". If you want to copy every record,
press ENTER. However, you also have the
opportunity to select just those addresses you want to copy, if they have
something in common. For example, in the "Organization" field you
might type "Fox Corporation." When you have set up the required
search field or fields, start the lookup by pressing ENTER. KeyList displays the number of selected
records, and prompts, "Copy all selected records?" To do this, press Y.
All the
selected records are copied to the destination document, and you are returned
to the KeyList menu. Alternatively, you have a further opportunity to choose
from the selected addresses. To do this, press N, and you are presented with the first matching record. If you press ENTER this record is added to the document. If you
do not want to include this record, use SPACE with dots 5‑6 to scan the list, and press ENTER for each record you wish to include.
You can
also copy addresses to another address list file, rather than to a document as
just described. At the KeyList menu select "Copy addresses". Your BrailleNote BT prompts: "Copy addresses to a document or an address list?"
To copy
to an address list file, press A, and your BrailleNote BT prompts
for a destination folder name and file name. Select an existing address list. If you need to
select a different drive or folder, press BACKSPACE.
There are
now two possibilities; either the source and the destination files have the
same number of fields and the same field names, or there are differences.
The first
case applies when you are copying records to a file with an identical structure
to the source file. KeySoft advises, "All fields match. Review field mapping list?" You would normally press N here, and you are placed at the Selection
List, from where you may select the required records, as described in the
previous section about copying to a document.
Alternatively,
if the source and destination structures are different, KeySoft tells you how
many field names match, and queries, "Review field mapping list?" If you press N at this point, KeySoft copies only those fields which have matching
field names in the destination file.
However,
if you want to specify how each field in the source file is mapped to the
destination file, press Y. KeySoft presents a "Field
Mapping List" containing pairs of field names. The first of each pair is a
field name from the source file, and the second is a matching field name in the
destination file, if a match exists. To change a mapping, review the field
mapping list by pressing SPACE or BACKSPACE repeatedly and select a source field name by
pressing ENTER. You are presented with a field
selection list containing all the field names in a destination record. Review
this list and pick the corresponding field name by pressing ENTER. You can then continue to review the field
mapping list, making changes as required. To prevent a field being copied, use
the Clear Field command, SPACE with dots 3‑5‑6, when the field name is displayed.
When the field mapping list is to your satisfaction, press SPACE with E and you can proceed to select the
required records to copy, as described previously.
KeySoft
is installed with a blank address file called: "Address List". Its name is displayed when you
select, "Add address", or "Lookup address". However there is no reason why you
can't have multiple address lists, instead of one, and use them for other
purposes than storing addresses. Information on creating an address list can be
found in 10.12 Creating an Address List.
To select
a different address list, or to verify which address list is currently
selected, select the "Select KeyList file" option in the KeyList Menu. You are prompted
for a folder and file name. Select the folder and file in any of the usual
ways. The selected file remains current until deliberately changed. If the file
selected is not of the Address List type then you are prompted to verify the
selection when you enter KeyList.
Each
address list has an associated KeyList definition file that defines the fields
that are contained in an address record. The definition file for the standard
"Address List" may be found in the KeyList folder and is named
"Address List.klt".
When you
first enter details into the Address List, an associated database volume is
created within the "Keylist.cdb" file that is stored in the KeyList
folder on the Flash Disk. The entries you place in the Address List are stored
within this database file.
We
recommend caution in working with database definition files. If you think that
you have the necessary skills and wish to experiment with creating your own
variant of the "Address List", we suggest that you first make a
copy of the existing Address List definitions file and that you modify this
copied file. In this way you will always have the original Address List
definition file intact.
From the
File Manager, copy the file named "Address List" from the KeyList
folder on the Flash Disk to the General folder on the Flash Disk.
Use
Keyword to open the Address List file you have copied into the General Folder.
We suggest you set KeyWord to line reading mode, by pressing SPACE with M until "line reading mode"
is displayed.
We'll now
consider the task of modifying this file so that the associated database is
named "Phone List", and the definition file only contains fields for
"Last Name", "First name", and "Phone". Now,
let's take a closer look at the original address list definitions file that we
have just opened.
You will
find that the file contains some 33 lines of information. The syntax of each
line determines its function.
The first
line of the file contains the word "database", followed by the words
"Address List". We want to create a definition file called
"Phone List", so replace "Address List" with "Phone
List", leaving the word "database" at the start of the line.
The
second line contains the number "24". Leave this unchanged.
The next
27 lines define each field as it appears in the Address List. Each line starts
with a unique number, but the order in which the fields appear in the database
is determined by their relative line position, not the number used to identify
the line.
Delete the
lines starting with "16420" and "16419". These lines
represent the fields "Middle Name" and "Title" in the
original definition file.
Position
the cursor at the start of the line numbered "14856" and place a
"Top of Block" marker. Next position the cursor to the start of the
line numbered "24594", enter the Block Menu and select "Delete
Block".
You
should now be left with a file that contains 9 lines. Modify the line starting
with "14857" so that the text between the quotes is "Phone"
rather than the original "Home phone number". It is important that
the word "Phone" is placed inside quotation marks.
The final
form of your modified file should be:
database
Phone List
24
14865,
name, autocap, "Last name"
14854,
name autocap, "First name"
14857,
phone, autonum, "Phone"
24594,
concat, "14865, 14854"
24595,
concat, "14854, 14865"
announcement
order 14854, 14865
sort
order 24594, 24595
Once you
are happy with the contents of the modified file, exit the file, and from the
File Command Menu, rename it to "Phone List". Ignore the message that
there is no database associated with the file. Copy the "Phone List"
definition file back into the KeyList folder.
All you
have to do now is go to the Address List menu and select the "Phone
List" file as your address file. You can then add entries to your new
phone list. When you first try to add an entry to the phone list, you will be
asked to confirm the creation of the associated database within the
"Keylist.cdb" file.
KeyList
is not restricted to looking up or adding to an address list. It can also be
used to manipulate any of the databases in the KeyList folder. To do this,
select the folder and name of the required database using the "Select KeyList file" option in the KeyList menu as
described in 10.11 Selecting an Address List.
You can
now use KeyList to Lookup or Add to the selected database in the usual way, as
if it were an address list.
When you
have finished reviewing or updating a database, remember to re‑select the
Address List in the KeyList folder for future use.
Refer to
the Database Manager chapter for information on setting up a database and how
to free database space.
End of
Address List Chapter.
This
chapter introduces KeyMail, the BrailleNote's user‑friendly e‑mail
package that lets you send, receive and manage your e‑mail.
If you
are new to the world of electronic telecommunications you may wonder what e‑mail
is. That is, apart from being short for electronic mail. Essentially e‑mail
is just the electronic equivalent of paper mail, but it is faster and cheaper
than ordinary mail. It takes minutes or hours rather than days to reach its
destination even when the destination is on the other side of the world.
In order
to send and receive e‑mail, computers need to have a set of rules, or
protocol, which determines how the information is sent. BrailleNote BT's e‑mail
program, KeyMail, uses the popular POP (Post Office Protocol) e‑mail
format. This protocol has become the "industry standard" which
ensures easy connection to the majority of Internet Service Providers.
We
commence this chapter by describing, in general terms, what KeyMail can do. We
then take an overview of the KeyMail package, and follow this with getting
started with KeyMail from a first time perspective. Following this is a fuller
description of KeyMail and its component parts.
The
KeyMail e‑mail program enables you to access mainstream e‑mail
services and communicate with e‑mail users worldwide.
KeyMail
provides you with the following capabilities:
KeyMail
enables you to communicate with people using many different popular e‑mail
programs like Microsoft Outlook or Outlook Express, Eudora, and Lotus cc:Mail.
KeyMail
guides you through the steps of addressing and composing an e‑mail
message, connecting to an e‑mail service provider, sending e‑mail
and receiving e‑mail.
KeyMail
helps you organize your e‑mail messages so you can find them easily using
electronic folders, and it enables you to set up your preferred e‑mail
options.
KeyMail
handles attachments to e‑mail. It understands Microsoft Word document
formats so you can read Word documents attached to your e‑mail. You can
also attach files of any format to your out‑going e‑mail.
KeyMail eliminates
the routine task of appending your name and e‑mail address, and
facilitates responding to an e‑mail message. Replying to a message
automatically creates a new message with the address and subject line filled
in, and the message area contains the text of the original message.
With a
range of connectivity configurations available and the KeyMail software,
BrailleNote BT provides everything you need to join the connected world of e‑mail.
You can
access KeyMail by typing E from the Main Menu, or by pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER with E. This takes you to the KeyMail
Menu, which contains 4 items. These are:
Write an
e‑mail;
Read e‑mail;
Send and
receive e‑mail;
Set up options.
Choose "Write an e‑mail" when you wish to send a new message
to one or more people. You can enter their e‑mail addresses manually, or
more conveniently, choose them from your KeyList address list. KeyMail steps
you painlessly through the various options that include the following items:
main
recipient or recipients;
carbon
copy recipient or recipients;
blind
carbon copy recipient or recipients;
subject;
and,
whether
you wish to send any file attachments.
You can
then create, review, spell check, and edit the text of your e‑mail
message using the same friendly commands used in KeyWord. At this point you may
choose to send your e‑mail, with or without saving a copy, or save it as
a Draft, so that you can return to it at a later time.
You may
also emboss or print a copy of your e‑mail.
To read e‑mail
stored on your system, choose "Read E‑mail.” You can check for new messages before you
start, or read messages stored from previous sessions. KeyMail uses a series of
folders to organize your mail, and you can add folders of your own to
streamline the filing of your mail. KeyMail guides you through selecting the
desired folder, and provides tools for replying to and forwarding e‑mail,
with and without the original text and/or attachments included.
E‑mails
can be marked for further action, such as moving or copying to another folder,
or sending to the Trash folder.
To check
for new e‑mail, choose "Send and receive e‑mail.” KeyMail prompts you through the
necessary steps, and provides feedback about the status of the connection and
mail download. If you have any unsent mail, it is also sent at this time.
The
purpose of the "Set up options" is to define the details of your e‑mail
accounts. You can set up as many accounts as you wish. Using the Receive
options you can choose not to delete messages from your service provider after
they have been downloaded, leaving them available to be downloaded to another
computer. A size limit can also be set on e‑mails to be downloaded, and
if exceeded, an alert will be given. The Address list set up allows you to
define which address list to use, if you have more than one, and to tell it
your own name and e‑mail address so these can be included in e‑mail
you send.
Each of
the Set up Options is detailed in
11.10 Setup Options.
Setting
up access to the internet itself is handled separately. For more information,
refer to 14.3 The Connectivity Menu.
When
KeyMail connects in order to send or receive e‑mail, at the end of the
process it will prompt: "Remain connected?" At this point you can press Y to stay connected to the internet, or N to disconnect. The reason you have this choice
is because you may wish to do other e‑mail activities, or switch to
KeyWeb, during the same session. When you choose to remain connected, KeySoft
returns to the Main Menu. When you disconnect, KeySoft returns to the KeyMail
Menu. This applies only to connections using a dial‑up modem.
Before
you can send and receive e‑mail, you need to set up an e‑mail
account with an Internet Service Provider, or ISP for short. If you already
have an e‑mail account, you can configure KeyMail to work with it in most
cases. For those unfamiliar with Internet Service Providers, your ISP can be
thought of as providing a similar service to telephone banking, only instead of
shuffling money, your ISP handles your e‑mail.
First you
have to choose a Service Provider (ISP) and establish with them what your e‑mail
address and log on password will be, and the address of their send and receive
mail boxes. A typical example of these various items may be:
User
Name: Murray_Thorn;
Password:
Cheeky;
Pop
Server address: pop.clear.net.nz;
SMTP
Server address: smtp.clear.net.nz.
In some
cases you may require other information such as a DNS address. Either ask your
Service Provider for details on setting up a Windows CE machine, or contact
your BrailleNote BT dealer.
If using
a dial‑up connection, you will also require a telephone number from them.
Some Service Providers also require a User Name and Password for the initial
connection, as well as those required to access your actual E‑Mail
account.
Some
people have e‑mail accounts with separate providers, but may only access
them using one ISP connection to the Internet. Others may have several accounts
and several different ways to get connected. Others will have just one e‑mail
account through one ISP. This chapter covers the setting up of an e‑mail
account and the handling of e‑mail. For information on how to set up the
connection to the internet, refer to
14.6 Dial up and LAN Connections .
Unless
you are extremely accurate, it is highly likely that you will input an
incorrect keystroke or two while you are filling in the various details.
KeySoft has a number of editing and review commands that make it easy to
correct such problems. Get into the habit of frequently using KeySoft Help, SPACE with H. It often provides a valuable source
of information relevant to what you are trying to do.
If you
notice a mistake while typing in, use BACKSPACE to take out the last character. To review an e‑mail
address, you can display it by pressing SPACE with dots 2‑5. Pressing this combination again
causes the address to be spelt. You can move forwards and back through an entry
using SPACE with dot 3 or SPACE with dot 6.
Alternatively,
you can locate the character you wish to position the cursor at on the Braille
Display, and press the Touch Cursor associated with that cell to route the
cursor to that character.
Some fields require you to use Computer Braille, so you need to be aware
of the default Computer Braille settings. The @ sign used in e‑mail addresses is a case in point. For 6 dot US
Computer Braille the @ sign is generated by pressing SPACE with U, followed by dot 4. For 6 dot United Kingdom Computer Braille the
@ sign is generated by pressing SPACE with U, followed by dots 2‑3‑4‑6.
KeyMail
provides most of the important functions of the popular e‑mail programs
available today. If you have used any of these programs you have a head start
because you already understand what you are doing. KeyMail guides you through
the process of addressing, writing an e‑mail message and attaching files
to e‑mail.
There are
some essential details that you must provide, like who you want to send the e‑mail
to, but there are also many details that are optional. The following discussion
guides you through all of the available options.
When
addressing e‑mail using KeyMail you may select addresses from an address
list. KeyMail provides a way of setting up your own personal address details
that are used specifically by KeyMail. This information is needed so that
KeyMail can add your details to your out‑going e‑mail. Then your e‑mail
correspondents have a return address for their reply.
Remember
that if you need help with your available options at any point, press SPACE with H.
1. From anywhere in KeySoft, press BACKSPACE with ENTER with E, or go to the Main Menu and press E. From the KeyMail menu, select "Write an E‑mail."
2. KeySoft prompts: "Send to?." Type in the address and press ENTER. Or, if the address you want to use is in your address book, press the first few letters, or the whole name, of the person you want to send the e‑mail to and press ENTER. KeySoft looks for entries in the address list with matching first names. If it finds a match, it displays the first name and surname of the matching record. KeySoft continues at Step 3.
If
two or more records are found, it reports "X records selected" where X is the number of records,
and queries "Send to all selected addresses?." If yes, press Y. KeySoft continues at Step 4.
If
you don't want to send to all of them, press N. KeySoft confirms "No" and displays the first name and surname of the first matching record. To
send to this person, press ENTER. To skip this person and go to the
next, press SPACE with dots 5‑6, and so on until KeySoft displays your choice, then press ENTER. KeySoft will confirm your selection with the
message: "Address added."
If
KeySoft fails to find a match, it reports "Cannot find name in the address list," where “name” is the name you typed. You can edit the name and try again.
A
person may have more than one e‑mail address, in which case you get to
choose which address to use.
Other
options available when entering an e‑mail address are:
Type
in the e‑mail address, rather than the person’s name.
Look
up the person in the address list by pressing BACKSPACE with L. This takes you to the selection
list for the Address List.
3. KeySoft now prompts, "Also send to?.” The same options as are discussed in step 2 are available. To skip adding another address here, press ENTER.
4. A prompt: "Copy to?" is displayed. Type a name as
discussed in step 2 or press ENTER to skip.
5. A prompt: "Blind copy to?" is displayed. Again you can type a
name as discussed in step 2 or press ENTER to skip.
You
may be wondering what blind copy is? It is a copy of an e‑mail that is
sent without being marked with all "send to" and "copy to" addresses. Consequently the
recipient does not know that anyone else has been sent a copy.
6. KeySoft prompts: Subject?." Type a word or phrase that
encapsulates the topic of your e‑mail and press ENTER. You can quickly move to the Subject field
from any of the previous field by pressing SPACE with dots 5‑6. This saves you having to "pass through" all the intervening fields if you do
not wish to enter any addresses.
7. KeySoft then queries "Attach a file to this e‑mail?." If no press ENTER or press N and KeySoft continues at the next step. If yes please refer to section 11.7 Attaching a file to an e‑mail.
8. The prompts "E‑mail message,” "Top of document" and "Blank" are presented. You are placed at the top of a
new document in KeyWord where you can type, review and edit your e‑mail
message. When you are happy with it, press SPACE with E to exit KeyWord.
Now
the prompt "Ready to send this e‑mail?" is displayed. If not press N and you will be returned to the "send to" prompt. You may review the details
you previously entered by pressing SPACE. If you are ready to send the e‑mail, press Y. KeySoft now prompts "Save a copy?." Press N to send the e‑mail without retaining a
copy. Press Y to send the e‑mail and to
save a copy of the e‑mail message. KeySoft queries which folder to use.
Select the folder from existing ones or create a new folder in the usual way.
KeySoft returns to the KeyMail menu. There are 4 other options available at the
"Ready to send this e‑mail?" prompt:
To
save the e‑mail as a Draft, press D. This saves the e‑mail in the "Draft" folder, where it can be retrieved at a later
time.
To
Print, press P.
To
Emboss, press E.
To
abandon this e‑mail without sending, press SPACE with E.
KeySoft
saves your outgoing e‑mail in a special folder, called the "Outbox.” When you exit the KeyMail menu,
KeySoft will prompt if there are any un‑sent messages in the Outbox, and
ask if you want to send them. Pressing N leaves the e‑mail in the Outbox to be sent at some other time. If
you press Y KeySoft will prompt for an e‑mail
account and connection configuration, and send the e‑mail. KeySoft does
not check for newly received e‑mail at this time.
If you
know that you have e‑mail to send and also wish to check for new received
e‑mail, choose the "Connect to send and receive e‑mail" option on the KeyMail menu.
Note: If
you receive a message that has multiple recipients and you only want to reply
to one of them, follow these steps:
1. Select the e‑mail you wish to
reply to (but leave it closed).
2. Move to the address of the person
you want to sent a reply to and press BACKSPACE with K.
3. KeyMail will display: "copied to clipboard".
4. To add the address into the To:
field of a new message, press BACKSPACE with V.
5. Fill in the Subject field and write
your message.
You have
the option of automatically adding your own customized signature to an email.
Your signature can include any information, such as your name, initials,
contact details, or even a meaningful quotation!
The email
signature that is added to the end of a new message comes from a document that
you create and name, 'signature'. Likewise, an email signature that appears at
the end of an email message that you reply to or forward, originates from a
document that you create and name, 'reply signature'.
The
contents of the 'signature' and 'reply signature' documents, can be exactly the
same or be different in whatever way you like, depending on your requirements. For
instance, in new emails, you may want to include your full contact details
whereas in emails that you reply to or forward you might need to include just
your name and work phone number.
Follow
these steps to create email signatures:
1. Go into the Word Processor and
select the KeyMail folder from the Flash Disk.
2. Create the 'signature' and 'reply
signature' documents.
3. Type your signature and be sure to
format it the way you want it to appear in your email message.
Once you
begin to write, reply or forward an email, you will notice that your new
signature has been automatically added to the end of the email. This signature
can be personalized for the individual email by simply editing it at this
point.
To attach
a file to an e‑mail, follow these steps.
1. When KeySoft queries "Attach a file to this e‑mail?" press Y. KeySoft displays "Folder name? General."
Select
a drive, folder, and file in the usual way.
2. You are now asked "File to attach?" Press SPACE to access the file list. KeySoft prompts "List of all files in (folder name) folder." Review the list and select the file you want.
3. KeySoft now queries whether you want
to attach the file in its current format. For example, KeySoft might query "Attach this KeyWord document in a different file type?" If you press Y for Yes, KeySoft queries, "Attach as which file type? Microsoft Word file?” Press ENTER to accept this option. To choose a different file type, press SPACE with dots 3‑4. The available file types are:
Microsoft Word, ASCII text, Plain Braille file, Rich Text Format (RTF),
WordPerfect 5.1, and same file type as the source.
4. KeySoft now prompts, "Attach another file?” You can now attach another file by typing Y for yes. KeySoft continues at the beginning of this step.
5. When you have finished attaching
files, press N. Continue with the e‑mail
writing procedure.
Note: When
sending a document as an attachment, it pays to consider the reading equipment
available to the recipient. For example, a plain Braille file is no use to
someone without a Braille reading device. Remember also that you can attach
files off the Network, even those whose file type is incompatible with the
BrailleNote BT.
The "Read E‑Mail" option on the KeyMail menu is
likely to be the most frequently used feature of the BrailleNote BT's e‑mail
system. Using this option you can download new e‑mail, read e‑mail
stored in the KeyMail filing system, including those sent by yourself, organize
your e‑mail into folders, and send unwanted e‑mail to the trash
folder.
KeyMail
guides you through processes such as reading or detaching e‑mail file
attachments and moving or copying e‑mail to other folders. It provides
options for replying to, and forwarding e‑mail. KeyMail allows you to
perform these options one at a time, or you can mark individual e‑mail
for later action.
Next we
discuss the philosophy behind KeyMail's "Read E‑mail" design, then we take a detailed
look at each of the available features.
KeyMail
organizes your messages by sorting them into folders. These folders are located
within the KeyMail system, and are not part of the normal folder structure of
KeySoft. Initially, KeyMail provides 8 internal folders. These are My E‑mail,
Inbox, Outbox, Sent, Received, All, Draft and Trash. It is highly recommended
that you create at least 2 folders of your own. Your folders could simply be
called “Mail In” and “Mail out.”
Incoming
mail is automatically placed in the Inbox. When you have read an e‑mail,
KeyMail will prompt you to move the e‑mail to another folder. This folder
must be one that you have created, or the "Trash" or "My E‑mail" folder, and could for example be
your “Mail In” folder. Items moved from the Inbox
also appear in the Received folder. A link to this e‑mail also appears in
the All folder. It is important to understand that if an e‑mail stays in
the Inbox, it does not appear in either the Received or All folders.
The
Outbox stores your outgoing e‑mail messages until they have been sent. At
the point where you are about to send your e‑mail message, KeyMail asks
if you wish to save a copy. If you answer yes, you are prompted for the folder
into which to save the e‑mail. Again, this must be a folder you have
created, and could be your “Mail out” or "My E‑mail" folder. E‑mail saved in a
folder prior to sending will also appear in the Sent folder. A link to this e‑mail
is also placed in the All folder. It is important to realize that sent e‑mails
only appear in the Sent and All folders if you have saved them to one of your folders.
The
Drafts folder is used to hold messages that have been started, but are not
ready to be sent, and the Trash folder stores any e‑mails deleted from
the system.
New mail
is automatically placed in the Inbox and is stored in the order it is received.
If you choose to read the Inbox, KeyMail asks whether you wish to check for new
mail before placing you in the Inbox at the last item received.
KeyMail
encourages you to organize your e‑mail as you read. Once a message has
been read from the Inbox, you are prompted to move the message from the Inbox
to another folder. In this way you keep the number of items in your Inbox to a
manageable number, and you are able to organize your e‑mail under useful
categories. E‑mail within a folder can be marked, either on an individual
basis, or alternatively all items can be marked. This handy feature allows you
to move, copy, delete, print or emboss marked e‑mails as a group without
having to repeat the procedure for each e‑mail.
Reading
or detaching file attachments received with e‑mail is easy with KeyMail.
Document attachments can be read without detaching, or they may be detached and
saved in the normal KeySoft folders so that they can be accessed from KeyWord.
The “E‑mail Action Menu" can be invoked from within any
KeyMail folder, or while reading an e‑mail, and provides tools for
replying to e‑mail, forwarding an e‑mail to another person or group
of people, moving, copying, deleting, printing and embossing. To select the E‑mail
Action Menu, press SPACE with dots 2‑6.
The
following steps are required to read your incoming e‑mail.
1. Select KeyMail by pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER with E.
2. KeySoft displays "KeyMail Menu.” Select "Read E‑mail" from the KeyMail menu.
3. If you have more than one account, KeySoft prompts: "Use which e‑mail account? Press ENTER for (account)" To select the offered e‑mail account, press ENTER, otherwise press SPACE repeatedly to find the required account. When you have found it, press ENTER.
4. If using a dial‑up modem to
access your e‑mail, read this. If not, skip to the next step. KeySoft
displays the message “dialing,” and you should hear the dialing process
followed by whistling noises as your modem connects with the modem at your
Service Provider. Before the sequence of messages listed in the next step, you
will first hear these:
Dialing;
Connected;
Logging
On;
Logon
Successful;
Connected;
...and
at the end of the sequence below, you will get this message:
Remain connected to the modem? (Press Y or N)
5. KeySoft reports the progress of the
mail checking sequence by displaying the appropriate message as each
significant stage of the operation is completed. The typical sequence of
messages, assuming you have one new message to receive and no outgoing e‑mail
to send, is:
There
is 1 e‑mail on Server;
Checking
for new messages;
There
is 1 new e‑mail;
Receiving
1;
There
is no e‑mail to send.
When new
e‑mail appears in the Inbox, you will be presented with the first new e‑mail
to read:
1. To review the fields associated with
the E‑mail press SPACE to advance through the fields, or BACKSPACE to move back through the fields.
Each
e‑mail entry in a folder consists of a number of fields, depending on
whether the e‑mail has any attachments, and how many there are. The first
field presented is the Subject, followed by the sender. Next the date and time
the message was received is given, followed by a field for each attachment, if
they are present. Finally, a list of whom the e‑mail was to be copied to,
followed by the date and time the message was sent in the time zone it was sent
from.
File
attachments are discussed in 11.8.5 Received Attachments.
2. To read the e‑mail, press ENTER at any field other than an attachment field.
3. KeySoft prompts ”Top of Document,” and you are placed at the top of the e‑mail message. Use the
normal KeyWord commands to read and review the message. When you have finished
reading, press SPACE with E to exit the document.
4. KeySoft prompts "Move this e‑mail to which folder?." To hear the existing options, press SPACE. These are Trash and My E‑mail. You can
create a new folder by typing its name and pressing Y at the prompt. KeySoft will advise that one e‑mail
has been moved. If you want to leave the e‑mail in the Inbox press SPACE with E. You are then returned to the
Inbox, where you can review and read your next e‑mail.
The
following section provides instructions on how to move around the e‑mail
within the "Inbox,” or any folder. Please consult the
following section 11.8.6 Folder Management to find out more about Folder
Management, folders you have created, and how you may either rename or delete
them from the KeyMail folder system.
When you
enter any folder, the focus is on the last item entered in that folder. You can
move up and down the items in a folder, and read the key fields associated with
each item. If desired, you can also read the e‑mail message and any
included attachment.
KeyMail
provides the following commands to review e‑mail within a folder:
To read
the selected e‑mail, press ENTER.
To exit
the e‑mail message, press SPACE with E.
To move
to the next field, press SPACE.
To move
back to the previous field, press BACKSPACE.
To move
to the next e‑mail, press SPACE with dots 5‑6.
To move
back to the previous e‑mail, press SPACE with dots 2‑3.
To move
this e‑mail to the trash folder, press BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
To mark
an e‑mail for further action, press SPACE with M.
To search
for a subject, name or contents, press SPACE with F, then S, or N or C; remember that you can add spaces to a search string by using the
binding space command. It is shown as $bsp on the Braille display.
To select
the E‑mail Action Menu, press SPACE with dots 2‑6.
To move
forward or back a day, press BACKSPACE with dot 6 or dot 3.
To move
forward or back a week, press BACKSPACE with dot 5 or dot 2.
To move
forward or back a month, press BACKSPACE with dot 4 or dot 1.
To move
forward or back a year, press BACKSPACE with dots 5‑6 or dots 2‑3.
To move
to the first e‑mail in a folder, press SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3.
To move
to the last e‑mail in a folder, press SPACE with dots 4‑5‑6.
To
determine the number of e‑mails in the folder press SPACE with I.
If the e‑mail
being reviewed has one or more attachments, these appear as fields in the e‑mail
entry. Move forward or back through the fields with the SPACE and BACKSPACE keys. KeySoft displays "Attachment 1 name,” "Attachment 2 name,” and so on, depending on the number
of attachments.
Press ENTER on the desired attachment, and KeySoft asks you
to confirm whether you wish to detach or read the file. To read the attachment,
press R. To detach, press D.
Choosing
Read, places you at the top of the attached document. KeySoft's normal review
commands may then be used to read the file. Press SPACE with E to exit the attachment, and you are returned
to the folder from which you opened the attachment.
Choosing the
“Detach” option, causes KeySoft to prompt the
attachment file type, and ask whether you wish to detach the file as a KeyWord
document.
For
example, if the attachment were a Microsoft Word document, KeySoft would
prompt: "Attachment is a Microsoft Word file. Detach as a KeyWord document?"
To have
the file converted to a KeyWord Text Document, press Y. To leave the attachment as a Microsoft Word
file, press N. To have the file converted to a
KeyWord Braille Document, press B.
KeySoft
will then prompt: "Delete this attachment from the e‑mail?"
Now that
you have saved a copy of the attachment, you can save storage space by deleting
the attachment from the e‑mail. To delete the attachment from the e‑mail,
press Y, to leave the attachment unchanged,
press N.
Please note that email attachments received in the
DOCX or PDF file types will immediately prompt you to detach the file in a
specific location, as there is conversion that is necessary when the file is
opened.
E‑mail
folders are different to the other kinds on the Flash Disk. They are held in a
database, called E‑mail folders.cdb, found in the KeyList folder of the
Flash Disk. You cannot access this database any other way than KeyMail, but we
hope that by understanding this, it will make the folder management process
easier to understand. It also explains why, in order to make more room for e‑mails,
the option is called "Free Database Space". For more information on
this option, please refer to 11.10.3 Free Database Space.
Organizing
your e‑mail requires that you give some thought to what folders you need
to efficiently categorize your e‑mail. New folders can easily be created
at any prompt to name a folder, by simply typing in a new folder name. If the
folder doesn't already exist you will be prompted to confirm the creation of a
new folder.
The following
options are available at the “Folder Name" prompt:
To select
the suggested folder press ENTER.
To move
forward or back through the list of existing folders, press SPACE, or BACKSPACE.
In the
"list of folders,” the following commands are available:
To delete
a folder, press BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6;
To rename
a folder, press BACKSPACE with R;
To
determine the number of e‑mails in the folder, press SPACE with I;
To jump
to folders starting with a particular letter, press that letter.
E‑mail
within a folder may be marked for future action. The marking can either be
applied to all e‑mail in the folder, or on an individual basis. E‑mail
marking is extremely useful when you are organizing your e‑mail, as it
allows you to perform common actions on a number of files. For example, if you
decide, while reading your new e‑mails, that a number of them can be
deleted, these e‑mails may be marked. Before exiting the folder you can
move all the marked e‑mails to the Trash folder by pressing BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
To mark
individual e‑mails, press SPACE with M. To mark all files in the folder, press SPACE with dots 2‑6 to open the “E‑mail Action Menu,” and choose the mark all files option.
E‑mail
marking only applies while you are in the folder. When you exit the folder the
marking is turned off.
The E‑mail
Action Menu is available when you are reviewing e‑mail within a folder,
and is entered by pressing SPACE with dots 2‑6. The options available from the menu depend on the folder you are
reviewing.
Invoking
the E‑mail Action Menu within the Inbox presents the following options:
Reply: Used
to send an answer to the person who sent you the message. Choosing this option
presents further choices, and after you have chosen the appropriate action,
KeyMail creates a new message with the address and subject line filled in. The
additional options available after choosing Reply are:
Reply to sender only:
If you
receive a message that has been sent to a group of people you can send a reply
to all members of the group as well as the sender, or just to the sender of the
message. Answering Y to this option restricts your reply
to the sender.
Move e‑mail to another folder:
Choose
this option to move the selected e‑mail to the folder of your choice.
Either select the folder by pressing SPACE, then ENTER, or type in the name of the folder.
If the folder does not already exist you are asked to confirm the creation of a
new folder.
Copy e‑mail to another folder:
Choose
this option to copy the selected e‑mail to the folder of your choice.
This leaves the original in the current folder. Either select the folder by
pressing SPACE, then ENTER, or type in the name of the folder. If the folder does not already exist
you are asked to confirm the creation of a new folder.
Delete e‑mail from this folder:
Choose
this option to delete the selected e‑mail from the current folder. The
deleted e‑mail is moved to the Trash folder.
Mark all e‑mail:
This is a
useful feature if you want to perform an action on all e‑mail within the
current folder. For example you may wish to copy the contents of the folder to
another folder. If you wanted to do this, first "Mark all e‑mail,” then choose the "Copy e‑mail to another folder option" from the E‑mail Action Menu.
Invoking
the E‑mail Action Menu within, for example, the Sent folder, causes the “Reply" and “Delete e‑mail from this folder" options to be suppressed. A new
item, "Move to Trash" will appear on the menu in addition
to the other standard items.
Include copy of original e‑mail:
Answering
Y to this prompt causes KeySoft to
include a copy of the original e‑mail text in the message area.
Include original e‑mail attachments:
Answering
Y to this prompt causes KeySoft to
include a copy of the original e‑mail attachments with the reply.
Forward: Used
to send an e‑mail message you have received to another person or group. Choosing
this option presents further choices and input fields to be entered. After you
have done the appropriate action, KeyMail creates a new message with the
subject line filled in, and the message area will contain the forwarded e‑mail.
You can then enter your message ahead of the forwarded e‑mail. The
additional option available after choosing Forward is:
Include the original emails attachments:
Answering
Y to this prompt causes KeySoft to
include a copy of the original e‑mail attachments with the forwarded
message.
You are
then presented with the standard prompts for writing an e‑mail, such as: Send to? Also Send to?, Copy to?, and so on. From this point, proceed
on as if you were preparing and sending a standard e‑mail message.
Move e‑mail to another folder:
Choose
this option to move the selected e‑mail to the folder of your choice.
Either select the folder by pressing SPACE, then ENTER, or type in the name of the folder.
If the folder does not already exist you are asked to confirm the creation of a
new folder.
Copy e‑mail to another folder:
Choose
this option to copy the selected e‑mail to the folder of your choice.
This leaves the original in the current folder. Either select the folder by
pressing SPACE, then ENTER, or type in the name of the folder. If the folder does not already exist
you are asked to confirm the creation of a new folder.
Delete e‑mail from this folder:
Choose
this option to delete the selected e‑mail from the current folder. The
deleted e‑mail is moved to the Trash folder.
Mark all e‑mail:
This is a
useful feature if you want to perform an action on all e‑mail within the
current folder. For example you may wish to copy the contents of the folder to
another folder. If you wanted to do this, first "Mark all e‑mail,” then choose the "Copy e‑mail to another folder option" from the E‑mail Action Menu.
Invoking
the E‑mail Action Menu within, for example, the Sent folder, causes the “Reply" and “Delete e‑mail from this folder" options to be suppressed. A new
item, "Move to Trash" will appear on the menu in addition
to the other standard items.
Print e‑mail:
Choose
this option to print an ink copy of the selected e‑mail.
Emboss e‑mail:
Choose this
option to emboss a copy of the selected e‑mail on a Braille printer.
Include copy of original e‑mail:
Answering
Y to this prompt causes KeySoft to
include a copy of the original e‑mail text in the message area.
Include original e‑mail attachments:
Answering
Y to this prompt causes KeySoft to
include a copy of the original e‑mail attachments with the reply.
Forward: Used to send an e‑mail message you have
received to another person or group. Choosing this option presents further
choices and input fields to be entered. After you have done the appropriate
action, KeyMail creates a new message with the subject line filled in, and the
message area will contain the forwarded e‑mail. You can then enter your
message ahead of the forwarded e‑mail. The additional option available
after choosing Forward is:
Include the original e‑mails attachments:
Answering
Y to this prompt causes KeySoft to
include a copy of the original e‑mail attachments with the forwarded
message.
You are
then presented with the standard prompts for writing an e‑mail, such as: Send to? Also Send to?, Copy to?, and so on. From this point, proceed
on as if you were preparing and sending a standard e‑mail message.
Move e‑mail to another folder:
Choose
this option to move the selected e‑mail to the folder of your choice.
Either select the folder by pressing SPACE, then ENTER, or type in the name of the folder.
If the folder does not already exist you are asked to confirm the creation of a
new folder.
Copy e‑mail to another folder:
Choose this
option to copy the selected e‑mail to the folder of your choice. This
leaves the original in the current folder. Either select the folder by pressing
SPACE, then ENTER, or type in the name of the folder. If the folder does not already exist
you are asked to confirm the creation of a new folder.
Delete e‑mail from this folder:
Choose
this option to delete the selected e‑mail from the current folder. The
deleted e‑mail is moved to the Trash folder.
Print e‑mail:
Choose
this option to print an ink copy of the selected e‑mail.
Emboss e‑mail:
Choose
this option to emboss a copy of the selected e‑mail on a Braille printer.
Mark all e‑mail:
This is a
useful feature if you want to perform an action on all e‑mail within the
current folder. For example you may wish to copy the contents of the folder to
another folder. If you wanted to do this, first "Mark all e‑mail,” then choose the "Copy e‑mail to another folder option" from the E‑mail Action Menu.
Invoking
the E‑mail Action Menu within, for example, the Sent folder, causes the “Reply" and “Delete e‑mail from this folder" options to be suppressed. A new
item, "Move to Trash" will appear on the menu in addition
to the other standard items.
The Trash
folder is used as a temporary storage folder for e‑mails deleted from any
of the KeyMail folders. When you exit KeyMail and return to the Main Menu,
KeySoft advises if there are any e‑mails in the Trash folder and asks if
you want to empty the trash.
Typing N at the prompt to "empty trash?" returns you to the Main Menu, and
leaves the items in the "Trash" folder.
To empty
the trash, press Y. To Review the Trash Folder, press R. Pressing Y permanently deletes all e‑mail from the Trash folder. Typing R allows you to review the items. The following
options are then available:
To review
each e‑mail by moving through the fields, press SPACE to move to the next field. To move back to the
previous field, press BACKSPACE.
To move
to the next e‑mail, press SPACE with dots 5‑6. To move back to the previous e‑mail,
press SPACE with dots 2‑3.
To delete
the e‑mail being reviewed, press BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
To
restore e‑mails in the Trash folder to their original folders, press SPACE with dots 2‑6 to enter the 'Trash Folder Menu.” From this menu you may choose the
option to "Restore this e‑mail to original folder.” The other option in this menu is "Empty the Trash Folder.”
Connect
to Send and Receive E‑mail checks for new e‑mail, and sends any e‑mails
in the "Outbox.” You are prompted through the steps
required, and feedback is provided as to the status of the connection and mail
download. If you have any unsent mail, this is also sent at this time.
1. From the KeyMail menu select "Send and receive e‑mail.”
2. If you have more than one account, KeySoft prompts: "Use which e‑mail account? Press ENTER for (account)" To select the offered e‑mail account, press ENTER, otherwise press SPACE repeatedly to find the required account. When you have found it, press ENTER.
3. If using a dial‑up modem to
access your e‑mail, read this. If not, skip to the next step. KeySoft
displays the message “dialing,” and you should hear the dialing process
followed by whistling noises as your modem connects with the modem at your
Service Provider. Before the sequence of messages listed in the next step, you
will first hear these:
Dialing;
Connected;
Logging
On;
Logon
Successful;
Connected;
...and
at the end of the sequence below, you will get this message:
Remain connected to the modem? (Press Y or N)
4. KeySoft reports the progress of the
mail checking sequence by displaying the appropriate message as each
significant stage of the operation is completed. The typical sequence of
messages, assuming you have one new message to receive and no outgoing e‑mail
to send, is:
There
is 1 e‑mail on Server;
Checking
for new messages;
There
is 1 new e‑mail;
Receiving
1;
There
is no e‑mail to send.
For
details on the options available while downloading e‑mail, during the
download options, refer to the following section 11.9.1 Download status.
During
the sending and receiving process BrailleNote BT beeps once every few seconds
indicating it is busy.
When
using a dialup connection, at completion of sending your messages, KeySoft
displays "Remain connected to modem?" To disconnect and return to the
KeyMail Menu, press N. To remain connected and return to
the Main Menu, press Y.
If you wish to terminate the e‑mail session at any time, press SPACE with E. If using a dial‑up connection, KeySoft will prompt, "Abandon e‑mail session after current operation or hang‑up immediately?". To allow KeySoft to complete its current operation before hanging up, press N for no. To hang up immediately, press I for immediately.
You can
press ENTER at any time during the download
process to hear the status of the download. During this process, the
BrailleNote BT beeps once every few seconds indicating it is busy.
Download
status displays the percentage complete, the size of the e‑mail currently
being downloaded and the percentage complete of the total e‑mails waiting
to be downloaded. It is useful to check the status during downloads of long
messages, as it provides an indication that the download is progressing
satisfactorily.
The
maximum size for any e‑mail to download, without prompting for User
intervention, is initially set to 50K or approximately 50,000 characters. Any e‑mail
bigger than this setting causes KeySoft to prompt: "This e‑mail is larger than the maximum size allowed. Option?"
The following
options are available at this point:
Continue
to download: press
ENTER;
Skip
this e‑mail: press
S;
Delete
this e‑mail from server: press
D;
Hear
information about the e‑mail: press
I;
This
displays the sender and the subject.
Download
only the first 10 lines,
but
leave all on the server: press
T;
Download
10 lines and delete
from
server: press
A.
Change
the size limit: press
L.
Selecting
Setup Options from the KeyMail menu presents the KeyMail Setup Menu which
provides 4 options; "Directory of E‑mail Accounts,” "Receive Options,” "Address List,”and "Free Database Space".
"Directory of E‑mail Accounts" allows you to define account
details for e‑mail using a particular Service Provider, and provides
options for both adding a new account and looking up and modifying an existing
account. For details refer to 11.10.1 Directory of E‑mail Accounts.
"Receive Options" allows you to choose whether or not
your e‑mail is deleted from your mail box at the Service Provider after
you have downloaded it to the BrailleNote BT. It also allows you to set the
size limit for automatic download. Refer to 11.10.2 Receive Options.
"Address List” allows you to select the Address
List file that will be used by KeyMail.
"Free Database Space" allows you to reclaim space in the e‑mail database that had been taken up by unwanted e‑mails. Refer to 11.10.3 Free Database Space.
To select
"Directory of E‑Mail Accounts,” first select KeyMail from the Main
Menu, then select Setup Options. You are presented with the KeyMail Setup Menu
and "Directory of E‑mail Accounts" is the first item on this menu.
There are
two options on this menu; "Add an Account,” and "Look up an Account.”
"Add an Account" is used to set up the details of a
new e‑mail account.
"Look up an Account" allows you to review the details
for an existing e‑mail account, and modify individual fields as
appropriate.
Information
relating to a particular e‑mail account is stored in a record, and each
record has a number of fields that contain the details for that record. KeySoft
provides commands for moving between records and reviewing the fields within
them. To move to the next record, press SPACE with dots 5‑6. To move back to the previous record,
press SPACE with dots 2‑3. Within a record you can use the SPACE and BACKSPACE keys to move forward or back through the list
of fields.
The next
two sections provide detailed information on "Adding an Account" and "Looking up an Account.”
To send
and receive e‑mail you need access to an e‑mail Service Provider.
When you open an account with a Service Provider you need to obtain details of
the service such as the POP server and SMTP addresses, and these details must
be loaded into KeyMail before you can use that e‑mail account.
Note: Details of
the actual internet connection are listed separately. This is because it is not
uncommon for users to access the internet in multiple ways, via a different set‑up
to the default one, and this arrangement saves double entering account details
or connection configurations.
To add an
e‑mail account, follow these steps:
1. Select E‑mail from the Main
Menu, or press BACKSPACE with ENTER with E, anywhere.
2. KeySoft displays "KeyMail Menu.” Select Set Up Options from the
KeyMail menu. KeySoft displays "KeyMail Set Up Menu." Select Directory of E‑mail
accounts.
3. KeySoft displays "Directory of E‑mail Accounts.” Select Add an account. KeySoft displays "Entry List for Directory of E‑mail accounts.”
4. KeySoft now steps you through a list
of details of the service so that you can enter details for each item. KeySoft
queries “Account Name?” Enter the name you wish this account
to be called and press ENTER. Typically you would use the name of your provider, for example, "Earthlink.”
5. KeySoft prompts "User Name?” Enter the user name, for example
Murray_Thorn. Typically this is the part of your e‑mail address that
precedes the @ sign.
6. KeySoft prompts “Password?" For greater security, you can leave
this blank and you will be prompted for the password each time you connect.
Alternatively, type your password. The password is displayed as you enter it.
You can review it before pressing ENTER. After pressing ENTER it displays as 5 asterisks.
Remember that passwords are often case sensitive, so it is important that you
enter the password exactly as you have chosen or been given.
7. You are then prompted for "Your Name?" and reminded that computer Braille
is required. This is the name that will appear in the From: field when the
recipient reads e‑mail from you.
8. KeySoft prompts "Your E‑mail address?." Type your full e‑mail address
for this provider, for example: Murray_Thorn@earthlink.net.
9. KeySoft now queries "POP Server?." Enter the POP server address. For
example a POP server address might be "pop.humanware.com.” The POP server address defines the
path via which you receive mail from your e‑mail account provider.
10. KeySoft queries "Use a secure connection for POP server?" If your POP server requires a secure
connection (SSL), press Y. If a secure connection is not required, press
N. The default is No.
11. Next KeySoft queries "SMTP Server?." Enter the SMTP server address. For
example a SMTP server address might be "smtp.humanware.com.” The SMTP server address defines the
path via which you send mail to your e‑mail account provider.
12. KeySoft then queries "Use a secure connection for SMTP server?" If your SMTP server requires a
secure connection (SSL), press Y. If a secure connection is not required, press
N. The default is No.
13. KeySoft displays, "SMTP authentication required?" Increasingly, e‑mail providers expect users to verify their user name and address on the SMTP server before allowing them to proceed. The BrailleNote BT is set up to automatically provide your username and password if you have turned this feature on. The default is No. Press Y to turn on.
14. KeySoft asks you to enter the Pop
port. The default value is 110. This
may vary depending on E‑mail service.
15. Finally, KeySoft asks for SMTP port.
The default value is 25. This
may vary depending on E‑mail service.
16. You can review your list of entries with the BACKSPACE and SPACE keys. When you are happy with the entries, press SPACE with E to exit the list and KeySoft prompts
"Add this record?." Press Y to save this record in the list of e‑mail accounts. KeySoft confirms
your choice with the message "Yes,” "Record added" and returns to the Directory of E‑mail
Accounts Menu.
If you
have more than one e‑mail account that you wish to access on the
BrailleNote BT, simply add another record in the same way. Each account will
have its own POP and SMTP server addresses, which you can get from the e‑mail
account provider.
To check or modify details of a particular account, select "Look up an Account". To do this, follow these steps:
1. Select E‑mail from the Main
Menu, or press BACKSPACE with ENTER with E, anywhere.
2. KeySoft displays "KeyMail Menu.” Select Set Up Options from the
KeyMail menu. KeySoft displays "KeyMail Set Up Menu." Select Directory of E‑mail
accounts.
3. KeySoft displays "Directory of E‑mail Accounts.” Select Look Up an account. KeySoft queries "Account to Look Up?"
4. To lookup all account records, press ENTER. To move to the next account record, press SPACE with dots 5‑6, and to move to the previous account record, press SPACE with dots 2‑3. Alternatively type part or the entire e‑mail account name, then press ENTER. If your entry matches more than one account name, KeySoft displays the number of matches and places you at the first matching account name. To move to the next match, press SPACE with dots 5‑6, or to move back, SPACE with dots 2‑3. Make a selection by pressing ENTER.
5. KeySoft steps you through the fields
of the nominated account so that you can check the details of each item. If you
want to change a field, press BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4 anywhere in the list. This takes
you into an entry mode where all fields are presented and you can enter or
change any field. Press ENTER when you have finished modifying a
field and the next field will be presented. SPACE with E takes you back to the review option.
To
make a duplicate copy of an e‑mail account record, you can use the same
technique as discussed in 10.5 Duplicating a Record, for duplicating address list
records. This provides a quick and convenient way of duplicating a record, and
then modifying a field.
The
account record list comprises the following items:
Account
Name;
User
Name;
Password;
Your
Name;
E‑mail
address;
POP
Server;
POP
Server secure connection (SSL). Yes or No;
SMTP
Server;
POP
Server secure connection (SSL). Yes or No;
SMTP Authentication Required?
6. When you are happy with the entries,
press SPACE with E to exit the record, and if you
changed any details KeySoft prompts "Add this record?" Press Y to save this record in the list of services or N if you do not want to save your changes.
If you
want to delete an account record, select the account you wish to remove, and
press BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
Receive
Options allows you to choose whether you want to delete e‑mail from the e‑mail
service after uploading it to your BrailleNote BT, and to put a size limit on
incoming e‑mails.
To select
Receive Options, first select KeyMail from the Main Menu, and then select Setup
Options. You are presented with the KeyMail Setup Menu and Receive Options is
the second item on this menu.
Selecting
Receive Options places you in the E‑mail Receive Options Setup List,
which contains two items.
1. "Delete e‑mail from service after receiving? currently Yes or No"
For
the usual option of having each e‑mail deleted from your service account
after it has been successfully received, press Y. To leave it on the service so that, for
example, you can also download it to your PC, press N. This feature can be useful if you wish to
keep a complete record of your received e‑mail on your PC, and are using
your BrailleNote BT to download your messages while you are traveling.
2. "Size limit for automatic download of e‑mail? Currently 50K"
If an
e‑mail is larger than this setting, KeySoft will prompt you with a number
of options before downloading it. These options were discussed in 11.9.1 Download status. To change the value, enter the
maximum size in kilobytes and press ENTER. For example, to set the limit at 60 kilobytes, enter 60, followed by ENTER. The default setting is 50K, or approximately
50,000 characters.
To exit
the Receive Options list, press SPACE with E and you are returned to the KeyMail
Setup Menu.
E‑mail
folders are held in a database. One of the peculiarities of databases is that
when you delete items from them, they don't automatically shrink back down
again. Because of this, simply deleting your unwanted e‑mails does not
free up more space. The "Free database space" software shrinks the database back to the
smallest size capable of storing the e‑mails remaining in the database.
To use
this utility, simply go to the e‑mail set‑up menu, and select the
item "Free database space". After running, the utility will
report how much space has been freed.
End of E‑Mail
Chapter.
KeyWeb
has all the same basic features as Internet Explorer. You can browse the web,
use a search engine, download files or read a page online and work through
forms. KeyWeb can also be used to open and read locally stored html files, such
as a saved web page.
This
chapter is designed to demonstrate the features and commands of KeyWeb, and the
ways it makes the Internet accessible for users of the BrailleNote family of
products. To learn more about how the Internet works, we suggest that you
investigate the various tutorials available that are designed to aid persons
who are blind or visually impaired in learning to use the Internet and all its
accompanying features.
As with
KeyMail, in order to use KeyWeb, you will need to set up at least one
connection configuration. The connection configuration makes it possible to
connect to an Internet service provider and therefore to the world wide web.
There are many different setups you can use to do this, and the ones that you
choose will depend on what technology you have available and where you want to
be when you browse the web.
Here are
some examples of available connection configurations:
Connect
to a LAN network using the ethernet port
Using
WiFi (wireless) in your BrailleNote BT, access any available WiFi network, at
home, school, work, or even out shopping.
As is
standard in KeySoft, you can jump in and out of KeyWeb to go to other
applications such as KeyMail, KeyWord etc. The hot key combination for changing
to KeyWeb is BACKSPACE with ENTER with I. For more information on the Task
list, see 1.19 Switching Between Tasks.
If you
are using a USB external modem connection and jump to another task, KeyWeb will
ask if you wish to stay connected. If you jump into KeyMail while still
connected, you can then use the same connection to check your e‑mail.
Likewise if you wish to return to KeyWeb from KeyMail, you can continue to use
the same connection.
If you
jump to another task, perhaps to paste new contact information into the Address
list, you will also stay connected, and you can return to KeyWeb when you have
finished, using BACKSPACE with ENTER with I. You will be returned to the same
page you left.
When
using a wireless or LAN network connection, you will automatically stay
connected until you choose to disconnect.
While
using a dialup connection, if you have left KeyWeb while still connected to the
Internet, and you decide that you don’t wish to return to either KeyWeb or
KeyMail, you can disconnect from right where you are. Simply press SPACE with O to access the Options Menu, select
Connectivity Menu, and from this menu, select Disconnect. This option only
displays in the Connectivity Menu when you are connected to the Internet, and
using a dialup connection.
A URL
(Uniform Resource Locator) is the location address of a web page; for example,
www.humanware.com, or Flash Disk\My Favorites\hw.
The first
prompt displayed when you select KeyWeb from the Main Menu is a request for a
URL. At this point you have several options. You can either:
Select
the home page, which is the URL offered;
Type a
URL;
Copy and
paste a URL from another location, such as from KeyWord or KeyMail (For more
information refer to 1.20 Copying and Pasting Text);
Select a
URL from your favorites (For more information refer to 12.8.3 Selecting a Favorite);
Select a
URL from the history list (For more information refer to 12.10.1 History Records);
Select an
HTML file from a folder (For more information refer to 12.7 Application Management);
Having
made a selection, press ENTER. KeySoft prompts for a connection
configuration. If you only have one set up, this one will be offered. If you
have several configurations, it will offer the last one used. To change service
provider, press SPACE at the prompt and select another
one in the usual way.
During
the page loading process, you may hear a series of beeps unless you have turned
them off; these are progress tones, designed to let you know something is
happening while the page is loading. You can also find out what percentage of
the page has loaded by pressing SPACE with H. When the page has completed
loading, KeyWeb will display the words in the top line of the page.
Note that
you can hear the contents of a URL by pressing SPACE with dots 3‑4 then repeat the command.
Progress
tones are there to let you know a page is loading or a download is progressing
normally. You can control their volume or turn them off altogether. To do this,
go to the Options Menu, Review Voice by pressing SPACE with O then R. Press SPACE repeatedly to reach the Progress Tone Volume option. Type a number
between 0 and 6. Zero disables the tone, 6 is loudest. To leave the setting unchanged,
just press ENTER. The factory setting is 4.
Apart
from the "move by" commands outlined below, KeyWeb
uses the same commands as the Book Reader for moving through a page. These
commands are in the Command Summary and are also covered in 4.5 Additional Reading Commands.
There are
different ways you can review or move across a web page:
You can
read it, using the standard KeySoft Read commands.
You can
skip across it from hyperlink to hyperlink, referred to in KeyWeb as simply “links;”
You can
move through it reviewing another page element such as input controls, headings
or frames.
Or you
can combine these in any way that works for you. In this chapter, we refer to
links, frames, headings and input controls collectively as “page elements.”
You can
use the NEXT and PREVIOUS thumb keys to move around all the input
controls and links on the page in whatever order they appear. So with each
press you may move from, for example, link to button to text field to link, to
link etc. This is different to the other page navigations as they only move by
one specified element type, whereas this one includes all types of input
controls and links. If you have surfed the Web on a PC before, this is the
equivalent of using Tab and Shift Tab.
This
function allows you to move from section to section of non‑linked text.
You can set a minimum number of characters for KeyWeb to search for.
For
example, if the minimum size is 50, KeyWeb will find the next section of text
that is 50 or more characters long, and skip to the beginning of it ready for
you to read. The larger the minimum number, the larger the section KeyWeb will
skip to.
This is
useful when reviewing news or magazine sites, research sites, or anywhere where
you just want to get to the information.
The key
commands are:
Move to
next section of text: ENTER with dots 5‑6,
Move to
previous section of text: ENTER with dots 2‑3.
Note: These commands are similar to move by paragraph
but use ENTER instead of SPACE.
To set
the minimum size of the section of text, there is an option in the display
settings. To get to this setting, press BACKSPACE with O then D for Display Settings, then
select "Text section size?" Enter the number and press ENTER. The factory setting is 50.
Links
will take you to another place, either in the same page or website, or
somewhere else entirely. They also can lead to downloads, documents, etc.
Moving from link to link is a very useful way to review or use many types of
sites. Great for reviewing search results on a search engine, a menu page or
frame, the home page of a large site, etc.
Links
appear on the Braille display like this: dots 2‑4‑6 name of link
dots 1‑3‑5.
If you
have speech on or have set speech on request, you will notice that links are identified
by a small beep just before the name of the link.
Moving by
Link is always available to you in KeyWeb; so you can use it in conjunction
with moving by another type of page element.
To move
from link to link, use BACKSPACE to move backwards and SPACE to move forwards. Alternatively, press the
initial letter of the link. Note that each time you press a particular letter,
you are moved to the next link on the page that starts with that letter. For
example, if you repeatedly press the letter "n" you will be moved
sequentially through all the links starting with "n" in the order
that they occur on the page.
When
punctuation level 1 is set, no beep will be heard. However, when punctuation
level 2 is set, you will hear several beeps.
For
punctuation levels 3 to 5, KeySoft will display "link start" and
"link end".
You can
follow the link you are on by pressing ENTER, or the touch cursor anywhere above the link on the Braille display.
It is
also possible to place the cursor on a character within a link as opposed to
following it, perhaps to copy and paste the link into a document or e‑mail.
When you are on the link, press and hold down the PREVIOUS thumb key, then press and release the touch
cursor.
The other
three types of page elements you can use to move around the page are Input
control, Heading or Frame. You can toggle through these types of page elements
using the commands listed below. The default setting is input control. Because
these page elements share a separate set of movement commands to links, you can
use whichever one you have selected in conjunction with links. You can select
links in the same manner as well; the command is included in the list below.
What
follows is a brief description of each page element and how it is used.
Input
control: Input controls are fields where you can type in text, or some other
form of entry is required. They include text form fields, check boxes, radio
buttons, buttons, and selection lists. Almost all forms are made up of a
combination of these types of fields. Handling forms is discussed in 12.6.1 Handling Forms.
Heading:
Headings usually cover the topics on a page and are a good way of finding out
what the page is about.
Frame:
Many web pages are divided into frames. They are basically windows within the
page, usually dividing the page into subjects or groups of links etc. This is a
high level search and a good way of skipping around a page quickly to get a
sense of what it is about.
These are
the commands used to move around the page by element:
Move to
next element: SPACE with dots 4‑6;
Move to
previous element: SPACE with dots 1‑3;
Current
element: SPACE with dots 1‑3‑4‑6;
Change
move type: SPACE with T;
Link: L;
Input
Control: I;
Heading: H;
Frame: F.
Once you are on an element, you can read from that point. For example, having moved by frame to Frame 2, you can then press SPACE with G for a speech read‑out, or SPACE with dots 1‑2‑4‑5‑6 to scroll your Braille display to read the contents of that frame. If ever in doubt, press SPACE with H.
For pages
and sites previously visited in the same session, you can use the forward and
back commands ENTER with F and ENTER with B to move between them.
If you
wish to move on to a new site at any point, simply press ENTER with O. KeyWeb will prompt: “Address? Press ENTER for (current URL).”
At this
point you have five options (these are the same as when first logging on):
1. To select the current URL, press ENTER.
2. Type in a new URL or favorite name
and press ENTER.
3. Go to list of favorites by pressing SPACE.
4. Go to a saved web page by either
typing the \pathname with a back slash in front of it, or pressing SPACE and then SPACE with T to go into directory mode, and locate it that
way. Even if you make a selection that is not online, your Internet connection
will stay connected.
5. Go to your history by pressing ENTER with dots 2‑3‑6. For more information on History,
refer to 12.10 History.
To fill
out forms you need to be in "move by input control" mode, as forms are made up of input
controls such as form fields, combo or list boxes, check boxes, buttons, and
radio buttons.
When on an input control, it is not always clear what needs to be input. There are two ways to deal with this:
1. Set the “Automatically read input control prompts” to on. This mode will display most
of the prompts, or labels, that explain the purpose of the input control. NOTE:
Some prompts may be coded in such a way that they cannot be read at all.
2. The alternative way is for when you are working with the “Automatically read input control prompts” mode set to "off." Simply press SPACE with R to read the prompt.
To fill
in a text field, type the information in computer Braille, e.g. user name,
search criteria etc. Any existing text can be deleted by pressing BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4. You can edit or delete what you
have written in the usual way. Once you are happy with your input, press ENTER, and your text will be submitted. Note that
you have to press ENTER before your input will be accepted.
If you change your mind and don’t wish to submit the contents of the field
after all, you can either delete it all by pressing BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4, or if there is a reset button,
move to it using SPACE with dots 4‑6 and press ENTER there. If the form has more than one text
field, you may need to move between them using SPACE with dots 4‑6 instead.
In
KeyWeb, selection list is the term used for combo boxes and list boxes. These
are the input fields that allow you to make a selection from a list, and
sometimes to type in your own entry if none of the list items is appropriate.
Once you
are in the selection list field, you can select an item by pressing SPACE and BACKSPACE to go down and up the list. Alternatively, in
some selection lists you can type the initial letter and press it repeatedly
until you find your preferred selection. This is useful in lists of countries
or states, for example, where you know the item you are looking for.
Having
selected an item, simply use SPACE with dots 1‑3 or SPACE with dots 4‑6 to move on, and your selection will
be entered.
To Tab to a button, check a box or select a radio button, press ENTER. KeyWeb will display "click" or "check" or "pressed" respectively.
The
symbols that appear on the Braille display for each input control element are:
Text
Start: (&) dots 1‑2‑3‑4‑6;
Text
End: (y) dots 1‑3‑4‑5‑6;
Radio
button, checked: dots 2‑4‑5‑6, dots 1‑2‑3‑4‑5‑6, dots 1‑2‑3‑5;
Radio
button unchecked: dots 2‑4‑5‑6, dots 3‑6, dots 1‑2‑3‑5;
Check
box, checked: dots 1‑2‑3, dots 1‑2‑3‑4‑5‑6, dots 1‑2‑3;
Check
box, unchecked: dots 1‑2‑3, dots 3‑6, dots 1‑2‑3;
Button:
dollar‑sign b‑t dots 1‑2‑4‑6, dots 1‑2, dots 2‑3‑4‑5;
Selection
list: dollar sign‑l‑s dots 1‑2‑4‑6, dots 1‑2‑3, dots 2‑3‑4;
Multiselection
field (where you can select more than one item):
dollar sign‑l‑s 1‑2‑4‑6, 1‑2‑3, 2‑3‑4 + Checkbox.
Most
application management happens from the Internet Options menu. This is
accessible when you are in KeyWeb, either on a web page or a locally stored
document, by pressing BACKSPACE with O. These are the available options:
Open HTML
file;
Set
current page as home page;
Go to
home page.
Internet
file management:
Clear
cookies;
Delete
temporary files;
Erase
browser history;
File
download options;
Stream
Audio Links.
Display
settings:
Hide
images without descriptions;
Automatically
read input control prompts;
Text
section size;
Default
language for web pages;
Print
current web page;
Error
status;
Review
Browser scripting setting;
Change
Browser Profile.Here is each of these options in more detail:
This
option is used to open a locally stored document, such as a saved web page.
Your home
page is the one that is always presented at the URL prompt. When you first
enter KeyWeb, the home page is set to www.humanware.com\keyweb. To change this
to a home page of your choice, go to that page in the usual manner, and then
select this option off the menu.
No matter
where you are on the internet, when you select this option you will go straight
to your home page.
The three
items on this sub‑menu all involve managing cached files i.e. files that
save themselves on your BrailleNote BT.
Cookies are small files that are uploaded to your computer or BrailleNote BT by web pages. They serve a wide range of functions, but they can build up and from time to time, it pays to delete them all. Select this option to do so.
Same as with cookies, web pages upload various files to your BrailleNote BT and they build up over time. Select this option to delete them all.
This
clears all of the URL's and files that are listed in KeyWeb's history. Very
useful for teachers and students or other people who share equipment, or simply
if you end up with a lot of URL's you will never look at again.
From the
File Download Options List you have the choice of turning "Stream Audio
Links" on (the default) or off.
To allow
for the streaming of audio links, ensure that "Stream Audio Links" is
on. If you want to download an mP3 file, you need to turn "Stream Audio
Links" off.
These
settings determine the extra information that will display as you read a web
page.
Visual
images may have a label called an alt tag, which describes in words what the
image portrays e.g. Child playing with Dog, back view of BrailleNote BT, etc.
Images without these alt tags are not a lot of use and in this option you can
choose Y to ignore them altogether. The
default setting is N. The exception is when an image is
used as a link, in which case it will be treated as a link and not an image,
regardless of how this setting is set.
When this is set to Y for yes, KeyWeb displays the label associated with each of the input controls as it reads them, such as text boxes, radio buttons, check boxes, tables, etc. To turn this feature off, press N.
If a page
is written in a foreign language such as French or German, it may have a hidden
HTML code that indicates this. If this is the case, and you have that language
on your BrailleNote BT, KeyWeb will automatically read the page in that
language. If the page does not have a code marker, you can listen to it and
read it using the English setting, or change it to another language in the
usual way, again assuming you have that language on your BrailleNote BT.
This was described in 12.4.1.2 Moving by text. Type a minimum number of characters for the "Move by Text Size" function. Factory setting is 50.
To print
the current web page, you use the same process that you would for printing a
document. If your printer is ready, print the current web page straight away.
Otherwise, you will be required to set‑up the current printer before
printing.
Refer to
Chapter 6 on Embossing and Printing Documents, for further information.
Occasionally
you will find that a web page is not working correctly. If this is the case,
KeyWeb will inform you of any Java script errors in the current web page.
Deactivating
browser scripts can help the loading of certain complex pages on the
BrailleNote, but it can also interfere with navigation in other pages. Scripts
should be activated unless problems occur on specific pages. To disable
scripts, when this option is selected, select Yes at the "Scripting
disabled? Currently NO" prompt, followed by ENTER. To quickly access this
option from a web page, press BACKSPACE with J.
The web profile allows you to change the way web sites
see the Apex. In certain cases, such as www.amazon.com, it will
automatically provide the Apex the mobile version of the site. If you prefer
the desktop version to the default, you can now change this. Available profiles are:
·
BrailleNote
Mobile Device (Default)
·
BrailleNote Legacy Device (KeyWeb
from earlier versions of KeySoft)
·
Windows XP pc running Internet
Explorer 6
·
Windows
Pocket PC Device
·
Microsoft
Smart Phone Device
Note that results will vary on how
different web pages interpret these profiles, so it is advisable to try them
all if a page is not showing correctly. KeySoft also has a short cut keystroke
to access the profile toggle. Press BACKSPACE with P anywhere on a web
page to quickly change the web profile.
You can
type in the name of a favorite and, assuming that the favorite exists, that
page will be loaded.
Pressing SPACE when at the address prompt takes you to a
folder / file prompt layer where you can choose an existing favorite to load.
To add a
favorite webpage to your favorites folder, you have to be on the page, online.
Go to the Favorites Menu by pressing ENTER with dots 2‑3‑5, and press SPACE until you get to “Add current page to Favorites” Press ENTER.
KeyWeb
will ask you to confirm the name and offers the title of the page. At this
point you can rename your favorite by typing in the name of your choice before
pressing ENTER. When you next review your
Favorites list, the page will display as the name you chose.
It is
possible to create a favorite from a link on a website, such as an audio
streaming link. This option will only show up in the Favorites Menu when the
cursor is on a link.
Go to the
Favorites Menu by pressing ENTER with dots 2‑3‑5, and press SPACE until you get to “Create Favorite from current link” Press ENTER.
KeyWeb
will ask you to confirm the name. At this point you can name your favorite by
typing in the name of your choice before pressing ENTER. When you next review your Favorites list, the link will display as the
name you chose.
The
simple way to do this is to press the SPACE bar at the URL prompt. This will take you to the List of Favorites in
your Favorites folder. Note that a few common web pages come pre-installed as
favorites for your convenience.
You can
either review the favorites by pressing SPACE repeatedly and pressing ENTER to select one, or simply type the
initial letter of the name and press ENTER when it is displayed.
To select
a favorite from another folder other than your Favorites folder, press the BACKSPACE bar at the URL prompt. KeyWeb will
prompt: "Folder name? Press ENTER for My Favorites". Press SPACE and KeyWord will display: "List of folders on Flash Disk". To review the list of folders on
the Flash Disk, press SPACE repeatedly and press ENTER to select one, or simply type the initial
letter of the name and press ENTER when it is displayed.
You can
organize your Favorites in exactly the same way as you would normally organize
files and sub‑directories in KeySoft, as discussed in Chapter 15. Move,
change, rename or delete favorites just as you would any other files. The
difference is that instead of KeyWord file format files being the default file
type, it is HTML. This means that while in My Favorites, KeyWeb will only
display URL's unless you use the SPACE with X command, in which case you can then
also choose between txt and html file types.
Tables
are a common occurrence on web pages, and are used for everything from setting
out items for sale to laying out records in online banking.
KeyWeb
has a Table Mode just for navigating tables.
To get
into Table mode, you need to be in a table. On the display, a table is marked
as:
"$tb" or dots 1‑2‑4‑6, dots 2‑3‑4‑5, dots 1‑2.
Press SPACE with M to get into table mode. While in
table mode, you can find out what cell you are in. Press SPACE with wh sign (dots 1‑5‑6) and KeyWeb will display your row
and column co‑ordinates.
The
cursor moves through a table by row or by column. On the display there will be
one space between each column, and two spaces between each row.
While in
Table mode the following navigation commands apply.
Move
forward one cell along a row: SPACE with dot 4.
To hear
the current cell in a row: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
Move back
one cell along a row: SPACE with dot 1.
Move down
one cell in a column: SPACE with dots 5‑6.
To hear
the current cell in a column: SPACE with dots 1‑4.
Move up
one cell in a column: SPACE with dots 2‑3.
History
is a record of all the web addresses or local file paths (referred to as URLs)
you have accessed using the browser, with an upper limit of 300.
To access
the history, press ENTER with dots 2‑3‑6.
To go to
the history list, press SPACE with dots 5‑6.
To
navigate to a page listed in the history, select it from the history list using
SPACE and BACKSPACE, then press ENTER. Alternatively, use the SPACE with F find command to locate the history
item in the list then press ENTER.
Each
history record consists of the following information:
Date when
last visited – self explanatory;
URL – the
whole address path for the page e.g. http://www.humanware.com/index.cfm/8,html;
Title –
the title given to a particular page;
Domain –
the base web address for a page, e.g. www.humanware.com.
You can
change the way in which a history is presented by sorting by day or by domain.
A search
by day will sort all the fields in a record by date and time order, then by
domain. A search by domain will sort all fields by domain, then date and time.
To toggle
the sort mode press SPACE with S. The factory setting is by day, and
if you change it, the system will always default to the setting you last made,
whichever it is.
Having
established a sorting order for the history records, you may then want to
review them. You can do this in two ways – by record or by field. Reviewing by
record will take you from record to record in the order defined by the sort.
Use SPACE with dots 5‑6 to review forwards and SPACE with dots 2‑3 to review back.
Review
fields within a record by using SPACE for forwards and BACKSPACE for back.
Other commands
for reviewing history records are:
Next
History record: SPACE with dots 5‑6.
Previous
History record: SPACE with dots 2‑3.
Forward
one Day: BACKSPACE with dot 6.
Back
one Day: BACKSPACE with dot 3.
Forward
one week: BACKSPACE with dot 5.
Back
one week: BACKSPACE with dot 2.
Previous
Domain name: BACKSPACE with dot 4.
Next
Domain name: BACKSPACE with dot 1.
Newest
History record: SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3.
Oldest
History record: SPACE with dots 4‑5‑6.
Sort
by domain/day: SPACE with S.
Note:
history is presented alphabetically for day or domain.
KeyWeb is
‘sitting’ on Internet Explorer, and from time to time, Internet Explorer will
open a dialog box. You will know this because KeyWeb will display its title and
the fact that it is a dialog box. Wherever possible, the same navigation
keystrokes are used as for the rest of KeyWeb. The difference is that at every
text input field, you need to press ENTER to submit your input. You then move to the next one using SPACE.
The final
entry will almost always be a button control with a label such as YES, NO, OK, or CANCEL. Move to the appropriate button and press ENTER to activate it. Where you end up from there
will depend on what the dialog box was for.
Downloading
files to the BrailleNote BT is easy.
You can
use this feature to download:
Software
upgrades directly onto your BrailleNote BT;
Books;
Bank
Statements;
MP3
files;
…and
other files that you may wish to use on your BrailleNote BT, assuming they are
compatible. You can also download files for moving to a PC later. However,
please heed the following warning before making any downloads.
WARNING:
Only HumanWare's proprietary software can run on the BrailleNote BT. KeyWeb
does not limit the type of file you can download, but we strongly advise you
not to try and run executables on your BrailleNote BT, including those designed
to run on Windows CE. Doing this could cause irreparable damage to your
BrailleNote BT and to KeySoft, and you do so at your own risk.
Follow
these steps to download a file off an internet site.
1. When you are on the download link or
button, press ENTER. KeySoft will prompt: "Download file into which folder?."
2. Select a folder in the usual way,
either on the BrailleNote BT itself or on an external drive or storage card.
3. KeySoft will prompt: "Download file name? Press ENTER for (file name)" where the file name is the current
name of the file to download. Press ENTER, or to change the name of the file at this point, type a new name
(without a file extension, which is automatically added) and press ENTER.
When the
download is complete, you will be returned to a blank page. You can then use
the go back or forward commands to return to the web page you were previously
in, or press ENTER with O to choose another page.
Note: If you attempt to download a file that is too
big for the memory available on the destination drive, you can abort the
download by pressing SPACE with E during the download process. To
find out the status of a download at any time, press SPACE with H. This will provide you with
information regarding filename, transfer rate (in KB/sec), percentage of
completion (when total file size is available) and the amount of KB downloaded
so far.
General Caution: While copying or moving any files onto your
Flash Disk from any location, never perform a reset. This can cause your Flash
Disk to disappear and can cause corruption.
Because
every web page is different, there will be times when pages seem to not load
completely. If you find that certain parts of a web page are missing, KeyWeb
has a feature which analyzes the page again after all of its content has been
loaded.
If you
come across a situation where you cannot click on certain links, or form fields
are not visible, simply re-analyzing the page can render the page correctly. To
re-analyze the page, simply press BACKSPACE
with R and the
Apex will notify you that the page has been re-analyzed. Now your content
should be displayed correctly.
End of
Web Browser Chapter.
This
chapter will describe how to setup and use the BrailleNote’s Chat feature. The
type of Chat used is called Instant Messaging, or IM. Perhaps you are wondering
what is Instant Messaging? Essentially, it is a text‑based form of
communication that occurs between 2 or more people in real‑time. Instant
Messaging is also referred to as IM. There are several forms of instant
messaging. KeyChat uses the XMPP protocol.
Once
Keychat is setup and you are able to log in, you can chat with members of any
XMPP messaging service. Three of the major organizations that provide this
service are Google, IChat, and Jabber.
The most
popular way to obtain an instant messaging service is by signing up for a Gmail
account. Google automatically allows its e‑mail users the ability to
instant message via XMPP. The Gmail e‑mail address will be your user name
and your Gmail password will be your password. For more information on setting
up your instant messaging service options, please refer to 13.1 Setting
up Instant Messaging Service Options.
This
chapter will show you how to Setup and sign on to the Instant Messaging (IM)
service. You will learn how to have conversations by sending and receiving
messages, how to use your availability status and how to manage your contacts.
Procedure:
1. From the Chat menu, press O to
select "Options".
2. Scroll down the list of options to
select "Instant Messaging" and press ENTER.
3. Type in values for the following
settings: "Username", "password", "auto‑connect",
"Host Server" and "Host Server Port". For each setting,
type in the correct value followed by ENTER.
Here are
typical settings values for a google chat account:
User name:
username@gmail.com
Password:
keychat12345
Host
Server: talk.google.com
Host
Sever Port: 5222
Procedure:
1. From the Chat menu, press M to select "My
availability".
2. Select "Instant messaging: sign
on".
Notes:
If the
BrailleNote is not connected to the internet when attempting to sign on, the
BrailleNote will display the following message: "Failed to sign on to
Instant messaging".
If auto
connect is on, the connection will be automatically established when entering
Chat.
Requirements:
The
BrailleNote needs to be connected to the internet.
The
instant messaging service has to be set up.
The user
has to be signed in.
Procedure:
1. From the Chat menu, press S to
select Start a New Conversation.
2. When prompted with "Chat
with?", press SPACE to access the contact list.
3. Select the Instant Messaging contact
of your choice.
4. Proceed with the conversation.
5. The conversation ends.
Please
note that outgoing messages appear on the braille display preceded by the 2‑cell
symbol dots 1‑2‑3‑4‑5‑6, 1‑3‑5.
Incoming messages are preceded by the 2‑cell Braille symbol dots 1‑2‑3‑4‑5‑6,
2‑4‑6.
Requirements:
The user
is not already engaged in a conversation with the other participant.
The
BrailleNote needs to be connected to the internet.
The
instant messaging service has to be set up.
The user
has to be signed in.
Procedure:
1. The BrailleNote receives an Instant
Message. It will display "Message from ..., chat with?".
2. Press Y to Chat now.
3. Proceed with the conversation.
4. The conversation ends.
Please
note that outgoing messages appear on the braille display preceded by the 2‑cell
symbol dots 1‑2‑3‑4‑5‑6, 1‑3‑5.
Incoming messages are preceded by the 2‑cell Braille symbol dots 1‑2‑3‑4‑5‑6,
2‑4‑6.
Procedure:
1. From the Chat menu, press M to
select "My availability".
2. Select "Change my availability
status".
3. Availability status choices include:
Online, free to chat, busy, away briefly or gone for a while. Use SPACE with
dots 3‑4 to cycle through the available options and press ENTER to
select.
Procedure:
1. From the Chat menu, press O to
select "Options".
2. Press G to select "General
settings" followed by ENTER.
3. At the KeyChat settings prompt, select "Action when a contact's availability status changes". Use SPACE with dots 3‑4 to select one of the two following options: "Display a message" or "No notification". Press ENTER to accept setting.
Procedure:
1. From the Chat menu, press O to
select "Options".
2. Press G to select "General
settings" and press ENTER.
3. At the Chat settings prompt, select "Action for when a new message arrives". Use SPACE with dots 3‑4 to select one of the following options: "Prompt with options" or "Sound notification". Press ENTER to accept setting.
4. At the "Action for when a new
message arrives while chatting" prompt, the available options will be:
"Flash Braille Display", "No notification" or "Sound
notification".
Notes:
Braille
flashing means that all pins will emerge and retract three times in a row.
Procedure:
1. From the Chat menu, press S to
select "Start new conversation".
2. When prompted with "Chat
with?", type in the name of a contact that has not previously been entered
followed by ENTER.
3. The BrailleNote prompts "… is
not a contact. Add?" Press Y to add the contact.
4. The BrailleNote prompts "Add".
5. Fill out additional fields; press
ENTER to move to the next field.
Note:
If the
contact already exists, the BrailleNote will attempt to start a conversation
with the contact.
Procedure:
1. From the Chat menu, press S to
select "Start new conversation".
2. When prompted with "Chat with?
", press SPACE to access contact list.
3. Move to the contact whose information you wish to review. Press SPACE with I.
4. The BrailleNote will display the
type of contact and their availability status if applicable.
Procedure:
1. From the Chat menu, press S to
select "Start new conversation".
2. When prompted with "Chat with?
", press SPACE to access contact list.
3. Move to the contact whose information you wish to delete. Press BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
4. The BrailleNote will prompt
"Delete…, sure? Press Y for "Yes" to delete contact.
Procedure:
1. From the Chat menu, press S to
select "Start new conversation".
2. When prompted with "Chat with?
", press SPACE to access contact list.
3. Move to the contact whose information you wish to rename. Press BACKSPACE with R.
4. The BrailleNote will prompt
"New name for…?
5. Type in the new name for the contact
and press ENTER. The BrailleNote returns to the contact list.
Procedure:
1. From the Chat menu, press S to
select "Start new conversation".
2. When prompted with "Chat
with?", press SPACE to access contact list.
3. Press SPACE with X. Filtering
options are: Service type and Availability.
4. The BrailleNote filters the contact
list, showing contacts by service type or availability.
End of Chat Chapter.
This
chapter looks at all the different ways the BrailleNote Apex BT can connect to
other forms of technology. From cables to cableless, there is bound to be a
connection configuration that will suit your requirements.
These
connection configurations allow you to access:
The World
Wide Web;
E‑mail;
Local
Area Network;
Your PC
via ActiveSync.
Bluetooth
makes it possible to access the web and your e‑mail anywhere, anytime, by
pairing with a Bluetooth cell phone. You can also pair with a Bluetooth QWERTY
keyboard.
With
wireless networking you can also access the web and your e‑mail anywhere
where there is an available wireless network. Use it to view the network on
your BrailleNote BT and even manage network files
LAN
networking makes the same things possible, using a cable to connect to the
network.
USB
client (mini USB port) allows you to connect to your PC with ActiveSync and
access your e‑mail or the web via your PC's internet connection, be it
dial up or networked.
USB host
connection used with external modem.
This
chapter assumes that you have a basic understanding of networking and already
have a network available. Not all the options discussed require a network
however, so don't be put off if this is not something you wish to get into!
The heart
of setting up connectivity on your BrailleNote BT is the Connectivity Menu. This
is available from the Options Menu. To access the Connectivity menu, press SPACE with O then C.
The world
of connectivity is a world of communication between, or among, devices of all
kinds. Just as in the world of human beings, where there are those who speak
our language and those who don't, not all devices can talk to all other
devices, they have to share a method of communication. And again, just as
sometimes people don't like what each other are saying, or don't agree, or
misunderstand; in the world of connectivity, even when devices share the same
methods of connecting, they don't always manage to connect the first time.
Why is
this? Firstly, because electronic and computerized devices are
"dumb". They only know what they know, and if a device offers another
device a setting even slightly different to what it is expecting, it will
ignore it. And while there are industry standards, with so many different
companies manufacturing devices that are trying to talk to each other, there is
bound to be the odd miscommunication, where theory collides with practice. Then
there is the business of which device initiates the connection.
With
cableless connectivity options such as wireless networking, this gets even more
interesting again. When you use cables, you actually plug the cable in between
two devices, so there is no ambiguity as to which devices are supposed to be
communicating. However, cableless devices have to broadcast their availability
to all other devices within range, and then there is a stage of identifying
which device goes with which, not to mention security levels etc., before
anything else can happen.
In the
face of all these possibilities, initiating a connection can take some
patience, some tweaking, but most of all, following the instructions.
The
BrailleNote BT has been designed to make this as straightforward as possible. There
is just one important rule to remember ‑ that the BrailleNote BT
initiates all connections. A special case among tens of millions of PC's,
laptops and PDA's, it knows best what it needs from other devices, and is set
up to initiate connections.
A
connection configuration is a record of the settings required in order to be
able to use a particular type of connectivity, such as wireless networking or a
phoneline, with a particular device. Because each type of connectivity is
different, their configuration needs to be different.
You may
also find that you will need to set up different configurations for the same
kind of connectivity, such as a network configuration for work, and one for
home.
The same
connection configuration can be available for a range of uses, such as e‑mail,
browsing the web, and local network access.
In this
section we discuss the devices available to connect your BrailleNote BT with
other devices.
The
connectivity menu is the heart of the connectivity options available on the
BrailleNote BT.
The
Connectivity Menu is in the Options Menu. It has the following items:
Create a
New Dialup or LAN connection: Select this option to set up a new dial up, or
LAN connection i.e. using the ethernet port. Refer to
14.6.1 Creating a New Dialup or LAN connection.
Disconnect
Dial‑up connection: Only displays when the BrailleNote BT is online using
a dial‑up connection. Refer to
14.6.4 Disconnect Dial‑up connection.
Active
Connection Details (Name): This option gives you information on any connection
that is currently active. Refer to
14.7 Active Connection Details.
Bluetooth:
Select this option to turn Bluetooth on or off. Refer to 14.12 Bluetooth.
Wireless
Ethernet: Select this option to turn WiFi on or off. Refer to
14.4 Using a Wireless Connection.
Review an
existing connection configuration: This option allows you to make changes to a
configuration. Refer to 14.8 Review an existing connection configuration.
Setup Options: The first option is "Computer name? Currently Apex###". You can change the name of the Apex### to something unique. This is the name that a network will use to identify your BrailleNote BT as a networked device. This is particularly important if any other network users are using a BrailleNote BT. The second option is "Modem Country Settings". Use this option to setup your modem to fit country specific conditions. Type the country's first letter or use standard commands to browse through list. "FCC" is the default setting for English speaking countries.
Wireless
networking is just a different form of computer networking that doesn't require
cables. It is also sometimes referred to as WiFi or 802.11, but they are all
the same thing.
You will
also need access to a wireless network. This may be in your home, workplace or
school, or in an airport, café or library. There are two ways in which to
access a wireless network ‑ through setting up a connection
configuration, and through scanning for and picking up a wireless network.
Which method you use will depend on the circumstances.
Although
there has been much talk over the past few years about wireless security, or
lack of it, most workplaces or institutions will have proper security measures
in place on their wireless networks. These comprise a range of settings,
passwords and codes that are only made available to legitimate users. In the
case of public wireless networks such as in libraries and airports, the network
itself will provide most of the settings automatically because they are set up
to let you log in, not to prevent you. However, before trying to connect your
BrailleNote BT to any non‑public wireless network, be aware that you will
need to have some advance information about the wireless network, usually via
the network administrator.
To find
out how to:
Create a
new wireless networking configuration, refer to 14.4.1 Creating a new Wireless Configuration.
Scan for
a new wireless network and logging on, refer to 14.4.2 Scanning for a Wireless Network.
Connect
to wireless network after it is set up, refer to 14.4.3 Reconnecting to a Wireless Network.
Organize
the wireless network configurations already set up, refer to 14.5 Wireless Options.
If you
are unfamiliar with any of the terms used, please refer to 14.9 Glossary of terms:.
When you
have a wireless connection available to you on a regular basis, you should set
up a dedicated configuration for it. It may be, for example, on your college
campus or in your workplace. All wireless networks have an SSID (Service Set
Identifier). The SSID is just the name given to the network. For added
security, networks not intended for access by the general public may hide their
SSID, so it cannot be displayed when you scan for visible networks. In this
case, the network administrator needs to tell you what the SSID for the network
is, and any other applicable settings such as WEP.
To create
a connection configuration for a wireless connection, go to the Wireless
Network option of the connectivity Menu.
1. Go to the Options Menu by pressing SPACE with O, select Connectivity by pressing C, then Wireless Ethernet, by pressing W.
2. KeySoft prompts, "Wireless internet on? Currently Yes." Press Y for Yes.
3. You are at the Wireless Ethernet Menu. Select "Configure a New Wireless Connection" and press ENTER. KeySoft presents you with the Entry List for Connection configuration. You can move down the list by pressing SPACE.
4. The first item is Name. Enter any
name you like, something that is meaningful to you, and press ENTER.
5. KeySoft prompts, "SSID?" This is the name of the network as determined by the network administrator. Type in the SSID and press ENTER.
6. Next is "Use Infrastructure Mode?" which requires a Y or N value. The values you need to assign will be given to you by the network
administrator.
7. Next is "Security Protocol". Select the security protocol you
want to use (WEP, WPA‑PSK, WPA2‑PSK). If you want to use WPA‑Enterprise
or WPA2‑Enterprise, select WPA or WPA2. You can also select Open if you
don't want any security at all, however, this option is not recommended.
8. Next is "WEP‑key"
entry field. Enter the WEP‑key and press ENTER. Note that the WEP‑key
will be in hexadecimal format and either 10 characters long, for a 64 bit
encryption or 26 characters long for a 128 bit encryption. If instead of WEP,
you select WPA‑PSK, you will need to fill out information on your Pre
shared key (PSK).
9. Next, for Enterprise configurations,
is 802.1x Authentication. This will be either 0 for no authentication, 1 for
TLS, or 2 for PEAP, or 3 for MD5 ‑ Challenge or 4 for MsCHAPv2. Type in
the appropriate value and press ENTER. If you don't know what this is,
you probably don't need it.
10. The rest of the fields are standard
network settings and again, the values will come from the network administrator.
The fields are: "Obtain an IP Address Automatically?", "IP Address", "Subnet Mask", "Default Gateway", "Primary DNS", "Secondary DNS", "Primary WINS", and "Secondary WINS." Any fields that don't need
changing, just pass over them by pressing SPACE.
11. KeySoft prompts, "Use a proxy server for this connection?" If N for No, you will go to the end of the list. If Y for Yes, you will need to fill in two more
fields ‑ "proxy server name" and "proxy server port."
12. To save and close the record, press SPACE with E. KeySoft prompts, "Add this Record?" Press Y for Yes or N for No.
This
configuration is now available for use as described in 14.4.3 Reconnecting to a Wireless Network.
To make
changes to, or to delete a wireless configuration, use the “Review an existing connection configuration” function as described in 14.8 Review an existing connection configuration.
An
alternative way to log into a wireless network is to scan for it. Wireless
networks that have the public display of their SSID disabled will be invisible
to a scan, so scanning is not an appropriate way to try to log into those
networks. However wireless networks with low, or no security, such as are found
in libraries, airports and cafés etc., are set up through scanning. This is
because when selected the first time, they then typically transfer most of the
settings required in a connection configuration automatically to your
BrailleNote BT. This connection configuration is then available to use to log
on automatically in the future.
1. To scan for a new wireless network,
from the Wireless Ethernet menu, select Scan for Wireless Networks and press ENTER.
2. KeySoft prompts, "List of available connections." The connections listed will depend
on how many wireless networks are displaying themselves in your vicinity. To
review the list, press SPACE. Each network will announce its
name, for example:
1. SSID: Vodaphone; 2. SSID: Tsunami; 3. SSID: Air America
3. Make a selection by pressing ENTER.
4. KeySoft prompts, "Entry List for Connection Configurations." Press SPACE. The first field is the connection configuration name. By default, the
SSID name will be used, but you can modify it if needed. Press ENTER when done. In most cases, the rest of the
fields will be correctly configured by the connection itself, however this will
vary depending on how the wireless network is set up. In some cases, the venue
will provide you with a code to enter, in others the whole configuration is
provided. Once completed, exit the configuration using SPACE with E and press Y when asked if you wish to save it.
5. KeySoft displays the name of the
network, e.g. "1. SSID: Vodaphone" You are now on the Wireless
network.
The next
time you scan for this network, it will show up with its configuration listed
just before its name. For example, if the connection configuration is called
VP, you would hear or read, "VP SSID: Vodaphone." Just press ENTER on this option and you will be connected.
This
option makes it really easy to connect to a wireless network that you use
repeatedly. If you only use one wireless network, this option automatically
reconnects to it. If you use more than one, a list of configurations is formed.
As the BrailleNote BT can only pick up a wireless network that is in the
vicinity, this option will always pick up the one that you want. In the unusual
situation that you have two wireless networks with configurations in the same
vicinity or two configurations for the same wireless network, so that there is
a chance it may pick up the wrong one, you can change the order of the list so
that the preferred configuration will get picked up first.
To reconnect to a wireless network; from the Connectivity Menu, select “Reconnect using existing Configurations” and press ENTER. KeySoft will announce, "Please Wait, connecting to (config)" there will be progress beeps as it locates the network, then "Please Wait, connected to (config)." You are now connected to the wireless network.
Wireless
network connection configurations will order themselves with the first created
at the top. As discussed in the previous section, if this doesn't work for you,
you can change the order of the list.
To change
the order of the list, follow these steps:
1. From the Wireless Ethernet Menu,
select Order Connection Preferences.
2. KeySoft prompts: "List of configurations in preferred order." To review the list, press SPACE or ADVANCE. The list will be something like:
1. work; 2. home; 3. home2
3. When you are on the item you wish to move, press SPACE with dots 2‑6. This will take you to the Preference Order Action Menu. The options are:
Top:
Move to the top of the list,
Up:
Move up one position in the list,
Down:
Move down one position in the list, and
Bottom:
Move to the bottom of the list.
4. Select a move from the list and the
order will change accordingly.
For example: I want to move "home2" above "home", as it is the one I use most often. I go to "3. home2" and press SPACE with dots 2‑6. I press SPACE twice to get to "Up: Move up one position in the list," and press ENTER. KeySoft displays, "2. home2," confirming that "home2" has moved to position 2. I press SPACE with E.
The
Wireless options allow you to set some parameters on how wireless operates on
the BrailleNote BT. To review the list items, press SPACE or ADVANCE to go down the list, or BACK or
BACKSPACE to go up.
To get to
the “Wireless Ethernet Options List,” select it from the Wireless Ethernet
Menu.
The three
options and their purposes are:
1. “Notify when new networks are available (currently yes/no)” When this option is set to yes, a
message displays when the device is not yet connected to a wireless network and
a network is detected.
2. “Automatically Connect to Non preferred Networks (currently yes/no)”. This option allows the wireless
card to try to establish a connection to a network that is not part of the
existing configurations database.
3. “Types of Networks to Access (Currently Access Points only)”. When trying to connect, this
option filters out the wireless devices using a different Infrastructure. The
default is Access points only with P as its hotkey. This setting detects only network access points. For Ad‑Hoc
only, press H. This filters out access points and
detects only peer to peer devices. For All Available types of network, press A, this allows any type of network to be
accessed.
4. Power Saving Mode (currently
yes/no). By default, this option is set to yes (Power saving mode ON). If you
are having trouble establishing a wireless connection, you may want to disable
this option. Note that turning Power Saving mode OFF will cause the battery to
drain at a much faster rate than otherwise. Any changes to Power Saving Mode
will require a Reset.
These two
kinds of connection are quite different in the way they operate, but have some
things in common in how you set them up. This is because both are used to
access the internet, and both require cables. Even if you are using a LAN
network connection to access a network, instead of just using the internet, the
setting up of the network connection configuration is the same.
This
section explains how to set up a dial up or LAN connection, and how to use it
once you have done so.
NOTE: Only one USB external Modem is supported (Radicom V92MBU‑E for Windows CE 6.0). Users must order the USB modem from Humanware.
Use this
option to set up a Dial up or LAN connection, as the name suggests. You can
also enter a wireless configuration this way but it is preferable to do so via
the "Wireless" Menu item.
Before
following this procedure, please refer to either 14.6.3 Using a Dial‑up Connection or 14.6.2 Using a LAN connection, whichever applies to what you want
to do. They provide essential information about devices and settings that are
needed to complete the procedure.
1. KeySoft prompts: "Entry list for connection configurations." To go to the first field, press SPACE.
2. "Connection configuration name?" Enter a name for the record that is
meaningful to you, then press ENTER.
3. "Device to use? (name)." Dialup only ‑ if using networking, select the device to use (such
as, ethernet if you are accessing a network via the ethernet port) and then go
to step 9. If you are not using Dialup only, this is where you specify the
device through which you are making the connection, such as a type of modem.
Select the device you want by pressing ENTER. To cycle through the list, press SPACE with dots 3‑4 and make a selection by pressing ENTER.
4. "Phone Number?." For dialup connections only. If
using in a work environment, remember to add any dialout prefix to the number.
5. "Service User name?." This is the user name you use to get onto the internet via your ISP. Type it here. Likewise the "Service Password?."
6. For the rest of the prompts, leave
them set to their default unless otherwise stated in 14.6.3 Using a Dial‑up Connection or 14.6.2 Using a LAN connection.
7. For dialup connections only: When
you are happy with all the settings, add this configuration by either pressing SPACE with dots 2‑6, or SPACE with E then Y at the "Save this record?" prompt. The rest of this procedure
applies to networking configurations only.
8. The rest of the fields relate to
networking using a LAN. As discussed in 14.6.2 Using a LAN connection, you may not need to fill in all,
or even any of them, depending on the way in which the network is set up.
"IP
Address" ‑ This identifies the BrailleNote BT as a part of the
network.
"Subnet
Mask" ‑ The part of the IP address that is common to all of the IP
addresses in the domain.
"Default
Gateway" ‑ Default connection to the Internet through another piece
of hardware or software that provides address translation and/or security.
"Primary
DNS" ‑ Domain Name Server ‑ translates network names into IP
addresses.
"Secondary
DNS" ‑ The system will look to this setting if the primary DNS
setting cannot be located.
"Primary
WINS" ‑ A WINS setting has a similar purpose to DNS, and it is
highly unlikely a network will have both WINS and DNS. The system administrator
will advise you which to use.
"Secondary
WINS" ‑ The system will look to this setting if the primary WINS
setting cannot be located.
Proxy
Settings:
"Use
a proxy server for this connection?" Y/N
'proxy
server name"
"proxy
server port"
End Of
List
LAN is an
acronym for Local Area Network. We use the term in this user guide to refer to
networking via the ethernet port and cable as opposed to wireless networking
where cables are not needed. Wireless networking is discussed separately in 14.4 Using a Wireless Connection.
You will
also need access to a working ethernet computer network, via a network capable
PC, server, hub/switch/router or DSL modem.
There is
a Default Ethernet connection already setup. You only need to plug in the
Ethernet cable to the device. When you start the web browser, KeyChat or e‑mail
application, the connection should be made automatically.
If you
need to configure the connection, use these specific settings:
At the "Device to Use?" prompt, select Ethernet Network
Connection.
At the "Obtain an IP address automatically?" setting, ensure it is set to yes,
unless the network uses static IP addresses as in scenarios a, b and c below,
where it is necessary to enter the IP address manually. When set to Yes, this
setting allows the network to fill in the rest of the fields automatically
except the proxy server fields.
The
scenarios below cover most of the common network configurations found at work, school
or at home. In a work or school scenario, you may need to involve the network
administrator in this task.
a. Home Network: If you have one PC and
only intend to connect to the BrailleNote BT, such as in a home user situation
(i.e. No DHCP server, no WINS, maybe gateway), set an IP address in the same
range as the PC's IP address. For example, if the PC's is 10.0.0.1, make the
BrailleNote BT's 10.0.0.2. If the PC acts as a gateway, add a gateway address.
If you use a router, the address is likely to start with 192.168.0.n where n is
a number that uniquely identifies your BrailleNote BT.
Note: If another computer is subsequently
attached to the network, it MAY take the IP address that the BrailleNote BT
has. If this happens, one of the addresses will need to be changed, and setup
run again.
b. Local Network with static IP addresses: If the network uses static IP addresses i.e. not automatically assigned, set an IP address on the BrailleNote BT in the range of acceptable addresses. Add a gateway address if available.
c. Local Network with DHCP: This kind
of network automatically assigns IP addresses. When creating the new dialup or
LAN connection, set the "Obtain an IP address automatically?" setting to Yes. It will pick up the DNS or WINS from the
DHCP.
To use a dial‑up connection, you will need an external modem. An external USB modem is available as an option. This is discussed in this section.
Using an
external modem connected via USB host port: Connect the modem to the
BrailleNote BT using the USB cable. Ensure the modem is on and plugged into a
phone line. The device name to choose when configuring the connection is USB
Modem.
This
option only displays when you are online with a dial‑up connection. It
allows you to hang up without having to be in either KeyMail or KeyWeb at the
time.
To disconnect from the dial‑up connection, select this option off the Connectivity Menu and press Y for Yes. To exit without disconnecting, press N for No.
This
option of the Connectivity menu announces information on a currently active
wireless or LAN connection.
The items
listed are:
Name:
Status:
connected to (name of network)
Signal
strength: (if connected via wireless)
IP
Address:
DNS
address:
Test
current connection. This last option is a "ping" function. This
allows you to check if there is a connection path between the BrailleNote BT
and a particular site. Although KeySoft prompts you for the IP address, you can
also enter a URL such as www.humanware.com.
In the
active connections details, you will find information regarding Signal
Strength. Values provided will give you an indication of the quality of your
signal reception. If you find that the signal is poor, try moving to a
different location to improve signal strength.
Value
Under ‑81 Poor Reception.
Value
between ‑81 and ‑71: Average reception
Value
between ‑71 and ‑67: Good reception
Value
between ‑67 and ‑57: Excellent reception.
This
option allows you to access connection configurations that you have already
created, and view and/or edit the information in them. This applies to all
configurations including wireless ones.
From the
Connectivity Menu, select "Review an existing connection configuration". Using SPACE, then SPACE with dots 5‑6 or SPACE with dots 2‑3 to move from one to the next, find
the configuration record that you wish to review. At this point you can review
the different fields in the record by pressing SPACE or ADVANCE and BACK or BACKSPACE.
If you
wish to make a change to any field, follow these steps:
1. Move to the field to be changed. Press BACKSPACE with dots 2‑5, and you are asked for a new entry for this field. There are three options here:
a) Type a new entry and press ENTER.
b) Edit the old field which is offered
as the suggestion, as described in 5.19 Editing at a Prompt.
c) Clear the field by pressing SPACE with dots 3‑5‑6, followed by ENTER.
2. This puts you in an entry list so
you can modify or add to any other field as well. You have the same three
options for all the fields, and you can change any other field in the record.
If you
want to fill in a field that is blank, simply navigate to it and type in the
new entry.
Being
able to duplicate a connection configuration is highly useful when you wish to
make slight variations to the configuration, such as adding a dial out prefix
to a phone number for use at work. It is better, and far simpler, to create two
configurations than to keep changing the setting in the one configuration. By
duplicating the entire configuration and renaming it, all you then have to do
is adjust the settings that need it, and you have a second configuration.
To create
a duplicate configuration, follow these steps:
1. From the Connectivity Menu, select "Review an existing connection configuration". Using SPACE, then SPACE with dots 5‑6 or SPACE with dots 2‑3 to move from one to the next, find
the configuration you wish to duplicate, go to name field by pressing SPACE, then exit with SPACE with E.
2. Select the "Create a new Dialup or LAN Connection" option and when you get as far as
the "Connection configuration name?" prompt, select the Block Commands
Menu by pressing SPACE with B. Note that this is a different menu
to the Block Commands menu in KeyWord.
3. Press SPACE and KeyList displays: "Retrieve last record?". This is the configuration you
accessed in step 1, so press ENTER.
4. KeyList prompts, "Connection configuration name? Currently (name)". You now have two identical
configurations. Change the name, and any other fields necessary, then press SPACE with E.
5. When prompted to save the record,
press Y for Yes.
These are
terms that are used with LAN and wireless networking.
DHCP: Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol.
WINS: Windows Internet Naming Service ‑
Microsoft specific Name.
SSID: Service set identifier.
TLS: Transport Layer Security. It is a protocol
that allows applications to securely communicate through a network.
MD5: Message ‑Digest algorithm 5.
Proxy Server: A server that acts as a go‑between for
requests from clients wishing to access resources found on others servers.
Number protocol: similar to DNS, but for NetBIOS.
Gateway: Connection to the Internet through another
piece of hardware or software that provides address translation and/or
security.
IP Address: Identifier on a Network.
DNS: Domain Name Server, translates network names
into IP addresses.
WEP: Wired Equivalent Privacy, encryption protocol
on wireless networks providing a security level similar to a wired connection.
Both 64‑bit (the standard WEP) and 128‑bit encryption strength are
available. It is however recommended that you use 128‑bit encryption as
it offers the highest level of security.
WPA: Wi‑Fi protected access: A security
technology for wireless networks. WPA improves on the encryption and
authentication features of WEP.
PSK: Pre‑shared key: Wi‑Fi protected
access: It is a key shared by two parties on a secure channel. It is used in Wi‑Fi
encryption such as WEP or WPA where both wireless access points and all clients
share the same key.
802.1x: Authentication protocol in use on wireless
networks.
Subnet mask: A mask used to determine what subnet an IP
address belongs to.
LAN: Local Area Network.
Access Point: Device connected to a network that allows
other wireless devices to enter this network.
Infrastructure: Type of wireless connection (using an access
point or in Ad Hoc mode).
Ad Hoc: Wireless direct (Peer to peer) connection
between devices.
Connection
to ActiveSync over Ethernet fails, however, Internet connection (mail, browser
etc) via DSL or Cable Modem works:
Is there
a firewall program (such as Zone Labs ZoneAlarm, or Norton Personal Firewall)
on the PC? If so, have the appropriate ports been opened?
Has
"Allow network (Ethernet) and Remote Access Service (RAS) server
connection with this desktop computer." been checked in the ActiveSync
Connection Settings dialog?
If you
have any troubles with ActiveSync once you have set it up, try deleting the
partnership and creating a new one. This allows you to reset all the settings
in ActiveSync. Alternatively, try a reset on the BrailleNote BT with no keys
held down.
If there
is a firewall in use on your network, disable any firewall blocking for the IP
address of the BrailleNote BT. This may require setting a static IP address for
the BrailleNote BT, depending on the firewall in use on the network.
Bluetooth
allows devices to connect to one another without the need for cables.
A
Bluetooth device contains a radio transceiver that takes the information
normally carried by a cable, and transmits it at a special frequency to a
Bluetooth transceiver in the receiving device, which will then pass the
information to that device. When two Bluetooth enabled devices link up like
this, it is called "pairing."
Every
Bluetooth device has one or more services that it offers. These are functions
that it has available to share with another Bluetooth device. In Bluetooth‑speak,
offering a service is called exposing a service. For example, a keyboard can
only expose keyboard as a service, as it can only do one thing. A PC however,
may expose a range of services, such as "modem", "network",
or "headset". This is complicated slightly by the fact that devices
expose all of the services they can potentially support, whether or not the
device transmitting a request to pair can actually use those services.
Bluetooth
is a relatively new technology and has some interesting idiosyncrasies such as
the one just mentioned. However with patience it usually all works in the end!
Most
Bluetooth device pairings involve an authentication code. This code is
sometimes known by other names, but it's the same thing. When initially setting
up the pairing, you enter the same code into each device. Not all pairings
require a code, even if they ask for one, so a certain amount of
experimentation might be worthwhile.
The
BrailleNote BT can pair with a Bluetooth keyboard, the modem functionality of a
Bluetooth enabled cell phone or PC, a headset, a hands free device, a printer,
a GPS receiver and ActiveSync. We do advise that you get recommendations of
makes and models of these devices that work with the BrailleNote BT
successfully, or test this yourself before purchasing any Bluetooth device.
To use
any of these services, you first need to establish a pairing between the
BrailleNote BT and the other device. This is akin to plugging the two devices
into one another before being able to actually do anything. This is discussed
in the following section 14.12.2 Pairing with another Bluetooth device.
The
procedure for pairing the BrailleNote BT with another device is fairly
consistent regardless of what the device is. Using a PC with ActiveSync or
using the BrailleNote as a Braille Terminal involves a few more steps so it is
documented separately in context in 14.14.3 Connecting using Bluetooth.
1. Go to the Options Menu by pressing SPACE with O, then C for the Connectivity Menu.
2. Select Bluetooth and press ENTER. KeySoft prompts: "Bluetooth on? Currently Yes/No." Press Y.
3. KeySoft prompts: "Search for devices?" Press Y. KeySoft displays, "Searching for Bluetooth devices, please wait..." This may take a few seconds during
which you will hear progress beeps.
4. When the search is complete, KeySoft
will display: "List of Bluetooth devices."
5. Review the list with SPACE and select the device with which you want to
pair by pressing ENTER when it is displayed. Single service
devices such as a keyboard, will offer pairing when selected and you can start
using them straight away, although in many cases you will be asked to type in
an authentication code. This code is the same on both sides, and you will need
to enter it on each side. The BrailleNote BT will cue you through this process.
Pairing with a PC to use ActiveSync or using the BrailleNote as a Braille
terminal is slightly different so refer to 14.14.3 Connecting using Bluetooth.
Once you
have established a pairing, the BrailleNote BT keeps a record of it and the
authentication code, so it is easy to reconnect next time.
Specific
details on how to pair with a Bluetooth keyboard follow.
Specific
details on pairing with a Bluetooth Printer are covered in 6.3 Printing with Bluetooth.
Follow
these steps to connect to a Bluetooth keyboard.
1. Press the "connect" button
on the Bluetooth keyboard. This is usually found on the underside of the
keyboard.
2. Start a search for Bluetooth devices
using the BrailleNote BT as described in steps 1 to 4 of the previous section.
3. Once searching is complete and the
keyboard is on the device list, pair & activate the keyboard.
4. At the "Authentication
code?" prompt, type any code and press ENTER.
5. Then type the same code on the
Bluetooth keyboard and press ENTER.
You
should now be connected.
If your
PC is not already Bluetooth enabled, you can turn your PC into a Bluetooth
device by purchasing a Bluetooth USB dongle or a Bluetooth CF card from an
electronics retailer. These plug into the USB port or card reader on your PC
and come with the necessary software on CD. As with any new soft‑ or
hardware, first ensure that your PC meets the system requirements.
The PC
may offer services including ActiveSync (if ActiveSync is installed) and a
modem, if it has one.
To pair
the BrailleNote with a PC, you will need to set Bluetooth to On on the
BrailleNote. The remaining operations are done on the PC.
Note that
the BrailleNote's bluetooth passkey is 0000.
As well
as accessing the internet, you can also use a connection between the
BrailleNote BT and a network to access the rest of the network on your
BrailleNote BT. This means that you can browse to folders and files on the
network, allowing you to open compatible files and/or attach any kind of file
to your e‑mails.
Open an
MS Word file from a network folder, make changes and close it again. E‑mail
an Excel spreadsheet using your BrailleNote BT or, if you receive one, move it
onto the network where you can open it from a PC. Transfer files quickly and
easily onto the network.
This is
possible when a LAN or wireless connection is set up without ActiveSync (which
has the opposite effect of allowing you to browse the BrailleNote BT file
structure on your PC). If you don't already have a connection configuration set
up for using with LAN or wireless networking, follow the connection set up
instructions in 14.6.1 Creating a New Dialup or LAN connection or 14.4.1 Creating a new Wireless Configuration.
The
network appears as Network
on the Drive list when there is a Network available.
There are
several key terms and concepts that are important to understand in order to
access a network confidently.
Network
Client: A network client is a device that requests and receives data over the
network. When connected to a network, the BrailleNote BT is a client device.
Domain: A
domain is a group of computers and devices on a network that are administered
as a unit. A network may have only one domain, or multiple domains, depending
on the way it has been designed. The domain is the highest point available when
searching and you need to know the name of the domain in order to do so. Please
note that if a network is a workgroup and doesn't have a domain, you won't be
able to search by domain.
Server: A
server is basically a computer on which the network, or part of the network,
resides. There may be one or several servers in a domain. If you wish to access
a specific server on the network, you will need to know its name. Otherwise you
can search the domain and locate it that way.
Network
Folders: We are using this term to cover all of the shared folders and
directories or resources on a network. Resources that are not available for use
with the BrailleNote BT, such as printers, will not show up at all.
Network Place: The BrailleNote BT allows you to map any frequently used network folders to a list of network places, making it quick and easy to access them. The list of Network Places is the first thing to appear once you select Network Drive. For more information, refer to 14.13.4 Network Places.
This
topic explains how to set up access to a network's servers and folders via your
BrailleNote BT.
The first
time you access the network, there are no defaults set up as it is previously
unchartered territory. However on subsequent uses, you will find that most of
the prompts will offer your previous choice as a default, for example,
"Network server? Press enter for server1." There are other short cuts
for future use that are discussed as they come up.
Before
starting this procedure, you will need to know the exact name and spelling of
either the domain, if there is one, or the server or servers that you wish to
access. In the case of a wireless connection, you will need to be connected. In
both cases, you will need of course to have a connection configuration set up
to access this particular network using either method. Lastly you will need to
know your username and password for logging onto the network, if the network
requires this.
From
anywhere in KeySoft where you are prompted to select a Drive from the Drive
list (for example, File Manager, Directory):
1. Select Network from the Drive list
by pressing N.
2. KeySoft prompts, "Network Place?." Ignore this prompt for now and
press SPACE twice.
3. KeySoft prompts, "Browse entire Network." Press ENTER.
4. At this point you have two choices; Network Server, or press SPACE to choose Domain to Search?. The one you choose will depend on
what information you have available. If you know the name and exact spelling of
the server you wish to access on the network, type it at the Network Server prompt and press ENTER. If you know the name and exact spelling of
the domain and wish to search for a network folder that way, type it in at the Domain to Search? prompt and press ENTER.
5. Regardless of which option you
chose, if you have to log into this network, at this point you will be prompted
for your network server user name. If your Braille code does not support the
characters required, you will be advised to use Computer Braille.
6. Press SPACE with E. This extracts you from the log‑in
fields. The BrailleNote BT will ask you to verify your choice to save username and
password with a Y or N.
7. KeySoft prompts: "Update the default login information?." This prompt relates to whether you
wish to save your login details on the BrailleNote BT. If you type Y for yes, you will hear a warning about the
risks of saving it. However if you do save it, you won't need to log in
manually again. If you type N for no, you won't run the risk of
someone using your BrailleNote BT to gain access to the network with your
login, but you will have to re‑enter your username and password every
time.
8. If you chose the Network Server name, skip this step. If you chose the domain search, at this point you will be presented with all of the servers on the network. You can review them all by pressing SPACE, or press the initial letter of the server you are looking for, repeatedly if necessary, until you find it. Press ENTER.
9. KeySoft prompts: "Network Folder?." You can type the exact name, review all the folders by pressing SPACE, or press the initial letter of the folder you are looking for until you find it. Press ENTER.
10. KeySoft prompts: "Network Place name for this folder? Press ENTER for (folder name)." Type another name or press ENTER. Network Places are explained in 14.13.4 Network Places.
11. From here on, it is the same as
reviewing the folder structure in the BrailleNote BT.
Note: If you turn off the BrailleNote BT, the
BrailleNote BT will ask you to enter your network server user name and password
as soon as you select Network from the Drive List.
Once you
have been onto the network at least once and set up a network place or places,
accessing the network becomes a lot more straightforward. The procedure is
almost the same as the first time, but now you have some shortcuts in the
Network Places list, possibly a saved login, and default options at each prompt
to make the process quicker.
1. Select Network from the Drive list
by pressing N.
2. KeySoft prompts, "Network Place? Press ENTER for (name)" where (name) is the last network
place visited. Either press ENTER, or go to the list of network places
by pressing SPACE, select one, and press ENTER.
3. If you saved your username and
password, or do not have one, from here on, it is the same as reviewing the
folder structure in the BrailleNote BT. If you didn't save your username and
password, you will be prompted here to enter them.
4. Press SPACE with E. This extracts you from the login fields.
5. From here on, it is the same as
reviewing the folder structure in the BrailleNote BT.
Note: After a reset of the BrailleNote BT, there
will be no defaults set up as they are all wiped. If you do a reset while
holding down dots 4‑5‑6, all your settings will be lost and
you will need to start again as described in 14.13.2 How to access Network for the first time.
The
BrailleNote BT maps network folders to a list of network places, making it
quick and easy to access them. The list of Network Places is the first thing to
appear once you select Network Drive, so you can go directly to them instead of
having to search down through the domain or review all the servers to find the
shared folder that you want.
Every
time you open a new network folder, KeySoft will ask you to map it to a network
place. You can give the network place any name you like, but as it is the
convention, KeySoft offers the folder's name as the default. You can accept it
by pressing ENTER, or type an alternative name then
press ENTER.
Because
you may not want to keep a network place for the future, you can delete it. To
do this, select the network place from the list of network places, but do not
press ENTER. Instead, to delete, press BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4. KeySoft will ask you to confirm
this by typing Y for yes, or N for No.
You can
also rename a network place by pressing BACKSPACE with R.
It is not
possible to map the same network folder to two different network places, nor is
it possible to have two network places with the same name.
To
connect your BrailleNote to a PC, you need to install a MicrosoftÔ program onto your PC and connect the
BrailleNote and PC with a USB cable or Bluetooth. To use Bluetooth, you need to
set up your PC with a Bluetooth accessory such as a dongle or card. See 14.14.3 Connecting using Bluetooth. If you are using Windows XP or
earlier, you install ActiveSync. If you are using Windows Vista, you need the
Windows Mobile Device Center (WMDC). These programs can be downloaded from
www.microsoft.com. ActiveSync is also available on the CD that is supplied with
your BrailleNote
When you
have one of these programs installed, and your BrailleNote and PC are
connected, you can use your PC to:
§ View the BrailleNote file structure.
§ Manage the files and folders on your
BrailleNote, including copying, moving and deleting them.
§ Synchronize files and time settings
between your PC and your BrailleNote.
§ Redirect internet access via your PC's internet connection.
If you
are using WMDC, you can access your files on the BrailleNote, edit and save
them, without having to first copy them to your PC.
Before
you can use ActiveSync or WMDC with the BrailleNote BT, you need to install the
software on your PC. You can download the software from the MicrosoftÔ website or, if you are using ActiveSync, you
can install is from the CD‑ROM supplied with the BrailleNote BT.
If you
are downloading the program from the MicrosoftÔ
website, www.microsoft.com, search for the software using the keywords
"ActiveSync" or "WMDC", and then follow the instructions on
your screen.
If you are
downloading from the BrailleNote CD, follow the instructions below.
1. Insert the CD‑ROM into your PC CD‑ROM drive. After a few seconds, a menu is displayed. Select "Install ActiveSync".
2. Give the installation file a few
seconds to automatically extract and copy files. When this is complete, the
first window of a SetUp wizard is displayed. In the SetUp wizard window, Tab to
the Next button.
3. Follow the wizard until the SetUp is
complete.
USB is a
good connection type to start off with, as it is simple and allows you to set
up a partnership for future LAN or wireless connections.
To make a
connection between your BrailleNote BT and a PC, follow these steps:
1. Plug the smaller end of the USB
cable into your BrailleNote BT, and the larger end into a USB port on your PC.
2. On the BrailleNote BT, ensure the ActiveSync connection type is set to USB. To do this, go to the Main Menu, then Utilities Menu, then Miscellaneous Options, press SPACE, and then U for USB. Exit by pressing SPACE with E.
3. Return to the Utilities Menu by pressing SPACE with E. Press C or SPACE once to get to "Connect to ActiveSync via USB". Do not press ENTER yet.
4. On the PC, make sure the connection
type is also set to USB. To do this, in the ActiveSync window on your PC, from
the File Menu, select Connection Settings. Check the option Allow USB connection... and Tab to OK and press ENTER. If it is your first ever connection on the PC, the Get Connected
Wizard may pop up instead, in which case just carry on to step 5.
5. Now on your BrailleNote BT, press ENTER. Note: If the connection does not happen
within 10 seconds, reset the BrailleNote BT until you hear a beep, and the
connection should come up straight away.
To use
this connection to access the Internet, there are a few more simple steps:
1. Enter the Options Menu by pressing SPACE with O. Press C for Connectivity then SPACE to get to "Create a New Dialup or LAN Connection." Press ENTER.
2. KeySoft prompts: "Connection configuration name?." Type a name that is meaningful to
you and press ENTER.
3. KeySoft prompts: "Device to use?." Cycle through the options to
Ethernet Network Connection and press ENTER.
4. Press SPACE with E and at the prompt, "Save this configuration?" press Y for Yes. This configuration is the one you will
need to access the internet.
Now
return to the main menu and select Internet. Apex will use the configuration
you have just setup.
The user
interface for the PC Bluetooth service may vary from the one described here.
Nevertheless, the COM port information will still be available somewhere.
Before
setting up a pairing between the BrailleNote BT and your PC's Bluetooth
function, ensure that both ActiveSync, or WMDC for Windows Vista and Bluetooth
are set up on your PC. See 14.14.1 Installing the Synchronization Software on your
PC.
To set up
Bluetooth on your PC:
1. Install the Bluetooth driver. Follow
the instructions supplied with your Bluetooth dongle or card.
2. Open the Bluetooth Devices Control
Panel.
3. Click on the Options tab and select Turn discovery on and Allow Bluetooth devices to connect to this computer.
4. On the COM Ports tab, click Add.
5. Select Incoming (device initiates the connection) and click OK.
6. Note the number of the COM port that
was added.
7. Close the Bluetooth Devices Control
Panel by clicking OK.
8. On your PC, open your
synchronization program, either ActiveSync or WMDC.
9. From the File menu, select
Connection Settings.
10. Select "Allow connections"
11. Select the COM port assigned to
Bluetooth.
12. Click OK.
Now you need to connect the BrailleNote. To do this:
1. Go to the Utilities Menu on your
BrailleNote and press M for Miscellaneous Options.
2. Go to ActiveSync Connection by
pressing SPACE.
3. Select Bluetooth by pressing B then ENTER. Bluetooth is now the connection type of choice. Now you need to set up
Bluetooth on the BrailleNote BT.
4. Go to the Options Menu by pressing SPACE with O, then C for the Connectivity Menu.
5. Select Bluetooth and press ENTER. KeySoft prompts: "Bluetooth on? Currently Yes/No." Press Y.
6. KeySoft prompts: "Search for devices?" Press Y. KeySoft displays, "Searching for Bluetooth devices, please wait..." This may take a few seconds during
which you will hear progress beeps.
7. When the search is complete, KeySoft
will display: "List of Bluetooth devices."
8. Your PC will appear on the list by the name you gave it during Bluetooth set up. Select it by pressing ENTER. KeySoft prompts: "List of services for (device name)?" Review the list, and select "ActiveSync".
9. KeySoft prompts: "Pair with (device name) and activate ActiveSync?" Press Y.
10. On your BrailleNote BT, KeySoft will
prompt: "Authentication code?" Type a password that you can
remember, in letters or numbers.
11. On your PC, there will be a dialog box requesting an authentication code. Type the same password here and click OK.
You are
now connected to ActiveSync via Bluetooth.
Synchronizing
the time on your BrailleNote BT each time you use ActiveSync is a simple matter
of ticking a checkbox.
Firstly,
ensure that your BrailleNote BT is set to the correct international time zone.
This is described in 1.24 Time and Date. Your BrailleNote BT will
synchronize to the time zone specified so if it is incorrect, the time will
always be out.
Whether
you not connected via ActiveSync, open the ActiveSync window on your desktop.
From the Tools Menu, Tab to Options and press ENTER. On the Sync Options tab that shows, you will find a check box labeled "Synchronize mobile device clock upon connecting". Check this box, and to save the
change, Tab to OK and press ENTER.
One of
the options available in ActiveSync is the automatic conversion of MS Word
files to MS Pocket Word format when transferring them to the BrailleNote BT
from your PC, and convert them back when transferring in the other direction.
As this is automatic i.e. you do not get the option of choosing when you would
like to do this and when not, we recommend that you ensure it is turned off.
However at times, converting to MS Pocket Word format may be useful, and if so
it is useful to know how to switch this function on.
From the
Tools menu in the ActiveSync window of your desktop, select Options. There are
three tabs, select the Rules tab. There is a button marked Conversion Settings.
Tab to this and press ENTER. On this tab is a check box labeled
"Convert files when synchronized, copied, or deleted." When checked, ActiveSync will
always convert transferred MS Word or MS Pocket Word files; when unchecked it
never will.
To
establish a successful connection with ActiveSync, a number of independent
factors must be satisfied. Be prepared to spend time to understand the
connection procedure. With patience you will soon be connecting quickly and
reliably.
Synchronization
is the act of keeping two things the same. In the world of planners and address
lists and files, it specifically means being able to keep the entries, or
records on the BrailleNote BT the same as those on a PC, or vice versa. When
you synchronize, the information goes back and forth between the two systems in
such a way that both sides end up the same, with a little help from you
occasionally. So, if you enter a friend's name or an appointment on the BrailleNote
BT, you can ensure that by synchronizing, they will end up recorded in MS
Outlook as well. If you don't want your entries and records to be the same,
then synchronizing is not for you.
There is one kind of BrailleNote BT to PC synchronization that uses ActiveSync without KeySync, and that is file synchronization. This is discussed in detail in 14.17 File Synchronization.
The first
time you synchronize records, any records that are unique to either KeySoft or
Outlook will copy themselves to the other system. Records that already occur on
both your BrailleNote and your PC will need user intervention, and the length
of time this takes will be determined by how many you have.
If you
have a sizeable number of records on either your PC or BrailleNote or both, the
first synchronization could be quite a mission!
Synchronizing
works best when you do it often, rather than leave the changes to build up.
The
software required to set up KeySync on your PC is available on the program CD
that came with your BrailleNote BT, and on the HumanWare web site at
www.humanware.com/support/braillenote/software.
1. Either:
§ Put the CD into the CD drive of your
PC, and select "Install KeySync PC Software" from the menu that is
displayed, or
§ Download KeySync from the HumanWare
web site and run the program called setup.exe.
2. The KeySync Setup window appears.
Read the information on it, then Tab to Next and press ENTER.
3. The Destination Folder window appears. In this window there is a file path field, in which the file path C:\Program Files\HumanWare\KeySync is specified. Tab to Next and press ENTER. Note: if re‑installing KeySync, at this point you will get a dialog box saying "You've specified a folder that already exists…" Tab to Yes and press ENTER.
4. Your PC is now ready to install
KeySync. In the window that appears, Tab to Next and press ENTER.
5. After a short period of installing activity, a dialog box displays asking if you want to run KeySync at every start up. Tab to Yes and press ENTER.
6. When the Installation Complete
window displays, tab to the Finish button and press ENTER.
KeySync
puts an icon in your system tray, but otherwise as KeySync is driven from your
BrailleNote BT, there is very little you need to do with it on the PC.
Important Note: If for some reason you wish to reinstall the
KeySync PC Software, do not remove the original version of the software, just
install over it. This is because the removal process also deletes the previous
synchronization information.
Having
installed KeySync on the PC, you can now set up the BrailleNote. This involves
options for what is to be synchronized, and what to do if information relating
to something has been changed in both KeySoft and the PC.
KeySync
works by finding new records on the BrailleNote and the PC with the same name
and title, but different details, as well as records which have had different
changes made to both the KeySoft and the Outlook copies since the last
synchronization.
This
section covers the options you have for dealing with new and differing records.
For address records, the First and Last names of the contact are used as an
identifier. For appointments, the date, time and title are used as an
identifier. In the procedure below, these identifiers are represented by the
word (identifier) in brackets.
Follow
the steps below to set up the synchronization options.
1. From the Main Menu on your
BrailleNote, choose Utilities Menu, then Synchronization.
2. KeySoft prompts: "KeySync Menu". There are two menu items. Select the
second item, "Options for synchronization".
3. KeySoft prompts: "KeySync Options List". Press SPACE.
4. KeySoft prompts: "Action if something has changed on both the PC and in KeySoft?"
§ If you want to make a judgment call
on an individual basis, press A ("Ask the user to choose"), and press ENTER.
§ If you trust the BrailleNote records over Outlook, press K ("Choose KeySoft's copy"). Press ENTER.
§ If you trust the Outlook records over the ones on the BrailleNote, press P ("Choose the PC's copy"). Press ENTER.
§ If you want to leave both options unchanged, and unsynchronized at this stage, press L ("Leave both unchanged"). Press ENTER.
5. KeySoft prompts: "Synchronize contacts? Currently (y/n)". Type Y for Yes or N for No and then press ENTER.
6. KeySoft prompts: "Synchronize Planner? Currently (y/n)" Type Y for Yes, or N for No and then press ENTER.
If
you answered yes, KeySoft prompts: "Synchronize All appointments? Currently (y/n)" This option allows you to specify a
period of weeks, past or future, that you wish to synchronize. If you want all
past and future appointments synchronized, type Y for Yes and go to step 9. If you wish to
specify a period of time, type N for No and then press ENTER.
7. KeySoft prompts: "Past weeks of appointments to sync? Currently All." The values you can enter are, L for All, or a number between 0‑999,
which specifies the number of weeks. If you don't want to synchronize any past
weeks, type 0. No number signs required. Type a
value and press ENTER.
8. KeySoft prompts: "Future weeks of appointments to sync? Currently All." The same values are valid as for
the past. Type a value and press ENTER. Note: In the case of both past and future
time frames, all the instances of any new recurring appointments starting in
the time frame will synchronize through, even if they extend beyond the time
frame specified.
9. You are now set up to synchronize as
much or as little as you wish to. The values that you have selected become the
defaults until you change them again. To get back to the KeySync menu, press SPACE with E.
1. Connect to ActiveSync. See 14.14 Connecting your BrailleNote to a PC.
2. From the Main Menu, select the
Utilities Menu, then Synchronization, then "Synchronize Now".
The
first time you synchronize, a dialog box will pop up on the PC, asking if you
wish to synchronize with this particular BrailleNote BT, with an accompanying
announcement from the BrailleNote BT saying "Please confirm on the PC that it is OK to sync data."
To
answer yes, press Enter on your PC. If you are not using Office XP or 2000 with
the security pack installed, go to step 3.
§ If you are using MS Office XP or
2000 with the security pack installed or running Vista, a second dialog box may
display on your PC. It is a feature that is meant to stop viruses from polling
your Outlook records, and warns that a program is trying to get into your
contacts list. If you are not using a screen reader, it may seem like the
process has hung, but it is a simple routine on the PC to get around the dialog
box:
§ Tab to the check box labeled "Allow access".
§ Press the space bar to check the
box, then Tab to go to a combo box that has a range of times up to ten minutes.
§ Use the arrow keys to select a time
from the drop‑down list.
§ Tab to the Yes button and press
Enter. You can then proceed. Unless you have hundreds of contacts to
synchronize, ten minutes should be enough time. If it is not, the dialog box will
reappear allowing you to specify another ten minutes in the same way.
3. KeySync displays: "Connecting…Syncing contacts/planner, please wait…". Some beeps may follow. Then there
are three prompts, either one, some, all or none of which may come up, in the
following order:
§ “The details for (identifier) have changed on both sides. Option?."
To
use the KeySoft details, press K.
To
use the PC details, press P.
To
leave the decision until next time you synchronize, press L.
To
always use the KeySoft details, press S.
To
always use the PC details, press C.
§ "(Identifier) has been deleted from (the PC/KeySoft) only. Option?" where PC/KeySoft is either one or the other. Select one of the following options:
To
delete this record from the PC and KeySoft, press D.
To
restore the record to the PC/KeySoft, press R.
To
leave the decision until next time you synchronize, press L.
To
always restore records to the PC/KeySoft, press A.
To
always delete records from KeySoft/the PC, press E.
§ "New records for (identifier) have been found on both KeySoft and the PC. Option?." Select one of the following options:
If
these are different people, then to create separate records for both, press D.
If
these are the same person, then to use the KeySoft details, press K, or to use the PC details, press P.
To
leave the decision until next time you synchronize, press L.
To
always use the KeySoft details, press S.
To
always use the PC details, press C.
4. KeySync has now presented all the
relevant prompts and you have chosen options for them. KeySync will now
display: "Syncing (contacts/planner), please wait" then proceed to synchronize. During
this process, KeySync will let you know what is going on with a series of
"Percentage complete" prompts. When it is complete, KeySync will
display some or all of this prompt: "Finished syncing (contacts/planner). x PC items updated. x KeySoft items updated. x KeySoft items deleted."
5. If you are synchronizing both
contacts and planner applications, at this point KeySync will return to step 2
and go through the process again for the other application.
Note: Once the synchronization begins, do
not interrupt it.
For
details on Synchronizing your Address List and Planner, see 14.16.4 Synchronizing the Address List and 14.16.5 Synchronizing the Planner.
6. When all the syncing is complete, KeySync will display: "Syncing complete. KeySync menu."
KeySync
works by pairing Outlook and KeyList records with each other and making them
the same. It initially identifies pairs of records by looking for identical
first and last name fields on each side, and creates copies of single records
to make them into a pair. After that, any changes to the pairs are updated when
you synchronize. KeySync works with the whole KeyList address database on the
BrailleNote BT, and on Outlook the main Contacts folder, not including any
subfolders or renamed contacts folders or any group or distribution lists set
up on Outlook.
KeySync
carries out the following functions:
When you
add a new address record to either KeyList or Outlook, KeySync will add the
record to the other system.
When you
delete an address record in either KeyList or Outlook, KeySync will ask whether
you want to delete it from the other system, or restore it.
Note: When you delete both copies of a record, they
are gone for good.
When you
make a change to an existing address record in either KeyList or Outlook,
KeySync will update the other system with the changes.
If when
you make different changes to the same record on both sides, KeySync will ask
you which one you want to use.
Here are some examples:
1. Initially, your friend Andie is in
your BrailleNote BT as Andie Brown, but in Outlook as Andrea Brown. Both
records are synchronized across as the names are not identical, and you can
delete whichever one you don't wish to keep.
2. You update Kyle Jones' e‑mail
address on the BrailleNote BT but not on your PC. When you run KeySync, it
automatically updates Outlook with the new e‑mail address.
3. You update a customer's mobile phone
number on Outlook, but when you try to ring her while out of the office, you
find it is incorrect. You get the correct number and enter it into KeyList as
you have your BrailleNote BT with you. When you run KeySync, it will detect
that there has been a change on both sides and as you have set KeySync to
always ask you about these, you tell it to use the KeySoft copy.
4. On Outlook, you delete the contact record for a supplier that you no longer use. When you synchronize, KeySync asks if you wish to delete it off KeyList, or restore it to Outlook. You select the delete option and wipe it completely.
Because
there are a lot more fields in an Outlook Contacts record than in a KeyList
address record, and they have different names, only the fields that are in both
systems are synchronized. The pairs in order of KeyList then Outlook are:
Last
Name Name,
Last
First
name Name,
First
Middle
Name Name,
Middle
Title Name,
Title
Home
Phone Home,
Phone
Business
Phone Business,
Phone
Cell
Phone Home,
Mobile
Home E‑mail E‑mail
Address
Business
E‑mail E‑mail
Address 2
Home
Fax Home
Fax
Business
Fax Business
Fax
Street
Address Home
Address
Street
Address Line 2 Home
Address
Street
Address Line 3 Home
Address
City Home
Address City
State
or County Home
Address State
Zip or
Postcode Home
Address Zip
Home
Country Home
Country
Business
Title Job
Title
Company
Name Company
Department Department
Business
Street Address Business
Address
Business
Street Address Line 2 Business
Address
Business
Street Address Line 3 Business
Address
Business
City Business
Address City
Business
State or County Business
Address State
Business
Zip or Postcode Business
Address Zip
Business
Country Business
Country
Web
Page Web
Page
Notes Notes
The
fields in an Outlook record that are not synchronized by KeySync are not
generally affected by the synchronizing process. However, if you delete a
previously synchronized record off KeySoft, and during synchronization choose
to delete the Outlook record as well, the entire Outlook record will be
deleted, including the unused fields.
It is a
characteristic of Outlook that if you do not put an area code onto a phone
number, it fills in the default country and area code for you, regardless of
whether it is correct or not, and while you can change them, you cannot delete
these codes entirely, so you have to have these codes even if the number is
local. The phone number fields in KeyList do not do this, however; they simply
take whatever numeric combination you type into them. This means that if a
number in a KeyList record without a country and area code synchronizes to
Outlook, Outlook will add the default one at the Outlook end. And the next time
you synchronize, those codes will synchronize back to KeyList. However if you
type a country and area code in KeyList, using a space between each code,
Outlook will recognize these and sort them into the appropriate fields. For
example, the number +1 415 8206820 in KeyList will synchronize accurately into
Outlook.
If you happen to be displaying an individual contact record when you synchronize, the display does not automatically refresh itself with the new information. It will however refresh once you close it.
Overlapping
appointments happen when two appointments are scheduled in all or partly the
same timeframe, for example one for 10am – 11am and one for 10.30am – 12 noon
on the same day. Both MS Outlook and KeyPlan will allow you to schedule these
appointments, although you will get a notification message from either system.
However in this section we are just going to look at the BrailleNote BT end of
the process and overlapping appointments that occur when synchronizing with
Outlook.
When
synchronizing, there is a greater chance of getting unwanted overlapping
appointments caused by scheduling on both systems. If you are synchronizing
regularly, however, your current schedule will be fairly up to date in both
systems, so overlapping appointments will be fairly uncommon. But just in case,
KeySync will notify you of any overlaps caused as a result of the
synchronization process, when the syncing is finished. The overlapping
appointment prompt will only be displayed if overlapping appointments occur in
the next year.
After all
records have been synchronized, if there are any new overlapping appointments,
KeySync will display: "There are overlapping appointments. Review them
now?" To ignore them, press N and you will be returned to the
KeySync Menu.
If you
wish to review them straight away, press Y. KeySoft returns you to the planner, to the first overlapping
appointment resulting from the synchronization. Once in the Planner, you can
review any or all overlapping appointments using the two commands:
Go to
next overlapping appointment: SPACE with dots 3‑4‑5‑6, and
Go to
previous overlapping appointment: SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3‑6.
It is
also possible to synchronize files between the BrailleNote BT and a PC. This
means you can, effectively, keep copies of files on both your BrailleNote BT
and PC at the same time, with a choice of having them updated automatically in
either direction, or only when you choose to update them. For example, if you
have a report that you may wish to work on while traveling to work, then on
your PC, then on your way home, simply put it into the Synchronized Files
folder on either your BrailleNote BT or PC, and when you ActiveSync, both
versions will synchronize to the latest version.
File
synchronization is not a KeySync function, but works with ActiveSync alone. So,
even if you don't want to synchronize your planner or address list, you can
still take advantage of this tool, and you don't need to install the KeySync PC
software. Also unlike KeySync synchronization, you can synchronize files with
more than one PC.
Follow
these steps to set up file synchronization between your BrailleNote BT and your
PC.
1. Connect to ActiveSync and say "Yes" to a partnership. Note:
If you already have a partnership set up, in the ActiveSync window on your
desktop, go to Tools then Options, and skip to step 3.
2. If you are presented with the "Select number of Partnerships" screen and only want to sync with
this computer, check the box for "Yes, I want to synchronize with only this computer". If you synchronize with more than one
PC, however, it is fine to check the other box.
3. The Select Synchronization Settings window will display. Ensure that the Files option is checked, no others. Note: KeySync will still function if Files is checked.
4. A dialog box will appear telling you that a synchronized files folder will be set up on your desktop. Tab to the OK button and press ENTER.
5. You are back in the Select Synchronization Settings window. Tab to OK and press ENTER and a window called Set Up Complete appears. Tab to the Finish button and press ENTER.
6. ActiveSync will set up a folder in
My Documents called "BrailleNote BT Synchronized Files", for storing
synchronized files. Likewise, it creates a folder called "Synchronized
Files” on the Flash Disk of your BrailleNote BT. It is only the files you put
into either of these folders that will be synchronized.
7. At this stage you can select how you
want the synchronization to operate. From the Tools menu, select Options, then
the Sync Mode tab. You have three choices; they are: Continuous, only at
connection, and manually. Select the one that you prefer. Stay in this window
for the next step.
8. Lastly, as described in 14.14.5 File Conversion and ActiveSync, you may want to turn off the
Convert File Format function. This converts MS Word files to MS Pocket Word and
back during the synchronization process.
Your File
Synchronization is now set up.
1. While the instructions for file
synchronization say to turn off the converter function, if the file on your PC
is a Microsoft 2000 or later document, you may wish to leave the converter
function turned on, and convert the file to Pocket Word. Alternatively, save
the Word document as a rich text format file before transferring to the
synchronize folder.
End of Connectivity Chapter.
A file is
the name given to any organized information stored in an electronic form. File
types stored by the BrailleNote BT are word processor documents, e‑mail
attachments, address lists, dictionaries, and so on. The File Manager provides
tools for manipulating and organizing files using folders and a directory
structure.
To select
the File Manager, go to the Main Menu and press F. KeySoft displays: "File Manager menu."
As always you can review the options in the menu by pressing the ADVANCE and BACK thumb keys or SPACE and BACKSPACE, followed by NEXT or ENTER to select an item, or just press an initial letter. The File Manager comprises the following items:
1. Browse Files: To check all the files
in a folder;
2. Copy File: To copy a file or group
of files;
3. Erase File: To erase any file;
4. Rename File: To change the name of a
file;
5. Move File: To move a file from one
location to another;
6. Protection: To protect or unprotect
any file. Once a file is protected, it cannot be accidentally erased or altered
without first unprotecting it;
7. Unzip File: To unzip a file;
8. Zip File: To zip a file or group of
files;
9. Translate File: Firstly, to translate a Braille file to a text file, or vice versa. The discussion about file translation starts at 15.18 File Translation.
Secondly,
to import a file that is in some other format ‑ ASCII or Microsoft Word
for example, into the BrailleNote BT and convert it to a Keyword format. The
file may be on a disk or storage card or brought in through the USB port.
Thirdly,
to export a document from BrailleNote BT's KeySoft format into some other
format; for example, ASCII or Microsoft Word format. The file may be written to
a disk or storage card or sent out through the USB port;
10. Folder Manager: To create, rename or
erase a folder or sub‑directory.
General
Caution: While in the process of copying or moving any files onto your Flash
Disk from any location, never perform a reset. This can cause your Flash Disk
to disappear and can cause corruption.
Documents,
folders and drives were discussed in
3.4 Documents Folders and Drives. Remember documents are just
particular types of files and they are handled in the same way as far as the
File Manager is concerned.
When you
choose an option from the File Manager menu, such as Copy File, you are first
asked to select the drive. The selection of a drive was discussed in 4.8.1 Selecting a Drive. The selection of a folder and file
follows the same procedure as discussed in 3.5 Opening a Document.
There is
another way of selecting a drive in KeySoft generally, which is not restricted
to the File Manager. If you are at a prompt for a file name or folder name, and
you have not had the opportunity to select a drive, then press BACKSPACE. KeySoft prompts: "Drive? (Last drive used)."
You can
choose a drive, and then follow the prompts to select a folder and file.
Folder or
file names are easy to check. When KeySoft displays the name of a file or
folder, you can repeat the name by pressing SPACE with R. Any punctuation and spaces within the name
are not usually spoken. If you wish to hear the file or folder name spoken with
punctuation and spaces included, press SPACE with O, then H. To check the exact spelling of a file or folder name, press SPACE with O, then S.
To obtain
information about a file, folder or drive, use the Browse Files option. From
the File Manager menu, press B for Browse and KeySoft displays: "Drive? (Last drive used),"
You can
select the drive and then the folder as usual. KeySoft then displays a list of
files in the selected folder. Review the list in the usual way. Let us say that
you are reviewing the files in a folder, and the file name "Frank" is displayed. If you press SPACE with I, KeySoft provides information about
the file. That might typically be as follows: "Braille document. Size: 945. Last modified: Saturday 22 May 2010, at 8:21 PM. Unprotected."
At the
point where KeySoft displays "List of folders" on a particular drive, you can request information about the selected
drive by pressing SPACE with I.
This
might typically be as follows: "Disk name: (name). (number) characters free. Disk size: (number) characters."
Similarly,
you can obtain details as to when a folder was created by stepping through the
list of folders presented after the "List of folders" prompt is displayed until your
desired folder is presented, and then pressing SPACE with I.
For
details on how to view sub‑directories, see 15.17 Creating Renaming and Erasing Sub‑Directories.
When
giving information about a file, KeySoft displays the file type in addition to
the size and date, etc. The file type indicates what type of information the
file contains and whether it is a Braille document, a Microsoft Word document,
an address list and so on. It determines how the information contained in a
file is to be interpreted by KeySoft. KeyWord, for example, recognizes certain
file types and interprets these file types to extract meaningful information.
In the BrailleNote BT file system, files can contain information that be
interpreted in all manner of different ways. In KeySoft, files which contain
text or Braille are called documents.
The
following document or file types are supported by KeySoft:
Braille
Document: A document type where the contents are interpreted as Braille
characters and symbols;
Microsoft
Word: The Microsoft Word, word processor document format;
DOCX: Microsoft
Word 2007, word processor document format. KeySoft File Manager can open DOCX
files by converting them into TXT or HTML formats. Any changes to the text will
be made in that format, leaving the original DOCX file untouched. When opening
a large DOCX file, please allow a few minutes for conversion to TXT format;
Rich text
format: A standard word processor format that converts formatting to
instructions that other programs, including compatible Microsoft programs, can
read and interpret;
Word
Perfect 5.1: A file type used by the Word Perfect 5.1 DOS word processor;
PDF:
KeySoft File Manager can open PDF documents. It can do so by converting the
file to txt format. Any changes to the text will be made in that format,
leaving the original PDF file untouched. When opening a large PDF file, please
allow a few minutes for conversion to txt format. Note that PDF files can also
be opened using the Book Reader;
PPTX
(PowerPoint version 2007 or later): When accessing the file browser, simply
press ENTER on a .pptx file. KeySoft will immediately convert this to
an accessible web page for you to be able to view all the slides’ content;
KeySoft
version 2 Braille: This is the Braille document format of version two of
KeySoft, the version used by the Braille Companion;
KeySoft
version 2 text: This is the text document format of version two of KeySoft, the
version used by the DOS versions of KeySoft Companion, the KeyNote Companion
and the Braille Companion;
ASCII
text. An ASCII text document contains only ASCII characters. It allows only
very simple formatting using, for example tab characters;
UNICODE
text. A standard character encoding format that supports international
languages;
Plain
Braille. A standard form of Braille.
When
reviewing a folder in the File Manager, KeySoft's default setting only displays
files that are likely to contain text. This prevents system files from
"cluttering" the list of files and limits the accidental deletion of
system files.
KeySoft
also provides the option to view all files in the folder. To select this option
press SPACE with X when the prompt "List of files in (folder name)" is displayed. There are two
additional file views available. These are: "List of all, including hidden, files” and "List of KeySoft files."
Each time
you repeat the SPACE with X key sequence a different type of
file view is presented.
A zip file
(a file with a .zip extension) contains one or more files that have been
compressed to reduce file size. You can open a zip file, which will uncompress
the file(s) and place them in a specified location. Similarly, you can take one
or more files and compress them into one single zip file at a specified
location.
If you
have a zip file that you wish to open, follow these steps:
1. Go to the File manager.
2. Press U to activate the Unzip
function.
3. Locate on which drive the zip file
is located.
4. Locate the folder on the selected
drive where the zip file is located.
5. Select the file to unzip at the
selected location.
6. Locate the drive where you wish to
unzip the file.
7. Locate the folder on the selected
drive where you wish to unzip the file.
8. If the file is protected, enter the
password, when done or if it is not password‑protected, press Enter. If
this is a large file, you may hear progress beeps.
9. When the file has been uncompressed, you will be asked if you wish to delete the original zip file. Press Y or N.
Note that
you can also open a zip file by pressing ENTER when it is selected in the File
explorer.
1. Go to the File manager.
2. Press Z to activate the zip
function.
3. Locate on which drive the file(s) or
folder is located.
4. Locate the folder or file (s) on the
selected drive.
5. Select the file(s) to zip at the
selected location. You may "mark" several files to zip at once using SPACE with M.
6. Locate the drive where you wish to
zip the file.
7. Locate the folder on the selected
drive where you wish to place the zip file.
8. Enter a file name. The
".zip" extension will be added automatically.
9. Enter a password if necessary. If
not, just press Enter. It takes some time to compress files, you may hear
progress beeps.
10. When the zip file has been created,
you will be returned to the File Manager.
Note that
you can also ZIP a file when browsing in any application using BACKSPACE with Z.
The
Folder Manager allows you to create, copy, rename or delete folders and sub‑directories.
From the File Manager menu press F, for Folder Manager. You can review
the options in the usual way. You can also select an option in the usual way by
pressing NEXT or just press the initial letter of
the option name.
From the
Folder Manager menu, press N, for New Folder. KeySoft prompts: "Create folder on which drive? Press ENTER for Flash Disk."
Select
the required drive, and KeySoft prompts: "New folder name?."
Type the
new name, of up to 250 characters and press ENTER. A new, empty folder is created, and you are returned to the Folder
Manager menu.
Note that
this is not the only place you can create a folder. You can create a folder at
most "folder name" prompts just by typing a new name.
For
instructions on how to create a sub‑directory, see 15.17.2 Creating a Sub‑Directory.
The
option of copying folders has been added to the Folder Manager. To access Copy
Folder, go to the File Manager Menu and open the Folder Manager by pressing F.
Copy
Folder is listed in the Folder Manager Menu, after New Folder (previously known
as Create Folder). Once you hear "Copy Folder", press ENTER and
KeySoft will prompt: "Copy folder on which drive? Press ENTER for Flash Disk." If you want to copy the folder onto your Flash Disk press ENTER and KeySoft will prompt: "Folder to copy?."
In
addition to copying folders, it is also possible to rename and erase them. You
cannot however protect and unprotect folders, nor can you move them.
1. From the Folder Manager menu, press R, for Rename. KeySoft prompts: "Rename folder on which drive? (Suggested drive)."
2. Select the drive, and then the
folder you wish to rename. KeySoft prompts: "New name for (original name)?."
3. Type in the new name and press ENTER, or use the prompt editing commands as
discussed in 5.19 Editing at a Prompt to modify the original name, and
press ENTER. The name is changed and you are
returned to the Folder Manager menu.
Alternatively,
while in a folder list at any folder prompt, press BACKSPACE with R. Follow steps 2 and 3 above, and
you will be returned to where you were in KeySoft.
For
instructions on how to rename a sub‑directory, see 15.17.3 Renaming a Sub‑Directory.
You can
erase a folder and its contents, including unprotected, protected or hidden
files and sub‑directories, in one operation. Therefore it is important to
check before erasure that there is nothing in the folder that you wish to keep
before proceeding.
1. From the Main Menu, press F for File Manager and then F for Folder Manager.
2. Press E for Erase a folder, then select a drive.
3. At the “Erase Folder on which drive?” prompt, press SPACE and locate the folder you wish to erase.
4. KeySoft will prompt: “Folder to erase? Press ENTER for folder name” where folder name is the selected folder. Press ENTER.
5. KeySoft prompts: "Erase folder and all contained files and folders. Sure?" Press Y and the erasure begins.
6. If any files are protected, KeySoft
prompts: "file name is protected. Erase anyway?". Press Y, or A for All, if you suspect there may be others that you also wish to
erase. If you wish to save the protected file, press N and the erasure of the other files will
continue, however the actual folder will not be erased.
7. KeySoft displays the number of files
and sub‑folders erased, then returns to the Folder Manager menu.
Note that
you can also erase a folder by pressing BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
1. Go to the File manager, then Folder
Management.
2. Press Z to activate the zip
function.
3. Locate on which drive the folder is
located.
4. Locate the folder on the selected
drive.
5. Select the folder to zip at the
selected location. Only one folder may be compressed at a time.
6. Locate the drive where you wish to
zip the file.
7. Locate the folder on the selected
drive where you wish to place the zip file.
8. Enter a file name. The
".zip" extension will be added automatically.
9. Enter a password if necessary. If
not, just press Enter. It takes some time to compress files, you may hear
progress beeps.
When the
zip file has been created, you will be returned to the File Manager.
Note that
you can also ZIP a folder when browsing in any application using BACKSPACE with Z.
The Browse
Files option in the File Manager allows you to open files using the Media
Player, KeyWord, KeyWeb and KeyBook.
A file
name will be displayed after ENTER is pressed, and File Manager will
open the file in the correct application if the file type is recognized. File
Manager recognizes the file type from the extension, for example, if it is
Greensleeves.mp3, File Manager knows to open the file in the Media Player. The
file types, .wav, .wma, and .m3u, will also be opened in the Media Player.
The file
types that can be opened in KeyWord include .brf, .txt, .rtf, .docx, .doc, .pdf,
KeyWord text and Braille files. For KeyWeb, the files .html/.htm and url
(shortcut) are recognized by the File Manager.
Compressed
Zip files can also be opened here by pressing ENTER.
KeySoft
has the ability to open .pptx files made in Microsoft PowerPoint 2007 or later.
In the File Manager menu, select the “Browse Files” option and find your .pptx
file in your desired folder. Simply press ENTER on the .pptx file and KeySoft will
immediately begin converting it to a viewable format which will be shown in
KeyWeb.
When the
conversion completes, KeyWeb will launch and you will be brought to a list of
slides in the presentation. Simply click on your desired slide and KeySoft will
show you its content, including the titles, bullets, tables, and other slide
objects.
As it can
take some time to convert the PowerPoint presentation the first time, you do
not have to convert the presentation every time you press ENTER on the .pptx file. If
you have already converted the presentation, KeySoft will prompt you to either
open the existing converted copy, or convert it again. By simply pressing O
to open the existing copy, you will instantly see the presentation without
needing to wait for the conversion again. Converted presentations are stored in
a PowerPoint folder found on the flash disk. This folder is necessary for the
PowerPoint access to take place and is a new system folder found in KeySoft 9.4
or later.
In a list
of files, you can change the order in which files are listed. Files can be
ordered by name, date, type or size. For example, let us consider the file,
Board of Trustees Report.doc which was last modified on Friday 7 May 2010 and
is 27 KB. The order can be changed so that this file is listed before Salary
Review.doc which was last modified on Friday 23 April 2010 and is 12 KB. Note
that you cannot change the order of folders or directories.
As you
can see, file lists are arranged in alphabetical order when ordered by name, so
that the names of files appear from "A" at the top of the list to
"Z" at the bottom of the list. Likewise, by changing the date order,
the dates that the files were last modified are listed from the most recently
modified to the least recently modified. You can order by type, for example,
you can order all the .doc files before all the .txt files in your list. The
file size can also be organized from largest to smallest. Ordering files by
size is particularly useful when you realize that you are running out of
storage space and need to find and delete the largest file in your list of
files.
To toggle
between ordering the file lists by name, date, type or size of a file, press SPACE with V.
You can
mark any number of individual files to select multiple files. When you mark a
file, you are selecting it to either copy, move, erase and protect/unprotect.
You could also select multiple files, for example, when printing, importing or
for playing on the media player.
You can
either mark an individual file or all the files in a list of files. To toggle
between marking and unmarking an individual file, press SPACE with M. If you later discover that you
have marked the wrong file or group of files or decide against making a change
to a file or group of files, repeat the command, press SPACE with M to remove each mark. To mark all
files in a list of files, press ENTER with lower g. This is also a toggle command; in
other words it will alternate between marking all files and unmarking all
files.
Note that
marks are kept after you open a file in the Browse Files option. However, marks
will be lost if you exit a list of files or if you change the view in a list of
file, by pressing SPACE with X.
As well
as marking files, you can also mark folders. Once marked, folders can be copied
or deleted.
Once you
have marked the appropriate file or group of files you can:
§ Perform the copy, move, erase and
protect/unprotect operations.
§ Play a group of marked media files
in the media player.
§ Rename individual files. To do this,
press BACKSPACE with R. Note that you cannot mark and then
rename multiple files.
To copy a
marked file or a group of files, press BACKSPACE with Y. For instance, you may wish to make
a copy of a file so that you can move it to another location.
To move a
marked file or a group of files, press BACKSPACE with M. You can easily move a file to a
different location, for instance from the General folder to the KeyBase folder.
Note that a marked file or group of files will no longer be marked once moved
to another folder.
If you
move a protected file, you will be asked to confirm the move. Also, when you
copy or move a protected file, it will remain protected.
To erase
a marked file or a group of files, press BACKSPACE with C. When you decide that you no longer
need a file or want to get rid of one in order to free up more storage space,
you can erase it.
To
protect a marked file or a group of files, press BACKSPACE with P, then P. You can add security by choosing to protect a file. This is good if
you need to prevent others from making changes to a file. This effectively
makes the file Read‑Only, which means that others can open the file and
read it, but cannot make any changes to it.
To
unprotect a marked file or a group of files, press BACKSPACE with P, then U. If the protected file is to be reviewed and you want the reviewer to
make changes to the file, you can unprotect it.
To play a
group of marked media files in the media play, press ENTER. The files will be sent for feedback in the
media player.
Note: If
you want to do more than just listen to audio files, for example you want to
skip through a track, or pause a track, then you need to switch to Media
Player. To switch to media player, press BACKSPACE with ENTER with M. Refer to 17 Media Center.
This
option allows any file to be copied to another folder or drive. You can also
copy within a folder.
A file is
often copied so it can be used as the basis for a similar document or as a
template. You might also copy an important file to another disk for security.
Copying
is a process of duplication, it does not remove the original file. If you wish
to do this, refer to 15.11 Erasing a File. During the process, prompts use
the terms "Source" and "Destination", which refer to the original file and its
copy, respectively.
To copy a
file, start from the File Manager menu and press C. KeySoft prompts: "Source drive? (suggested drive).”
Follow
the procedure as previously described; select the required drive, and answer
the subsequent prompts for folder and file name. The file is initially assumed
to be a KeySoft type meaning that it may only be in Braille. To type the name
of any file, remembering you must type the name in computer Braille, press SPACE with X. The first time you press SPACE with X, KeySoft displays the current entry
type. The second and subsequent times, KeySoft changes the entry type. In the
list of files, SPACE with X can be used to narrow or widen the
list of options as described in 15.4 Document and File Types.
After a
source file name has been selected, KeySoft prompts: "Destination drive? (suggested drive)."
The
choices of destination drive and folder are made in exactly the same way as in
choosing the Source File name.
The
destination file name is the same as the source file name except if a file is
copied within the same folder. Then the words "Copy of" are put in front of the file name to
differentiate it from the original file. You can, of course, rename file as
described in 15.12 Renaming a File.
When a
selection has been made, copying commences and after a few seconds you are
returned to the File Manager menu.
If the
chosen Destination File name already exists in the destination folder, KeySoft
prompts: "(File name) already exists. Replace?."
KeySoft
is asking if you want to replace the existing file. Remember that it cannot be
recovered later if you change your mind. If you do want to replace it, press Y. Pressing N returns you to the File Manager menu without the file being copied.
To
conserve disk space, or to make file management easier, you may wish to erase
files you no longer need. The Erase File option accomplishes this.
From the
File Manager menu, press E to select the Erase File option.
KeySoft prompts: "Erase file from Drive? (suggested drive)."
Choose a
disk, folder name, and file name in the same way you would choose a file to
copy, as described in the previous section. When a file has been chosen for
erasing, KeySoft prompts: "Erase (file name). Sure?."
This is
your last chance to abandon this destructive process. Press Y to erase the file, or N to abandon the operation.
NOTE: Protected files cannot be erased until they
are first "unprotected," as described in 15.14 Protecting a File.
The names of files often have to be changed as their contents alter with editing, or to avoid confusion with other files. This can be done using the Rename File option.
1. From the File Manager menu, press R, for Rename. KeySoft prompts: "Rename File on which Drive? (suggested drive)."
2. Select the drive, and follow the
prompts for folder and file. Once a file has been selected, KeySoft prompts: "New name for (file name)?."
3. Type the new file name or edit the
existing file name and press ENTER. Editing the existing file name is
the same as editing at a prompt as discussed in 5.19 Editing at a Prompt. Providing the file is not
protected, the name is changed, and you are returned to the File Manager menu.
Alternatively,
while in a file list at any file prompt, press BACKSPACE with R. Follow steps 2 and 3 above, and
you will be returned to where you were in KeySoft.
With this
option you can move a file (protected or unprotected) from one
folder/directory/drive to another in one action. This is different to the Copy
file option in that it does not leave a copy of the file in the source folder.
Otherwise it is almost the same procedure.
To select
the Move File option, start from the File Manager menu and press M. KeySoft will display: “Source Drive? Press ENTER for (suggested drive).”
Locate
and select the file you wish to move in the usual way. When you select the
file, KeySoft will display: “Destination Drive? Press ENTER for (suggested drive).”
Locate
the destination folder or directory. When you select it, KeySoft will display: “One file moved. File Manager menu.”
As the
prompt says, you are back in the File Manager menu.
You can
also move a file by selecting it in the usual way and pressing BACKSPACE with M.
Files can
be protected against accidental erasure. Once a file is protected, it cannot
generally be changed, erased, or copied over with a new file without first
removing the protection. You do not need to remove the protection first if you
specifically erase a protected file either individually or as part of a group
of files or a folder. Although KeySoft does not require you to remove the
protection, it will provide the following prompt regardless: "xyz is protected. Erase anyway?." For more information on erasing folders, refer to 15.6.4 Erasing a Folder.
To select
the Protect File option, start from the File Manager menu and press P. KeySoft prompts: "Protect File on which Drive? (suggested drive)"
Select
the file to protect in the same way as choosing a file to copy, erase or
rename. Once a file has been selected, KeySoft prompts: "(File name) is unprotected," or protected, as appropriate. Press P to protect, or U to unprotect, and you are returned to the File Manager menu.
Often you
may want to copy a group of related files, such as all letters to a particular
company. You could do this one file at a time, but it is slow if there are more
than 2 or 3 files.
To speed
things up, KeySoft allows the use of two "wild card" characters to specify a group of
files with related names.
Any
single character can specified by SPACE with dots 2‑3‑6. For example, the file name:
NOTES, followed by SPACE with dots 2‑3‑6,
would
select all the following files:
NOTES1;
NOTES2;
NOTES3.
You can
use the single character wild card more than once. For example, the file name:
NOTES, followed by SPACE with dots 2‑3‑6, twice,
would
select NOTES13 and NOTES24, but would ignore NOTES7.
The
second wild card is SPACE with dots 3‑5. This is the multi‑character
wild card, used to represent any group of characters. For example, the file
name:
SCIENCE, followed by SPACE with dots 3‑5 would select all the following
files:
SCIENCE NOTES – JAN;
SCIENCE;
SCIENCE3.
To Copy,
Erase, or Protect a group of related files, include the appropriate wild card
characters in the file name that you enter at a "File name?" or "Document name" prompt. Use Help, SPACE with H to remind you of the commands.
To select
every file in a folder, use just the multi‑character wild card, SPACE with dots 3‑5, as the file name. You might do
this to copy the entire contents of one folder to another folder. If you save
the copies in the same directory, KeySoft prefixes "Copy of" to the file name of each copy.
When
using wildcards KeySoft gives the opportunity to confirm each file individually
or to let KeySoft operate on all files without interruption. KeySoft prompts: "Confirm each file?."
You can
select Y to confirm each file individually,
or N to for KeySoft to perform the
operation without interruption. If you select "confirm each file", KeySoft requests confirmation for
each file before completing the operation and moving onto the next file.
For
example, when using wildcards to erase files, KeySoft prompts: "(Number)files were selected. Confirm each file?" where number is the number of
files. If you press Y, KeySoft prompts for each file: "OK to erase (file name)" where file name is a matching file
name. Y confirms the action for this file, N cancels the action for this file and A confirms the action for this and all the other
matching files.
The idea
of folders was introduced very early on in this User Guide because this
provides a convenient way to organize documents. When used in one layer only,
we call them folders. However when folders are organized in a tree structure
with any number of levels, we refer to them as directories. The distinction is
not in what they are but in how they are used. It might help to think in terms
of being in “folder mode” i.e. one layer, or “directory mode” i.e. several layers. Folder mode is
the standard folder management mode in which the BrailleNote BT operates. The
reason for having two modes is to make management simpler. If you never intend
to use the directory structure, folder mode saves having to type slashes at
prompts. If you do have a directory tree of several layers, folder mode will
give you the topmost layer of directories only. You can then swap to directory
structure to work in the sub‑directories of the selected directory.
The
directory structure is particularly relevant when importing or exporting files.
For instance, you might want to import a file from a storage card. The card
might be organized as a directory tree with several sub‑directories.
If you
find yourself comparing this with how MS Windows Explorer works, it pays to be
aware that you cannot view the sub‑directories and files in a directory
in the same list. For example, if you are listing the sub‑directories in
a directory, no files will be listed. If you list the files in the directory,
no sub‑directories will be listed.
When in
directory mode, a folder becomes a directory and this is indicated by a slash
character “/ ”, appearing before the folder name.
This initial slash represents the "root" directory, which contains
all the other directories on this drive. The root is called the "parent"
of the directories “beneath” it.
A typical
directory name starts with the slash, followed by a directory name followed by
one or more sub‑directory names separated by "/." For example a directory on the Flash Disk
might be /Flash Disk/general/letters.
What does
this mean? The name can be broken down into the following parts:
The first
slash which is the root.
"Flash Disk" is a sub‑directory of the
root directory. In this case it is the Flash Disk drive.
The next "slash" is just a separator.
"General" is the name of a sub‑directory
of the "Flash Disk" directory. Its parent is "Flash Disk."
The next "slash" is another separator.
"Letters" is the name of a sub‑directory
of the "General" directory. Its parent is "General."
This
naming convention allows us to find a document or file in any directory
structure.
You can
choose to use directories at any prompt for a folder name, not just in the File
Manager. For example, from the File Manager Menu select Copy File and then
select a drive such as the Flash Disk. KeySoft prompts: "Source folder name? (Last used folder)."
If you
now press SPACE with T, KeySoft replies, for example: "Source directory name? /(Last used folder)" where "/(Last used folder)", is the last used directory.
You can
select directories in exactly the same way when using the File Manager,
Directory option.
Following
on from the previous section, there are two basic ways to choose a different
directory at this point. You could type the full name, including slashes, etc.,
but this can be rather prone to errors, especially if you are not sure of the
arrangement of the directories.
Alternatively,
you can browse the directory structure to find what you want. This is rather
like using KeySoft's menus. You can move "down" by selecting a sub‑directory
from a list, or move "up" by selecting the parent.
You can
review any list of available directories in several ways: To navigate down a
list, press SPACE with dot 4, SPACE or ADVANCE. To navigate up the list again,
press SPACE with dot 1, or BACK or BACKSPACE. To go back up a level in the
directory structure, press SPACE with dots 2‑3. To make a selection, press NEXT or ENTER. If you know that you are not in a
low enough level directory to find the folder you want, you can bypass the "Directory name? Press ENTER for /name" prompts at each level by pressing SPACE with dots 5‑6 instead of ENTER.
Let's see
how this works. For the purposes of this example, we will assume that we are
currently in the "/General" directory on the Flash Disk and we
wish to go to the "/KeyMail/Attachments" directory. You could be at any "Folder name?" prompt on KeySoft, although the
exact prompts will vary. The example is taken from the Open a Document function
in KeyWord. At the prompt, press SPACE with T.
1. At the "Directory name? Press ENTER for /General" prompt, navigate up to the parent directory by
pressing SPACE with dots 2‑3. KeySoft displays: "Directory name? Press ENTER for /". This is a list of sub‑directories of the Flash Disk.
2. Navigate down through the list until
"KeyMail" is displayed. Either press SPACE with dots 5‑6, or do the following:
1. Press ENTER to select KeyMail, and KeySoft displays: "Directory name? Press ENTER for /KeyMail".
2. Press SPACE repeatedly to see the sub‑directories within the KeyMail
directory.
Regardless
of which method you chose, KeySoft now displays "Sub‑directories of Flash Disk/KeyMail."
3. Using one of the methods described
in Step 2, navigate to the "Attachments" directory.
4. Press ENTER. You have reached your goal. See what happens when you review this directory. There are no more sub‑directories. Navigate back up to the "attachments" sub‑directory. You can press ENTER, putting you at the familiar "Document/File to Open?" prompt. You might now review this directory for files.
Directories
are one of the most demanding concepts to master. Finding files in a complex
directory structure can be difficult. Remember to change to directories when
prompted for a folder name. Remember also that you can move back and forward
through directories and up and down lists of available directories using the
commands covered in this section. And of course, if in doubt, you can press SPACE with H at any time.
All
folders are directories in the root directory of a drive, with the exception of
the folder called "None," which is the root directory itself.
Sub‑directories below this level are not accessible in folder mode.
It is
possible to browse, create, rename and erase any sub‑directories using a
variation on the same processes for browsing, creating, renaming and erasing
folders. This is because, as discussed before, they are basically one and the
same, only used in a different way. It is important to know how to do this if
you find that you cannot erase a seemingly empty folder, as it almost
definitely contains sub‑directories that are not visible in that folder.
Three
procedures are listed below in a step by step format. You may notice that the
prompts refer to both folders and directories, but it still works! Please note
also that if you wish to create a sub‑directory that is deeper than root
level, for example /general/recipes/brownies, this whole “branch” will be
displayed at prompts that include "/folder name."
When opening a document in the File Manager, you may need to browse through a list of folders and file names to find the one you want. To browse a sub‑directory, follow these steps:
1. From the Main Menu, press F for File Manager and then B for Browse
Files.
2. Change from folder to directory by
pressing SPACE with T.
3. KeySoft prompts: "Directory name?." Either press SPACE and
search through the list of folders until you find the one you want, or if you
have many folders to search through, type the path instead. You will now be
able to view the first level of folders.
4. Move down the list of folders and press ENTER once you find the sub‑folder you want. KeySoft
will now prompt: "Directory name? Press ENTER for /downloads." Now either press ENTER to
select the downloads or return to the list of downloads and select My
Subdirectory at the next level down.
5. KeySoft will display the
subdirectory in /downloads, for example, "test". Press ENTER to select "test" and KeySoft will prompt: "Directory name? Press ENTER for /downloads/test." If you press ENTER at
this point and "test" is the last subdirectory in the list, KeySoft
will prompt: "List of files in (directory name)?."
The only
problem with browsing a sub‑directory using the method described above,
is that once you access a sub‑directory, you're stuck there until you
back out. To browse the directory tree without getting stuck in a sub‑directory,
press SPACE with dots 5‑6 or SPACE
with dots 2‑3.
If you
are in a sub‑directory and want to move up a level, pressSPACE with dots 2‑3. and KeySoft will move up a level.
For example, from /downloads/test to /downloads. To move up yet another level,
press SPACE with dots 2‑3 again. To browse sub‑directories
from within a directory, press SPACE with dots 5‑6.
1. From the Main Menu, press F for File Manager and then F for Folder Manager.
2. Press N to create a New folder, then select a drive.
3. At the “New Folder name?” prompt, press SPACE with T. The New Folder prompt will repeat.
4. Press SPACE and either search through the sub‑directories (folders) until you
find the one in which you want to set up the sub‑directory. KeySoft will
prompt “New Folder name? Press ENTER for /folder name” where folder name is the name of the
currently selected directory.
5. Type the name you wish to give the
sub‑directory without a / before it, and press ENTER. KeySoft will prompt “Directory does not exist. Create new directory?.”
6. Press Y for Yes. KeySoft displays: “Folder created. Folder Manager menu.” You are back in the folder manager menu.
1. From the Main Menu, press F for File Manager and then F for Folder Manager.
2. Press R for Rename a folder, then select a drive.
3. At the “Folder to Rename?” prompt, press SPACE with T. The Rename Folder prompt will
repeat.
4. Press SPACE and search through the sub‑directories (folders) until you find
the one that contains the sub‑directory you wish to rename; and select it
by pressing ENTER. KeySoft will prompt “Folder to Rename? Press ENTER for /folder name” where folder name is the name of the
currently selected directory. Press SPACE to move through the list of sub‑directories until you find the
one you want then press ENTER. If there are any more layers of
sub‑directories, repeat this procedure until you reach the one you wish
to rename.
5. KeySoft will prompt, "New name for /directory name?" where the name is the directory you wish to rename. Press ENTER.
6. KeySoft will prompt “New Name for /directory name?” where directory name is actually the
parent directory of the one you have selected. Type the new sub‑directory
name and it will update that, not the parent directory.
7. Press ENTER to complete the renaming. KeySoft will return you to the Folder Manager
menu.
Just as
with erasing folders, you can erase a sub‑directory and its contents,
including unprotected, protected or hidden files and sub‑directories, in
one operation. Therefore it is important to check before erasure that there is
nothing in the folder that you wish to keep before proceeding.
1. From the Main Menu, press F for File Manager and then F for Folder Manager.
2. Press E for Erase a folder, then select a drive.
3. At the “Folder to Erase?” prompt, press SPACE with T. KeySoft will prompt “Directory to Erase?”
4. Press SPACE and locate the directory containing the sub‑directory you wish to
erase.
5. When you have found it, press SPACE with dots 5‑6. KeySoft will prompt: “Directory to erase? Press ENTER for /directory name” where directory name is the selected directory. Repeat this if necessary
6. Press SPACE until you reach the sub‑directory you wish to delete and press ENTER. KeySoft will prompt, "Directory to erase? Press ENTER for /directory name" where directory name is the selected sub‑directory. Press ENTER.
7. If any files are protected, KeySoft
prompts: "file name is protected. Erase anyway?". Press Y, or A for All, if you suspect there may be others that you also wish to
erase. If you wish to save the protected file, press N and the erasure of the other files will
continue, however the actual sub‑directory will not be erased.
Note that
you can also erase a sub‑directory by pressing BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
As well
as creating and reading your own documents and books, you may want to exchange
information with other people, especially via e‑mail. KeyWord can
directly open a file of any of the supported types listed in
15.4 Document and File Types. KeyWord can also save a file as
any of the supported types. The supported types include Microsoft Word format;
the de facto standard for Word Processor document exchange. The following
sections of this chapter are needed only when you specifically want to convert
a file without going into KeyWord.
The
Translate File option of the File Manager Menu allows you to take a file in
ASCII, or Microsoft Word, or WordPerfect 5.1 and others and translate it so
that it can be read or edited on your BrailleNote BT. This process of
converting a file into KeyWord format is called "importing." Braille files created by another Braille
system can also be imported into KeySoft.
The
Translate File option also works in the other direction as well. You can take a
KeySoft document and translate it to the format used by Microsoft Word, or
WordPerfect 5.1, or to ASCII format and other formats. This is called "exporting." KeySoft documents can also be
exported as Braille files for use by other Braille systems.
The
Translate File option also translates KeySoft Braille documents into text
documents, and vice versa.
Apart
from an ASCII set‑up list, which specifies how documents are translated
between KeySoft format and ASCII format, there are also set‑up lists for
Braille to text, and text to Braille translation. These provide a lot of layout
flexibility in the translated document if required, but you may not need to
change any settings because the default settings have been chosen for typical
usage.
To use
the Translation Menu, start from the Main Menu, select the File Manager, and
then the "Translate file" option. The Translation Menu
consists of the following items:
Import
file;
Export
document;
Translate
between Braille and text;
ASCII translation
options;
Back
translation options, Braille to text;
Forward
translation options, text to Braille.
Note that
the ASCII translation options apply in the case of ASCII imports and exports
including those to or from the serial USB port.
The
Translation Menu items are now discussed.
To import
a file, follow these steps.
1. From the Translation Menu, press I, for import a file. KeySoft prompts: "Import from which device? Press ENTER for file."
2. The options are:
1. If the file is stored on a SD card,
press F to import from a File.
2. If you want to import from a host
using the USB serial adapter cable provided with your BrailleNote BT press S for USB Serial port.
3. To import using the USB port, press U.
4. To import using Bluetooth, press B.
After
selecting "File" as the device to import from, KeySoft prompts: "Import file from which drive? (Suggested drive)."
Select
the drive. KeySoft then prompts: "Directory name? (Suggested directory)."
The slash
character is used to separate the different parts of the directory path name.
For a description of directory path name, refer to 15.16.2 Accessing Files in Another Directory.
You can
accept the suggested directory, or type a new directory path name, remembering
you must type the name in computer Braille, or edit the old name. Alternatively
you can press SPACE to review a list of sub‑directories
of the suggested directory. Next select the desired file to import when KeySoft
prompts: "File to import?."
Remember
that you can press SPACE or ADVANCE to list all files in the selected
directory. When you have selected the file KeySoft prompts: "Destination folder name? (Suggested folder)." Select a folder.
KeySoft
displays: "Text (or Braille) document name?."
Next, type the name of the destination file and press ENTER. If the file already exists you are asked if you want to append to it or replace it? Press A to append or R to replace. KeySoft imports the file or document and saves it as the destination file in the selected folder. KeySoft then returns to the Translation Menu.
Note that
while you can import files that are in either North American Braille Computer
Code format or in United Kingdom Braille Computer Code format, the importation
process does not convert the Braille language of the file. If your BrailleNote
BT is set to USA Braille and you import a file in UK Braille format, for
example, the contents of the file appear strange when you read it with KeyWord.
To read an imported file that is in another Braille language, you can
temporarily change the language that your BrailleNote BT uses, then change it
back again when you have finished. The Braille language your BrailleNote BT
uses can be changed using the Braille display Options in the Options Menu as
described in 5.4 Braille Display Options.
To export
a document press E, in the Translation Menu. You can
export the document as one of the following document formats:
Plain
Braille file;
Microsoft
Word file;
Rich text
format file;
Word
Perfect file;
KeySoft
version two Braille document;
KeySoft
version two text document;
ASCII text file;
The original document remains unchanged.
1. Select the drive in the usual way when prompted. KeySoft then prompts:
"Export document from which folder? (Suggested folder)."
2. When you have selected the folder
KeySoft prompts:
"Document name? (Suggested file name)."
3. Select the document to export. KeySoft prompts:
"Export to which device? Press ENTER for file."
The
options are:
To
export from a File press F.
To
export from the USB Serial port using the USB serial adapter, press S.
To
export using the USB port, press U.
To
export using bluetooth, press B.
After
selecting "File" as the device to export to, KeySoft
prompts: "Export as an ASCII text file?."
1. To export as an ASCII text file
press ENTER. To select another file type, press
SPACE with dots 3‑4 repeatedly to step through the list
of file types that you can export. The available file types were listed in 15.4 Document and File Types.
2. When you have selected the file type, select the destination drive. KeySoft then prompts:
"Directory name? (suggested directory). Computer Braille is required."
3. Select the suggested directory, find
the one you want in the usual way, or type the path name of the desired
directory. Remember that the slash character, dots 3‑4, is used to separate the different parts of
the directory.
4. After the file is exported you are
returned to the Translation Menu.
To find
out how to access files in another directory, see 15.16.2 Accessing Files in Another Directory.
When you
have selected a device KeySoft prompts: "Export as a Braille or text file?."
Press B for Braille or T for a text file. When you have selected the file type KeySoft queries: "Host ready to receive?."
Prepare
the host to receive the file and when it is ready press ENTER or press Y. You hear a periodic beep as the document is transferred. When the
transfer is finished, you are returned to the Translation Menu.
To
translate a document from KeyWord Braille to KeyWord text or vice versa, select
Translate between Braille and Text from the Translation Menu. This is useful
if, for example, you have written a Braille document which you now intend to
print, but before printing, you want to check out the ink‑print
formatting. You can translate it into a text document and review it.
KeySoft
guides you through the translation procedure. Select the source folder name
when prompted by KeySoft. Either type a folder name and press ENTER, or press SPACE to review the List of Folders. Alternatively, to select a sub‑directory
path name, press SPACE with T.
To change
the current drive, press BACKSPACE. For the Flash Disk, press F. For an SD card press S. To review the list of drives, press SPACE.
After you
have selected the drive and folder, select the source file. Either type a file
name or select it in the usual way.
Follow
the same procedure to select the destination folder name and enter the
destination file name.
If you
type a document name that does not exist, KeySoft asks if you want to create a
new document. Conversely, if the document already exists, you are asked if you
want to append the translated document to the end of the existing one, or
replace it entirely.
When you
have entered the destination file name, the source document is translated to
its complementary format. That is, a Braille document is translated to text, or
vice versa. The source document remains in its original format, and you are
returned to the Translation Menu.
The ASCII
translation options are used by KeySoft when translating between KeyWord and
ASCII formats including when exporting documents to the USB Serial Port.
To review
and set ASCII translation options, select ASCII Translation Options from the
Translation Menu. Press SPACE to display the ASCII Translation
Options list. Each item in the list is discussed below. When you have reviewed
the list, you can use BACKSPACE to move back through the list to
check the settings. The current setting is displayed for each item. Remember
that you must press ENTER after you have changed the setting.
Press SPACE with E to exit when you are satisfied with
your settings.
Press P for Paragraph, or L for Line. Press ENTER to complete the entry. This option determines the way that lines are
terminated during document exporting or file importing. During document
exporting, if the Line option has been selected, a carriage return is added at
the end of each line. If the Paragraph option is selected, a carriage return is
added only at the end of each paragraph, giving a line that is as long as the
paragraph. The Line option is usually best when exporting to a communications
program. The Paragraph option is most suitable when exporting a document to a
word processor because it allows the text to be reformatted after it is
received.
The Line
or Paragraph format option also determines how KeySoft treats each incoming
line of text during file importing. If the Line format option is selected,
KeySoft leaves the text unaltered. In the Paragraph option, KeySoft removes
single carriage returns. Where there are two or more carriage returns, or a
carriage return followed by an indent to indicate a new paragraph, no change is
made.
If you go
into KeyWord and insert any hard carriage returns to format the file contents,
these will be retained next time the file is opened in the BrailleNote BT.
When
importing an ASCII file, for example a Braille book, that has a single space in
front of each line, the left margin is automatically stripped out so that
KeySoft doesn't interpret it as if every line is the start of a new paragraph.
The options are:
To
convert extended ASCII characters to standard ASCII characters, press C. This option removes the high order bit. It is
useful in situations where this bit may be inadvertently set.
To ignore
ASCII characters, press I. This option removes characters with the high order bit set. It is useful
where graphical symbols have been used extensively. For example, when boxes
have been drawn around text.
To retain
ASCII characters as extended ASCII characters, press R. Extended ASCII characters are 8 bit
characters such as characters in foreign languages or graphical symbols. In
most cases KeySoft can name or use the character. In other cases the character
will be referred to as "character n" where n is the ASCII value of the character.
The options are MS‑DOS; International MS‑DOS; or ANSI.
The
options are N to turn on the use of an end of
file character, or F to turn off and ignore the use of
an end of file character. This option determines whether an ASCII end of file
character (1AH or ^Z) is appended to a document being exported after the end of
the text. In most cases this will cause a communications program to stop
receiving text and save it on disk.
Press N to turn on the appending of a line feed
character after a carriage return character is exported. Press F to turn off appending a line feed character.
Appending a line feed character may be required when exporting to a
communication program depending on the program.
The baud
rate is the speed at which data is transferred between serial devices. Type a
new baud rate value if you know the standard values or press SPACE with dots 3‑4 to cycle through the list of
available values.
Press N, E or O, for None, Even or Odd parity respectively. If you are
unsure which setting is correct select none; this is usually preferred for
short cables.
Press 7 or 8 for the number of data bits and press ENTER. Standard ASCII characters use only 7 data bits while extended ASCII
characters have 8 bits.
The
options are S for Software or H for Hardware. Handshaking determines how the BrailleNote BT and a host
computer control the flow of data from each other. Handshaking is needed if the
BrailleNote BT or host computer cannot keep up with the flow of data when a
high baud rate is selected. BrailleNote BT supports both types of handshaking.
You know when it is needed because large blocks of data are lost when exporting
documents or importing files. Try the software option first if information
about the host computer is limited.
This is
the delay between each character when exporting a document. It should be zero
when using a communications program on the host. Where a document is being
exported directly into a word processor or other program, a value from 1 to 5 may be used to allow the word processor to keep up. Use the smallest
value which does not cause characters to be lost.
This is
the end of the ASCII Translation Options list.
These are
the general settings which are used during the translation of a KeySoft Braille
document to a KeySoft text document. These settings are used throughout KeySoft
whenever a document is back translated. For example, when exporting a Braille
document. The first 6 items and the last item may be over‑ridden in a
document by changing the Ink‑print Translation Options, as described in 7.4.2 Ink‑Print Settings linked with a Braille
Document.
To review
and change Back Translation Options from Braille to Text, select Back
Translation Options from the Translation Menu. Press SPACE to display the Braille to Text Translation Set
Up List. Each item in the list is discussed below. When you have reviewed the
list, you can use BACKSPACE to move back through the list to
check the settings. The current setting is displayed for each item. Note that
you must press ENTER after you selected a new setting.
Press SPACE with E to exit when you are satisfied with
your settings.
The way
paragraphs are formatted in Braille is usually different from the way they are
formatted in ink‑print. For example, paragraphs in Braille are commonly
indented two spaces whereas paragraphs in ink‑print are commonly
separated by one or more blank lines. This option tells KeySoft how to
recognize a paragraph in a Braille document so that it can be formatted
correctly in the text document.
KeySoft needs to know what type of paragraph boundary is used in the source document. It needs to know this in order to correctly interpret where one paragraph ends and the next starts in the Braille document. There are 3 options, as follows:
1. For an Indented line, or one or more
blank lines, press I. This is the suggested setting. For
a new paragraph to be started in the destination document, the source document
must have either a New Line followed by an indented line, or a blank line.
Single New Line markers which are not followed by an indented line are not
taken as the start of a new paragraph and therefore are not passed over into
the text document.
2. For one or more New line markers,
press N. This setting causes every New Line
marker to indicate the end of a paragraph.
3. For one or more Blank lines, press B. Use this option if every line in the source
document ends with a New Line marker and paragraphs are indicated by blank
lines.
The way
paragraphs are formatted in the resulting text document is not affected by this
setting but is determined by the "Paragraph format?" setting below.
This
setting is also used by KeyWord to determine the paragraph boundary when the
paragraph reading commands are used.
This
applies to Heading, Subheading and Lines styles of presentation and determines
how New Line markers in a Braille document are translated.
To leave
the line formatting Unchanged, press U.
To remove
New Line markers and thereby Join lines together, press J.
To expand
single New Lines into Blank lines, press B. This is the suggested setting.
To have
Braille italics converted to italics font press Y. To have italics ignored press N.
In
Braille, sentences are usually ended by a period followed by a single space
whereas in ink‑print sentences are usually ended with a period followed
by two spaces. To have a space after a period in a Braille document converted
to two spaces after the period, press Y. Press N to leave as a single space.
The
places where you have forced a new page in a Braille document by pressing SPACE with P are often not the correct places to
force a new page in ink‑print. This option excludes New Page markers in
the Braille document from the text document. You can force new pages in the
text document by using the Ink‑print Inclusion option in the Braille
document as described in 7.4.2.3 Ink‑print Exclusion.
To save space in Braille, items in an outline may start on the next line, rather than after a blank line. If this is the case and you want a blank line left in the text document, press Y to turn this option on. Press N to turn it off.
This sets the number of blank lines which are left in the text document before and after a section of text which has the Heading presentation style. The factory setting is 2 and 1. To change the setting, type the new number of blank lines before a heading, a comma and then the new number of blank lines after a heading. Number signs are not needed. For example "1,2."
This sets
the format indicators to be inserted at the beginning of each line in a heading
in a text document. These format indicators are: center the line, right justify
the line, insert tab, fonts, underline, space, or force new line or new page.
Entering format indicators here is the same as when searching for them. Refer to 3.12.2 Searching for Format Indicators for details. The factory setting
for the heading format is: "Center line," "Bold on."
This sets
the number of blank lines which will be left in the document before and after a
section of text which has the Subheading presentation style. The factory
setting is 1 and 1. The same procedure as discussed in Item 7 above is used to
change the setting.
You can enter the commands to be inserted in the text document at the beginning of each line in the Sub‑heading presentation style. You can use the same format indicators as listed in the Heading Format item above. There is no factory setting for this item.
This item
determines the format indicators that are inserted between paragraphs in the
text document. You can enter a combination of New Lines, spaces and tabs. To
enter a New Line press SPACE with dots 2‑6. The default is 2 New Line format
indicators.
When
either the heading, subheading, outline or line styles of presentation are
used, the style will continue in effect until another style is selected or the
number of blank lines set here is encountered.
This is
the end of the Braille to text translation setup list.
These are
the general settings which are used during translation from a KeySoft text
document to a KeySoft Braille document. These options are used throughout
KeySoft wherever a document must be translated into Braille. The items are
generally similar to those for back translation, but there are differences to
cater for the direction of translation. The first 8 items may be over‑ridden
from within a text document by using the Braille Translation Options, as
described in 7.17.5.3 Braille Translation Options.
To review or change the settings in the Forward Translation Options list, select Forward translation options, from the Translation Menu. The 15 items in the list are as follows:
KeySoft
needs to know this in order to correctly interpret where one paragraph ends and
the next starts in the text document. The options here are the same as for Item
1 in the Back Translation Options. Refer to 15.20.8 Reviewing and Setting Back Translation Options above for details.
This
applies to Heading, Sub‑heading and Lines styles of presentation and
determines how New Line markers in a text document are translated into Braille.
There are four options:
To leave
the line formatting unchanged, press U.
To remove
New Line markers and thereby join lines together, press J.
To replace
New Line markers with two Spaces, press S.
To have
new lines in the text document start new lines in the Braille document but
remove any blank lines, press B. This is the factory setting.
To have
italics font converted to Braille italics press Y. To have italics ignored press N.
Multiple
spaces may be used in a text document between sentences or for visual
formatting. This option can be used to remove these from the Braille document
during translation, leaving only one space.
The
places where a new page has been forced in text are often not the correct
places to force a new page in the Braille document. This option excludes New
Page markers in the Braille document from the text document.
If the
text document uses tabs extensively for visual formatting, you can have these
replaced by a space in the Braille document using this option.
Usually
you would want capital signs included in Braille document, but if you are
translating a text document where every word is in capitals, for example, then
this option will become very useful.
This
option enables you to save space in Braille by eliminating blank lines left
between items in an outline.
This sets
the number of blank lines which are left in the Braille document before and
after a section of text which has the Heading presentation style. The factory
setting is one before and one line after.
You can
enter the format indicators to be inserted in the Braille document at the
beginning of each line in the Heading presentation style. You can include
format indicators to center the line, right justify the line, insert tabs, and
spaces, or force new lines or new pages. For details, refer to 3.12.2 Searching for Format Indicators. The factory setting is: "Center line."
This sets the number of blank lines which are left in the Braille document before and after a section which has the Sub‑heading presentation style. The factory setting is one and zero.
You can
enter the format indicators to be inserted in the Braille document at the
beginning of each line in the Sub‑heading presentation style. You can use
the same indicators as listed in the Heading Format item above. The factory
setting is 4 spaces. To enter a space as the first character in the Sub‑heading,
press ENTER with B.
This item
determines the format indicators which are inserted between paragraphs in the
Braille document. You can enter a combination of New Lines, spaces and tabs. To
enter a New Line press SPACE with dots 2‑6. The factory setting is a New Line
followed by 2 spaces.
When either the heading, subheading, outline or line styles of presentation are used, the style continues in effect until another style is selected or the number of blank lines set here is encountered. The factory setting is two.
Often a
line of text in ink‑print takes up more than one line in Braille.
Sometimes this makes it difficult to find an item in a list or an outline when
reading an embossed copy. This option does not affect the first line of each
item in Braille, but if more than one line has to be used for an item, the
second and subsequent lines will be indented by this number of cells. The
factory setting is two.
This is
the end of the Text to Braille options list.
End of
File Manager Chapter.
The
Utilities Menu provides a number of general‑purpose functions. This
chapter covers most of the functions available from the Utilities menu. This
chapter will also address the installation of new KeySoft versions.
To enter
it, select the "Utilities"
option in the Main Menu. The available operations are as follows:
Connect
to ActiveSync. ActiveSync is discussed fully in 14.14 Connecting your BrailleNote to a PC.
Synchronization.
This is discussed fully in 14.16 KeySync.
Backup
or Restore Files, which allows all working files to be backed up or restored to
a backup drive.
Pronunciation
Dictionary, which corrects the pronunciation of unusual words.
Date
and Time Set, used to reset the internal clock.
Install
KeySoft extensions
Application
Program, which runs optional KeySoft software.
Miscellaneous
Options, which allows you to select a connection type for ActiveSync.
Language
Options, which allows you to configure which language will be used.
Key
Management – for keeping track of separately purchased KeySoft products.
You can
select an item by reviewing the list and pressing ENTER, or by pressing the initial letter of the required item.
You can
use the Backup Options in the Utilities Menu
to save and restore all KeySoft working files, including word processor and e‑mail
documents, planner files and address lists. By default, KeySoft stores these
files on the Flash Disk.
It is good
housekeeping to backup your files to an external drive. This could be a storage
card, an external memory drive, or a PC or network. This safeguards your
information against loss caused by accidental overwriting or deletion of files
and other mishaps. Incremental Backup can be used to reduce the time taken to
copy the files to the backup drive. Only those files changed since the last
backup are copied. You should back up your files into the same folder used for
the previous backup. You may use the Restore option to restore your working
documents or files in the event of a problem, or to return to an older version.
From the
Utilities menu, select the "Backup or Restore files" option. KeySoft prompts: "Do you wish to Backup or Restore files?."
If you
want to backup your working files, press B, for Backup. KeySoft prompts: "Backup which drive? Press ENTER for Flash Disk."
Press ENTER to backup the Flash Disk. KeySoft prompts: "Backup which folder? All."
KeySoft
assumes you want to backup "All" folders. You would normally do a
complete backup of all folders on the Flash Disk together with their contents.
Alternatively you can backup a folder at a time if you wish. To backup all
folders, press ENTER, or to backup one folder at a time,
press SPACE to review the list of folders and
press ENTER to select the desired folder.
KeySoft prompts: "Make backup on which drive? Press ENTER for (suggested drive)."
Backups
are normally done to a storage card, an external memory drive, or to a Network.
Select
the appropriate drive from the drive list, then press ENTER. KeySoft prompts: "Make Backup in which Folder? Press ENTER for (suggested folder)."
The
suggested folder name is based on the current date, and is in the form "June 10, 2010 backup." Press ENTER to accept the suggested folder, or press SPACE to review the list of folders on the backup drive. Alternatively you
can type in the name of a folder. If the folder does not already exist you will
be asked to confirm creation of the new folder; press Y to do this.
The time
taken for the backup process depends on the number of files being backed up,
and BrailleNote BT continues to beep about once per second during the process.
At the completion of the backup KeySoft confirms the number of files copied to
the backup disk, and you are returned to the Utilities menu.
To speed up the backup process you can perform an incremental backup, which only copies files modified since the last backup. This procedure is described in the next section.
Incremental
Backup can be used to reduce the time taken to copy the files to the backup
drive. Only those files changed since the last backup are copied. You should
back up your files into the same folder used for the previous backup.
From the
Utilities menu, select the "Backup or Restore files" option. KeySoft prompts: "Do you wish to Backup or Restore files?."
Press I for Incremental Backup. KeySoft prompts: "Backup which drive? Press ENTER for Flash Disk."
Press ENTER to backup the Flash Disk.
From this
point on, the procedure is as outlined in 16.1.1 Backing Up.
Given
that you are performing an incremental back up to an existing folder, KeySoft
requests confirmation before backing up files modified since the previous
backup. Even if you have only created one new file, you will be asked to
confirm the replacement of the KeySoft.ksd file that resides in the
Dictionaries folder. Press Y to confirm that you want this
system file to be updated.
From the
Utilities menu, press B to select Backup Options. KeySoft
prompts: "Do you wish to Backup or Restore files?."
To
restore files that have been backed up, press R. KeySoft prompts: "Restore from which drive? Press ENTER for (drive)."
Press ENTER to select the offered backup drive, or select
the drive which has the backup you wish to restore. KeySoft prompts: "Folder name? (suggested folder)."
Select
the folder that you want to restore. KeySoft prompts: "Restore to which drive? Press ENTER for Flash Disk."
Your
backup files are copied from the backup disk, and you are returned to the
Utilities menu. BrailleNote BT continues to beep once per second during the
process, and on completion displays the number of files copied.
If a file
already exists, you are asked to confirm that you wish to replace the existing
file with one on the backup drive. To replace the existing file press Y, to skip this file press N, to accept all files press A. You can press SPACE with H to get detailed information on the date and
time of creation of a file, and the file size of both the source and
destination files, before the back up process starts
Backup
and Restore work on the entire contents of a folder. If you want to restore an
individual file, you should use the Copy File option in the File Manager
described in 15.10 Copying a File.
The
Pronunciation Dictionary allows KeySoft to correctly pronounce unusual words,
and to expand abbreviations. KeySoft's accuracy is superior to most speech
products, but proper names or technical words can be corrected by adding a
suitably misspelled version to the pronunciation dictionary.
This is
done by entering the correct spelling of the word, together with a suitable
misspelling. Before speaking a word, KeySoft searches the pronunciation
dictionary and if it finds the word, the misspelled version is spoken instead.
Commands are provided to add, delete and change words in the pronunciation
dictionary.
To access
the Pronunciation Dictionary, start from the Utilities Menu and press P. The Pronunciation Dictionary Menu includes the
following 3 options:
Add a
word;
Change a
word;
Delete a word.
If
KeySoft mis‑pronounces a word, you may add it to the Pronunciation
Dictionary.
1. From the Pronunciation Dictionary
menu, press A.
2. KeySoft prompts, "Type word to add." Type the normal spelling of the
word, without spaces or numbers, and press ENTER.
3. KeySoft then prompts, "Type misspelling." Type in a misspelling of the word, using only
letters and spaces, which gives a correct pronunciation for the word. Spaces
are useful for changing the stress. Do not press ENTER yet.
4. To check the new pronunciation, press SPACE with dots 1‑4. If it does not sound correct, change it with the prompt editing commands, or delete it by pressing SPACE with R, and try again. If it sounds OK, press ENTER.
You are
then returned to the Pronunciation Dictionary Menu.
If you
are concerned about the pronunciation of a word, you can review the
Pronunciation Dictionary to check whether it is included. If it is, you can
change the misspelling to improve the rendition.
From the
Pronunciation Dictionary menu, press C. KeySoft prompts, "Type word to change." Either type the normal spelling of
the word and press ENTER, or review the pronunciation
dictionary by pressing SPACE repeatedly and select the word from
there. KeySoft then prompts: "Type misspelling, press ENTER for (default)"
You can
now amend the offered default by using the prompt editing commands, or you can
type in a new misspelling. Before pressing ENTER, listen to the new pronunciation by pressing SPACE with dots 1‑4. If you are not happy with the
sound, continue to edit the misspelling until you are satisfied with the
pronunciation, and then press ENTER. The latest misspelling is saved,
and you are returned to the Pronunciation Dictionary menu.
It is
unusual to find a word which is seriously mispronounced, but people's names and
foreign words may be exceptions. Typical problems are a shift in vowel sound,
and misplaced stress.
To
correct the way a word is spoken, misspell it phonetically, and use a space to
shift the stress. For example:
Change "Mikhail Gorbachov" to "Mikhile Gorba choff".
Change "Socrates" to "Socra tees".
Change "Taj Mahal" to "Taaj Mah harl".
There are
various reasons why you may wish to put a substitute text string in the
Pronunciation Dictionary. For example, KeySoft correctly speaks many acronyms
that contain vowels, such as "IBM". However, a less common acronym may be spoken as a word, so you may wish
to use the Pronunciation dictionary to change the rendering. For example:
Change "ATM" to "A T M", or "automatic teller machine".
Change "NaCl" to "N A Cl", or "sodium chloride".
You can
change the way symbols are spoken. For example, KeySoft says "star" when it encounters the symbol often
called "asterisk". If you prefer to hear "asterisk", you may do this with the
Pronunciation Dictionary. To do this Braille an asterisk symbol at the "Type word to add" prompt and then Braille the word "asterisk" at the "Type misspelling" prompt. The pronunciation of the
plural of the punctuation name also needs entering. To do this Braille an
asterisk symbol followed by an "s" at the "Type misspelling" prompt and then Braille the word "asterisks" at the "Type misspelling" prompt.
You can
change the way KeySoft announces the grade 1 and grade 2 signs. For example,
KeySoft speaks the dot 3 sign as "apostrophe", but you may prefer to hear "dot 3". From the Pronunciation Dictionary menu, press
A. KeySoft prompts: "Type word to add."
Press the
Computer Braille sign for "apostrophe", which happens to be dot 3. For the misspelling, type d‑o‑t 3, remembering that 3 is a lowered C in computer Braille.
Finally,
you can change the word which KeySoft says when you press SPACE with dots 3‑6, twice to identify an indistinct
letter. For instance, if you prefer to hear "toffee" instead of "tango" when you check the letter T, go to the "Add word" option and press T, followed by an exclamation mark. For the
misspelling, type "toffee". This now does as you wish, but it
does not alter the pronunciation of the word "tango" in normal text.
You can
have fun changing the way things are spoken, but take care! It can be a source
of mystery later on, when you have forgotten that you made the change.
From the
Pronunciation Dictionary menu, press D. KeySoft prompts, "Type word to delete." Either type the normal spelling of
the word and press ENTER, or review the pronunciation
dictionary by pressing SPACE repeatedly and select the word from
there. The word is deleted and you are returned to the Pronunciation Dictionary
Menu.
Follow
these steps to set or change the settings of, KeySoft's internal clock and
calendar. Remember that at each point in the process you can obtain relevant
help by pressing SPACE with H.
1. From the Utilities menu, press D for Date and time set.
2. KeySoft prompts: "Date format? (default). Press ENTER for USA." Press S for USA format, which is: month/day/year, or K for UK format which is: day/month/year. Press ENTER to confirm your selection. To leave the date
format unchanged, just press ENTER.
3. KeySoft prompts: "Time format? Press ENTER for 12 hour." Press A for 12 hour or B for 24 hour clock format, followed by ENTER. To leave the time format unchanged, just press ENTER.
4. KeySoft prompts: "Timezone? Press ENTER for (current timezone)." Either press ENTER to choose the current selection, type the
first letter of your timezone and press ENTER, or cycle through the list of time zones by pressing SPACE with dots 3‑4.
5. KeySoft prompts: "In Daylight saving time? Currently (yes/no)." Type Y for Yes or N for No then press ENTER. Or if the current selection is correct, just press ENTER.
6. KeySoft prompts: "Time? Press ENTER for (current time)." Enter the time, without number signs, in the form: hh:mm, where "hh" is hours and "mm" is minutes, separated by a colon. You may abbreviate an entry with fewer digits and no separator if it is unambiguous. In 12 hour format, follow the minutes by a space and then A or P to denote before noon and after noon. Press ENTER.
7. KeySoft prompts: "Date? Press ENTER for (current date)." If the date is correct, press ENTER to retain it, or enter a new date. If USA date format has been selected, enter the date in the form: #mm#dd# yy, such as #04#22#06 for April 22, 2006. If UK date format has been selected, enter the date in the form: #dd#mm#yy, such as #25#08# 06 for 25 August 2006. When you have typed the date, press ENTER.
As an
alternative to entering the date, you may move around the calendar until the
date you want is displayed. To move back or forward a day at a time press SPACE with dot 3 or dot 6. To move a week at a time press SPACE with dots 2 or 5. To move a month at a time press SPACE with dots 1 or 4. To move a year at a time press SPACE with dots 2‑3 or 5‑6. After the date entry is made, you
are returned to the Utilities menu.
This
option allows you to run optional software applications written specially for
the BrailleNote BT, including manual and software upgrades.
To run an
application program, start from the Utilities Menu and press A to select Applications Program. KeySoft
prompts: "Run program from which drive? Press ENTER for (default drive)."
Press ENTER, or use SPACE to select another drive from the drive list. KeySoft prompts: "Directory name? Press ENTER for (default directory)."
Type in
the directory name, or use SPACE to select the required directory.
KeySoft prompts: "Program Name?."
Either type the program name, or review the list of programs by pressing SPACE, and press ENTER to complete your entry. The program is now loaded and you will be prompted for a "Command Line." Refer to the instructions associated with the Application Program you are running to determine if a Command Line parameter is required. If you don't have information on this, try pressing ENTER which will run the program without a command line parameter. The Application Program immediately starts running.
The
Miscellaneous Options setup list contains four items. The first allows you to
choose which connectivity method to use for ActiveSync communication. The second
option asks you if you want to put your unit in Deep sleep mode, the next
option provides a keyboard compatibility mode for users making the transition
from Blazie notetakers, finally, the last option is the selection of the Visual
display code page.
To access
the Miscellaneous Options, start from the Utilities Menu and press M.
From the
Miscellaneous Options setup list, press SPACE until KeySoft displays: “ActiveSync Connection? (default).”
where the
word "default" shown in brackets is the current
setting. The options are:
To
connect to ActiveSync using the USB port, press U followed by ENTER.
To
connect to ActiveSync using Bluetooth, press B followed by ENTER.
If you
plan on not using your BrailleNote for an extended period of time, you may want
to activate the Deep Sleep mode. Deep Sleep is a mode that completely powers
down the unit and stops all processes including alarms. Power off and back on
the unit to Exit Deep Sleep and return to normal operations. Deep Sleep will
also be stopped by pressing Reset, by plugging the unit to a power outlet or by
installing battery.
The
keyboard compatibility mode is included to ease the transition to the
BrailleNote BT for people used to the command structure of Blazie notetakers.
From the
Miscellaneous Options setup list, press SPACE until KeySoft prompts: “Compatibility Mode? Currently (default).”
where the
word "default" shown in brackets is the current
setting. The options are:
To select
KeySoft "native" commands press F followed by ENTER.
To turn
the keyboard compatibility mode On press N followed by ENTER.
With
keyboard compatibility mode On, the BACKSPACE key function of deleting the previous
character is duplicated by the command SPACE with B. The Block Commands menu is then transferred
to ENTER with dots 2‑3.
The
purpose of this menu item is to give you access to information about what kind
of add‑on software products you have installed on your BrailleNote BT.
There are two options on the Key Management Menu as follows:
Enter a
new product key – If you purchase an add‑on software product, sometimes
part of the installation process may require typing in a security code. This is
the place where one would do that. If it is necessary, instructions for correct
usage will be included in the add‑on software's documentation.
System Options – If you press ENTER at this option, the BrailleNote BT will display a list of add‑on software products. This includes extra languages, software maintenance agreements etc.
The
security option allows you to configure features that will help you limit
access to your BrailleNote Apex BT.
The Login
option allows you to setup a prompt that will ask for a password whenever the
unit is switched on. If you wish to enable the login option, press Y when
prompted. Press N if you feel a login password is not required.
If you do
opt for a login password, note that it should be made up of 6 to 8 alphanumeric
characters.
When
done, press Enter. You will be asked to confirm your password by entering it a
second time.
The
previous section describes how to setup your BrailleNote Apex BT to ask for a
password when you login. If such is the case, every time you power up the
BrailleNote BT, you will be prompted with the message
"Enter password?". At this point, enter your 6 to 8 alphanumeric
password, followed by Enter. If your password is correct, you will return to
where you were when the unit was last turned off. If your password is
incorrect, you will be asked to enter it again and an error beep will be heard.
If you
have forgotten your password, you can have it reset by contacting HumanWare
technical support. After providing your identity information and BrailleNote BT
serial number, a single‑use license will be sent to your email address.
Using a computer, copy this license to your SD card. Insert this SD card into
the BrailleNote BT and reset the unit. The message "One license file
installed" will be heard, at which point the BrailleNote BT's password
will be reset. If you wish, you can now set a new password. See Login Setup for
additional information on setting up a login password.
Many school
systems require standardized exams to be done on a computer or other
device. KeySoft’s Exam Mode allows a teacher or administrator to only
allow a student to use the Braille Terminal mode. This locks the student
into only using the BrailleNote as a refreshable braille display for another
device. With the terminal mode active, a student can read the secondary
device’s content in braille, and often times control the secondary device with
the Apex’s keyboard, while not allowing them to go into any of the
BrailleNote’s native applications.
To enter Exam mode:
1. Navigate to the utilities menu or
press U from the main menu.
2. Press X for Exam Mode.
3. When prompted to enable exam mode, type
Y
for yes.
4. You will be placed at the log in
setup. This is where you will set the teacher password for exam mode. Once
set the student will not be able to leave Terminal mode and will be brought
back to that mode if resets or other power functions are done.
5. Press SPACE BAR to the
“Enable password protection?” and type Y for Yes.
6. Enter a 6 or more character long
password and press enter.
7. Re-enter the password and press
enter.
8. When asked to confirm changes? Type Y for yes.
9. You are now at the braille terminal
mode and you need to select whether you will connect your device with USB or
Bluetooth. Type U for USB or B for Bluetooth and press
enter.
10. You will hear a beep and the Apex is
now a refreshable braille display for another secondary device for the exam.
11. When finished with the exam, exit
the terminal mode with SPACE with E
12. KeySoft asks if you are sure you
want to exit terminal mode because it will require the Teacher password. Type Y
for yes to exit. Note if you type Y and you do not want to leave
terminal mode, a teacher must still enter the password.
13. Type the teacher password and press ENTER.
The device
is now out of Exam mode and all BrailleNote functionality has been restored. Note
that if you previously had a password on your Apex before exam mode was used,
it will be cleared and you will need to re-activate it after the exam is
completed.
To
install a new KeySoft version, follow these steps:
Place the
installation file (a file with a .hwi extension) in the root of an SD card or a
USB drive.
Have the
AC adapter plugged in and the BrailleNote BT powered on.
Insert
the SD card or the USB drive into the appropriate port. The BrailleNote BT will
detect the installation file and will begin the installation process.
You will
be asked if you wish to proceed with the installation. Press Y. Beeping sounds
will be heard and installation steps will be announced. When the installation
is completed, the installation file will be deleted from the SD card or USB
drive.
End of Utilities Chapter.
This
Chapter covers the Media features offered in KeySoft. These include the Media
Player and audio recording functions.
The
KeySoft Media Player allows you to play music, readings and any other audio in
a range of media formats, on your BrailleNote Apex BT.
The Media
Player is accessed from the Media Center menu found on the Main Menu. Alternatively,
you can go directly to it from anywhere in KeySoft by pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER with M.
You can
play just about any size of media file from either the BrailleNote BT itself or
a storage card or memory drive. When the track is playing, you can skip back
and forward through it, stop, pause or resume the track as you wish.
As well
as playing single tracks, you can play M3U playlists, allowing you to listen to
continuous audio. And streaming audio off the internet is also possible.
Other
features include volume control that operates independently of speech, changing
tasks with one keystroke, track information and the ability to listen to the
audio track in the background while performing other tasks in KeySoft.
This
section describes the features and their uses in detail.
The Media
Player can play media files with the following extensions: wma, wav, mp3, mpa,
snd, aif, aiff, aifc, wmv, au, wax, wmx, wvx and asx.
It can
also play M3U playlist files. This is discussed more fully in 17.1.9 Playlist files.
You can
store MP3 files anywhere you would store any other file. However as they can be
large files, you may find it most convenient to save them on a storage card.
You can
transfer MP3 files from a PC onto a storage card plugged into your BrailleNote
BT via ActiveSync or network client, load them directly onto a storage card
using a card reader/writer, or download them directly off the Internet using the
web browser on your BrailleNote BT.
While it
is possible to play an MP3 file on the BrailleNote BT while it is still located
on a network, please be aware that the sound quality will be impacted by any
variations in the network, just as it is when using a PC based media player. A
much better quality sound can be achieved by copying the file to a storage card
in one of the ways listed above.
Opening a
media file to play is the same as opening a file anywhere else in KeySoft. The
steps are laid out below. In this procedure, it is assumed that you know how to
select a drive, folder or file from a list.
1. To open the Media Player, press BACKSPACE with ENTER with M anywhere.
2. The BrailleNote BT will display one
of the following two prompts:
a) KeySoft prompts “Play media file in which folder? Press ENTER for (folder name)" where the folder name is "General" the first time you use the media player, and after that, it's the last folder accessed. Go to step 3.
b) KeySoft prompts “Continue playing (file)?” where file is the last file you
paused while it was playing. To start the track playing from the same point it
was paused, press Y. To select a different file, press N and refer to a) above.
c) If the Media Player was already
playing in the background, it will continue to play. Stop the track by pressing
SPACE with E and go to option a) above.
3. There are three possible actions at
this point:
a) If the folder you want was offered
at the prompt, simply press ENTER and go to step 4.
b) If you want a different folder on
the same drive as the folder offered, press SPACE and select another folder, then go to step 4.
c) If the folder you want is on a
different drive or on a card, press BACKSPACE and select the drive or card from the drive
list. Select a folder from the list of folders, and go to step 4.
4. KeySoft will prompt for a file name.
Go to a file in the list. If you want to play only this file, press Enter and
the track will start playing.
If you want to play several files, one after another, press SPACE with M to mark the first file you selected and want to play. Continue to select files from the list and mark them with SPACE with M until you have selected and marked all the files that you want to play. Press ENTER to start playing all the marked files. For more information on marking and unmarking files, refer to. 15.9 Selecting Multiple Files
5. When the track or tracks finish,
KeySoft will prompt, "Media file to play? Press ENTER for (file name)" where file name is the name of the
last file played. At this point you can select another file, or exit the media
player by pressing SPACE with E.
There are
two sets of commands that you can use to stop or pause a media track.
While in
the Media Player application itself, you can use the pause command BACKSPACE with ENTER and restart using either BACKSPACE with ENTER again, or SPACE with G. You can also stop it all together
by pressing SPACE with E.
However,
while a track is playing in the background and you are working in another part
of KeySoft, these commands will only affect the application you are working in.
It is however, possible to stop and restart the track using ENTER with dots 1‑3‑4‑6. This command also works while you
are in the Media Player application.
Sometimes you may want to skip through a track rather than listen to it straight through. There are two ways to do this.
1. The Braille Display acts as a
progress indicator for the track – once the track begins to play it will go
blank except for a lower g (dots 2‑3‑5‑6) indicator that moves evenly along
the Braille display as the track progresses.
As
the Braille display represents the total length of the track, this will affect
the rate and increments at which the indicator will move. For example, with a 5
minute track, it will move more slowly along the display than with a 3 minute
track.
You
can use the Braille display to skip along the track in either direction, simply
by pressing the touch cursor buttons. The indicator will skip to the position
of the button, and the track will skip to that spot as well.
There are
also skip commands that use the keyboard. These skip commands skip forwards or
backwards by either 1, 5 or ten percent of the total file.
They are:
Skip
forward 1% SPACE with dot 6,
Skip
back 1% SPACE with dot 3,
Skip
forward 5% SPACE with dot 5,
Skip
back 5% SPACE with dot 2,
Skip
forward 10% SPACE with dot 4,
Skip
back 10% SPACE with dot 1,
You can
use these singly or repeatedly to skip through a track.
If you
are part way into a track and want it to start from the beginning, press SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3. This is the same command as used
elsewhere in KeySoft for returning to the beginning.
As well
as playing files, the media player can also stream audio from compatible links
on the internet. Compatible links include ACB Radio's winamp link, along with
other winamp links that use a pls file format, and MS Media player links,
except in the case of ACB Radio. If it is not clear from the link whether it is
going to be compatible, try it to see.
If you
select a compatible streaming audio link while in KeyWeb, it will automatically
open either the Media Player, or open an online media player, depending on how
the link is designed.
After
selecting the link there will be a period of time when the file buffers and the
web page reloads itself. The length of time this takes will depend on the
internet connection speed. KeyWeb lets you know what is going on by a series of
prompts and progress beeps something like this: "Please wait ...beep
...beep... beep... loading media... beep... beep...Name of webpage." There
may be a short period of silence before or at the end of this sequence
depending on how long it takes for the Media Player to buffer the file. When
the file is loaded, the stream will start to play. Hitting ENTER again during this process could cause it to
hang, so make sure you give it time before retrying.
If the
link opens a player on the site itself, you will have to use KeyWeb to activate
the controls on the site itself. If the link opens in the Media Player, you can
use the stop, pause and play functions but not the others. This is standard
behavior for media players playing links that stream audio.
There is
a command that pauses and restarts audio streaming. It is ENTER with dots 1‑3‑4‑6. If audio is playing, it will cause
it to pause. If it is paused, it will cause it to restart. This command also
works to stop and start any media file while it is playing.
By saving
a streaming link as a favorite, you can go directly to it from the favorites
menu instead of having to go to the page then select the link. Instructions on
how to save a link are covered in
12.8.2 Create favorite from current link.
The media
player volume controls are:
Louder: ENTER with dots 4‑6.
Softer: ENTER with dots 1‑3.
They
operate independently from the speech volume, in that you can change the volume
without changing the volume of the speech. The speech volume is still the
"master volume", so if you adjust the speech volume, the media player
volume will change relative to it.
This
relativity is a useful feature as it means that if you wish to turn down the
volume of both speech and track at the same time, you can do so with one
action. For example, if you are listening to a piece of music while writing an
essay and someone addresses you, you can turn down the speech volume, keep
working, and still conduct a conversation.
The Media
Player volume commands are also mentioned in the last two items of the Options
Menu.
If you
wish to increase the relative volume of the voice to the Media Player, that is,
you want to make the speech louder or softer without making the Media Player
louder or softer at the same time, you can adjust it independently by pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER with R, then select "Speech Volume Level?." Select a number between 1 and 5, 5
being the loudest. The default setting is 3.
The
BrailleNote has built‑in stereo speakers. When listening to the media
player over stereo headphones or through a set of stereo speakers, the audio
track will play in stereo.
Recordings
made will be in mono.
The Media
Player supports the use of M3U playlist files. These files define a playlist of
MP3 files that must also be either on your BrailleNote BT or an inserted
storage card for the playlist to work. To use an M3U file, open it in the same
way as you would any other media file.
Any file
paths defined in the M3U file will need to point to the location of the MP3
files. If an existing M3U file has file paths relative to a PC, you would need
to open the M3U file either on your BrailleNote BT or on your PC in Notepad and
edit the file paths to reflect the location on the BrailleNote BT. If the M3U
file is in the same folder as the MP3 files to which it refers, you don't need
to include any file path at all, just the file names.
Alternatively,
it is easy to create an M3U file in Keyword. If this interests you, follow the
steps below:
Before
you start, you need to know the location of the media files you wish to include
in the playlist.
1. Create a new ASCII text document in
KeyWord. When prompted for a file name, add the .m3u suffix to the name you
give it. As stated above, it is easiest if you save the M3U file into the same
folder as the MP3 files listed in it.
2. In the document, you have two
options:
a) Type or paste in the file name of the MP3 including the file extension e.g. Purple Rain.mp3. Or,
b) If required, type or paste in the
file path to the first file, ending with its file name including the file
extension, for example: \Flash Disk\My Music
3. Go to the next line by pressing ENTER and repeat, so that each track is listed on
its own line.
4. When you've added all the tracks you
want to include in the playlist, press SPACE with S.
Your
playlist is now ready to use.
While
running an m3u playlist, you might want to skip a track or go back to a
previous track. The commands are:
Return
to previous track: SPACE with dots 2‑3
Go to
next track: SPACE with dots 5‑6
All of
the other media player commands also work when playing m3u files.
There are
two types of information available about your media file as it is playing –
track information and elapsed time.
You can
check out file information while playing a media file. The list of information
will vary depending on what type of file you are playing; for example, when
streaming audio, there is no track length to report, and likewise with an M3U
file, which may not have the track lengths specified in it. The available items
of information in order is Title, Track Length, Sample rate and bit rate. Time
is given as hh:mm:ss.
For
example:
Title:
Sample.mp3
Track
length: 0:1:1
Sample
rate: 44100 Hertz
Bit rate:
128 kbps.
To access
this information, press SPACE with I. To pass from one item to the next,
press SPACE. To go back to the previous item,
press BACKSPACE. To exit from the information at
any point, press SPACE with E.
You can
also find out the elapsed time, that is, how long the track has been playing
and the total length of the track. To access this information, press SPACE with wh sign (dots 1‑5‑6). Time is given as hh:mm:ss.
For
example: “Elapsed time: 0:0:27 of 0:1:1”
Having
set a track to play, if you then wish to work on a different task while playing
it in the background, either press the hotkey combination for the new task, for
example BACKSPACE with ENTER with P for Planner, or return to the main
menu by pressing SPACE with dots 1 to 6 and take it from there. The hotkey
combination for returning to the Media player is BACKSPACE with ENTER with M.
The audio
recorder allows you to make short audio recordings using your BrailleNote BT.
It is ideal for short recordings such as reminders and "to‑do"
items, recording a phone number, shopping lists etc.
There is
a choice of input via an in‑built microphone or external microphone (not
provided) and you can set the quality of the recording in the set up list. Play
back recordings via the Playback function, or the Media player.
In this
user guide, and in the prompts on your BrailleNote BT, recordings are referred
to as memos. Recorded memos are wave format files (they have a *.wav file
extension) and can be played either via the playback function, or through the
Media Player.
Memos are
saved by default to the My Memos folder on the Flash Disk unless otherwise
specified.
You can
use the audio recorder with either the internal microphone, or an external
microphone plugged into the port on the left side of the unit. The internal
microphone is positioned to the left of the Braille display. It has an
effective range of about 30cm (1 foot).
It may be necessary before recording to adjust the recording levels, depending on factors such as the usual volume of your voice, the default settings may be too high or low. These are discussed in 17.2.3 Adjusting Recording levels.
The
BrailleNote BT can record using an external microphone. The kind of external
microphone that will work with it is a low‑voltage "electret"
type. Electret microphones are distinct from "dynamic" microphones,
and are readily available. It would pay however, before purchasing any new
microphone, to test it with your BrailleNote BT, or to ensure that you can
return it if it is not compatible.
Just a
quick note on external microphones ‑ any damage to the microphone's lead,
no matter how slight, can result in a noticeable loss of sound quality.
Likewise the use of extension leads between the microphone and the socket.
Before
recording, there are some settings to configure. From Media Center in the Main
Menu, select Set‑Up options. This takes you to the Media Set‑Up
Menu. The options are; "Select folder for Memos" and "Recording Options".
The first
option in the menu is "Select folder for Memos," where you can nominate in which
drive and folder you wish memos to be saved. The factory default folder is the
My Memos folder on your Flash Disk. If you wish however, you can save the file
to a storage card or device. To change the default offered, change the drive
then folder in the usual way.
You can
either configure the settings directly in the Recording Options set‑up
List, or as part of setting up to make your first recording.
1. To access the recording options set
up list, from the "Media Set‑Up menu" menu either:
a) Select "Recording options set up list," or
b) Select "Record a Memo" and at the prompt, "Start recording from the microphone?" press O for Options.
2. The first setting is Sampling
frequency. For low quality (11.025 kHz), press L. For middle quality (22.05 kHz), press M. For high quality (44.1 kHz), press H. Press ENTER.
3. The next option is Bit Depth. For low quality (8 bits), press L. For high quality (16 bits), press H. (Read more about bit depth in 17.2.7 Bit depth.) Press ENTER.
4. The next item is, "Record button input source? currently microphone" This item allows you to select the recording source. Options are:
Microphone (hotkey is M): Use this option to record via a
microphone. If no external microphone is plugged in, recording will occur
through the internal microphone.
Off (hotkey is O): If you are not using the record
button, you can turn it off altogether so as to minimize the risk of bumping it
and making an unwanted recording.
5. The last options are Internal and External microphone recording levels. These are covered in the next section.
You are
now ready to make a recording. Go to
17.2.4 Recording a Memo.
The
recording levels for both microphones are set to an average level but you may
well wish to adjust them to suit the volume or pitch of your voice.
There are
two places where you can adjust the level (also known as "gain") ‑
using the menu items and entering a different value, or at the prompts. In the
menu, you can set a specific value whereas at the prompts, you can adjust the
level on a sliding scale and test it.
The next
two sections cover each of these in turn.
From the
Recording Options Set up List, select either Internal or External microphone
recording level. When the item is displayed, the current setting will also be
displayed. To change the value, type a new value and press ENTER.
The
recording level values available represent the viable decibel range for each
kind of microphone. For the internal microphone, the available values are 1‑15
(covering a range of 31.5 to 52.5 decibels), default setting is 12. For the
external microphone the available values are 1‑35 (covering 1.5 to 52.5
decibels), the default being 25.
Setting
the recording levels this way impacts the chosen default microphone, which if
you have not changed it at all, is the internal microphone.
To adjust
the levels on a sliding scale at a prompt and test the results, follow these
steps:
1. From the Media Menu, select Record a memo. KeySoft prompts "Start recording using...". Do NOT press ENTER yet!
2. At this point you can adjust the recording levels ‑ increase by pressing SPACE with dot 6 repeatedly, or decrease by pressing SPACE with dot 3 repeatedly. Still do NOT press ENTER yet.
3. You can now test the new level. Start a test recording by pressing T and speaking normally as you would if recording a memo, then to stop the recording, press T again. Still do NOT press ENTER yet.
4. To play back the test recording,
press P.
5. If the level is not right, repeat
steps 1 to 4 until you are happy. At that point, continue on with making your
recording by pressing ENTER!
The test
recording is called "Test.wav" and each new test overwrites the old
file so that you don't end up with lots of test files.
The FM
Radio volume controls are:
Louder: ENTER with dots 4‑6.
Softer: ENTER with dots 1‑3.
They
operate independently from the speech volume, in that you can change the volume
without changing the volume of the speech. The speech volume is still the
"master volume", so if you adjust the speech volume, the FM Radio
volume will change relative to it.
This
relativity is a useful feature as it means that if you wish to turn down the
volume of both speech and radio at the same time, you can do so with one
action. For example, if you are listening to the radio while writing an essay
and someone addresses you, you can turn down the speech volume, keep working,
and still conduct a conversation.
If you
wish to increase the relative volume of the voice to the FM Radio, that is, you
want to make the speech louder or softer without making the FM Radio louder or
softer at the same time, you can adjust it independently by pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER with R, then select "Speech Volume Level?" Select a number between 1 and 5, 5
being the loudest. The default setting is 3.
There are
two methods available for making a recording. The first method is useful if you
wish to change microphones or are not sure which microphone is set as the
default. The second method is useful if you are confident all the settings are
as you wish them to be.
Method 1:
1. From the Main Menu, select Media Center.
2. From this menu, select "Record a memo."
3. The Recorder prompts, "Start recording using microphone?" unless you have already changed the
default microphone to external in the set up options. To start recording with
the offered microphone, press ENTER, or Y, or the Record button. If you are using the external microphone you
will need to plug it in first. Note: The Record button works with the selected
input source in this instance.
4. You will hear a beep, which indicates that it is time to start recording. KeySoft will otherwise remain silent during recording.
5. To stop the recording, press ENTER or Y, or the Record button. Two beeps confirm that recording has ceased, and
KeySoft will repeat the prompt: "Start recording using internal microphone?". Note: The Record button works with
the selected input source in this instance.
Method 2:
1. From anywhere in KeySoft, press the record button. This is located on the left side of the unit, and is the first thing you will find if you feel from the front edge. It is a small button. Press it in and you will hear a beep. Release the button and start recording.
2. To stop recording, press the button
again.
There are
some other commands available while recording:
To change
tasks and continue working with KeySoft while still recording, either press SPACE with E or the relevant changing task hot
key combination.
At the "Start Recording from...?" prompt, you can also:
Playback
the last recorded memo by pressing P;
Erase the
last recorded memo by pressing E; or
Name the
last recorded memo by pressing N.
Unless
you have specified otherwise, memos are recorded in the My Memos folder on the
Flash Disk.
The
hotkey for playing back a memo is ENTER with M. When you select Playback Memos from the Media
menu, KeySoft will prompt:
“Playback memos in which folder? Press ENTER for My Memos.”
KeySoft
will display "List of memos, most recent first, in My Memos folder" for example:
“10:59:32
AM on Thursday June 7, 2006 memo”
“4:22:10
PM on Wednesday June 6, 2006 memo”
“Class
singing happy birthday to me”
Just as
in any file list in KeySoft, you can review it by pressing SPACE and BACKSPACE. To play a memo, press ENTER. When that memo has finished playing, the memo
name is repeated.
While
playing a memo, all of the usual Media Player commands are available.
In the My
Memos folder, all the usual file commands are available, e.g.:
Information
about item: SPACE with I
To erase
a file: BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4
To rename
it: BACKSPACE with R
Etc.
The
sounds we use and hear in the real world, such as our voices, are
"analog" signals. This means that they are continuous and constant.
To process these signals as a recording, we need to convert the signals to
"digital" form. Digital signals are not continuous, and so to create
the effect of continuous sound, a process called sampling is used. The value of
the signal is measured at certain intervals in time, and each measurement is
referred to as a sample.
The
frequency with which samples are measured is called the sample frequency. The
more samples that occur in a second, the better the quality of the sound. As
the measurement used to describe this is Kilohertz or kHz, the larger the
number of kHz, the better quality the sound.
Of course, the higher the sample frequency, the larger the resulting file will be. Because there will be times when the sound quality is not as important to you as the amount of storage space you have available, the Recorder has three sample frequencies to choose from: 11.025 kHz (low quality), 22.05 kHz (medium quality), and 44.1 kHz (high quality). The factory default frequency is 22.05kHz.
A bit
(short for binary digit) is the smallest unit of data in a computer. The range
of a digital signal is measured in bits. So, each time a sample is taken, the
size of that sample is measured in bits. This is called a bit depth, because
the size of the sample is determined by the vertical range of the sound wave
The Recorder has two available bit depths ‑ 8 bits and 16 bits. Using 16 bits per sample gives a higher quality recording with a larger dynamic range and less noise. However, it uses twice as much storage space as 8 bits. The factory default bit depth is 8 bits.
As
discussed before, the higher the sample frequency and bit depth of a recording,
the larger the resulting sound file will be. However, the larger the file, the
better the sound quality. Therefore you may want to make a value judgment about
what to record at a high quality and what to record at lower quality, to manage
your storage capacity. Below is a breakdown of the relative sizes for 10 second
and 60 second sound recordings according to the sound quality.
For a 10
second recording, the file sizes are:
1. Low Frequency sample, Low quality
bit depth =107KB
2. Medium Frequency sample, Low quality
bit depth =215 KB
3. High Frequency sample, Low quality
bit depth =431 KB
4. Low Frequency sample, High quality
bit depth =215 KB
5. Medium Frequency sample, High
quality bit depth =431 KB
6. High Frequency sample, High quality
bit depth =861 KB
For a 60
second recording, the file sizes are:
1. Low Frequency sample, Low quality
bit depth =646KB
2. Medium Frequency sample, Low quality
bit depth =1.26MB
3. High Frequency sample, Low quality
bit depth =2.5MB
4. Low Frequency sample, High quality
bit depth =1.26MB
5. Medium Frequency sample, High
quality bit depth =2.5MB
6. High Frequency sample, High quality
bit depth =5.04MB
The FM
Radio includes several features that are standard for a digitally tuned FM
Radio such as a typical car radio. For example, it has automatic tuning and the
ability to preset stations.
The
default frequency range of between 87.5MHz and 108MHz is used for the FM Radio.
The FM
Radio is accessed from the Media Center menu found on the Main Menu.
Alternatively, you can go directly to it from anywhere in KeySoft by pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER with F. When you access the FM Radio for
the first time you will tuned into the frequency 87.5 FM. Unless this is a
station, you will just hear static!
Since the
headphones act as an antenna they must be plugged in whenever you want to
listen to the radio. You can listen to the radio either via headphones or the
speakers. To listen to the radio via the speakers instead of through your
headphones, press ENTER with S. This is a toggle command; in other
words it will alternate between the headphones and the speakers each time you
press ENTER with S.
This
section describes the features and their uses in detail.
You will
need to tune your radio into your local FM stations using one of the three
options described below.
1. If you already know the frequency of a station, you can tune into it directly by pressing SPACE with F. KeySoft prompts: "Station frequency?". Type the frequency you want to tune into and press ENTER. The radio will then be tuned into the frequency you have selected and KeySoft will then display the frequency. For example "92.1 FM Stereo".
2. The FM Radio can automatically tune
into stations using the following hot keys:
To
scan forward to find a station press SPACE with dot 4;
To
scan back to find a station press SPACE with dot 1.
Once you have tuned into a station you can make further adjustments to the frequency by manually tuning the radio. See option 3 below for an explanation of manual tuning.
3. Manual tuning is handy for fine
tuning when the reception of stations is unclear. To improve the reception you
can increase or decrease the frequency by 100 KiloHertz at a time. It is also
useful for coarse tuning if you want to move the frequency up or down by 1
Megahertz. Fine or coarse tuning can be performed by using the following hot
keys:
To
increase the frequency by 100kHz press SPACE with dot 6;
To
decrease the frequency by 100kHz press SPACE with dot 3;
To
increase the frequency by 1MHz press SPACE with dot 5;
To
decrease the frequency by 1MHz press SPACE with dot 2.
Remember
that you can press SPACE with H at any time to read a summary of
the options available.
Presetting
stations is possible with the Presets feature. Presets save you from having to
remember the frequency of all your favorite stations.
You may
have as few or as many presets as you wish. Each preset is given a personalized
name so that they can be easily identified. For example, Concert FM or Cool
Party Tunes. All you need to do is tune to a station of your choice and press BACKSPACE with R. You can then type in a name and
press ENTER. Repeat this process for each
station you want to preset.
The
following hot keys are available for navigating preset stations:
To move
forward through the list of preset stations press SPACE;
To move
back through the list of preset stations press BACKSPACE.
Once you
have preset your favorite stations you can move from one to another by entering
the first character of the name, for instance, C for Concert FM. If there are more than one preset starting with the
same character, enter the first unique part of the name instead. For example,
"Co" for Concert FM or "Cl" for Classic.
When
KeySoft finds a preset station it will display both the name you have given it
and the frequency. For example "Concert FM 89.7 Stereo". Note that
once you have scrolled through all the preset stations KeySoft will display
"End of list" and remain tuned to the last preset station. The name
and frequency of the last preset station will then be displayed.
It is
possible to change the name of a preset and if you decide that you no longer
want a pre‑set on the list you can delete it. The following hot keys are
available for entering, editing or renaming and deleting preset stations:
To enter
a new preset station press BACKSPACE with R. KeySoft will prompt: "Name for this station? Currently (blank space)." The blank space represents no
preset name entered. Type in a name for the preset station and press ENTER. KeySoft will then display the name of the new
preset station.
To edit
or rename an existing preset station, select the one you wish to change and
press BACKSPACE with R. KeySoft will prompt: "Name for this station? Currently (existing preset station name)." Type in the new name for the preset
station and press ENTER. KeySoft will then display the new
name of the preset station.
To delete
a preset station, select the one you wish to delete and press BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6. KeySoft will prompt: "Delete (preset station name). Sure?." Type Y for Yes and KeySoft will display the frequency of the station.
Note that
the FM Radio will tune into the last frequency that it was tuned into when the
radio was previously switched on.
The
BrailleNote Apex BT allows you to listen to your favorite station at the same
time as performing other tasks in KeySoft. For example, while you are writing a
document or reading a book. If you want to leave the radio on in the background
while you work in another part of KeySoft press SPACE with E. Keysoft prompts: "Leave the radio on?." Type Y for Yes. If you need to change the station or adjust any of the other
FM Radio features, return to FM Radio via the Main Menu or by pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER with F.
To switch off the FM Radio press SPACE with E. KeySoft prompts: "Leave the radio on?". Press N for No.
You can
quickly silence the FM Radio using the mute function. For example, this is
useful when phone rings or you need to access Help without being distracted by
the sound of the radio blaring. To mute or un‑mute the radio press ENTER with dots 1‑3‑4‑6.
Inside the
media menu you will find the internet radio. The internet radio gives you
access to thousands of online radio stations provided by the ooTunes library
made popular on the Victor Reader Stream and mobile apps. With an internet connection
you can:
·
Search
the library of stations by name, genre, or by a key word.
·
Manually
type or paste a URL to a media file.
·
Play
a station in the background while doing something else on your Apex. Press
Enter with X to stop playing the station.
Once you
find a station you want to listen to, press enter on it. If you want to
add it to your favorites list, press Space with F and it will be located
in the favorites section of the internet radio menu. To delete it from
your favorites list press BACKSPACE with C
Note that
KeySoft’s internet radio functionality relies on the validity of the ooTunes
database of stations. From time to time it is possible that you receive
errors related to stations not being found or not playing. If you do
receive an error and cannot make a station play, most likely the station has
changed its web location and the ooTunes database will update its records and
resolve the issue in a few days. If the issue is not resolved, you can notify ooTunes
directly at www.ootunes.com.
End of
Media Center chapter.
This
chapter introduces the basics of KeyBase, the database application included
with KeySoft.
A
database is an organized collection of information (otherwise known as data)
that has been arranged so that it is easy and fast to find. The information
within a database is organized into fields and records. Each piece of
information, such as a phone number, is called a "field". You can
enter multiple fields against a person's surname, for example, to form a
"record".
Databases
are useful for storing a wide range of information, such as a catalog of CDs,
your recipes, bank records and so on. For your convenience, KeyBase comes with
9 different databases that are ready for use. If you cannot find exactly what
you need from the list of supplied databases, you can develop your own database
or modify one to suit your needs. The supplied databases are:
CD
Catalog: Keep information on the CDs that you own, such as the track titles on
each album.
Home
Inventory: Useful for entering information about household purchases such as
appliances that are under warranty and insurance details.
My Books:
Provides an opportunity to search for data on the genre and format of books you
have read.
My
Recipes: Retrieve lists of ingredients for your favorite dish.
Transaction
Record: Allows you to keep track of debit and credit movements within your bank
accounts. Copy and rename this database as needed. For instance, create one
copy for each of your bank accounts.
Receipt
Book: Make a record of goods and services bought or sold. Copy and rename this
database as appropriate.
Membership
List: Club/Organization contact details, for example, membership numbers and
subscription information. Copy and rename this database to suit your
requirements. For example, if you are the secretary of a Blind Cricket Club,
rename it "Blind Cricket Club Membership".
Wine
Tasting: Create records of your wine tasting experiences, including notes on
the taste and bouquet.
Ham Radio
Log: Used to keep a log of amateur radio contact and call details, such as
location, call sign and frequency.
To enter
the Database Manager from the Main Menu, use the SPACE and BACKSPACE keys to review the items in the
menu, until "Database Manager" is displayed, and then press ENTER. Alternatively, you can select the Database
Manager from the Main Menu by pressing D.
You can
switch directly to the Database from anywhere in KeySoft by pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER with D.
KeyBase
prompts: "Database to use. Press ENTER for (default)?", where the word "default"
is really the database you used last. This is a standard KeySoft filename
prompt and all the usual commands are available, as described below:
To select
the displayed database, press ENTER.
To cycle
through the list of available KeyBase files, press SPACE. KeySoft will then display "List of KeyBase files in KeyBase folder". To look through the list of
available KeyBase files, press SPACE or ADVANCE repeatedly and when the name of the
file you require is displayed, select it by pressing NEXT or ENTER.
Note: As
the remainder of this chapter uses the example of the Membership List database
to illustrate the features of the Database Manager, now is a good time to
select it from the list of supplied databases.
This
chapter introduces the basics of KeyBase, the database part of KeySoft.
A
database is an organized collection of information (otherwise known as data)
that has been arranged so that it is easy and fast to find. Databases are
useful for storing a wide range of information. The information within a
database is organized into fields and records. Each piece of information, such
as a phone number, is called a "field". You can enter multiple fields
against a person's surname, for example, to form a "record".
Databases
are useful for storing a wide range of information, such as a catalog of CDs in
your CD collection, your recipes, bank records and so on. For your convenience,
KeyBase comes with 9 different databases that are ready for use. If you cannot
find exactly what you need from the list of supplied databases, you can develop
your own database or modify one to suit your needs. The supplied databases are:
CD
Catalog: Keep information on the CDs that you own, such as the track titles on
each album.
Home
Inventory: Useful for entering information about household purchases such as appliances
that are under warranty and insurance details.
My Books:
Provides an opportunity to search for data on the genre and format of books you
have read.
My
Recipes: Retrieve lists of ingredients for your favorite dish.
Transaction
Record: Allows you to keep track of debit and credit movements within your bank
accounts. Copy and rename this database as appropriate, for instance, create
one copy for each of your bank accounts.
Receipt
Book: Make a record of goods and services bought or sold. Copy and rename this
database as appropriate.
Membership
List: Club/Organization contact details, for example, membership numbers and
subscription information. Copy and rename this database to suit your
requirements. For example, if you are the secretary of a Blind Cricket Club,
rename it "Blind Cricket Club Membership".
Wine
Tasting: Create records of your wine tasting experiences, including notes on
the taste and bouquet.
Ham Radio
Log: Used to keep a log of amateur radio contact and call details, such as
location, call sign and frequency.
To enter
the Database Manager from the Main Menu, use the SPACE and BACKSPACE keys to review the items in the
menu, until "Database Manager" is displayed, and then press ENTER. Alternatively, you can select the Database
Manager from the Main Menu by pressing D.
You can
switch directly to the Database from anywhere in KeySoft by pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER with D.
KeyBase
prompts: "Database to use. Press ENTER for (default)?", where the word "default"
is really the database you used last. This is a standard KeySoft filename
prompt and all the usual commands are available, as described below:
To select
the displayed database, press ENTER.
To cycle
through the list of available KeyBase files, press SPACE. KeySoft will then display "List of KeyBase files in KeyBase folder". To look through the list of
available KeyBase files, press SPACE or ADVANCE repeatedly and when the name of the
file you require is displayed, select it by pressing NEXT or ENTER.
Note: As
the remainder of this chapter uses the example of the Membership List database
to illustrate the features of the Database Manager, now is a good time to
select it from the list of supplied databases.
Once you
have selected the database you want to work with, the KeyBase Menu is
displayed.
If you
are familiar with KeyList, the address list manager, you will notice that
KeyList and KeyBase have many features in common.
The
KeyBase menu comprises of 8 options as follows:
Add
record.
Lookup
records.
Copy
records.
Emboss
records.
Print
records.
Import
data.
Review
database definition.
Free
database space.
The
following sections describe these options. Note: If you are using a database
for the first time, it will be empty until you have added records.
The
supplied database, Membership List (for instance, one named Blind Cricket Club)
is used here to help you add a record.
This
option allows you to enter any information into the database. Each item of
information, such as the first name of a member (in the Blind Cricket Club
database), is called a "field". All the fields associated with a
particular first name are used to form a "record".
At the
KeyBase menu, select "Add Record". KeyBase displays: "Entry list for Blind Cricket Club".
Move to
the first item in the list by pressing SPACE or ADVANCE, and KeyBase prompts you for a
first name. Type the first name of a particular member and press ENTER.
You are
then prompted for the next field. Either enter text and press ENTER or skip the field by pressing SPACE.
Continue
adding entries until you come to the end of the list. You can review the list
at any time by pressing BACKSPACE or BACK to move back, or SPACE or ADVANCE to move forward. When you are
satisfied, add the new record by pressing SPACE with dots 2‑6.
KeyBase
displays, "Record added", and you are returned to the
KeyBase menu. If you wish to add another record, press A and repeat the previous procedure.
This
option allows you to quickly find information in the database. It is useful
when you have a particular query that you need answered.
To
explain how to find information in a database, the example of a Membership List
for a Blind Cricket Club has again been used.
At the
KeyBase menu, select "Lookup Record". KeyBase displays: "Selection List for Blind Cricket Club".
Move to
the first item in the list by pressing SPACE or ADVANCE, and KeyBase prompts: "First Name?".
The
Selection List allows you to specify the search for a particular record or
several related records. For example, you may want to review the records of all
people called "Smith" who are members of the Blind Cricket Club. In
this case, type "smith" at the last name prompt, and press ENTER. The first name and last name of the first
person in the Blind Cricket Club database called "Smith" is
displayed. You can move through the list of "Smiths" by pressing SPACE with dots 5‑6. Each press displays his or her first
name, followed by the last name, in this case "Smith". Only records
which match the selection list are displayed. A beep indicates when there are
no more matching last names.
To review
the other fields in a particular record, press SPACE or ADVANCE repeatedly. Only fields containing
an entry are displayed. The format of each item comprises the name of the
field, such as "Membership Category", followed by the entry, such as
"Senior". The movement commands for the KeyBase menu are as follows:
To
move to the next record: SPACE with dots 5‑6.
To
move to the previous record: SPACE with dots 2‑3.
To
move to the next field: SPACE.
To
move to the previous field: BACKSPACE.
To
read all fields: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
To
delete this record: BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
To
change this field or any other field or to enter information into additional
fields
press BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
To
copy a record to the clipboard: SPACE with B then C.
When you
have finished reviewing to a selection, you can return to the "Selection
List" by pressing SPACE with E. You are then asked for another
Last name. If you have finished searching, you can return to the KeyBase menu
by pressing SPACE with E again.
The
information which you enter into the Lookup Record option is used to find
matching records. You may include as much or as little data as you wish.
For
example, when looking up a membership number, you might want to find Jane
Smith. Move to the first item in the list by pressing SPACE or ADVANCE, and KeyBase prompts: "First Name?". Type "Jane" and move to
the next field by pressing SPACE with dot 4. KeyBase will prompt: "Last name?". Type "smith" and start the search by pressing ENTER. The first "Jane Smith" will be
displayed. If necessary, cycle through the other "Jane Smith's" by
pressing SPACE with dots 5‑6, until you locate the one you
require. To find the correct "Jane Smith", review the fields by
pressing the initial letter for the field name. For example, D for "Date Joined".
For
string fields, you need only type the first few characters in a field rather
than the whole field. For example, if you just type S in the "Last Name" field, you are
able to access the records of all people whose last names begin with S.
You can
search for all members who fall into the senior membership category. At the
selection list, don't specify a last name, but press SPACE repeatedly until the prompt: "Membership category?" is displayed and then type "senior" and press ENTER. You can then use SPACE with dots 5‑6 to move through all the members who
are senior members of the Blind Cricket Club.
You can
also search for a name fragment within a field, using the multi‑character
wild card for the unknown first part. For example, you may remember a members'
postal address as: "Something View Road". If you press SPACE with dots 3‑5, followed by "View" in
the address line 1 field, you should have a very short list of records to
review.
Any
fields used in a Lookup will be offered as a suggestion for the next search,
unless you exit to the KeyBase Menu between searches. You may want to clear a
previously‑used field so it is not used in the next search. To do this,
move to the required field using SPACE or BACKSPACE and press the Clear Field command, SPACE with dots 3‑5‑6.
Note: numbers are matched identically, so that 42 will match with 42, but not with 39.9. Conversely, dates and times will be matched regardless of how they are entered. For example, 11.00p.m. will match with 23.00.
You may
want to emboss a name and membership number, or a selection of records, to
create membership cards for your Blind Cricket Club members. From the KeyBase
menu select "Emboss Records". KeySoft prompts: "Emboss or Set up embosser?"
If you
haven't previously set up the embosser, press S. The set up procedure is covered in 6.7 The Embosser Set‑up List.
To
proceed with embossing, press E, and KeySoft prompts: "Template name"?
A
template is a standard KeyWord text or Braille document that specifies the
field layout that is to be used when database records are printed, embossed,
copied, or merged into documents.
Each database
can have one or more templates, but each template only works with one database.
For this reason, in selecting a template, you can only select templates
associated with the current database.
To avoid
confusion caused by viewing templates that are associated with other databases,
follow the suggestions below:
1. Create a separate folder for each
database that holds the database and templates associated with that particular
database.
2. Name each template clearly to easily
identify with its associated database. For instance, for the database named
Book Club Membership, the template to be used when composing subscription
reminder letters, could be named Book Club Subscriptions.
Note you
will be provided with an error message if you accidently select a template that
is not associated with the current database. The error message is "This template is associated with a different database, (name of database). Use anyway?". To select another template, type N.
Refer to 10.9.2 Creating a Template for further details on how to
create a template.
To select
a template for embossing, you need to understand the difference between a
database record and an embossed page. A database record is a series of fields,
whereas an embossed page must have a specific format. So, to emboss database
records, you must specify which fields you want to emboss, and how they should
be arranged. This is defined by a template, which is a KeyWord document laid
out with the required field names in the required arrangement. A template may
also contain text and formatting information.
There are
two main template categories, namely Braille templates and text templates. To
emboss records from your Blind Cricket Club database, you would use a Braille
template. Conversely to print records from the same database, you would use a
Text template. The convention used for naming templates, places the word
"Braille" in front of the Braille templates.
After you
have selected the template, KeyBase displays, "Selection list for Blind Cricket Club". This is the Selection List that
you use in the Lookup Record option. It is used in the same way to select the
records that you want embossed. If you want to emboss every record, press ENTER. However, you can select just those records
you want to emboss. When you have set up the required search field, or fields,
start the lookup by pressing ENTER. KeyBase displays the number of
selected records, and prompts, "Emboss all selected records?" To do this, press Y. All the selected records are embossed, and you are returned to the
KeyBase menu.
Alternatively,
you have a further opportunity to choose from the selected records. To do this,
press N, and you are presented with the
first matching record. If you wish to emboss this record, press ENTER and this record is embossed. If you do not
want to emboss this record, scan the list by pressing SPACE with dots 5‑6, and press ENTER for each record that you wish to include.
The
procedure for printing a record, or a selection of them, is very similar to
embossing. From the KeyBase menu, select "Print records". KeySoft prompts: "Print or Set up printer?"
If you
haven't already set up the printer, press S. The set up procedure is covered in 6.10 The Printer Set‑Up List. To proceed with printing, press P, and follow the prompts to select a template
and choose which records to print.
Importing
information into a database is a valuable KeyBase feature that allows you to
input records from files rather than entering them by hand.
Comma
Separated Values (CSV) is the file type used for importing into a database. It
is a file type that is widely supported by many database and spreadsheet
applications, including but not limited to, Access, Excel, and Lotus Notes. To
ensure that .csv files are successfully imported, check that the first line of
the .csv file contains the field names and that these are named the same as the
field names in KeyBase. This is often given as an option when you export data
from another application in order to import the data into KeyBase.
To begin
the process of importing data, either press I or access the KeyBase menu or cycle through the items using SPACE until you find "Import Data" and then press ENTER to select it. KeySoft will prompt "Source folder name? Press ENTER for (default)", where "default" is the
last folder used. Select the drive and folder containing the .csv file you wish
to import. The prompt "Import data from which CSV file?" will be displayed. Type the name of
the .csv file you wish to import and press ENTER. Alternatively, you can select it from the list of files by pressing SPACE repeatedly, followed by ENTER when the file is displayed. KeySoft will prompt: "Does line 1 (field 1, field 2, field 3) contain field names?". If you type Y, KeyBase will exclude line 1 of the .csv file
when importing, because it contains field names rather than data. If you type N, line 1 will be included.
Note: To
help you determine whether or not the first line contains field names, KeySoft
will display up to 30 characters of line 1.
The field
mapping of .csv files to the field names in the KeyBase database now begins.
Field names in the .csv file (if field names are present) are compared with
those in the database. Once the matching is complete, the results are displayed
as one of the possible outcomes that follow:
"All fields match. Review field mapping list?"
"One field doesn't match. Review field mapping list?"
"(A specified number) fields do not match. Review field mapping list?"
"No fields match. Review field mapping list?"
Your
response to the result will be either Yes or No. If you type Y, the Field Mapping List will be
displayed. The Field Mapping List contains one item for each field in the .csv
file. This will show you what .csv field maps to which database field. For example,
in the case of a membership list, "(Last name) maps to (last name)". If the .csv file does not contain
field titles, an example of a prompt could be "(Jones) maps to nothing".
To change
the mapping of a particular field, press ENTER. You will then be presented with a list of the fields in the database.
Once you have selected a field, KeySoft will once again prompt "(item) maps to (KeyBase field)" and the new mapping displayed. For
example, "Jones maps to last name".
Once you
are happy with the field mapping, press SPACE with E. KeyBase will then display your changes (for
example, "All fields match"), and follow with the prompt:
"Review field mapping list?". To start the import process, press
N.
If your
.csv file is large, the import process may take some time. If this is the case,
"Please wait" will be displayed and you will hear
a beep every few seconds. If you want to check on progress, find the status
information by pressing ENTER. Once the process is complete, the
KeyBase Menu will be display.
Note that
KeyBase can be used to view data that is maintained on another system and
frequently imported into a database. To manually delete existing data before
performing an import, follow these steps:
1. At the "Database to use?" prompt, press SPACE and locate the database from which data is to
be deleted.
2. To delete the existing data, press BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4. KeyBase will prompt: "This KeyBase Definition File has an associated database called xyz. Erase the Definition File only, the database, or both?."
3. Select "database only" by
pressing D. You will then be given a further
warning.
4. Confirm that you only want to erase
the database by pressing Y.
5. You will then be returned to the
list of files. To select the database, press ENTER.
6. KeyBase will inform you that the
database does not exist and give you the option to create it.
7. Press Y and select the Import Option to import your .csv file.
KeyBase
allows you to use the information in a database as the basis for a document.
For example, when embossing or printing records, a template is used to
designate how the information is formatted and to add command text, etc. This
option is useful for preparing lists or forms for emailing, allowing you to
review form letters before printing, and so on.
At the
KeyBase menu, select "Copy Records". KeyBase display: "Copy Records to a document, another database or a CSV file".
To copy
to a document, press D. KeyBase will prompt: ""Destination folder name? Press ENTER for (default)" where "default" is the
last folder used. Select the drive, folder and document you want to copy the
records to and KeyBase will prompt you for the template file to use. The type
of document you are copying records to will determine whether you choose a
Braille or Text template. If you are copying to a Braille document, you can
only choose a Braille template. If you are copying to Text document, you can
only choose a Text template. Select the template you wish to use and continue
as described in 18.2.3 Embossing Records.
This
option allows you to take a selection of records from one database and add them
to another database. Because you can select which fields are copied and which
are not, the two databases do not need to be exactly the same. The field names
also do not have to match, because you can control how the fields are mapped.
This is useful when you have records you want to copy from old KeyList based
databases, into new KeyBase databases, for example.
At the
KeyBase menu, select "Copy Records". KeyBase display: "Copy Records to a document, another database or a CSV file".
To copy
to another database, press A. KeyBase will prompt: "Destination file name?". Select the database you wish to
copy. KeyBase will then attempt to match the field names in the current
database with those in the destination database you have selected and will
display the results in the same way as in the Import Data option. Use the Field
Mapping List to adjust this mapping as required. This is described in 18.2.5 Importing Data into a Database. From the Selection List, select
the records you wish to copy in the same way as described in
18.2.3 Embossing Records.
Exporting
information out of a database is a valuable feature of KeyBase that allows you
to upload a database to a PC, as well as share data with other people and
applications. Also, by using the export option for backup allows the backup to
be restored on any machine.
Comma
Separated Values (CSV) is the file type used for exporting out of a database.
It is a file type that is widely supported by many database and spreadsheet
applications, including but not limited to, Access, Excel, and Lotus Notes.
To begin
the process of exporting data, access the KeyBase menu and cycle through the
items using SPACE until you find "Copy Records". Press ENTER to select it. KeySoft will prompt "Copy records to a document, another database, or a CSV file". Type C to select a .csv file and KeySoft will prompt "Destination folder name? Press ENTER for (default)". Once you have selected the drive
and folder, KeyBase will prompt: "Destination CSV filename?". Type the name of the file and
press ENTER or select an existing file to
overwrite it. You do not need to type the .csv extension because it is
automatically added for you. If the .csv file already exists, the prompt "File exists. Replace?" will be displayed.
KeySoft
will then prompt: "Include field titles?". Whether you answer yes or no,
depends on the requirements of the application you will use to open the .csv
file. Commonly, you will decide to include the field names by pressing Y. The first line of the .csv file will then
contain a list of the field names. To omit field names, press N.
Select
the records that you want to include in the .csv file from the Selection List.
To select all records in the database, press ENTER. Otherwise, use the Selection List to only select the records you
require, as described in 18.2.3 Embossing Records.
If you
are feeling adventurous, you may want to create your own database. There are
many possibilities for the types of databases that can be created. For the
purpose of explaining how to create a new database, the example of developing a
Medical History is used to illustrate how a new database is created.
Note:
Creating your own database is a difficult task. To be successful, you will need
a solid technical understanding of how databases work and be an advanced user
of KeySoft.
To create
a new database, select Database Manager from the Main Menu. KeyBase prompts: "Database to use?". Instead of selecting an existing
database, you will now type the name of the database you wish to create (such
as Medical History) and press ENTER. KeyBase will prompt: "File does not exist. Create a new file?". Confirm that you wish to create a
new file, by typing Y.
You will
then be led through the process of creating a new database. This includes the
following:
The Field
Definition List, where you define the fields and field types for your new
database.
The Sort
Order, which defines the order that the records are presented during the lookup
records process.
The
Record Title, this is displayed when you first enter a record during lookup and
helps you to identify the record you wish to find.
The
Associated Database which is in the form of a .cdb file. You will notice that a
KeyBase database consists of two different files. First, there is the KeyBase
Definition File (this has the extension .kbs) that defines the field names,
various field options, the sort order, record title, etc. And second, there is
the .cdb file that contains the actual data. The KeyBase Definition File is
created when you develop a new database. The first time you add a record, the
.cdb file is created and KeySoft will prompt “The database for (.kbs filename) does not exist. Create a database called (.cdb filename)”. Normally these files have the same
base name, for example the Medical History database will have Medical
History.kbs and Medical History.cdb. However, sometimes you may wish to have
more than one KeyBase Definition file using the same data. This will allow you
to have different views of the data.
Once you
have created a new database by typing and confirming the new database name,
KeyBase will display "Field definition list for Medical History".
You will
now need to think of all the information that you want to keep from each visit
the Medical Center. Each piece of information becomes a field and you can have
up to 150 different fields in your database. Also consider which order you want
the fields presented when you add a record. Last, but not least, you will need
to decide on the type of data to store in each field. Is the data a date, time,
number or text only? The type of data you store in each field is known as a
field type and there are 8 choices:
String
Number
Yes or No
Document
Date
Time
Field
types are explained in detail in
18.4.2 Field Types.
For the
Medical History database, the following fields and field types will be entered
in the order below:
Reason
for appointment ‑ String
Appointment
Date ‑ Date
Appointment
Time ‑ Time
Medical
Practitioner ‑ String
Prescription
Issued – Yes or No
Notes ‑
Document
Medical
Center Name ‑ String
Medical
Center Cost ‑ Number
Prescription
Cost ‑ Number
You don't
need to get everything right the first time. You can come back later and add
additional fields, remove fields you find you don’t need, or change the name of
fields. However, think carefully about the field type, because if you change a
field type after you have added data to your database, any data already stored
in the previous type will no longer be displayed.
When you
are ready to start defining the fields, press SPACE at the prompt: "Field Definition List". KeyBase will prompt "Field 1 name?". Type a name for the first field
that you want to be presented with when you add records and press ENTER. In the example of a Medical History database,
the first field is "Reason for appointment".
The
prompt "Field type for Reason for Appointment? Currently string" will be displayed. To confirm that
this is the correct field type for this field, press ENTER. KeySoft will then prompt "Field 2 name?". Type "Appointment Date"
and press ENTER. KeySoft will then prompt: Field
type for "Appointment Date? Currently string". This field is a date field not a
string field and you must therefore change the field type. To cycle through the
list of types, press SPACE with dots 3‑4 repeatedly until “Date” is displayed and then press ENTER. KeySoft will then prompt “Field 3 name?”. Continue on adding all the fields
in the order you want them presented.
You can
review the field names and types you have already added by pressing SPACE or BACKSPACE. While reviewing the fields you can change the
field names, as well as inserting, deleting, or changing the order of the
fields:
To change
the name of a field, either type the new name and press ENTER or edit the existing name using the standard
KeySoft editing commands. Note that if you are using a Braille keyboard you can
type field names in your preferred keyboard grade. When you review the field
names, you will notice that they are displayed in your preferred reading grade.
However, KeyBase stores field names internally as text, so if you edit a field
name you must make sure to edit using computer Braille.
To insert
a field before the current field, for example to add "Medical Center
Address" before "Prescription Cost", press SPACE with dots 2‑6. The current field and all
subsequent fields are moved down one place to open up a gap for the new field
to occupy.
To delete
a field, for example, the Appointment Time field in your Medical History
database, press BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4. KeyWord will prompt: "Delete Appointment Time field. Sure?". If you type Y, the field will be deleted from the Database
Definition. The subsequent fields will move up a place. In other words,
"Medical Practitioner" will take the place of "Appointment
Time" and "Prescription Issued" will take the place of
"Medical Practitioner" and so on.
To move
the current field up one place in the Field Definition List, that is, closer to
the beginning of the list, press BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3. If the field can be moved up by
one place, the field name prompt will be repeated and the new position number
is displayed. For example, "Field 2 name? Currently Appointment Date", becomes "Field 1 name? Currently Appointment Date". This move will then force the
first field in the list, "Reason for Appointment", to become Field 2.
To move
the current field down one place in the Field Definition List, that is, closer
to the end of the list, press BACKSPACE with dots 5‑6. If the field can be moved down by
one place, the field name prompt will be repeated and the new position number
is displayed. For example, "Field 4 name? Currently Medical Practitioner", becomes "Field 5 name? Currently Medical Practitioner". This move will then force the next
field in the list, "Prescription Issued", to become Field 4.
There are
numerous options available for each field, depending on the field type. To
review these options for the current field, press BACKSPACE with O after the Field Type prompt. The
Field Options list will be displayed as described in detail in 18.4.3 Field Options.
Once you have added all the fields you require and are fairly satisfied with them, you are then ready to move onto the next stage. You can return to the Field Definition List later to make further changes if needed. To exit the Field Definition List, press SPACE with E. KeyBase will prompt: "Sort Order is Reason for Appointment. Change?".
Note: If
you decide to change a field type after records have been added, any fields
that had been assigned with the original field type will not be displayed. This
situation does not apply for string and document field types as they are
interchangeable. If you have entered a significant number of records and you
want to keep the database, make a copy of the KeyBase Definition File in a
different folder. Make the required changes in the copy and then use the Copy
Records option (from the KeyBase Menu) to copy the data from your old database
into your new database. Delete the original database and move the new database
to a location where you wish to store it.
The 6
Field Type options are described in the following sections:
A string
is a sequence of characters. For example, you can enter a string to retain
important phone numbers; months of the year or the symbol representing a
currency. A string can be presented in text or any grade of Braille and is sorted
alphabetically.
The
maximum length of a string is 255 characters. For longer entries or multiple
line entries, use a document field type.
Note:
When you include characters and numbers in a sequence, they are treated as
words. To store the sequence with the numbers in numerical order, put a 0 in
front of numbers 1‑9. For example, the My Books database includes a field
to store series numbers, and this procedure would ensure that the titles
appeared in order of their series number.
This
Field Type applies to any sort of number, but can only contain digits, the
negative sign and a decimal point. The number field type is therefore
unsuitable for storing phone numbers as they may contain spaces, brackets, and
so on.
Suitable
numbers to have in your database, include quantities, ages, and event years.
Numbers can also represent measurements, such as temperature, and quantities
(dollars and cents, for instance).
Numbers are sorted numerically.
The Yes
or No Field Type provides two options to choose from; yes or no. This is useful
when you want to include a question requiring a yes or no answer in your
database, for instance, "Was there a prescription issued?".
The
maximum length of data allowed in a string field type is equivalent to 255
characters. If you think the data you want to add to a field will be beyond
this limit, use a document field type. For example, in the case of a Medical
History database, you could add a document that outlines details of your
treatment schedule or lists the ingredients in your medication.
An
advantage of using the document field type over a string field type is that a
document is two dimensional. That is, you are able to read and edit it as you
would with a document in KeyWord.
The Date
Field Type is useful for keeping a record of events such as your last dental
check‑up or when you purchased an appliance that is under a fixed
warranty. If you want to enter the date for today, type "today".
A date is
sorted chronologically. In other words, you can sort your check‑ups or
warranty expiry dates from the earliest to the latest.
The Time
Field Type is useful for keeping a record of events such as what time you spoke
to someone on your Ham Radio or the time of a medical appointment.
There are
numerous options available for each field, depending on the field type. These
can be reviewed or changed by pressing BACKSPACE with O when a field type prompt is
displayed.
The Field
Options are displayed as a list. Move forward or back through the list by
pressing SPACE or BACKSPACE. To change an option, either select or type
the new value and press ENTER. When you are happy with the
options, return to the Field Definition List by pressing SPACE with E.
For
String Fields, you have 4 options to choose from that are exclusive to this
Field Type:
"Braille Option?"
This is
used to determine how the field will be entered and if Braille code or Unicode
is stored in the database for this field. On units that have a Qwerty keyboard,
Unicode is used universally.
If you
have a unit with a Braille keyboard, the options are:
Preferred
Keyboard Grade, which is used for general strings such as names, descriptions,
etc. Your entry will be stored and displayed again, exactly as you entered it.
Computer
Braille, which is used when combinations of letters, punctuation and/or numbers
are entered. For example, email addresses, post codes, etc.
Back‑translate
from preferred grade. You will be able to use grade 2, or whatever your
preferred keyboard grade is when adding this field, but the field will be
stored in the database as Unicode. When the field is displayed, it will be
displayed in your Preferred Reading Grade. Use this for fields you will be
sorting on to ensure that they are sorted correctly. If you select a string
field type as one of the fields in the Sort Order, KeyBase will automatically
change the Braille Option to "Back‑translate from preferred
grade".
"Braille Prefix?"
If you
are using literary Braille, you can choose between Capital Sign, Double Capital
Sign, Auto Number Sign and None.
"Field Context?"
This
option is used for many different purposes, including controlling how the
contents of the field will be displayed.
Fields
usually contain fragments of text that by themselves, do not denote context.
For instance, in some cases the pronunciation that is used is dependent on the
context. For example, "Dr" in a "Title" field is
"Doctor", but in an "Address" field, is most commonly the
abbreviation for "Drive".
The
options for Field Context are as follows:
General
(the default)
Spell
Name
Address
Town or
City
State
Country
Organization
Password
Email
address
Phone
number
"Maximum Length?"
The
default maximum length is 255. Numbers between 1 and 255 can be entered. If you
need longer fields, use a Document field‑type. Usually you would leave
this set to 255. However, if you will be using the database in a situation
where you are printing on pre‑printed forms, for example, where there is
a specific limit on the length of a field, then set this appropriately to
ensure that your entry will fit in the pre‑printed space.
For
Number fields, you have 1 option that is exclusive to this Field Type:
"Number format?"
The
options are preferred setting (this is the default and uses the Number Format
setting in the Review Options List); digits and words.
The
settings below apply to all field types and follow on from the settings above:
"Help message?"
Any entry
in this option will be displayed when you request "help" on this
field in the "Add Record" option. It is displayed in addition to the
standard KeySoft help and the default for this setting is blank.
"Default value?"
The
default for this setting is blank. When a new record is initialized, the field
is set to the default value. For example, a "City" field with a
default of "Auckland", will appear as "City? Currently
Auckland", in the "Add Record" option.
There is
no difference in the amount of work involved in changing the city than there is
to assign a field without a default value. However, if the majority of new
database entries have "Auckland" as the city, having
"Auckland" as the default improves the efficiency.
Note: If
a default value is specified, this value is actually added to all records and
uses storage space that would not be used if the field was left blank.
For date
and time fields, "auto" can be entered as the default value. This
sets the field to the time or date when the record was created.
"Display option?"
The
display options are normal; read only and hidden.
An
example of when this setting can be used is with auto time and date fields. You
want the date and time logged as well as used to print, emboss or merge the
data, but you don't need to review or change it.
Another
example of when the display option is useful, is for filling in forms using
KeyBase. There may be some fixed fields on the form, such as a tax number.
These are set with a default value and they would otherwise clutter the list
when adding or reviewing fields.
After you
have defined the fields you require for a database, the next priority is to
define how you want the records sorted. This determines the order in which the
records are presented during the lookup records process. For example, sort the
records in chronological order by the "Appointment Date", when
looking for all records with "sore throat" in the “Reason for
appointment” field.
In a
membership list, where there are separate fields for a member’s first name and
last name, it is most practical to initially sort the records by last name.
Where there are several members with the same last name, you would sort by
first name. For example, those members with Jones as their last name would be
sorted in the following order: Alice Jones, Ben Jones, and Sally Jones.
Depending
on the type of field you are sorting, records can be sorted into one of the
three categories below:
1. Chronological order ‑ listing
by date field type, from earliest to latest.
2. Alphabetical order ‑ listing
by string field type.
3. Numerical order ‑ listing by
number field type in ascending order.
You must
sort by at least one field and can sort on up to 3 fields in a specified order.
The records are initially sorted by the first field you specify. This means
that records will be grouped together when the first field is identical. These
records are then sorted by the second field you specify. In cases where this
field is identical, the third sort field is used. When you first create a
database, the first field in the Field Definition List is automatically chosen
as the sort order.
When you
enter the Sort Order List, the initial prompt provides a list of the sort order
fields in the order that they are presented. For example, "Sort
order is First Name, Last Name, Membership Number. Change?". To
leave the sort order unchanged, press N. The Record Title prompt will then be
displayed. To change the Sort Order, press Y and the Sort Order List will be displayed.
The Sort
Order List presents each field in the sort order one by one, therefore allowing
you to add, remove or change the fields. There will always be a 1st sort field,
displayed as "1. Sort by (fieldname)". If
there is a 2nd sort field, KeyBase will display, "2.
Then sort by (another fieldname)". The 3rd sort order will be
displayed as "3. Then sort by (yet another
fieldname)". However, if there is no 2nd sort field, the prompt for
the 3rd field will not be presented. If this is the case, the 2nd sort field
will display"2. None".
To change
a sort order field or add another field, move through the list by pressing SPACE or BACKSPACE until the position you want to change is
displayed, and press ENTER. You will be presented with the
Field Selection List. Move through this list to find the field you want and
press ENTER.
A sort
order can be removed by pressing BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4. If you remove any field (except
the last field), the subsequent fields move down to replace the field that has
been removed. Remember that there must always be at least one field in the Sort
Order. If only one field remains, it cannot be deleted so must be changed
instead.
Note: If
you change the sort order of existing records, the database will be sorted
again once you return to the KeyBase menu. There may be a short delay during
the sorting process.
Once you have finished the order sorting process, press SPACE with E. KeyBase will prompt: "Record title (field 1; field 2; field 3). Change?".
The
Record Title helps you quickly identify records during lookup and is displayed
when you first enter a record in the lookup option. The Record Title consists
of up to 3 fields in any order. For example, if you may want the Record Title
to be the "Appointment Date", followed by the "Reason for
Appointment" in your Medical History database. In a Membership List
database, you may want the Record Title to be the First Name, followed by the
Last Name.
Note: The
Record Title must contain at least one field. When you first create a database,
the Record Title defaults to Field 1.
The way
that you interact with record titles is similar to how you deal with sort
orders. The first prompt is: "Record title (field 1; field 2; field 3). Change?". To leave the record title
unchanged, press N and the Associated Database prompt
will be displayed. To change the Record Title, press Y and the Record Title List will be displayed.
The
Record Title List presents each field in the Record Title one by one, therefore
allowing you to add, remove or change the fields in the same way as Sort
Orders, which are described in
18.5 Sort Orders. For example, the Record Title for
our Medical History database will automatically be set to “1. Reason for
Appointment”, “2. None”. We want to change this to “1. Appointment Date”, “2.
Reason for Appointment”.
Once you have finished with the record title, press SPACE with E. KeyBase will prompt: "Associated Database? Currently (name)".
As
described earlier, a KeyBase database consists of two different files, the
KeyBase Definition File that defines the field names, etc. and the .cdb file
that contains the actual data. Normally these files both have the same base
name, for example Medical History.kbs and Medical History.cdb. However, you may
occasionally use the same data for more than one KeyBase Definition File. The
Associated Database Name will enable you to have multiple “views” of the same
data for different purposes.
The
Associated Database Name prompt is: "Associated database name? Currently (name)". Select the default name, which is
the same name as your KeyBase Definition File. If you are creating another view
of an existing database, select the .cdb file of that database.
Note: An
associated database must be in the same folder as the KeyBase Definition file
with which it is associated.
The
Associated Database prompt is the last prompt required to define a database.
Once you have confirmed or selected it, you are prompted: “Confirm Changes?”. Press Y to go to the “KeyBase Menu” where you can start adding records to your new
database. However, if you have made a complete mess of your database and want
to start again, press N and the “Database to use?” prompt will be displayed.
Try
adding some data to your database once it is defined. You will often find that
you need to make some changes to the definition. For example, you may need
additional fields, have added fields you realize you don’t need, or find the
order the fields are presented is inappropriate, and so on. The "Review Database Definition" option in the KeyBase Menu has been
created for the purpose of reviewing and making changes to your Database
Definition.
It is
clear that developing even a basic database is not a simple task and that it
will take several attempts to get it right. It is likely that fields will be
named incorrectly, important fields will get missed out, or that you accidently
duplicate fields and so on. Because of the need to make changes to your
databases during the development process, the DataBase menu includes a
"Review Database Definition" option. At the KeyBase menu, select "Review Database Definition". The Database Definition Menu will be
displayed. This contains the following options:
Field
Definition
Sort
Order
Record
Title
Associated
Database Name
The above
options correspond to the tasks you perform when you initially create a
database as described in 18.4 Creating a new Database. However, when you review a
database definition you can access each option individually.
Once you
have reviewed and made the changes you require, exit from the Database
Definition Menu by pressing SPACE with E. If you have made changes, KeyBase
will prompt: "Confirm changes?". If you made changes you didn’t
intend to and want to abandon them, press N. To bring your changes into effect, press Y.
A KeyBase database consists of two files. The KeyBase Definition
File, which contains the field names and other information that defines the
database, and the database itself that contains the data. Normally both these
files have the same base name, but different endings or extensions. The KeyBase
Definition File has a .kbs extension and the database file a .cdb extension.
When you use the File Manager, you will not be able to read the .kbs extension
when a KeyBase Definition File name is displayed. If you need to find out if a
file has a .cdb or .kbs extension, press SPACE with I.
Because
the KeyBase Definition File and the .cdb file form a pair, KeySoft’s File
Manager takes both files into account when you operate on a KeyBase Definition
File.
When you
copy a KeyBase Definition File, both the definition file and the database are
copied. This is very useful for back‑up purposes.
When you
erase a KeyBase Definition File, KeySoft prompts: “This KeyBase definition file has an associated database called (associated database name). Erase the definition file only, the database only, or both?”.
To erase
only the KeyBase Definition File, press F. To erase the database (.cdb) file only, press D.
To erase
both the KeyBase Definition File and the database (.cdb) file, press B.
Before
erasing a database (.cdb) file, you will receive another warning. It is
possible for a .cdb file to be associated with more than one KeyBase Definition
File and you are warned of this before a .cdb file is erased.
Similarly,
when you rename a KeyBase Definition File, KeySoft also prompts to see if you
want to erase only the definition file, only the database, or both files.
One of
the peculiarities of databases is that when you delete items from them, they
may not automatically shrink back down again. Because of this, simply deleting
your unwanted records does not always free up more disk space. The "Free database space" software shrinks the database back
to the smallest size capable of storing the records remaining in the database.
To use
this utility, simply go to the KeyBase menu, and select the item: "Free database space". After running, the utility will
report how much space, if any, has been freed.
End of
Database Manager chapter.
Text
adventure games, also known as Interactive Fiction, involve fun games that are
played using text‑based input and output.
There are
nine games in z‑game file format supplied with your BrailleNote BT:
A
Tutorial Game. The Dreamhold.
Adventure
Bear's
Night Out
Curses
Dragon
Gourmet
Hunter In
Darkness
The
Underoos That Ate New York
Winter
The first
game in the list of games supplied with your BrailleNote BT is A Tutorial Game.
The Dreamhold. Because this is a tutorial game, it allows you to learn as you
play. If you have never played adventure or interactive fiction games before,
we recommend that you play The Dreamhold first.
Before
you try playing any game on your BrailleNote BT, it is important that you read
and understand the following:
1. There are many differences and
similarities between games. As you will notice, most moves you can perform in
one game can also be done in another. For example the keyword "look" will work in most games. When you
type "look" and then press ENTER you will be given a description of your
current location.
2. Humanware did not write the games
that have been supplied with your BrailleNote BT. We are simply distributing
them and if you have a problem with a specific game then Humanware will not be
able to provide support. To resolve a problem with a specific game, you will
need to contact the author of the game. To find out details about the author,
try typing the keyword "about" and press ENTER. You will usually then be given
some details about the game and information on how to contact the author.
3. The start of some of the games may
be a bit strange. This is because the games have been designed with a visual
screen in mind and the author of the game assumes that you are using a screen.
The best action to take is to wait for the spoken text to finish and then try
pressing the ENTER key once or twice. Alternatively,
press BACKSPACE with S to hear the status line.
4. Although the supplied games suit
both a speech and braille environment, you need to realize that they were
primarily designed to run on a screen. This means that you may encounter a
situation that is confusing because the author has included graphics or a
timer. The games supplied with your BrailleNote BT should not encounter such
situations. However, if you try out games that have not been supplied with your
BrailleNote BT, you should be aware that this may occasionally happen.
5. Press SPACE with H to learn about the KeySoft commands to use for
loading, saving and reviewing the game output.
Note:
This is not the help for the specific game you are playing. Each game includes
its own detailed help. To access this help, type "help" and press ENTER.
6. During the process of playing a
game, you will type in commands and press ENTER before receiving feedback from the game. There is an exception that
applies to the one key mode that is discussed in 19.7 Single Key Mode. If you are playing a game with the
text to speech on, then the response will be spoken to you from beginning to
end.
If
you are using Braille only, then you read the first part of the response from
the game on your braille display. To continue reading, press the ADVANCE key to
read to the end of the game response.
You
can also read by using the standard reading keys for reading the previous,
current, and next sentence. Specifically, SPACE with dot 1, SPACE with dots 1‑4, and SPACE with dot 4. Words and characters can also be
read in the same way as they are in the Word Processor and Book Reader, using SPACE with dot 2, SPACE with dots 2‑5, and SPACE with dot 5 for words and the commands SPACE with dots 3‑6 and SPACE with 6 for characters. You can also read from the
cursor position to the end of the current game response, by pressing SPACE with G. To hear the entire text again,
press SPACE with R to repeat it.
Note.
The standard reading keys of SPACE with dots 2‑3, SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6, and SPACE with dots 5‑6 do not behave in the same manner as
they do for reading in the Word Processor and Book Reader. These commands
should not be used until you have read 19.5 Reading Previous Moves.
As with
other applications within Keysoft, a game can be left running whilst you move
across to another application (see
1.19 Switching Between Tasks for details on task switching).
Whilst playing a game you can task switch to another application. For example
pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER with S will switch you to the calculator.
To return to the game in progress press BACKSPACE with ENTER with G.
To enter
Games from the Main Menu, use the SPACE and BACKSPACE keys to navigate the items in the
menu, until "Games" is displayed, and then press ENTER. Alternatively, you can select Games from the
Main Menu by pressing G.
You can
switch directly to the Database from anywhere in KeySoft by pressing BACKSPACE with ENTER with G.
KeySoft
prompts: "Play which game?". Press SPACE and KeySoft will then prompt: "List of game files in My Games folder". Press SPACE again, and you will be given a list of the
games that have been supplied with your BrailleNote BT. If you have loaded a
game in the past then the last loaded game name will be displayed. The standard
Keysoft operations for choosing a file are available.
If you
have never played a game before, we recommend that you first play the tutorial
game, named "Dreamhold". Cycle through the games and when "A tutorial game. The Dreamhold" is displayed, press ENTER. An introduction to the game is then spoken
that begins with "Time shifts and flattens, days and decades folding aside
like pages in a book." The text continues further and ends with "Press space to continue". The reason that you must press SPACE to continue, is that each game only presents a
certain amount of information at a time and this prompt is a way to tell you
that there is still more to learn about the game, before any commands can be
entered.
To hear
the final part of the introduction to the Dreamhold, press SPACE and you will hear: "Only the floor is
smooth...a fine white surface beneath you feet. There is a narrow gap in the
east wall". Congratulations, you have now entered the fantasy realm of
text adventure games! You now have the option of reviewing the details of the
last part of the message, using any of the review commands for reading
sentences and paragraphs (except for the commands for reading the current,
previous and next paragraph, as these will be explained later).
Now that
the introduction to The Dreamhold has finished and you know where you are in
the game, it is now up to you to perform an action. This is done by typing in a
command and pressing ENTER. A simple one is the shorthand
command, "look". Type "look" and press ENTER. The game will then respond with exactly the
same message about the room you have entered.
If you
want to repeat your last command, press BACKSPACE with R. You can also review and edit the
command text before pressing ENTER to send the command to the game.
Well
done, you have made your first move! If you are still using The Dreamhold, then
typing help and pressing enter would now be a good thing to do, to learn about
more commands.
The
Dreamhold has extensive help built into it. The following commands can be typed
in to learn more standard game commands. Type the following commands and then
press ENTER :
"Help
basics".
"Help
commands".
"Help
talking".
"Help
system".
"Help
special".
"Help
strategy".
As you can observe, the commands are quite detailed and in some cases rather long. You move around by typing directional words, such as East, West, North, South, as well as pick objects up by typing the word "get" ("get sword", for example), and put objects down by typing the word "drop" (such as, "drop sword"). These commands are not part of KeySoft, but part of the game supplied. Each game may use these commands in different ways and may extend the range of words. The commands explained in the Help section of the "A tutorial game. Dreamhold" are standard and typical of many games.
If you
are part way through reading a response in a game, you do not have to move to
the end in order to start typing your response. All you need to do is start
typing and press ENTER.
When
playing a game, it is useful to be able to mark a block of text and move it to
another location, such as the clipboard. For example, when there is a
complicated and long‑winded description that you want to re‑read
and think over before making your next move.
The
following block marker commands can be used when playing games:
To insert
a block marker, press BACKSPACE with M.
To copy a
block to the clipboard, press BACKSPACE with K.
To paste
the contents of the clipboard into the input prompt, press BACKSPACE with V.
There are
numerous special words, called system words and these are used to perform
actions outside the game, but are very important. They include:
"Restart"
‑ to restart a game.
"Restore"
‑ to load a saved game.
"Save"
‑ to save a game.
"Undo"
‑ to undo the last move (not available in all games).
"Quit"
‑ to leave a game.
Many game
commands have the option of entering shorthand. This is useful when you have
commands that you need to frequently type, often a long and tedious process.
The important examples of shorthand include:
"l"
‑ for look.
"x"
‑ for examine.
"n",
"s", "e", "w" ‑ for North, South, East and
West.
"g"
‑ for Again (to repeat the last move).
If you
are typing in Braille and using grade 2 as your preferred keyboard entry, then
single character commands will need to be preceded by a letter sign. This
prevents KeySoft from treating these single characters as a contraction and
expanding them (something which can confuse the game).
Note: The
game will attempt to default to grade 1, even if the default keyboard grade is
set to grade 2. To avoid this situation, press SPACE with O and KeySoft will prompt: "Options menu". Press G to select Grade of Braille for Keyboard Entry
and select your preferred braille grade. This selection is applied until you
choose to change it by repeating this procedure.
All the
games supplied, as well as the many others that can be played on your
BrailleNote BT handle many types of commands. However, if you misspell or type
something that the game does not understand, it will then let you know that you
have entered an invalid input. A common response is "That is not a verb I understand". Each game may respond slightly
differently but will be consistent in the response that it provides.
You will
learn that the invalid input response means the game did not understand what
you typed, either because of a spelling mistake or because you used words the
game does not recognize. Another possibility is when you have used words in a
combination that the game does not understand. Try similar words and simpler
expressions. For example "put the Piano on top of the stage" may
fail, but "put piano on stage" may succeed.
If you
want to exit a game and return to the Main Menu press SPACE with E, or type "quit" and press
ENTER. You will then usually be prompted
to confirm that you want to quit. You will then need to type Y or Yes and press ENTER to be returned to the Main Menu.
If you
are typing in Braille and using grade 2 as your preferred keyboard entry, then
single character commands will need to be preceded by a letter sign.
Some
games may have bugs in them and do not run properly or suddenly stop working.
They may expect timed responses or contain graphics that also make the game
unreadable. A mechanism has been provided to exit back to the main menu without
going through the standard way of quitting. To abandon a game at any time,
press BACKSPACE with Q. This is a last resort way of leaving
a game and it is not recommended for use under normal circumstances.
A game
can be saved by either pressing SPACE with S or by typing "save" and
pressing ENTER. You will then be presented with a
standard KeySoft save prompt and will be able to type in a name to save the
current game that you have started but not as yet completed. Because this saved
game is applicable only to the current game, it is a good idea to include the
title of the name of the game or something similar. This will allow you to
easily distinguish between the partially completed saved games and the unsaved
games. For example naming a saved game "A Bears Night Out" game as
"Bear Lounge1" will make it easier to restore the partially completed
game.
At the
save prompt you can use BACKSPACE in the usual way to save the game
in a different folder or drive.
Note:
Restoring and loading a game is the same procedure.
In order
to restore a game, follow the two step process described below. First you need
to start the game and once it is running, restore the saved game. For example,
save a "A Bears Night Out" game as "Bear Lounge1". To run
"A Bears Night Out", select "Games" and choose this game
from the list, before loading "Bear Lounge1".
To load a
saved game press ENTER with O, or type the word
"restore" and press ENTER. You will then be presented with a
standard KeySoft prompt and by repeatedly pressing SPACE, cycle through to the game you wish to
restore. Use BACKSPACE to move to a different folder or
drive, as you do elsewhere in KeySoft.
Once the
appropriate game is found, press ENTER to restore the saved game. The
previous moves will not be available as these are not kept. However, you will
be able to review the game details, where you are, your score, how many moves
you have made, what you are carrying and so on. At this stage, it is advised to
check the status line by pressing BACKSPACE with S ‑ see 19.6 Status Line) and to look around by typing
"look" and then press ENTER.
During
the time you play a game, you will type in many moves and the computer will
remember these responses. It can sometimes be quite useful to review previous
moves, for example, to check the spelling of a word.
KeySoft
stores the last 20 moves you performed through typed commands, and the response
from the game itself. Each one of these historical moves can be read in the
same manner as the current move, by using the reading keys below:
To read
from the start of the previous sentence, press SPACE with dot 1
To read
from the start of the current sentence, press SPACE with dots 1‑4
To read
from the start of the next sentence, press SPACE with dot 4
To move
back a word, press SPACE with dot 2
To read
the current word and read it, press SPACE with dots 2‑5
To move
forward a word and read it, press SPACE with dot 5
To read
continuously, press SPACE with G
To move
between historical moves, use the command for moving by section, as listed
below:
To move
to the previous move, press SPACE with dots 2‑3
To move
back to the top of the currently selected move, press SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6
To move
to the next move results, press SPACE with dots 5‑6
The game
will also store up to 20 moves. When you have made 20 moves, the oldest moves
will be removed from the list as new moves are added. The commands for jumping
to stored moves are listed below:
To jump
to the oldest stored move, press SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3
To jump
to the most recently stored move, press SPACE with dots 4‑5‑6
If you
are entering a move and need to hear the previous move again, press SPACE with dots 4‑5‑6
Note: The
moves you type are stored in the move history. If you want to review what you
did to cause the game to react in a certain way, go back one or more moves in
the history.
As
mentioned earlier, Interactive Fiction games are written with a screen in mind.
One of the downsides to this approach, is that there are a few situations where
the author of a game, considers things from a visual perspective. Part of this
issue is the status line, an area on the screen (usually at the top) which
holds information about the game, such as the title, the number of moves a
player has had and the score. Keysoft a way to access the status line via a
keystroke. The contents of the status line will be captured and it will be read
to you, when you press BACKSPACE with S. You can also read the information
once it has been captured in the same manner as any other turn, by using the
standard reading keys.
The
status line is another place where the author of a game, can write information.
In fact the status line can grow to be several lines in size and can be used to
display a lot of text. Some games have what is called a "splash
screen" at the start of a game, which is an enlarged status line. If you
hear limited words when you first start up a game, then you may wish to try
reading the status line, as it could hold some valuable information. It is a
good idea to do this before you press any other key if you have not run the
game before. By pressing BACKSPACE with S, you know if there is important
information at the start of the game.
Games
also use a mode of interacting with you that is slightly different from the
standard way in which you type commands and then allow the game to provide
feedback. This is usually only used in a small section of the game, or to
provide you with a menu based help and information system. However, some games
may use this mode continuously.
Single
key mode can occur at any time and some games use it as their primary input
device. In general, this mode is mainly used to provide a menu based help
system. In this mode you press a key, and instead of going to the command input
area, the key will be acted on immediately, that is, without you needing to
press ENTER. This can be quite confusing when
it first happens to you. If you type a letter and hear a response straight
away, press BACKSPACE with S. This provides you with status
information from one or more lines on the screen. You can use the standard
reading keys to read everything the game presents to you.
A good
example of this situation can be found in the supplied game "Bears Night
Out". If you load this game and then SPACE with H, you will hear: "How to play, a few helpful
hints". To repeat the help message, either press SPACE or dot 1. If you now press BACKSPACE with S you will hear a lot more
information. For example, for "A Bear's Night Out", you will hear:
"A Bear's night out help menu. N = Next subject, P = previous, RETURN = read subject, Q = resume game. Greater than How to Play. The scoring system ...
etc"
What you
are reading is all the information on the status screen. Firstly the title of
the game ‑ "A Bear's Night Out". Secondly, a series of relevant
single keys and what action they will perform, N = next subject, P = previous,
return = read subject and Q = resume game. Finally you will hear a series of
menu items, the first of which has a > (greater than) symbol next to it.
This indicates that the currently selected menu item is active. If we press N
then the second item, "the scoring system", will become the active
menu item and will be spoken. Press BACKSPACE with S again to repeat all the information
that was previously presented. The difference is that this time the greater
than symbol will be next to the second menu option. To access the information
for that menu item, press ENTER. You can then press Q to return to the menu and press Q again to get back to the game.
In some
games (those not supplied), this mode of operation is used as part of the game
itself, not just for help and hints. They can also contain menus within menus
and may take some time to explore. The N, P, ENTER and Q keys will work. Alternatively, you
can usually rely on capturing and reading the status line to find out specific
single keys to press that are relevant to the game.
Note: The
moves you type are not stored in the move history and you are therefore unable
to review what you did to cause the game to react in a certain way.
If you
have enjoyed the games supplied with your BrailleNote BT, you may wish to play
additional games. There is an extensive range of z‑games available, many
are free and some are commercial and must therefore be purchased. The best
starting place is the Internet, though you may have a friend or relative who
still has some of the older commercial games, in particular, from a company
called Infocom.
Many of
the games available on the Internet have been written for an older audience.
That is, usually aged 15 years and up, and several of the games are for adults
only. Those supplied with your BrailleNote BT have been carefully scrutinized,
and are deemed to be appropriate for a general audience. For younger game
players, Dragon, Winter Wonderland and The Underoos that Ate New York are the
most appropriate.
If a
parent, teacher or guardian does supply games to younger BrailleNote BT users,
Humanware recommends that these games are first reviewed by an adult. This can
be done by playing the game, or visiting www.sparkynet.com/spag/noframe.html (a
web site that contains detailed reviews about many z‑games).
The place
to find freely available games and as a useful resource for finding out about
interactive fiction is www.ifarchive.org. This web site contains many freely
available games which can be download from http://ifarchive.org/indexes/if‑archiveXgamesXzcode.html
Baf's
site ‑ http://wurb.com/if/ is an easier web site to find specific games,
although we recommend that children are supervised whilst visiting this site.
Z‑games
were invented back in the early 1980's by a company called Infocom and the
games that they wrote are still available to be purchased. Many of these games
can be played on your BrailleNote BT. A CD of all the games was produced in
1996 and can still be purchased. The CD was called "Infocom Classic Text Adventure
Masterpieces" and can be found and purchased on‑line from sites such
as amazon.com. Friends or family may also have old copies that they bought
years ago.
Note:
Games that expect timed responses or contain graphics, will not run correctly
on your BrailleNote BT.
Many
interactive fiction games contain puzzles and tasks that you must complete
before you can move further on in the game.
These
puzzles can occasionally be too difficult to solve and our advice is to firstly
persevere, try different things, talk to others about the problem, and do not
give up. When you finally solve the puzzle, you will feel a lot more
satisfaction than having to "cheat". However, sometimes you may need
a little help. The games supplied with your BrailleNote BT have the following
resources to help you:
If you
are unsure of what to do next, try typing the word "hint" and
pressing ENTER. Some of the games also have hints
in the help menu.
To get
help, press SPACE with H. If you need help when you are in
single key mode, try pressing N. Listen to the menu option and when
you hear the word "hint", then press ENTER.
If all
else fails, use the Book Reader or Word Processor to look at the supplied text
files in the My Games folder.
Learning
about interactive fiction, or text adventures as they are also called, can take
a little time and it may appear confusing at the very beginning. There are many
resources on the Internet that can help you learn how to play, or even how to
create your own games. A good starting point is the web site www.ifarchive.org
and this site has been added to your web browser favorites when you upgraded to
the current version of Keysoft.
Two other
good sites to learn about playing are:
A
Beginners Guide to playing interactive fiction which can be found at
www.microheaven.com/IFGuide/ and The Brass Lantern at
http://brasslantern.org/beginners/
If you
are interested in writing your own text adventures (in fact any sort of game) you
need to learn about the INFORM compiler, the language used to create the games.
Two good web sites for this are :
The
Inform compiler home page ‑ www.inform‑fiction.org/
and
A
tutorial in creating a game at www.inform‑fiction.org/examples/alice.html
The
inform compiler is complex and will take many hours to learn to use. This is
probably only of interest to those BrailleNote BT users who have had some
experience in programming.
When
computers were first evolving, the terminals that were used to display
information did not allow graphics to be displayed. People still wanted to play
games that created scenes and allowed players to move around in an environment
where they could interact with it; wander through caves and tunnels; find
hidden treasure and attack monsters.
The only
way that this could be done was by describing to the player what was happening
and then allowing them to type in some actions. The first game that was like
this, was called "Adventure". As you played the game, you walked
around houses, caves and tunnels. You also picked objects up, looked around,
fought monsters and solved puzzles. The text adventure had been born.
Note: A
copy of "Adventure" is included in the games supplied with your
BrailleNote BT. Because it is quite a difficult game to play, it is not
recommended as the first game you try.
Over the
next 10 years many text adventures were made and sold to early users of personal
computers. But as graphics improved this type of game became unpopular and
nearly disappeared. However in the late 1990's a group of nostalgic programmers
and authors got together and reinvented the games, calling them Interactive
Fiction (abbreviated to IF), a more appropriate description of what you are
doing when you play a game. All the games included with your BrailleNote BT are
classified as interactive fiction where you as the player must unravel puzzles,
or perform certain tasks, all of which causes the story to slowly unfold.
End of Games chapter.
The
Command summary chapter provides a list of commands used in all applications.
Speech
On Request/Off/On SPACE with PREVIOUS thumb key
Braille
On/Off SPACE with NEXT thumb key
Start
in one handed mode: Hold
down BACKSPACE while turning On BrailleNote.
BrailleNote remains in one‑handed mode until restarted in two‑handed
mode.
Start
in two‑handed mode: Hold
down ENTER while turning On BrailleNote BT.
Braille Display:
Auto
Display SPACE with dots 1‑2‑4‑5‑6
Slow
Down PREVIOUS
Speed
Up NEXT
Stop Previous with Next thumb key
Back a
Word Previous with Back thumb key
Forward
a Word Previous with Advance thumb key
Route
Cursor Beginning Back with Advance thumb key
Mode Previous with Next (Cycle x 4)
Move
forward in a menu or list: SPACE, or
SPACE with dot 4, or
ADVANCE thumb key.
Move
backward in an menu or list: BACKSPACE, or
SPACE with dot 1 or
BACK thumb key.
Select
displayed item: ENTER or
NEXT thumb key.
Select
item in menu or jump to item in list: Press
first letter.
Return
to Main Menu: SPACE with dots 1 to 6.
Exit
current option: SPACE with E.
Obtain
help for current operation: SPACE with H.
Increase
volume: ENTER with dot 4.
Decrease
volume: ENTER with dot 1.
Speak
faster: ENTER with dot 6.
Speak
slower: ENTER with dot 3.
Raise
pitch of speech: ENTER with dot 5.
Lower
pitch of speech: ENTER with dot 2.
Stop
reading, or acknowledge alarm: BACKSPACE with ENTER.
Date
announcement: SPACE with O, D or
ENTER with D.
Time
announcement: SPACE with O, T, C or
ENTER with T.
Stopwatch: SPACE with O, T, S or ENTER with W.
Keyboard
Settings: SPACE with O, K or
BACKSPACE with ENTER with K.
Review
Voice: SPACE with O, R or
BACKSPACE with ENTER with R.
Power
and Battery status: SPACE with O, P.
User
Guide: SPACE with O, U or
BACKSPACE with ENTER with H.
Next
appointment: SPACE with O, N or ENTER with N.
Repeat
the last message or prompt: SPACE with R.
Repeat
the last prompt with spelling: SPACE with O, S or ENTER with S.
Repeat
the last prompt with all punctuation: SPACE with O, H or ENTER with H.
Options
Menu: SPACE with O.
Increase
volume of media player, FM radio and streaming audio: ENTER with dots 4‑6.
Decrease
volume of media player, FM radio and streaming audio: ENTER with dots 1‑3.
Pause
media player, stop audio streaming, mute FM radio : ENTER with dots 1‑3‑4‑6.
Restart
media player, start audio streaming, unmute FM radio: ENTER with dots 1‑3‑4‑6.
Playback
last memo: ENTER with M.
Unicode
table (available at any point computer braille is in use): BACKSPACE with dots 3‑5.
UEB
symbol table (available at any point that UEB is in use): BACKSPACE with dots 3‑5.
Select
Language and Braille code: ENTER with L.
Change
Braille Grade for keyboard entry: BACKSPACE with G.
Task
menu: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5, or
SPACE with O, M, or
Go to
Word processor: BACKSPACE with ENTER with W.
Go to
Planner: BACKSPACE with ENTER with P.
Go to
Address List: BACKSPACE with ENTER with A.
Go to
E‑mail: BACKSPACE with ENTER with E.
Go to
Book Reader: BACKSPACE with ENTER with B.
Go to
Calculator: BACKSPACE with ENTER with S.
Go to
Internet: BACKSPACE with ENTER with I.
Go to
Chat (instant messaging): BACKSPACE with ENTER with C.
Go to
Terminal for Screen Reader: BACKSPACE with ENTER with T.
Go to
Media Player: BACKSPACE with ENTER with M.
Go to
Database Manager: BACKSPACE with ENTER with D.
Go to
Games: BACKSPACE with ENTER with G.
Go to
FM Radio: BACKSPACE with ENTER with F
Type
folder name and press ENTER, or
Access
folder list: SPACE.
Select
a directory path: SPACE with T.
Change Drive: BACKSPACE.
Cycle
forward through folder list: SPACE.
Cycle
back through folder list: BACKSPACE.
Jump
to folder name starting with: Press
first letter.
Display
disk name and space available: SPACE with I.
Return
to “Folder Name?” prompt: SPACE with E.
Change
order in which folders are listed: SPACE with V
Cycle
forward through folder list: SPACE.
Cycle
back through folder list: BACKSPACE.
Jump
to folder name starting with: Press
first letter.
Return
to “Folder Name?”prompt: SPACE with E.
Select
displayed folder or marked folders: ENTER.
Display
folder information: SPACE with I.
Rename
folder: BACKSPACE with R.
Delete
folder: BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
Copy
folder: BACKSPACE with Y.
ZIP
folder: BACKSPACE with Z.
Mark
or Unmark folder: SPACE with M.
Mark
or Unmark all folders: ENTER with lower g.
Change
order in which folders are listed: SPACE with V.
Type
subdirectory and press ENTER.
Access
subdirectory list: SPACE.
Select
a folder: SPACE with T.
Change
drive: SPACE with E.
Go up
a level in the directory structure: SPACE with dots 2‑3.
Cycle
forward through subdirectory list: SPACE.
Cycle
back through subdirectory list: BACKSPACE.
Jump
to subdirectory name starting with: Press
first letter.
To go
up a level in the directory structure: SPACE with dots 2‑3.
Display
disk name and space available: SPACE with I.
Return
to “Directory Name?”prompt: SPACE with E.
Cycle
forward through subdirectory list: SPACE.
Cycle
back through subdirectory list: BACKSPACE.
Select
displayed subdirectory: ENTER.
Jump
to subdirectory name starting with: Press
first letter.
To
display the subdirectories of the displayed directory: SPACE with dots 5‑6
To go
up a level in the directory structure: SPACE with dots 2‑3.
Display
subdirectory information: SPACE with I.
Rename
subdirectory: BACKSPACE with R.
Erase
subdirectory: BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
Copy
subdirectory: BACKSPACE with Y.
Mark
or Unmark subdirectory: SPACE with M.
Mark
or Unmark all subdirectories: ENTER with lower g
Return
to “DirectoryName?”prompt: SPACE with E.
Change
order in which subdirectories are listed: SPACE with V
Type
file name and press ENTER, or
Cycle
forward through list of files: SPACE.
Change
folder: BACKSPACE.
Toggle
document type to create: SPACE with X.
Cycle
forward through most recently opened files: SPACE with dots 5‑6.
Cycle
back through most recently opened files: SPACE with dots 2‑3.
Change
order in which files are listed: SPACE with V
Cycle
forward through list of files: SPACE.
Cycle
back through list of files: BACKSPACE.
Jump
to file name starting with: Press
first letter.
Select
displayed file or marked files: ENTER.
Rename
file: BACKSPACE with R.
Delete
file: BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
Move
file: BACKSPACE with M.
Copy
file:
BACKSPACE with Y.
ZIP
file:
BACKSPACE with Z.
Protect
or unprotect file: BACKSPACE with P, then P
Mark
or unmark a file: SPACE with M
Mark
or unmark all files: ENTER with lower g
Toggle
file type to view: SPACE with X.
Return
to “File Name?” prompt: SPACE with E.
File
information: SPACE with I.
Change
order in which files are listed: SPACE with V
Single‑character
wild‑card: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑6.
Multi‑character
wild‑card: SPACE with dots 3‑5.
Clear
field: SPACE with dots 3‑5‑6.
Upper
case for computer Braille: SPACE with U.
Thumb
keys On/Off toggle: SPACE with O, F.
The
following lists possible operations that can be performed with the various
components of the Scroll Wheel.
To
ESCAPE Menus or Lists, at the "Folder Name" prompt, and "List of Folders" prompt : Up arrow.
To
access CONTEXTUAL HELP at Menus or Lists, at the "Folder name" prompt, and "List of Folders" prompt: Down arrow.
Jump
to top of menus and lists: Left arrow.
Jump
to end of menus and lists: Right arrow.
To
move backward at Menus or Lists, and "List of Folders" prompt : Scroll wheel left
To
access Drive list at the "Folder Name" prompt Scroll wheel left
To
move forward at Menus or Lists, and "List of Folders" prompt : Scroll wheel right
To
access Folder list at the "Folder Name" prompt Scroll wheel right
To
perform the ENTER function in Menus or Lists, at the "Folder Name" prompt, and "List of Folders" prompt : Center button.
The following items are accessed via the
Options Menu, and have not previously been covered under 20.1.3 Options Available at Any Point.
Access
Options menu: SPACE with O.
Grade
of Braille: SPACE with O, G, or
BACKSPACE with G, or
Set
Grade 1: BACKSPACE with A.
Set
Grade 2: BACKSPACE with B.
Set
Computer Braille: BACKSPACE with J.
Set
Nemeth Code (Word Processor) BACKSPACE
with N.
Braille
Options: SPACE with O, B.
Visual
Display: SPACE with O, V.
Insertion: SPACE with O, I, or
ENTER with I.
Read
continuously: SPACE with G.
Stop
reading: BACKSPACE with ENTER, or SPACE with dots 1‑4‑6.
Top of
file: SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3.
Bottom
of file: SPACE with dots 4‑5‑6.
Previous
character: SPACE with dot 3.
Current
character: SPACE with dots 3‑6.
Next
character: SPACE with dot 6.
Previous
word: SPACE with dot 2.
Current
word: SPACE with dots 2‑5.
Next
word: SPACE with dot 5.
Start
of line: SPACE with dots 1‑3.
End of
line: SPACE with dots 4‑6.
Start
of next line: SPACE with dots 4‑5.
Review‑only
mode: SPACE with X.
Information
(filename and word count): SPACE with I.
Open
Previous Document: SPACE with dots 1‑2‑5‑6.
Check
or change Reading Mode: SPACE with M.
In Sentence and Paragraph reading Mode, the
following commands review sentences and paragraphs.
Previous
sentence: SPACE with dot 1.
Current
sentence: SPACE with dots 1‑4.
Next
sentence: SPACE with dot 4.
Previous
paragraph: SPACE with dots 2‑3.
Current
paragraph: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
Next
paragraph: SPACE with dots 5‑6.
In Line Mode, the same
commands review lines and sections.
In Column mode, the same commands review the
current word on the line above or below and section above or below.
Find
where cursor is: SPACE with wh sign (dots 1‑5‑6).
Go to: SPACE with dots 1‑2‑6.
Previous
sentence: SPACE with dot 1.
Next
sentence: SPACE with dot 4.
Go to
next Tab position: BACKSPACE with T.
Define
Place Marker: BACKSPACE with D.
Jump
to Place Marker: SPACE with J.
Find: SPACE with F.
Find
Next Occurrence: SPACE with N.
Open
hyperlink: ENTER
with dots 2-6.
Cycle
forward through list of files: SPACE.
Cycle
back through list of files: BACKSPACE.
Jump
to file name starting with: Press
first letter.
Display
directory information: SPACE with I.
Change
order in which files are listed: SPACE with V
Return
to “File Name?” prompt: SPACE with E.
Delete
menu: SPACE with D.
Backspace: BACKSPACE.
Delete
current character: BACKSPACE with dots 3‑6.
Delete
current word: BACKSPACE with dots 2‑5.
Delete
previous word: BACKSPACE with dot 2.
Delete
to end of sentence: BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4 in Sentence and paragraph reading
mode.
Delete
to end of paragraph: BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6 in Sentence and paragraph reading
mode.
Delete
to end of line: BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4 in Line and Column reading modes.
Delete
to end of section: BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6 in Line and Column reading modes.
Delete
to end of document: BACKSPACE with dots 4‑5‑6.
Find
and replace: BACKSPACE with F.
New line: ENTER.
New
Page: SPACE with P.
TAB: SPACE with T.
Binding
space: ENTER with B.
Format
menu: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6.
Document
Layout: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6, L, or
BACKSPACE with L.
Style
of presentation: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6, S, or BACKSPACE with S.
Center
line: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6, C, or ENTER with C.
Right
justify line: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6, R, or ENTER with R.
Page
settings: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6, P, or BACKSPACE with P.
Template
Menu: BACKSPACE with ENTER with dots 2‑3‑4‑6.
Insertion
menu: SPACE with O, I, or
ENTER with I.
Insert
the Time: SPACE with O, I, T.
Insert
the Date: SPACE with O, I, D.
Insert
calculator result
or
whole calculation: SPACE with O, I, C.
Ink‑print
Settings Menu: Format
menu, I.
Ink‑print
layout: Ink‑print
Settings Menu, L, or BACKSPACE with ENTER with L.
Ink‑print
only inclusion: Ink‑print
Settings Menu, I, or BACKSPACE with ENTER with J.
Start
ink‑print exclusion: Ink‑print
Settings Menu, S, or BACKSPACE with ENTER with dots 3‑4.
End
ink‑print exclusion: Ink‑print
Settings Menu, E, or BACKSPACE with ENTER with dots 2‑6.
Ink‑print
translation options: Ink‑print
Settings Menu, T, or BACKSPACE with ENTER with O.
Ink‑print
page settings: Ink‑print
Settings Menu, P.
Font
control for translated or print document: ENTER with F.
Underline: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6, U, or ENTER with U.
Font: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑4‑6, F, or ENTER with F.
Braille Settings Menu: Format
menu, B.
Braille
layout: Braille
Settings Menu, L, or BACKSPACE with ENTER with L.
Braille
only inclusion: Braille
Settings Menu, I, or BACKSPACE with ENTER with J.
Start
Braille exclusion: Braille
Settings Menu, S, or BACKSPACE with ENTER with dots 3‑4.
End
Braille exclusion: Braille
Settings Menu, E, or BACKSPACE with ENTER with dots 2‑6.
Braille
page settings: Braille
Settings Menu, P.
Braille
translation options: Braille
Settings Menu, T, or BACKSPACE with ENTER with O.
Braille
grade: Braille
Settings Menu, B, or ENTER with G.
Block
menu: SPACE with B.
Append
block to clipboard: Block
menu, A.
Bottom
marker insertion: Block
menu, B.
Copy
block to clipboard: Block
menu, C.
Delete
block: Block
menu, D.
Erase
file and exit Keyword: Block
menu, E.
Insert
file: Block
menu, I.
Move
block to clipboard: Block
menu, M.
Paste
clipboard: Block
menu, P.
Read
block: Block
menu, R.
Store
block: Block
menu, S.
Top
marker insertion: Block
menu, T.
Zap
block markers: Block
menu, Z.
Correct
Braille grade of block (English only) Block menu, B
Language
and Braille grade change (if more than one language is enabled): Block menu, L.
Mark
character: Block
menu, SPACE with dots 3‑6.
Mark
word: Block
menu, SPACE with dots 2‑5.
Mark
sentence or line: Block
menu, SPACE with dots 1‑4.
Mark
paragraph or section: Block
menu, SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
Find
where the cursor is: SPACE with wh sign (dots 1‑5‑6).
Query
value of Tab stop: SPACE with wh sign (dots 1‑5‑6).
Switch
document: SPACE with dots 1‑2‑5‑6.
Exit
and Save document: SPACE with E.
Save
document: SPACE with S.
Quit
document: BACKSPACE with Q.
Spelling
Checker menu: SPACE with dots 1‑6, the ch sign.
Check
from cursor to end of document: Spell
Check menu, C.
Document
check: Spell
Check menu, D.
Lookup
Word in dictionary: Spell
Check menu, L.
Word
check: Spell
Check menu, W.
Paragraph
or section check: Spell
Check menu, P.
Select
Language: Spell
Check menu, S.
At the
Spelling Checker "Option?" prompt, the following are valid:
Review
the word: SPACE with dots 2‑5.
Ignore
the word: I.
Skip
this occurrence of the word: SPACE with dot 5.
Add
the word to the dictionary: A.
Correct
the word: C, new word.
Review
suggested spellings: S.
Look
up a word in the dictionary: L.
Read
sentence containing word: SPACE with dots 1‑4.
Read
paragraph containing word: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
During
Suggested Spelling Review:
Display
original word: I. Second press spells word.
Spell
current suggestion: SPACE with O, then S.
Use
suggestion: ENTER.
Return
to option prompt: SPACE with E.
Spell
current word in dictionary: SPACE with O, then S.
Display
original word: I.
Replace
original word: ENTER.
Template
Menu: BACKSPACE with ENTER with dots 2‑3‑4‑6.
Insert
Field: Template
Menu, I, or BACKSPACE with I.
Force
inclusion of line: Template
Menu, F.
Start conditional suppression: Template Menu, S.
End conditional suppression: Template Menu, E.
Mark comment line: Template
Menu, M.
The
following lists possible operations that can be performed with the various
components of the Scroll Wheel.
To
Escape: Up arrow
To
toggle navigation element according to the current reading mode: Down arrow
To
move to previous element or cell: Turn wheel counterclockwise
To
move to next element or cell: Turn wheel clockwise
To
jump to top of file: Left arrow.
To
Jump to bottom of file: Right arrow.
To
start reading: Center button.
Start listening: SPACE with G
Stop listening: BACKSPACE with ENTER
Cycle
through the list of Daisy elements: SPACE with T
Move
back by current Daisy element: SPACE with dots 1‑3
Move
forward by current Daisy element: SPACE with dots 4‑6
Enter
the list of headings: SPACE with V
Go to
any page, line or column: SPACE with dots 1‑2‑6
Toggle
the narrator voice on or off: ENTER with V
Define
a new place marker: BACKSPACE with D
Jump
to an existing place marker: SPACE with J
Enter
or view a text note: BACKSPACE with N
Increase
the narrator's volume: ENTER with dots 4‑6
Decrease
the narrator's volume: ENTER with dots 1‑3
Speed
up the narrator's voice: ENTER with dot 6
Slow
down the narrator's voice: ENTER with dot 3
Increase
the tone of the narrator's voice: ENTER with dot 5
Decrease
the tone of the narrator's voice: ENTER with dot 2
Go
forward reading: SPACE with G
Stop
reading: BACKSPACE with ENTER
Top of
file: SPACE with dots1‑2‑3
Bottom
of file: SPACE with dots 4‑5‑6
Find
text string: SPACE with F
Find Next
Occurrence of the last search: SPACE with N
Previous
character: SPACE with dot 3
Current
character: SPACE with dots 3‑6
Next
character: SPACE with dot 6
Previous
word: SPACE with dot 2
Current
word: SPACE with dots 2‑5
Next
word: SPACE with dot 5
Previous
sentence: SPACE with dot 1
Current
sentence: SPACE with dots 1‑4
Next
sentence: SPACE with dot 4
Previous
paragraph: SPACE with dots 2‑3
Current
paragraph: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6
Next
paragraph: SPACE with dots 5‑6
Determine
the current reading mode: SPACE with M
Change
the reading mode: SPACE with M repeatedly
Announce
Key Mode: SPACE with W
Book
information: SPACE with I
Current
position information: SPACE with dots 1‑5‑6
Go to
any page, line or column: SPACE with dots 1‑2‑6
Advance
the display by one width: ADVANCE
Move
back the display by one width: BACK
To
move the display forward by a chosen amount of text: NEXT
To
move the display back by a chosen amount of text: PREVIOUS
Start
the display advancing automatically: SPACE with dots 1‑2‑4‑5‑6
Slow
down: PREVIOUS
Speed
up: NEXT
Stop: PREVIOUS + NEXT thumb key
To
move the display back a word: PREVIOUS + BACK thumb key
To
move the display forward a word: PREVIOUS + ADVANCE thumb key
Turn
speech on or off: SPACE + PREVIOUS thumb key
Turn
the Braille display On or Off: SPACE + NEXT thumb key
Route
cursor to the beginning of the Braille display: BACK + ADVANCE thumb key
Cycle
through the 4 Braille display modes: PREVIOUS + NEXT
change
the text document reading grade: ADVANCE with NEXT repeatedly
For on
the fly translation Braille grade: p (preferred) f (six dot) h (8 dots)
Block commands: SPACE with B
To
open another book: SPACE with dots 1‑2‑5‑6
To
check what document you have selected: SPACE with I
The
following lists possible operations that can be performed with the various
components of the Scroll Wheel.
DAISY
Navigation
To
ESCAPE: Up arrow.
To
cycle through list of DAISY elements: Down arrow.
To
move back by current Daisy element: Turn wheel counterclockwise
To
move forward: Turn wheel clockwise
To
start reading: Center button.
To
jump to top of file: Left arrow.
To
Jump to bottom of file: Right arrow.
Text
book navigation
The
Scroll wheel commands are the same as in the Word Processor
To
ESCAPE: Up arrow.
To
toggle navigation element according to the current reading mode: Down arrow.
To
move to previous element or cell: Turn wheel counterclockwise
To move
to next element or cell: Turn wheel clockwise
To
start reading: Center button.
To
jump to top of file: Left arrow.
To
Jump to bottom of file: Right arrow.
1 A or lowered A, etc.
Plus: dots 3‑4‑6.
Minus: dots 3‑6.
Multiplied
by: dots 1‑6.
Divided
by: dots 3‑4.
Equals: ENTER.
Decimal
point: dots 4‑6.
Negative
number: SPACE with dots 3‑6.
Percent
operator: dots 1‑4‑6.
Left
parenthesis: dots 1‑2‑3‑5‑6.
Right
parenthesis: dots 2‑3‑4‑5‑6.
Set
decimal places: SPACE with dots 4‑6.
Clear
calculation: SPACE with dots 3‑5‑6.
Delete
last key: BACKSPACE.
Display
calculation or result: SPACE with C.
Read
last number or sign entered: SPACE with dots 2‑5.
Square
root: dots 3‑4‑5.
Squared: SPACE with dots 3‑4‑5.
Decimal
exponent: X.
Log to
base e of: N.
e to
the power of: SPACE with N.
Log to
base 10 of: L.
10 to
the power of: SPACE with L.
To the
power of: dots 4‑5.
To the
power of 1 divided by: SPACE with dots 4‑ 5.
Degrees: T, then D.
Radians: T, then R.
PI: Y.
Sine: T, S.
Arc sine: SPACE with T, S.
Cosine: T, C.
Arc
cosine: SPACE with T, C.
Tan: T, T.
Arc
tan: SPACE with T, T.
Clear
memory: SPACE with K, then 0 through 9.
Store
memory: SPACE with S, then 0 through 9.
Add to
memory: SPACE with A, then 0 through 9.
Recall
memory: SPACE with M, then 0 through 9.
display
memory: M, then 0 through 9.
Announce
Key Mode: SPACE with W.
Enter
a fraction:
Type the numerator, BACKSPACE with dots 3‑4 and then the denominator
Enter
a mixed number: Type
the whole number, SPACE and then the fraction.
Convert
a decimal to a fraction: SPACE with dots 3‑4.
Convert
a fraction to a decimal: SPACE with dots 3‑4, D
Convert
a fraction to its lowest terms: Type
the fraction and press ENTER.
Convert
a mixed number to an improper fraction: SPACE with dots 3‑4.
Convert
an improper fraction to a mixed number: SPACE with dots 3‑4 M, I.
Convert
a fraction to a percentage: dots 1‑4‑6.
Take
the reciprocal of a fraction: SPACE with dots 3‑4.
Find
an equivalent fraction to the displayed fraction: SPACE with dots 3‑4.
Data
Set Menu: BACKSPACE with S.
Check
whether the data entry is on or off: SPACE with I.
Find
the result of a calculation without entering it into the data set: dots 1‑2‑3‑4‑5‑6.
Statistical
Functions Menu/Statistical Functions Review List: S.
Sample
size: N.
Mean: M.
Median: D.
Mode: O.
Minimum: I.
Maximum: X.
Sample standard deviation: S.
Population standard deviation: P.
Sum of
values: V.
Sum of
the square of values: Q.
Copy a
value to the clipboard: BACKSPACE with K.
Enter
the Data Set Review Mode: SPACE with X.
Go to
the previous data item: BACKSPACE.
Go to
the next data item: SPACE.
Go to
the first data item in the data set: SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3.
Go to
the last data item in the data set: SPACE with dots 4‑5‑6.
Find a
specific number in a data set: SPACE with F.
Find
the next occurrence of the same number in the data set: SPACE with N.
Change
the View Option: SPACE with V.
Entry
order: E.
Frequency
order: F.
Numerical
order: N.
Delete
the current data item: BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
1: A, etc.
Plus: dots 2‑3‑5.
Minus: dots 3‑6.
Multiplied by: dots 2‑3‑6.
Divided by: dots 2‑5‑6.
Equals: ENTER.
Decimal point: dot 2.
Negative
number: SPACE with dots 3‑6.
Percent
operator: P.
Left
parenthesis: dots 1‑2‑6.
Right
parenthesis: dots 3‑4‑5.
Set
decimal places: SPACE with dot 2.
Clear
calculation: BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
Delete
last key: BACKSPACE.
Display
calculation or result: SPACE with C.
Read
last number or sign entered: SPACE with dots 2‑5.
Square
root: dots 1‑4‑6.
Squared: dots 2‑3.
Decimal
exponent: X.
Log to
base e of: N.
e to
the power of: SPACE with N.
Log to
base 10 of: L.
10 to the power of: SPACE with L.
To the
power of: dots 3‑4‑6.
To the
power of 1 divided by: SPACE with dots 3‑4‑6.
Degrees: T, then D.
Radians: T, then R.
Pi: Y.
Sine: T, S.
Arc
sine: SPACE with T, S.
Cosine: T, C.
Arc
cosine: SPACE with T, C.
Tan: T, T.
Arc
tan: SPACE with T, T.
Clear
memory: SPACE with K, then 0 through 9.
Store
memory: SPACE with S, then 0 through 9.
Add to
memory: SPACE with A, then 0 through 9.
Recall
memory: SPACE with M, then 0 through 9.
display
memory: M, then 0 through 9.
display
Calculation Formula: PREVIOUS with NEXT.
Announce
Key Mode: SPACE with W.
Enter
a fraction: Type the numerator, BACKSPACE with dots 3‑4 and then the denominator
Enter
a mixed number: Type
the whole number, dots 3‑4‑5‑6 (the number sign) and then the fraction.
Convert
a decimal to a fraction: SPACE with dots 3‑4.
Convert
a fraction to a decimal: SPACE with dots 3‑4, D.
Convert
a fraction to its lowest terms: Type
the fraction and press ENTER.
Convert
a mixed number to an improper fraction: SPACE with dots 3‑4.
Convert
an improper fraction to a mixed number: SPACE with dots 3‑4 M.
Convert
a fraction to a percentage: P.
Take
the reciprocal of a fraction: SPACE with dots 3‑4.
Find
an equivalent fraction to the displayed fraction: SPACE with dots 3‑4.
Data
Set Menu: BACKSPACE with S.
Check
whether the data entry is on or off: SPACE with I.
Find
the result of a calculation without entering it into the data set: dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
Statistical
Functions Menu/Statistical Functions Review List: S.
Sample
size: N.
Mean: M.
Median: D.
Mode: O.
Minimum: I.
Maximum: X.
Sample standard deviation: S.
Population standard deviation: P.
Sum of
values: V.
Sum of
the square of values: Q.
Copy a
value to the clipboard: BACKSPACE with K.
Enter
the Data Set Review Mode: SPACE with X.
Go to
the previous data item: BACKSPACE.
Go to
the next data item: SPACE.
Go to
the first data item in the data set: SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3.
Go to
the last data item in the data set: SPACE with dots 4‑5‑6.
Find a
specific number in a data set: SPACE with F.
Find
the next occurrence of the same number in the data set: SPACE with N.
Change
the View Option: SPACE with V.
Entry
order: E.
Frequency
order: F.
Numerical
order: N.
Delete
the current data item: BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
1: A, etc.
Plus: dots 2‑3‑5.
Minus: dots 3‑6.
Multiplied by: dots 2‑3‑6.
Divided by: dots 3‑4.
Equals: ENTER.
Decimal point: dots 2‑5‑6.
Negative
number: SPACE with dots 3‑6.
Percent
operator: P.
Left
parenthesis: dots 1‑2‑6.
Right
parenthesis: dots 3‑4‑5.
Set
decimal places: SPACE with dot 2‑5‑6.
Clear
calculation: BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
Delete
last key: BACKSPACE.
Display
calculation or result: SPACE with C.
Read
last number or sign entered: SPACE with dots 2‑5.
Square
root: dots 1‑4‑6.
Squared: SPACE with dots 1‑4‑6.
Decimal
exponent: X.
Log to
base e of: N.
e to
the power of: SPACE with N.
Log to
base 10 of: L.
10 to the power of: SPACE with L.
To the
power of: dots 3‑5.
To the
power of 1 divided by: SPACE with dots 3‑5.
Degrees: T, then D.
Radians: T, then R.
Pi: Y.
Sine T, S.
Arc
sine: SPACE with T, S.
Cosine: T, C.
Arc
cosine: SPACE with T, C.
Tan: T, T.
Arc
tan: SPACE with T, T.
Clear
memory: SPACE with K, then 0 through 9.
Store
memory: SPACE with S, then 0 through 9.
Add to
memory: SPACE with A, then 0 through 9.
Recall
memory: SPACE with M, then 0 through 9.
display
memory: M, then 0 through 9.
Display
Calculation Formula: PREVIOUS with NEXT.
Announce
Key Mode: SPACE with W.
Enter
a fraction: Type
the numerator, BACKSPACE with dots 3‑4 and then the denominator.
Enter
a mixed number: Type
the whole number, dots 3‑4‑5‑6 (the number sign) and then the fraction.
Convert
a decimal to a fraction: SPACE with dots 3‑4.
Convert
a fraction to a decimal: SPACE with dots 3‑4, D.
Convert
a fraction to its lowest terms: Type
the fraction and press ENTER.
Convert
a mixed number to an improper fraction: SPACE with dots 3‑4.
Convert
an improper fraction to a mixed number: SPACE with dots 3‑4 M.
Convert
a fraction to a percentage: P.
Take
the reciprocal of a fraction: SPACE with dots 3‑4.
Find
an equivalent fraction to the displayed fraction: SPACE with dots 3‑4.
Data
Set Menu: BACKSPACE with S.
Check
whether the data entry is on or off: SPACE with I.
Find
the result of a calculation without entering it into the data set: dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
Statistical
Functions Menu/Statistical Functions Review List: S.
Sample
size: N.
Mean: M.
Median: D.
Mode: O.
Minimum: I.
Maximum: X.
Sample standard deviation: S.
Population standard deviation: P.
Sum of
values: V.
Sum of
the square of values: Q.
Copy a
value to the clipboard: BACKSPACE with K.
Enter
the Review Mode: SPACE with X.
Go to
the previous data item: BACKSPACE.
Go to
the next data item: SPACE.
Go to
the first data item in the data set: SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3.
Go to
the last data item in the data set: SPACE with dots 4‑5‑6.
Find a
specific number in a data set: SPACE with F.
Find
the next occurrence of the same number in the data set: SPACE with N.
Change
the View Option: SPACE with V.
Entry
order: E.
Frequency
order: F.
Numerical
order: N.
Delete
the current data item: BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
The
following lists possible operations that can be performed with the various
components of the Scroll Wheel.
To
ESCAPE: Up arrow.
To
clear: Down arrow.
Result: Left arrow.
Details: Right arrow.
To
move to previous cell: Turn wheel counterclockwise
To
move to next cell: Turn wheel clockwise
ENTER: Center button.
At the calendar:
Move
by day: SPACE with dot 3 or dot 6.
Move
by week: SPACE with dot 2 or dot 5.
Move
by month: SPACE with dot 1 or dot 4.
Move
by year: SPACE with dots 2‑3 or dots 5‑6.
In a
planner page:
Go to
a new date: SPACE with dots 1‑2‑6, then,
Select
Forward or Back: F or B, then,
(where
n equals a number)
Move
by n day/s: nD.
Move
by n week/s: nW.
Move
by n month/s: nM.
Move
by n year/s: nY.
Previous
entry: SPACE with dot 1.
Current
entry: SPACE with dots 1‑4.
Next
entry: SPACE with dot 4.
Note: In Notes, the above commands move by
sentence or line as in KeyWord.
All
entries for previous day: SPACE with dots 2‑3.
All
entries for current day: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
All
entries for next day: SPACE with dots 5‑6.
Top of
current day: SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3.
Bottom
of current day: SPACE with dots 4‑5‑6.
Note: In Notes, the top and bottom commands
take you to top or bottom of the notes.
Read
continuously: SPACE with G, or SPACE with dots 1‑2‑4‑5.
Find
text string: SPACE with F.
Find
next occurrence: SPACE with N.
Appointment
menu: SPACE with dots 3‑4.
Schedule
appointment: Appointment
menu, S, or SPACE with dots 2‑6.
Review
or Modify appointment: Appointment
menu, R, or BACKSPACE with R.
Cancel
appointment: Appointment
menu, C, or BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
Hear
next appointment anywhere
in
KeySoft: SPACE with O, N, or ENTER with N.
Go to
next overlapping appt: SPACE with 3‑4‑5‑6.
Go to
previous overlapping appt: SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3‑6.
When the cursor is in the date line of a
calendar page:
Number
of appointments and all‑day events: SPACE with I.
Date
and days away from current date: SPACE with dots 1‑5‑6.
When the cursor is in an appointment:
Summary
of recurrences and alarm status: SPACE with I.
Date
and time and days away from current date: SPACE with dots 1‑5‑6.
Move
to next occurrence: SPACE with dots 3‑5‑6.
Move
to previous occurrence: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑6.
Patterns:
Daily: Type
number of days
Weekly,
Yearly: Sunday:
Su.
Monday: Mo.
Tuesday: Tu.
Wednesday: We.
Thursday: Th.
Friday: Fr.
Saturday: Sa.
every
day: v.
weekdays: d.
weekend
days: e.
Note: you can type less letters for Monday,
Wednesday or Friday as their initial letters are unique. You can also type more
of the name of a day, for example, Thurs for Thursday.
Weeks
between occurrences: Type
number of weeks.
Monthly,
Yearly: first
week: 1.
second
week: 2.
third
week: 3.
fourth
week: 4.
last
week: l.
Months
between occurrences: Type
number of months.
Number
of Recurrences: (not all options documented)
Days: SPACE with dot 6.
Weeks: SPACE with dot 5.
Months: SPACE with dot 4.
Years: SPACE with dots 5‑6.
Acknowledge alarm: BACKSPACE with ENTER
then:
Read alarm details: R.
Cancel alarm: C.
Postpone alarm: P.
Go to
diary entry: G.
The
following lists possible operations that can be performed with the various
components of the Scroll Wheel.
To
ESCAPE: Up arrow
Selecting
date:
To
toggle Day, Week, Month or Year: Down arrow
To
move back by current element:Turn wheel counterclockwise
To
move forward by current element:Turn wheel clockwise
Reading
the entries:
To
toggle between day and appointment: Down arrow
To
move back by current element:Turn wheel counterclockwise
To
move forward by current element:Turn wheel clockwise
To
access appointment menu when reading entries: Center button
To
move to top of current day when reading entries : Left arrow.
To
move to bottom of current day when reading entries: Right arrow
To
acknowledge alarm: Down, Left or Right arrow
To
ENTER at the "Date Selection" prompt or in Alarm mode: Center button
Move from planner page
to
calendar: SPACE with E.
Hear
the current time: ENTER with T.
Hear
today's date: ENTER with D.
Query
day, date and duration: SPACE with wh sign (dots 1‑5‑6).
Announce
Key Names: SPACE with W.
Previous
record: SPACE with dots 2‑3.
Current
record: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
Next
record: SPACE with dots 5‑6.
Previous
field: BACKSPACE.
Current
field: SPACE with dots 1‑4.
Next
field: SPACE.
Previous
word: SPACE with dot 2.
Current
word: SPACE with dots 2‑5.
Next
word: SPACE with dot 5.
Add a
completed record: SPACE with dots 2‑6.
Change
current or other field: BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
Clear
current field: SPACE with dots 3‑5‑6.
Delete
record: BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
Copy
record to Clipboard: SPACE with B.
The
following lists possible operations that can be performed with the various
components of the Scroll Wheel.
To
ESCAPE : Up arrow
To
toggle Record / Field in the Address Selection list: Down arrow
To
move to Previous element in Entry list:Turn wheel counterclockwise
To
move to Next element in Entry list:Turn wheel clockwise
To
move to the top of the list in Entry list: Left arrow.
To
move to the bottom of the list in Entry list: Right arrow.
To
ENTER in Entry list: Center button
To
move to the first record in the Address Selection list: Left arrow.
To
move to the last record in the Address Selection list: Right arrow
To
move back in Address Selection list: Turn wheel counterclockwise
To
move forward in Address Selection list: Turn wheel clockwise
To
modify current field in Address selection list: Center button
Read E‑mail: ENTER.
Next
field: SPACE.
Previous
field: BACKSPACE.
Next E‑mail: SPACE with dots 5‑6.
Previous
E‑mail: SPACE with dots 2‑3.
Move E‑mail
to Trash: BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
Mark E‑mail: SPACE with M.
Mark
All: SPACE with dots 2‑6, then A.
Search: SPACE with F.
E‑mail
Action Menu: SPACE with dots 2‑6.
Move
forward by day: BACKSPACE with dot 6.
Move
back a day: BACKSPACE with dot 3.
Move
forward by week: BACKSPACE with dot 5.
Move
back a week: BACKSPACE with dot 2.
Move
forward by month: BACKSPACE with dot 4.
Move
back a month: BACKSPACE with dot 1.
Move
forward by year: BACKSPACE with dots 5‑6.
Move
back a year: BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3.
Move
to first e‑mail: SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3.
Move
to last e‑mail: SPACE with dots 4‑5‑6.
Select
prompted folder: ENTER.
Delete
folder: BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
Rename
folder: ENTER with R.
display
Number of e‑mails: SPACE with I.
Send e‑mail: Y.
Return
to “Send to?” prompt: N.
Save e‑mail
as a Draft: D.
Print e‑mail: P.
Emboss e‑mail: E.
Abandon
e‑mail without sending: SPACE with E.
At
“Empty Trash?” prompt,
Leave
items in Trash: N.
Delete
items in Trash: Y.
Review
items in Trash: R.
Options
after selecting Review,
Move
to next e‑mail: SPACE with dots 5‑6.
Move
to previous e‑mail: SPACE with dots 2‑3.
Delete
e‑mail being reviewed: BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
Trash
Folder Menu: SPACE with dots 2‑6.
then,
Restore
e‑mail to original folder: R.
Empty Trash folder: E.
The
following lists possible operations that can be performed with the various
components of the Scroll Wheel.
To
ESCAPE in e‑mail folder: Up arrow
To
access e‑mail action menu: Down arrow
To
move to the top of the list in e‑mail folder : Left arrow.
To
move to the bottom of the list in e‑mail folder: Right arrow.
To
move to Previous message: Turn wheel counterclockwise
To
move to Next message: Turn wheel clockwise
To ENTER: Center button
Add a
record: SPACE with dots 2‑6.
Retrieve
last record: SPACE with B then R.
Paste
the clipboard into a field: SPACE with B then P.
Remove
a field entry from the current record: SPACE with dots 3‑5‑6 then ENTER.
Go to
the next record: SPACE with dots 5‑6.
Go to
the previous record: SPACE with dots 2‑3.
Next
field: SPACE.
Previous
field: BACKSPACE.
Next
word: SPACE with dot 5.
Previous
word: SPACE with dot 2.
To
hear the current record: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
Exit
from the list of records: SPACE with E.
Delete
a record: BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
Edit
current record: BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
Copy a
field to the clipboard: BACKSPACE with K.
Copy a
record to clipboard: SPACE with B then C.
To
delete a field: BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
To
review or change field settings: BACKSPACE with O.
To
insert a field before the current field: SPACE with dots 2‑6.
To
cycle through the field data types: SPACE with dots 3‑4.
To
move current field one up in the list: BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3.
To
move current field one down in the list: BACKSPACE with dots 5‑6.
Exit
the field definition list: SPACE with E.
To
change a sort order or a record title field: ENTER.
To
remove a sort order or a record title field: BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
The
following lists possible operations that can be performed with the various
components of the Scroll Wheel.
To
ESCAPE: Up arrow
To
toggle Record / Field in the Address Selection list: Down arrow
To
move to the top of the list in Entry list: Left arrow.
To
move to the bottom of the list in Entry list: Right arrow.
To
move to Previous field in Entry list:Turn wheel counterclockwise
To
move to Next field in Entry list:Turn wheel clockwise
To
ENTER in Entry list: Center button
To
move to the first record in the Address Selection list: Left arrow.
To
move to the last record in the Address Selection list: Right arrow
To
move back in Address Selection list: Turn wheel counterclockwise
To
move forward in Address Selection list: Turn wheel clockwise
To
modify current field in Address selection list: Center button
Go to
game: BACKSPACE with ENTER with G.
Save
the game: SPACE with S.
Load
the game: ENTER with O.
Abandon
the game: BACKSPACE with Q.
Enter
the next move: Type
a single/multiple character.
Insert
the last move entered: BACKSPACE with R.
Insert
block marker: BACKSPACE with M.
Copy
block to the clipboard: BACKSPACE with K.
Paste
the contents of the clipboard to the input prompt: BACKSPACE with V.
View
the current status: BACKSPACE with S.
Move
forward from the history item: SPACE with dots 2‑3.
Move
backward from the history item: SPACE with dots 5‑6.
In Sentence and Paragraph reading Mode, the
following commands review sentences and paragraphs.
Move
back a sentence : SPACE with dot 1.
Hear
the current sentence: SPACE with dots 1‑4.
Move
forward a sentence: SPACE with dot 4.
Move
back a word: SPACE with dot 2.
Hear
the current word: SPACE with dots 2‑5.
Move
forward a word: SPACE with dot 5.
Move
back a character: SPACE with dot 3.
Hear
the current character: SPACE with dots 3‑6.
Move
forward a character: SPACE with 6.
The
following lists possible operations that can be performed with the various
components of the Scroll Wheel.
To
ESCAPE Sentence and Paragraph reading mode: Up arrow
To
toggle navigation element according to current reading mode: Down arrow
To
move to the top of the file: Left arrow.
To
move to the bottom of the file: Right arrow.
To
move to Previous element: Turn wheel counterclockwise
To
move to Next element: Turn wheel clockwise
To start reading: Center button
These commands only function in Text or
Computer Braille documents.
Unicode
character entry: BACKSPACE with dots 3‑5.
Select
Unicode Table: SPACE, then ENTER.
Select
Unicode Character: SPACE or letter, then ENTER.
Review
or change a way a
character
is displayed in Braille: Unicode
Table, SPACE with D.
Review
or change a macro for
a character: Unicode
Table, SPACE with K.
Open a
new URL: SPACE with E.
Go
forward one page: ENTER with F.
Go
back one page: ENTER with B.
Save
web page: SPACE with S.
Refresh
Page: ENTER with R.
Hear
URL contents: SPACE with I then repeat the command.
Modem
disconnect: SPACE with O then C, D.
Progress
Tone Volume: SPACE with O then R. Move through the list until the
"Progress Tone Volume" setting is displayed.
Internet
Options Menu: BACKSPACE with O.
Favorites
Menu: ENTER with lower f.
Toggle
Browser Scripting setting: BACKSPACE
with J.
Toggle
Browser Profile: BACKSPACE
with P.
Re-analyze
Page: BACKSPACE with R. Allows KeyWeb to
reload the page data without reloading the page entirely. Useful if certain
items or links are not visible.
"Click"
on an item: ENTER.
Read
Input Control Prompt: SPACE with R.
Move
to next element: SPACE with dots 4‑6.
Move
to previous element: SPACE with dots 1‑3.
Current
element: SPACE with dots 1‑3‑4‑6.
Change
element type: SPACE with T.
Link: L.
Input
Control: I.
Heading: H.
Frame: F.
Link
or input control: B.
Move
to next link or input control: NEXT thumb key.
Move
to previous link or input control: PREVIOUS thumb key.
Change
option for NEXT and PREVIOUS thumb keys: SPACE with O, B. Review the list for "Function
of previous and next thumb keys".
Move
backwards: BACKSPACE.
Move forwards: SPACE.
Jump
to link starting with: Press first letter.
Table
Mode: SPACE with M repeatedly until "Table
Mode" is displayed.
Query
Cursor Position: SPACE with wh sign (dots 1‑5‑6).
While in Table Mode:
Move
forward one cell along a row: SPACE with dot 4.
To
hear the current cell in a row: SPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
Move
back one cell along a row: SPACE with dot 1.
Move
down one cell in a column: SPACE with dots 5‑6.
To
hear the current cell in a column: SPACE with dots 1‑4.
Move
down one cell in a column: SPACE with dots 2‑3.
History
command list: ENTER with dots 2‑3‑6.
Navigate
to current record: ENTER.
Next
Field: SPACE.
Previous
field: BACKSPACE.
Next
History record: SPACE with dots 5‑6.
Previous
History record: SPACE with dots 2‑3.
Forward
one Day: BACKSPACE with dot 6.
Back
one Day: BACKSPACE with dot 3.
Forward
one week: BACKSPACE with dot 5.
Back
one week: BACKSPACE with dot 2.
Previous
Domain name: BACKSPACE with dot 4.
Next
Domain name: BACKSPACE with dot 1.
Newest
History record: SPACE with dots 1‑2‑3.
Oldest
History record: SPACE with dots 4‑5‑6.
Sort
by domain/day: SPACE with S.
Note: history is presented alphabetically for
day or domain.
The
following lists possible operations that can be performed with the various
components of the Scroll Wheel.
To
ESCAPE: Up arrow.
To
change move type in Navigation mode: Down arrow.
To
move to previous element: Turn wheel left
To
move to next element: Turn wheel right
To
ENTER: Center button.
To
jump to top of page in Navigation mode: Left arrow.
To
Jump to end of page in Navigation mode: Right arrow.
To
toggle between Row and Column in Table mode: Down arrow.
To
jump to top of file in Table mode: Left arrow.
To
Jump to bottom of file in Table mode: Right arrow.
To
move to previous cell: Turn wheel left
To
move to next cell: Turn wheel right
To
toggle between Record and Field in History mode: Down arrow.
To
jump to First record in History mode: Left arrow.
To
Jump to Last record in History mode: Right arrow.
To
move back: Turn wheel left
To
move forward: Turn wheel right
Start a new conversation: S
To
access contact list from "Chat with" prompt: SPACE
Options:
O
General
Settings: G
To
cycle through options: SPACE with dots 3‑4
Contact
commands:
Review
Contact Information: SPACE with I
Delete
Contact: BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4
Rename
Contact: BACKSPACE with R
Change
Contact list filter: SPACE with X
Go to
StopWatch: ENTER with W, or
SPACE with O, then T, S.
Stop
or Start Stopwatch: SPACE.
Set
time back to Zero: BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
Stop
stopwatch altogether: SPACE then BACKSPACE with dots 1‑4.
Hear
elapsed time: SPACE with R.
Hear
elapsed time again: L.
The
following lists possible operations that can be performed with the various
components of the Scroll Wheel.
To
ESCAPE: Up arrow.
To set
time back to zero: Down arrow.
To
start or stop stopwatch: Left or Right arrow, or turn wheel left or right.
To hear
time elapsed: Center button.
Go to
Media Player: BACKSPACE with ENTER with M.
Volume
increase relative to speech: ENTER with dots 4‑6.
Volume
decrease relative to speech: ENTER with dots 1‑3.
Pause
track: BACKSPACE with ENTER or ENTER with dots 1‑3‑4‑6.
Restart
track: BACKSPACE with ENTER, SPACE with G, or ENTER with dots 1‑3‑4‑6.
Pause
audio streaming: ENTER with dots 1‑3‑4‑6.
Restart
audio streaming: ENTER with dots 1‑3‑4‑6.
Skip
forward 1%: SPACE with dot 6.
Skip
back 1%: SPACE with dot 3.
Skip
forward 5%: SPACE with dot 5.
Skip
back 5%: SPACE with dot 2.
Skip
forward 10%: SPACE with dot 4.
Skip
back 10%: SPACE with dot 1.
Elapsed
time of total time: SPACE with wh sign (dots 1‑5‑6).
Track
Information: SPACE with F.
Stop
track and exit: SPACE with E.
Record
a memo: Either
press Record button or go through the Media Center menu.
Stop
Recording: Either
press Record button or go through the Media Center menu.
Playback
a memo: ENTER with M.
Go to
FM Radio: BACKSPACE with ENTER with F.
Turn
off FM Radio: SPACE with E.
Toggle
speaker on/off: ENTER with S.
Go to
next preset station: SPACE.
Go to
previous preset station: BACKSPACE.
Go to
preset station starting with a particular character: ALPHA or DIGIT.
Enter
a new preset station: BACKSPACE with R.
Rename
preset station: Select
the preset then press BACKSPACE with R.
Delete
radio preset: Select
the preset then press BACKSPACE with dots 2‑3‑5‑6.
Jump
directly to a frequency: SPACE with F.
Scan
frequency forward: SPACE with dot 4.
Scan
frequency backward: SPACE with dot 1.
Jump
frequency forward by 1MHz: SPACE with dot 5.
Jump
frequency back by 1MHz: SPACE with dot 2.
Jump
frequency forward by 100kHz: SPACE with dot 6.
Jump
frequency back by 100kHz: SPACE with dot 3.
Turn
the FM Radio volume up relative to speech: ENTER with dots 4‑6.
Turn
the FM Radio volume down relative to speech: ENTER with dots 1‑3.
Mute
or unmute the FM Radio: ENTER with dots 1‑3‑4‑6.
The
following lists possible operations that can be performed with the various
components of the Scroll Wheel.
To
ESCAPE: Up arrow.
To
skip 1%, 5%, 10% toggle: Down arrow.
To
jump to start of track: Left arrow.
To Jump
to end of track: Right arrow.
To
skip backward: Turn wheel left
To
skip forward: Turn wheel right
To
Pause / Restart track: Center button.
End of Command Summary.
Appendix A User Settings for BrailleNote BT.
The following
User settings should be set‑up and/or checked on the BrailleNote BT.
A.1
Speech;
volume, rate, and pitch.
Refer to: 1.18.5 Setting Volume and Pitch
A.2
Time
and date set, and in preferred format.
Refer to 1.24 Time and Date: or 16.3 Date and Time Set.
A.3
Keyboard
input voice setting; words, characters, or off.
Refer to 1.15.1 Help Messages.
Refer to: 5.4 Braille Display Options, then Section 5.4.8 Braille Code.
A.5
Braille
grade for keyboard input.
Refer to: 5.5.1 Preferred Keyboard Braille Grade
Refer to 5.4 Braille Display Options, then 5.4.9 Calculator Braille Code.
A.7 Computer Braille language.
Refer 5.4 Braille Display Options, then 5.4.10 Computer Braille Table.
A.8 Computer Braille; 6 or 8 dot.
Refer to 5.4.12 Display Computer Braille using 6 or 8 dots.
A.9
Spelling
checker dictionary language installed.
Open the "Demonstration Document" in the "General" folder, and access the spelling checker by
pressing SPACE with dots 1‑6, the ch sign. If the spelling dictionary has not
been installed you will advised that there is no language currently installed,
followed by a prompt to choose the language. Press SPACE repeatedly until the dictionary name is
displayed, for example "USA Spelling Dictionary," then press ENTER.
A.10
Address
list data base installed.
From the
Main Menu select the Address List, then press A to add an address. You will be advised if the address list data base
does not exist, followed by the prompt to create a data base called "Address List." Press Y to create the data base named "Address List."
A.11
E‑mail
data base installed.
From the
Main Menu select the E‑mail option, then press S for Setup, and select the "Directory of E‑mail Account" item from the Setup menu. Press A to add a service. You will be advised if the
data base for "Directory of E‑mail Accounts" does not exist, followed by the
prompt to create a data base called "Directory of E‑mail Accounts." Press Y to create the data base.
You will
then be placed in the entry list for the "Directory of E‑mail Accounts." Unless you wish to continue on and
setup a "Directory of E‑mail Accounts" record, press SPACE with E to exit, and answer N to the prompt "Add this record?"
End of
Appendix A ‑ User Settings.
Appendix B Information on BookShare.
At the
time of publishing, the Bookshare service is only available to residents of the
United States. Up to date information on Bookshare and eligibility to join etc
is available from their website: http://www.bookshare.org.
For
information on the special offer for BrailleNote BT users as well as how to
join, go to:
http://www.bookshare.org/Braillenote
For
membership information, go to:
http://www.bookshare.org/web/AboutMembership.html
To join
Bookshare, go to:
https://www.bookshare.org/web/MembersJoinForm.html
For
Frequently Asked Questions about Bookshare, go to:
http://www.bookshare.org/web/SupportFAQ.html
There is
also a book available called "Finding ebooks on the Internet",
by BrailleNote user Anna Dresner, available through National Braille Press,
which tells you how to find, download, and access electronic books from a
variety of sources, including Bookshare. Sources for free public domain eBooks,
as well as for commercially available accessible eBooks, are also included. For
more information, including a link to the table of contents, visit:
http://www.nbp.org/ebook.html
End of
Appendix B ‑ Info on Bookshare
Appendix C Troubleshooting the BrailleNote BT.
If the
BrailleNote BT does not respond as you expect, there are a number of things you
should check:
Make sure that the BrailleNote BT has power.
Connect
the AC adapter. The BrailleNote BT should detect the AC adapter when the
adapter is powered on even if the BrailleNote BT is switched off. The message "AC adapter on," is normally spoken.
Switch off then on again.
If the
BrailleNote BT does not respond, leave the AC adapter connected. Wait 10
minutes, then try switching the BrailleNote BT off, then on again.
Resets – The three types and their uses.
Please
note that when you perform a Reset, a counter will appear on the right end side
of the display. Should a crash occur during reboot, the number listed will help
technical support identify the problem.
Press
just the reset button when:
‑
asked to by an upgrade/new feature installation program to install new drivers
and restart KeySoft
‑
the BrailleNote BT stops responding for any reason (assuming the problem is not
that the power is off, or the battery is flat!)
‑
the BrailleNote BT generally seems to not be its normal self.
Switch
the BrailleNote BT on and gently press the reset switch with a pointed
instrument until it clicks, then release it. The BrailleNote BT should beep
immediately. After a moment, a chime should sound and the BrailleNote BT will
display "KeySoft, version 9.0x. Build (number)."
After a
pause KeySoft displays: "Main Menu."
The
software Reset is equivalent to restarting a PC. It has the advantage of being
able to cleanly shutdown the Apex's operating system. The disadvantage is that
if there is a major problem with the Apex's operating system, it might be
unable to power down properly.
You will
lose data if you have to press reset while a file is open in the word processor
or the planner is open or an e‑mail is being written and changes have
been made and not saved before reset is pressed. Same in the address list if
changes are made to a record and not saved before reset is pressed.
To
perform a Hardware Reset, press and hold the RESET button for at least 5
seconds.
This has
the same effect as removing and reinserting the battery. All data currently in
use will be lost. The Apex will require more time to restart than it would for
a Software Reset.
A beep
will be heard and the message "Starting Keysoft" will be displayed.
After a
short while the system will announce:
"KeySoft version 9.0x. Build (number)" followed by "Main Menu."
The Clear
Settings Reset is the equivalent of a Software Reset where all user settings
are deleted. This erases all configurations, but does not affect your data.
Make sure
the BrailleNote BT is switched on. Hold down dots 4‑5‑6 and gently press the reset switch
with a pointed instrument until it clicks. The BrailleNote BT should beep
immediately. Continue to hold down dots 4‑5‑6.
A beep
will be heard and the message "Starting Keysoft" will be displayed.
After a
short while the system will announce:
"KeySoft version 9.0x. Build (number)" followed by "Main Menu."
Telephone
your BrailleNote BT Distributor for further advice.
C.5
Best
Practices When Turning On/Off your Apex.
When you
switch off your Apex, it is never completely off. It is rather in standby mode,
drawing very little power from the battery. For this reason, when you switch
your Apex on, the Apex immediately resumes your previous task without any boot
up necessary.
If you are
experiencing any issues related to your Apex not turning on immediately after
you switch the power on, make sure you are following the best practices below:
1. If your Apex is turned on but has
gone to sleep because you have not used it for 10 minutes, make sure you wake
the device up first with a key press before switching the power off.
2. Whenever you turn the power off,
ensure you wait at least 15 seconds before switching it back on.
3. If you switch the power on and
nothing occurs, wait at least 15 seconds as there are some random occasions
where it takes the system a few seconds to restore your previous state. If
nothing occurs after 15 seconds, then a soft reset may be necessary.
4. If your unit is not switching on and
restoring your previous state, simply holding the ENTER key while switching the device on can bring it up immediately.
End of
Appendix C ‑ Troubleshooting.
Appendix D Computer Braille Reference List.
The
BrailleNote BT supports USA and UK Computer Braille in both 6 dot and 8 dot
forms.
This
Appendix contains 6 tables which give you the dot combination used for each
ASCII character available in each of the supported configurations. The 6 tables
are listed in the following order:
United
States 6 dot Computer Braille ‑ Lower Case
United
States 6 dot Computer Braille ‑ Upper Case
United
States 8 dot Computer Braille
United
Kingdom 6 dot Computer Braille ‑ Lower Case
United
Kingdom 6 dot Computer Braille ‑ Upper Case
United
Kingdom 8 dot Computer Braille
Each
table has two columns. The first column contains the actual ASCII character
enclosed in single quote marks so that it is read at all punctuation levels.
The second column lists the dots required to obtain this character. Each table
is divided into sections according to the type of character. For example, the
lower case letters are in one section, the digits are in another, and so on.
The sections are divided by a blank line.
Reading
of this Appendix may be best accomplished by using KeyWord to select Appendix D
from the Manual folder on the Flash disk.
To find a
particular character, first find the start of the relevant table. Next set your
Reading Mode to the "Line Reading" option, by pressing SPACE with M as many times as necessary. Now,
using the "Read next line" command, which is SPACE with dot 4, start reading the first line of
the table. As soon as you have heard the character name, if it is not the
character you are looking for, press SPACE with dot 4 again to cut off the speech and
instantly start reading the next line. If you determine that the character you
are looking for is in another section, press SPACE with dots 5‑6 to start reading the next section.
Continue skimming through by line or section until you find the character you
are looking for. Now let KeySoft read the whole line, and you will hear the dot
combination for this character.
D.1 United States Computer Braille.
D.1.1
United
States 6 dot Computer Braille ‑ Lower Case
exclamation mark '!' 2,3,4,6
quotation mark '"' 5
hash
sign '#' 3,4,5,6
dollar
sign '$' 1,2,4,6
percent '%' 1,4,6
ampersand '&' 1,2,3,4,6
apostrophe ''' 3
left
bracket '(' 1,2,3,5,6
right
bracket ')' 2,3,4,5,6
asterisk '*' 1,6
plus sign '+' 3,4,6
comma ',' 6
hyphen '‑' 3,6
period '.' 4,6
forward
slash '/' 3,4
colon ':' 1,5,6
semi colon ';' 5,6
less
than '<' 1,2,6
equals '=' 1,2,3,4,5,6
greater
than '>' 3,4,5
question
mark '?' 1,4,5,6
underscore '_' 4,5,6
grave
accent '`' 4
left
curly brace '{' 2,4,6
right
curly brace '}' 1,2,4,5,6
upright
slash '|' 1,2,5,6
tilde '~' 4,5
zero '0' 3,5,6
one '1' 2
two '2' 2,3
three '3' 2,5
four '4' 2,5,6
five '5' 2,6
six '6' 2,3,5
seven '7' 2,3,5,6
eight '8' 2,3,6
nine '9' 3,5
'a' 1
'b' 1,2
'c' 1,4
'd' 1,4,5
'e' 1,5
'f' 1,2,4
'g' 1,2,4,5
'h' 1,2,5
'i' 2,4
'j' 2,4,5
'k' 1,3
'l' 1,2,3
'm' 1,3,4
'n' 1,3,4,5
'o' 1,3,5
'p' 1,2,3,4
'q' 1,2,3,4,5
'r' 1,2,3,5
's' 2,3,4
't' 2,3,4,5
'u' 1,3,6
'v' 1,2,3,6
'w' 2,4,5,6
'x' 1,3,4,6
'y' 1,3,4,5,6
'z' 1,3,5,6
D.1.2
United
States 6 dot Computer Braille Upper Case
The
following table shows the combinations which change when a keystroke is
immediately preceded by SPACE with U or when Caps Lock has been turned
on by pressing SPACE with U twice in succession.
'A' 1
'B' 1,2
'C' 1,4
'D' 1,4,5
'E' 1,5
'F' 1,2,4
'G' 1,2,4,5
'H' 1,2,5
'I' 2,4
'J' 2,4,5
'K' 1,3
'L' 1,2,3
'M' 1,3,4
'N' 1,3,4,5
'O' 1,3,5
'P' 1,2,3,4
'Q' 1,2,3,4,5
'R' 1,2,3,5
'S' 2,3,4
'T' 2,3,4,5
'U' 1,3,6
'V' 1,2,3,6
'W' 2,4,5,6
'X' 1,3,4,6
'Y' 1,3,4,5,6
'Z' 1,3,5,6
at
symbol '@' 4
left
square bracket '[' 2,4,6
right
square bracket ']' 1,2,4,5,6
back
slash '\' 1,2,5,6
carat
symbol '^' 4,5
underscore '_' 4,5,6
D.1.3 United States 8 dot Computer Braille
exclamation mark '!' 2,3,4,6
quotation mark '"' 5
hash sign '#' 3,4,5,6
dollar sign '$' 1,2,4,6
percent '%' 1,4,6
ampersand '&' 1,2,3,4,6
apostrophe ''' 3
left bracket '(' 1,2,3,5,6
right bracket ')' 2,3,4,5,6
asterisk '*' 1,6
plus sign '+' 3,4,6
comma ',' 6
hyphen '‑' 3,6
period '.' 4,6
forward slash '/' 3,4
colon ':' 1,5,6
semi colon ';' 5,6
less than '<' 1,2,6
equals '=' 1,2,3,4,5,6
greater than '>' 3,4,5
question mark '?' 1,4,5,6
at symbol '@' 4,7
left
square bracket '[' 2,4,6,7
back
slash '\' 1,2,5,6
right
square bracket ']' 1,2,4,5,6
carat
sign '^' 4,5,7
underscore '_' 4,5,6,7
'_' 4,5,6
grave accent '`' 4
left
curly brace '{' 2,4,6
upright
slash '|' 1,2,5,6
right
curly brace '}' 1,2,4,5,6
tilde '~' 4,5
Delete 8
Delete 1,2,3,4,5,6
'0' 3,5,6
'1' 2
'2' 2,3
'3' 2,5
'4' 2,5,6
'5' 2,6
'6' 2,3,5
'7' 2,3,5,6
'8' 2,3,6
'9' 3,5
'A' 1,7
'B' 1,2,7
'C' 1,4,7
'D' 1,4,5,7
'E' 1,5,7
'F' 1,2,4,7
'G' 1,2,4,5,7
'H' 1,2,5,7
'I' 2,4,7
'J' 2,4,5,7
'K' 1,3,7
'L' 1,2,3,7
'M' 1,3,4,7
'N' 1,3,4,5,7
'O' 1,3,5,7
'P' 1,2,3,4,7
'Q' 1,2,3,4,5,7
'R' 1,2,3,5,7
'S' 2,3,4,7
'T' 2,3,4,5,7
'U' 1,3,6,7
'V' 1,2,3,6,7
'W' 2,4,5,6,7
'X' 1,3,4,6,7
'Y' 1,3,4,5,6,7
'Z' 1,3,5,6,7
'a' 1
'b' 1,2
'c' 1,4
'd' 1,4,5
'e' 1,5
'f' 1,2,4
'g' 1,2,4,5
'h' 1,2,5
'i' 2,4
'j' 2,4,5
'k' 1,3
'l' 1,2,3
'm' 1,3,4
'n' 1,3,4,5
'o' 1,3,5
'p' 1,2,3,4
'q' 1,2,3,4,5
'r' 1,2,3,5
's' 2,3,4
't' 2,3,4,5
'u' 1,3,6
'v' 1,2,3,6
'w' 2,4,5,6
'x' 1,3,4,6
'y' 1,3,4,5,6
'z' 1,3,5,6
D.2 United Kingdom Computer Braille.
D.2.1
United
Kingdom 6 dot Computer Braille Lower Case.
exclamation mark '!' 3,4,5,6
quotation mark '"' 4
hash
sign '#' 5,6
dollar
sign '$' 4,5,6
percent '%' 4,6
ampersand '&' 1,2,3,4,6
apostrophe ''' 3
left
bracket '(' 4,5
right
bracket ')' 3,4,5
asterisk '*' 3,5
plus sign '+' 2,3,5
comma ',' 2
hyphen '‑' 3,6
period '.' 2,5,6
forward
slash '/' 3,4
colon ':' 2,5
semi colon ';' 2,3
less
than '<' 2,3,6
equals '=' 2,3,5,6
greater
than '>' 3,5,6
question mark '?' 2,6
grave accent '`' 2,3,4,6
left
curly brace '{' 1,2,3,5,6
upright
slash '|' 5
right
curly brace '}' 2,3,4,5,6
tilde '~' 6
Delete 3,4,6
'0' 1,2,3,4,5,6
'1' 1,6
'2' 1,2,6
'3' 1,4,6
'4' 1,4,5,6
'5' 1,5,6
'6' 1,2,4,6
'7' 1,2,4,5,6
'8' 1,2,5,6
'9' 2,4,6
'a' 1
'b' 1,2
'c' 1,4
'd' 1,4,5
'e' 1,5
'f' 1,2,4
'g' 1,2,4,5
'h' 1,2,5
'i' 2,4
'j' 2,4,5
'k' 1,3
'l' 1,2,3
'm' 1,3,4
'n' 1,3,4,5
'o' 1,3,5
'p' 1,2,3,4
'q' 1,2,3,4,5
'r' 1,2,3,5
's' 2,3,4
't' 2,3,4,5
'u' 1,3,6
'v' 1,2,3,6
'w' 2,4,5,6
'x' 1,3,4,6
'y' 1,3,4,5,6
'z' 1,3,5,6
D.2.2
United
Kingdom 6 dot Computer Braille Upper Case
The
following table shows the combinations which change when a keystroke is
immediately preceded by SPACE with U or when Caps Lock has been turned
on by pressing SPACE with U twice in succession.
'A', 1
'B', 1,2
'C', 1,4
'E', 1,5
'D', 1,4,5
'F', 1,2,4
'G', 1,2,4,5
'H', 1,2,5
'I', 2,4
'J', 2,4,5
'K', 1,3
'L', 1,2,3
'M', 1,3,4
'N', 1,3,4,5
'O', 1,3,5
'P', 1,2,3,4
'Q', 1,2,3,4,5
'R', 1,2,3,5
'S', 2,3,4
'T', 2,3,4,5
'U', 1,3,6
'V', 1,2,3,6
'W', 2,4,5,6
'X', 1,3,4,6
'Y', 1,3,4,5,6
'Z', 1,3,5,6
at
symbol '@', 2,3,4,6
left
square bracket '[', 1,2,3,5,6
back
slash '\', 5
right
square bracket ']', 2,3,4,5,6
carat
sign '^', 6
underscore '_', 3,4,6
D.2.3 United Kingdom 8 dot Computer Braille
exclamation mark '!' 3,4,5,6
quotation mark '"' 4
hash sign '#' 5,6
dollar sign '$' 4,5,6
percent '%' 4,6
ampersand '&' 1,2,3,4,6
apostrophe ''' 3
left bracket '(' 4,5
right bracket ')' 3,4,5
asterisk '*' 3,5
plus sign '+' 2,3,5
comma ',' 2
hyphen '‑' 3,6
period '.' 2,5,6
forward slash '/' 3,4
colon ':' 2,5
semi colon ';' 2,3
less than '<' 2,3,6
equals '=' 2,3,5,6
greater than '>' 3,5,6
question mark '?' 2,6
at symbol '@' 2,3,4,6,7
left
square bracket '[' 1,2,3,5,6,7
back
slash '\' 5,7
right
square bracket ']' 2,3,4,5,6,7
carat
sign '^' 6,7
underscore '_' 3,4,6,7
grave
accent '`' 2,3,4,6
left
curly brace '{' 1,2,3,5,6
upright
slash '|' 5
right
curly brace '}' 2,3,4,5,6
tilde '~' 6
Delete 3,4,6
'0' 1,2,3,4,5,6
'1' 1,6
'2' 1,2,6
'3' 1,4,6
'4' 1,4,5,6
'5' 1,5,6
'6' 1,2,4,6
'7' 1,2,4,5,6
'8' 1,2,5,6
'9' 2,4,6
'A' 1,7
'B' 1,2,7
'C' 1,4,7
'D' 1,4,5,7
'E' 1,5,7
'F' 1,2,4,7
'G' 1,2,4,5,7
'H' 1,2,5,7
'I' 2,4,7
'J' 2,4,5,7
'K' 1,3,7
'L' 1,2,3,7
'M' 1,3,4,7
'N' 1,3,4,5,7
'O' 1,3,5,7
'P' 1,2,3,4,7
'Q' 1,2,3,4,5,7
'R' 1,2,3,5,7
'S' 2,3,4,7
'T' 2,3,4,5,7
'U' 1,3,6,7
'V' 1,2,3,6,7
'W' 2,4,5,6,7
'X' 1,3,4,6,7
'Y' 1,3,4,5,6,7
'Z' 1,3,5,6,7
'a' 1
'b' 1,2
'c' 1,4
'd' 1,4,5
'e' 1,5
'f' 1,2,4
'g' 1,2,4,5
'h' 1,2,5
'i' 2,4
'j' 2,4,5
'k' 1,3
'l' 1,2,3
'm' 1,3,4
'n' 1,3,4,5
'o' 1,3,5
'p' 1,2,3,4
'q' 1,2,3,4,5
'r' 1,2,3,5
's' 2,3,4
't' 2,3,4,5
'u' 1,3,6
'v' 1,2,3,6
'w' 2,4,5,6
'x' 1,3,4,6
'y' 1,3,4,5,6
'z' 1,3,5,6
a
acute 'á' 8
a
grave 'à' 4,6,7,8
a
circumflex 'â' 5,6,7,8
Cap A
diaeresis 'Ä' 2,5,6,7,8
a
diaeresis 'ä' 4,5,6,7,8
Cap a
ring 'Å' 3,4,7,8
a ring 'å' 1,2,3,4,6,7,8
cap a
diphthong 'Æ' 1,2,6,7,8
a diphthong 'æ' 1,6,7,8
feminine
ordinal 'ª' 1,2,3,4,6,8
masculine
ordinal 'º' 3,8
c cedilla 'ç' 7,8
cap C cedilla 'Ç' 3,7,8
cap E acute 'É' 1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8
e acute 'é' 4,7,8
e grave 'è' 3,5,7,8
e circumflex 'ê' 4,5,7,8
e diaeresis 'ë' 3,4,5,7,8
i acute 'í' 3,4,5,6,8
i grave 'ì' 3,6,7,8
i circumflex 'î' 2,7,8
i diaeresis 'ï' 2,3,5,7,8
cap N tilde 'Ñ' 4,6,8
n
tilde 'ñ' 4,5,6,8
o
acute 'ó' 4,8
o
grave 'ò' 1,5,6,7,8
o
circumflex 'ô' 1,4,6,7,8
cap O
diaeresis 'Ö' 2,4,6,7,8
o
diaeresis 'ö' 1,4,5,6,7,8
u
acute 'ú' 5,6,8
u
grave 'ù' 1,2,4,5,6,7,8
u
circumflex 'û' 1,2,4,6,7,8
Cap U
diaeresis 'Ü' 2,5,7,8
u diaeresis 'ü' 3,4,5,6,7,8
y
diaeresis 'ÿ' 1,2,5,6,7,8
Exclamation
inverted '¡' 3,6,8
question
mark inverted '¿' 4,5,8
Start
of '¬' 3,5,8
Logical
NOT '⌐' 3,4,5,8
Right
double angle quotation '»' 3,4,8
Left
double angle quotation '«' 2,5,6,8
Pounds
sign '£' 2,3,6,7,8
cent
sign '¢' 2,3,7,8
Florin
sign '₣' 2,6,7,8
Yen
sign '₧' 3,5,6,7,8
Peseta sign '¥' 2,3,5,6,7,8
half '½' 2,3,5,8
quarter '¼' 2,8
Plus or minus '±' 1,2,3,4,5,8
Greater
than or equal to '÷' 1,2,3,6,8
Less
than or equal to '≤' 2,3,4,8
Greater
than or equal to '≥' 1,2,3,5,8
Nearly
equals '≈' 2,4,5,6,8
Identity
symbol '≡' 1,2,3,4,8
Superscript
2 '²' 2,3,4,5,6,8
Superscript
n 'ⁿ' 5,8
Radical
symbol '√' 1,2,3,5,6,8
Integral
sign '⌠' 2,3,4,5,8
Integral
sign '⌡' 1,3,6,8
degree
sign '°' 1,3,4,6,8
Intersection
symbol '∩' 1,3,5,8
Greek
epsilon 'ε' 1,3,4,5,8
'·' 1,3,5,6,8
'∙' 1,3,4,5,6,8
Solid
square '■' 6,8
Greek alpha 'α' 2,3,4,6,8
Greek beta, 'ß' 1,8
Greek Gamma 'Γ' 1,2,8
Greek pi 'π' 1,4,8
Greek Sigma 'Σ' 1,4,5,8
Greek sigma 'σ' 1,5,8
Greek mu 'µ' 1,2,4,8
Greek
tau 'τ' 1,2,4,5,8
Greek
Fi 'Φ' 1,2,5,8
Greek
Theta 'Θ' 2,4,8
Greek Omega 'Ω' 2,4,5,8
Greek delta 'δ' 1,3,8
Infinity
'∞' 1,2,3,8
Greek
fi 'φ' 1,3,4,8
Upper
left '┌' 1,3,5,6,7,8
Center
box '│' 1,4,6,8
Lower
Left '└' 2,3,4,6,7,8
Upper
right '┐' 2,6,8
Lower
right '┘' 1,3,4,5,6,7,8
Middle
box '┬' 1,2,7,8
Left
middle '├' 1,4,7,8
Box
intersection '┼' 1,5,7,8
Right
middle '┤' 1,4,5,6,8
Middle
box '┴' 1,7,8
Center
box '─' 1,4,5,7,8
Double
upper left '╔' 2,4,7,8
Double
center box '║' 2,5,8
Double
lower left '╚' 1,2,5,7,8
Double
upper right '╗' 2,3,8
Double
lower right '╝' 2,3,6,8
Double
middle box '╦' 1,3,7,8
Double
left middle '╠' 1,2,3,7,8
Double
box intersection '╬' 1,3,4,5,7,8
Double
right middle '╣' 2,4,6,8
Double
middle box '╩' 2,4,5,7,8
Double
center box '═' 1,3,4,7,8
Double
horizontal upper right '╕' 1,2,5,6,8
Double
horizontal right middle '╡' 1,5,6,8
Double
horizontal left middle '╞' 1,2,4,8
Double
horizontal lower right '╛' 3,5,6,8
Double
horizontal upper right '╒' 1,3,6,8
Double
horizontal lower left '╘' 2,3,4,5,7,8
Double
horizontal top middle '╤' 1,2,3,4,5,7,8
Double
horizontal intersection '╪' 1,3,4,6,7,8
Double
horizontal bottom middle '╧' 1,3,5,7,8
Double
vertical upper right '╖' 1,2,4,5,6,8
Double
vertical left middle '╟' 1,2,4,5,7,8
Double
vertical right middle '╢' 1,2,4,6,8
Double
vertical lower right '╜' 2,3,5,6,8
Double
vertical upper left '╓' 1,2,3,6,7,8
Double
vertical intersection '╫' 2,4,5,6,7,8
Double
vertical lower left '╙' 2,3,4,7,8
Double
vertical top middle '╥' 1,2,3,5,7,8
Double
vertical bottom middle '╨' 1,2,3,4,7,8
Fill
character '░' 1,2,3,4,5,6,8
Fill
character '▒' 1,6,8
Fill
character '▓' 1,2,6,8
Solid
fill '▄' 5,7,8
Solid
fill '▐' 6,7,8
Solid
fill '▀' 3,4,6,7,8
Solid
fill '█' 1,2,3,5,6,7,8
Solid
fill '▌' 2,3,4,5,6,7,8
End of
Appendix D‑ Computer Braille Reference List.
Appendix E BrailleNote Apex Manufacturer Warranty.
Manufacturer Warranty
This
device is a high quality product, built and packaged with care. All units and
components are guaranteed against any operational defects as follows:
US and
Canada: One (1) year
United
Kingdom: One (1) year
Continental
Europe: Two (2) years
Australia
and New Zealand: One (1) year
Other
countries: One (1) year
Warranty
covers all parts (except battery) and labor. If any defect should occur, please
contact your local distributor or the manufacturer technical assistance line.
Note:
Warranty terms may periodically change, please consult our website for the
latest information.
Conditions
and Limitations:
No replacement
or repair covered by the warranty will be carried out unless the unit is
accompanied by a copy of the original bill of purchase. Please retain your
original. If the unit has to be returned, please use the original packaging.
This warranty applies to all cases where the damage is not a result of improper
use, mistreatment, negligence or acts of God.
For
customer support, please contact the HumanWare office nearest you or view our
Web site at:
www.humanware.com/braillenote_support.
Global:
support@humanware.com
North
America: 1 (800) 722 3393 or e‑mail to us.support@humanware.com
Europe:
01933 415800 or e‑mail to eu.support@humanware.com
Australia
/ Asia: (02) 9686 2600 or e‑mail to au.sales@humanware.com
End of
Appendix E‑ BrailleNote Apex Manufacturer Warranty
User guide version 20140307.
ActiveSync
about • 21, 276,
282, 319
file
synchronization • 280, 287
installing • 277,
278
Add e-mail account
• 232
Address list
adding an address •
199
changing a field •
203
clearing a field •
203
copy to address
list file • 209
copy to braille
document • 144, 209
copy to text
document • 144, 209
copying a record •
204, 234
copying addresses
to a file • 209
creating an address
list • 210
deleting a record •
204
embossing • 205
entry list • 199
fields • 199
inserting an
address into a document • 204
look up address •
201
manipulating
databases • 212
printing • 206
record matching •
202
searching • 201
select an address
file • 210, 212
selection list •
201
synchronising with
Outlook • 284
templates • 149,
206, 207
templates for
embossing • 205
Advanced word processing
about • 121
overview • 121
Alarm
about • 196
acknowledge • 197
repeat period • 197
ring time • 197
Set up • 197
setting • 196
status • 194
volume • 197
Application program
KeySoft • 325
Application
switching • 11, 18, 81, 237, 368
Appointments
canceling • 195
editing • 194
entering • 186
modifying • 193,
195
next • 106
recurring • 187,
188
rescheduling • 193,
195
reviewing • 192
set alarm • 196
synching with
Outlook • 284, 287
ASCII text
export document as
• 307
ASCII Translation
about • 140, 309
baud rate • 311
end of file
character • 310
extended ASCII •
310
handshaking • 311
line feed character
• 310
number data bits •
311
options • 140, 309
paragraph format •
309
parity • 311
transmit delay •
311
Attachments • 222,
223
Audible Books • 90
Audio see also
Media Center
playback recording
• 339
recording • 335
streaming audio •
331
auto-advance of
braille display • 49
B
Back translation
about • 132, 135,
311, 314
braille italics • 312
heading blank lines
• 313
heading format •
313
new line • 312
new page markers •
313
outline style • 313
paragraph boundary
• 312
paragraph format •
314
revert after • 314
spaces between
sentences • 313
sub-heading blank
lines • 313
sub-heading format
• 313
Backup
files • 20, 319,
320
incremental • 320
Battery
care of • 30
charging • 13, 29,
30
check capacity •
18, 30, 106
life expectancy •
30
replacement • 31
Binding space • 144
Block commands
about • 78, 89, 136
append a block •
138
change grade of
block • 141
copy a block to
clipboard • 138
delete a block •
139
erase file • 141
format
considerations • 139
insert a file • 140
mark block • 137
menu • 136, 195
merging documents •
140, 141
move a block • 138
paste to clipboard
• 139
quick mark • 137
read a block • 138
store a block • 140
zapp markers • 141
Bluetooth
activesync • 272,
276, 278
connection • 37,
261, 271
keyboard • 272
pairing • 35, 41,
272
setting up on PC •
41, 273
Book reader
about • 75
Audible • 90
block commands • 78
book storage • 81
Bookshare • 82
exiting • 81
navigation key
commands • 75
NIMAS books • 91
reading commands •
77, 239
reading from
another drive • 75, 80
Review cursor • 76
review opening
options • 78
select another book
• 78
Book reading • 75
Bookshare
about • 82
downloading from •
83
membership
information • 449
unpacking new book
• 83
Braille Display
about • 5
calculator language
• 99, 422
care of • 42
computer 6 or 8 dot
• 100, 422
Cursor shape
computer braille • 100
cursor shape
standard • 98
display mode • 97
Message display
time • 100
Options • 52, 96,
307, 422
preferred reading
grade • 9, 98
show new lines as •
97
text document
reading grade • 99
turning on/off • 9,
15, 76
computer braille •
100, 422
Braille display
modes
about • 54, 76, 97
automatic • 54
editing • 55
layout mode • 55
reading • 54
Braille document
about • 122, 156
formatting for
print • 130
layout • 117, 123
Braille Grade
changing keyboard
grade • 96
reading grade
selection • 9, 98
text reading grade
• 99
Braille language
selection • 99, 422
Braille settings
for text document
braille grade •
148, 153
braille page settings
• 154
braille settings
menu • 149, 153
braille translation
options • 154, 314
styles for braille
document • 149, 151
Braille translation
instant
transcription in bookreader • 75
options list • 154,
314
Browser
dialog boxes • 251
display settings •
246
downloading • 83,
251
favorites • 247
forms • 241, 242
general functions •
238, 244
history • 242, 249
homepage - go to •
245
homepage - set •
245
links • 240
Logging on • 238
moving commands •
241
Streaming audio •
331
tables • 249
C
Calculation insertion
• 107
Memory • 177
Calculator
fractions • 167
statistical
operations • 169
tutorial • 13
Calendar - in
planner • 183
Capital sign • 43,
146, 147
Cards
LAN network • 265,
266
Secure Digital • 34
Care - general • 42
Carry case • 4
remove unit • 4
Check for e-mail •
215
Checklist of
Equipment • 1
Clipboard • 138
Column reading mode
• 48, 66, 98, 137, 142
Command summary
address list • 408
planner • 407
database manager •
411
e-mail • 409
FM radio • 420
games • 413
Browser • 415
in a menu or list •
379
e-mail • 410
e-mail • 409
Instant messaging •
418
KeyWord block •
195, 390
KeyWord dictionary
look up • 392
KeyWord editing •
388
KeyWord format
braille document • 389
KeyWord format text
document • 389
KeyWord formatting
• 388
KeyWord
miscellaneous • 391
KeyWord other
review • 387
KeyWord spelling
checker • 391
KeyWord template •
392
KeyWord text review
• 386
planner • 408
Browser • 415
Browser • 416
operating modes •
379
options at folder
name prompt • 382
options at list of
folders prompt • 382
options available
at any point • 380, 385
options menu • 385
options within a
folder list • 382
other useful
commands at prompts • 384
planner • 404
planner • 405
address list • 408
planner • 404
stopwatch • 419
switch programs •
381
e-mail • 411
calculator • 398
unicode characters
• 415
word processor
commands • 386
Commands
for moving • 48,
66, 98, 137, 142
for reading • 49,
142
Computer braille
6 or 8 dot format •
100, 422
about 6 or 8 dot •
147
changing to • 96
cursor style • 148
reference list •
429
translate for
display • 148
US or UK • 100, 422
use with KeyMail •
216
Computer Braille
reference list • 429
Connect to send and
receive • 229
Connectivity • 259
ActiveSync • 21,
276, 282, 319
Bluetooth • 37,
261, 271
configurations •
260
connectivity menu •
215, 260
dial-up connections
• 265, 266, 267
glossary • 261, 270
LAN connections •
265, 266
menu • 215, 260
network client •
273
Converting file
formats • 279, 288
Copy
a file • 297, 321
addresses • 209
block • 138
record • 204, 234
Copying address
list • 209
Create a document
create braille
document • 46
create text
document • 146
Microsoft Word •
155
Create folder • 293
Cursor
computer braille
shape • 100
concept of • 52
display • 53
position of • 64
relocate position •
61, 64, 78
standard shape • 98
start of next line
• 143
D
DAISY • 84
listening options •
87
navigation options
• 85
placemarkers • 88
reading options •
85
reading with the
braille display • 88
searching • 85
storage • 89
text notes • 89
Database Manager
about • 345
adding a record •
348
associated Database
Name • 363
copying records to
a document • 353
copying records to
another database • 353
creating a new
Database • 354, 364
database File
Management • 364
Database Menu • 347
embossing records •
350, 353, 354
exporting Data •
354
Field Types • 356,
357
finding information
• 348
free database space
• 365
importing data into
a database • 351, 354
printing records •
351
record title • 362
sort orders • 361,
363
Date
Display • 94
format • 324, 422
insert • 143
Date and time
insertion • 106
Date set • 324, 422
Deep Sleep • 326
Delete
current character •
59
current word • 59
last character • 59
previous word • 59
text • 59
to end of document
• 59
to end of paragraph
• 59
to end of sentence
• 59
Delete alert tone
volume • 105
Dial tone • 232
Dial-up connections
creating new
connection • 260, 265, 273
dial using • 265,
266, 267
disconnecting from
• 260, 268
Dictionary
spelling • 65
Directory
about • 300
access file • 302,
307, 308
root • 300
switching • 301
Directory of email
accounts
about • 231
Disk drive
description of • 45
file operations •
289
Document
about • 44
braille • 43
creating • 46
editing • 59
emboss • 114
handling of large •
73
listening to • 49,
142
naming • 46
print • 114
reading in braille
• 49
save • 144
save as another
type • 144
selecting • 45, 48,
290
text • 43
types reference 2 •
294, 299
word count • 62
DOCX files • 71
Double spacing •
127
Double-sided
embossing • 114, 116, 129, 151, 198, 205, 350
Download and read
e-mail • 221
Downloading using browser
• 251
Drive
change • 144
description of • 45
selection • 45, 46
Duplicating • 269
E
Earphones • 8
Editing
a document • 59
at a prompt • 110,
203, 269, 294, 298
delete to end of
sentence • 59
layout mode • 55
quit • 145
replacing text • 63
E-mail
about • 213
add service • 232
all folder • 220
attach file • 218,
219
attachments • 222,
223
before you start •
215
capabilities • 213
change email
account details • 233
connecting to send
and receive • 229
correcting input
errors • 216
detaching • 222,
223
dial tone • 232
directory of email
accounts • 231
download and read •
221
drafts folder • 220
Eudora • 213
folder management •
222, 224
folders overview •
220
free database space
• 215, 231
Inbox folder • 220
Keymail menu • 214
logging on. • 238
mark e-mail • 225
maximum message
size • 229
outbox folder • 220
Outlook Express •
213
pasting text into a
field • 19, 238
preparation • 215
received folder •
220
reviewing e-mail •
223
sent folder • 220
service name • 229
Trash folder • 228
E-mail action
copy • 227
delete • 225
emboss • 227
forward • 227
mark all • 227
move • 227
print • 227
Embossing
about • 113
group of documents
• 115
options • 115
pausing embosser •
115
setting up embosser
• 113
set-up list • 114,
116, 129, 151, 198, 205, 350
via Bluetooth •
113, 117, 272
via Serial port •
113, 117
via USB port • 113
Erase file
from file manager •
297, 298
using block
commands • 141
Erase folder • 294,
299
Error alert tone
volume • 105
Exam Mode • 327
Exclusion from
ink-print • 134, 313
Exiting
bookreader • 81
Exiting current
activity • 10
Export document
about • 307
to a file • 308
to serial port •
308
Extended characters
assigning a macro •
159
assigning braille
dots • 159
changing an
assigned macro • 160
entry by name • 157
entry by unicode
code • 158
interpreting
Braille display • 161
methods of entering
• 143, 157
F
Favorites
adding • 83, 247
organizing • 248
selecting • 238,
248
Fields
address list • 199
File Manager
about • 289
copy file • 297,
321
copy folder • 293
directory • 290
erase file • 297,
298
move file • 298
protect file • 298,
299
rename file • 297,
298
resolving file
extensions • 295
selecting multiple
files • 296, 330
sorting file lists
• 295
File
synchronization • 280, 287
File translation
about • 156, 289,
305
ASCII translation
options • 140, 309
back translation
options • 132, 135, 311, 314
export document •
307
exporting to serial
port • 308
forward translation
options • 314
from other file
types • 156, 289, 305
import Braille file
• 307
File types • 291,
297, 305, 308
Files
converting • 279,
288
File • 115, 299
synchronizing •
280, 287
Find • 62, 77
Find and replace •
63
First page number •
129
FM Radio
mute • 343
presetting stations
• 342
radio and KeySoft •
343
volume control •
337
Folder
description of • 44
Folder manager
about • 293
create folder • 293
erase folder • 294,
299
rename folder • 293
Fonts • 134, 149,
151
Format
braille document
for printing • 130
factory settings •
128, 130, 156
text document for
embossing • 149, 151
Format indicator
about • 47, 53, 55,
128
common types • 55
line break • 55
new line • 55
new line indicator
• 54, 59
new page • 55
page break • 55
Format menu
for braille • 123
Forward translation
about • 314
heading blank lines
• 315
heading format •
316
include capital
signs • 315
indent size • 316
italics font • 315
multiple spaces •
315
new line • 314
new page markers •
315
outline style • 315
paragraph boundary
• 314
paragraph format •
316
revert to paragraph
after • 316
sub-heading blank
lines • 316
sub-heading format
• 316
tabs • 315
Fractions • 167
Frames - on web
pages
about • 241
G
Games
abandoning a game •
371
block marker
commands • 370
entering a command
wile reading • 370
entering commands •
369
Grade 2 braille •
371
history of text
adventure games • 376
Internet Resources
• 376
invalid input • 371
Leaving a game •
371
moving between
historical moves • 373
reading previous
moves • 368, 372
restoring a saved
game • 372
Saving Games • 372
shorthand • 370
starting a game •
368
system words • 370
General settings
Changing action
when contact availability status changes • 255
Changing action
when message arrives while chatting • 255
Renaming a contact
• 256
Reviewing contact
information • 256
Go to
another date • 196
cursor position •
61, 64, 78
GPS Navigation • 26
Grade of braille •
9, 96, 98
H
Handshaking • 114,
116, 129, 151, 198, 205, 350
Hardware • 29
Hayes compatible •
267
Heading style
braille to
ink-print • 132
ink-print to
braille • 152
Headphones • 8
Help
keyboard learn • 19
Hibernate Mode • 5
Hyperlinks • 240
HyperTerminal • 36,
105
I
Identical to Source
style
braille to
ink-print • 133
ink-print to
braille • 153
Import file
foreign braille
file • 307
Inclusion for
ink-print • 134
Incremental backup
• 320
Indent • 125, 126
Indenting tab • 126
Information • 25
Ink-print layout
for braille • 133, 149
Ink-print page
settings • 135
Insert
address • 144
date • 143
field • 149, 206,
207
text • 59
time • 143
Instant messaging
Changing Action
when Contact Availability Status Changes • 255
Instant Messaging
Conversation Initiated by User • 254
Instant Messaging
Initiated by Receiving Instant Message • 254
Setting up Instant
Messaging Service Options • 253
Signing on to
Instant Messaging Service • 253
Internet connection
disconnect or stay
online • 237
disconnecting
outside KeyWeb • 238
Internet Options
Menu • 238, 244
Internet Radio •
343
ISP • 215
J
Justification •
133, 149
K
Keyboard
compatibility mode
• 326
layout • 6
shortcuts • 12
using a qwerty
keyboard • 35
Keyboard learn • 19
Keyboard settings
6 or 8 dot computer
braille • 102
about • 101
braille input grade
• 17, 101, 422
prompt for computer
braille • 102
voice • 101
Keyboard voice
setting • 15, 16,
47
KeyBook - see
Bookreader • 75
KeyPlan - see
Planner • 183
KeySoft
Installing new
version • 328
menus • 11
KeySync
address list • 284
all • 280
PC set up • 281
planner • 284, 287
KeyView • 36
L
LAN Networking •
265, 266
Layout
for text document •
149
ink-print for
braille document • 133, 149
list for braille
document • 117, 123
marker • 117, 123
Layout mode for
Braille display • 55
Left margin • 127
Line reading mode •
48, 66, 98, 137, 142
Line spacing • 127
Lines style
braille to
ink-print • 132
ink-print to
braille • 152
Loading a Book from
Another Drive • 81
Login
Logging in • 327
Login setup • 327
Resetting your password
• 327
M
Main Menu
about • 11
selecting from • 12
Margin
ink print • 133,
149
top and bottom •
130
Mark e-mail • 225
Marking places • 64
Media Center
about • 329
changing tasks •
335
how to play a file
• 330
playing file • 330
playlists • 329,
333
recording • 335
restarting track •
331
skipping through
tracks • 331
stereo and mono •
334
stop track • 330
streaming audio •
331
track information •
334
volume control •
332
menu • 44
Menu
block commands menu
• 136, 195
connectivity menu •
215, 260
file translation
menu • 306
KeyMail • 214
KeyWord • 44
navigating • 11
planner • 183
shortcuts • 12
Merging documents •
140, 141
Message display
time • 100
Microsoft Word
attachments • 222,
223
create document •
155
email attachments •
213
export document as
• 307
translation to and
from • 156, 289, 305
Modem
external modem •
267
Hayes compatible •
267
PC Tel • 267
Mono sound • 333
Move file • 298
MS Word
email attachments •
213
N
Nemeth Code • 161
Network client •
273
Networking • 216,
265
connecting via •
265, 266
favorites • 274,
275, 276
New braille
document • 46
New line indicator
• 54, 59
NIMAS books • 91
NLS
about NLS • 91
Numbers
spoken format of •
104
O
One-Handed
Operation • 19
Online forms -
Internet
how to fill out •
241, 242
On-line Manual • 22,
106
OOTunes • 343
Open book
understanding
settings • 78
Outline style
braille to
ink-print • 132
ink-print to
braille • 152
P
Page
break • 61
number of first
page • 129
Page settings for
ink-print • 135
Paragraph style
print to braille •
152
Password
detail • 229
Pasting text • 139
PDF Content • 72
Place marker
about • 64
defining • 65
deleting • 65
jumping to • 65
Planner
about • 183
alarms • 196
all day events •
186
calendar • 183
canceling • 195
date entry • 183,
184
date format • 183,
184
date selecting
another • 196
editing
appointments • 194
embossing and
printing • 198
finding an
appointment • 194
making notes • 185
menu • 183
modifying • 193,
195
page layout • 185
recurring
appointments • 187, 188
rescheduling • 193,
195
review commands •
192
scheduling
appointments • 186
set alarm • 186
Power Status
battery capacity •
18, 30, 106
Power switch • 5
PowerPoint Content
• 295
Presentation style
• 131, 151
Printer
about • 113
jpeg • 119, 206,
351
printing braille
documents • 118
setting up • 113
set-up list • 119,
206, 351
test • 120
via Serial port •
113, 117
via USB port • 113
Prompts
about • 9
cutting off • 10
on Braille display
• 10
repeating spoken •
10
Pronunciation
Dictionary
about • 321
add word • 322
change word • 322
delete word • 324
misspelling • 322
Protect file • 298,
299
Punctuation
set level • 51, 104
Q
Quick mark • 137
Quicknotes • 47
Quit
edit • 145
spell check • 68
R
Read e-mail • 220
Reading
auto-advance of
braille display • 49
e-mail • 214
modes • 48, 66, 98,
137, 142
review commands •
52
Reading books
sample • 75
Reading grade
setting • 9, 98
text document • 99
Recording • 335
gain control • 335,
336
making recording •
336, 338
playback recording
• 339
recording levels •
335, 336
sound quality • 339
Recurring
appointments
about • 187, 188
daily • 189
frequency • 190
monthly • 189
moving between •
191
weekly • 189
yearly • 190
Rename file • 297,
298
Rename folder • 293
Repeat
and spell • 17, 107
hear punctuation •
17, 107
Reset button
dots 4-5-6 reset •
427
hardware reset • 427
reset button • 6, 8
Restore files • 321
Review commands •
52
Review voice
number format • 104
punctuation • 51,
104
speech on request •
50
Review-only mode •
52, 78
Rich text format
export document as
• 307
Right justify •
130, 149
Right margin • 127
S
Save document • 144
Scroll Wheel
Center button • 8
Navigation button •
7
Scroll wheel On/Off
• 109
Wheel • 7
SD Cards • 33
Format SD Card • 34
Search
about • 62, 77
and replace • 63
next occurrence •
62
search string • 63
searching back • 63
searching forward •
62
wildcard • 203
Search and replace
• 63
Format marker • 58,
63, 313, 316
Sub-Folders • 293,
304
Sentence and
paragraph reading mode • 48, 66, 98, 137, 142
Service email
Service • 229
provider • 215
Service name • 229
Service, look up •
233
Shortcuts
keyboard • 12
Speech
controls-how to set
• 15, 17, 94, 422
hear punctuation •
107
keyboard settings •
15, 16, 47
military call sign
• 51
pitch • 109
repeat and spell •
107
review voice • 50
settings • 8, 103
speed • 109
spelling of words •
52
turning on/off • 9,
16, 76, 103
volume • 109
Speech Settings
review • 102
Spell checker
about • 65
add word to
dictionary • 67
browse dictionary •
68
correct word • 67
exiting from • 68
ignore word • 67
look up word • 68
Mac address • 25
review suggestions
• 67
review word • 66
skip word • 66
user dictionary •
67, 69
Spell folder or
filename • 290
SSL • 232
Startup
turning speech
on/off at • 16, 103
Statistical
Operations • 169
Stereo sound • 333
Stopwatch • 94
Storage Cards
Card reader • 35
SD card • 33
Streaming audio •
331
Styles • 131, 151
how to set or
change braille styles • 131, 151
how to set print
styles in braille doc • 133, 153, 311
Sub-Directories
creating • 293, 304
erasing • 305
renaming • 294, 304
using • 301
Sub-heading style
braille to ink-print
• 132
ink-print to
braille • 152
Switching documents
• 73
Switching off • 20
Synchronization
address list • 284
files • 280, 287
how to • 281
planner • 284, 287
setting up • 281
T
Tab
go to next tab •
143
indenting • 126
regular • 125
semi-colon tabs •
126
Tables
navigating online •
249
Task switching
documents • 73
Templates
creation and use •
149, 206, 207
embossing • 205
Text document
braille settings •
149, 153
braille styles •
149, 151
creating • 146
default settings •
128, 130, 156
font • 134, 149,
151
layout • 149
opening • 146
underlining • 134,
149, 150
Text settings for
braille document
about • 133, 153,
311
ink print exclusion
• 134, 313
ink print inclusion
• 134
ink print layout •
133, 149
ink-print page
settings • 135
Thumb Keys
about • 5
function of
previous and next • 48, 76, 98
On/Off • 5, 109
set layout • 5, 100
use in lists and
menus • 11
Time
daylight saving •
324, 422
display • 94
format • 324, 422
insert • 143
stopwatch • 94
synchronizing with
PC • 279
Time set • 20, 279,
422
timezone set • 324,
422
Time and Date
set • 20, 279, 422
Top margin • 130
Touch Cursor
about • 5
using • 53
Translate file
about • 156, 289,
305
ASCII • 156, 289,
305
between braille and
text • 309
between text and
braille • 309
export to file •
308
import file • 306
MICROSOFT • 156,
289, 305
WordPerfect 51 •
156, 289, 305
Translation Menu •
306
Translation options
• 135
Trash • 228
Trash folder • 228
E-Mail • 220
U
UEB Braille Code •
162
Underline • 134,
149, 150
Unicode characters
character insertion
• 107
view unicode tables
• 158
Unified English
Braille (UEB) • 21
USB
activesync using
usb • 32, 277
keyboard • 33, 35
printing • 113
storage devices •
35
USB Host Ports • 32
User guide • 106
User Guide On-line
• 22, 106
User settings
customizing • 21
initial setup • 422
Utilities Menu
miscellaneous
Options • 325
V
Version 9.1
BrailleNote BT • 24
VGA display • 36
View all Files •
294, 299
Visual Display
about • 36, 105
commands • 105
connect to Serial
port • 39
turning on - off •
40
use with HyperTerminal
• 36, 105
Volume
browser progress
tones • 105
delete tone • 105
error tone • 105
planner alarm • 197
W
Warranty • 449
Web page
moving to another
page • 242
reading and
navigating • 239
Scripting • 247
Wild cards
file operations •
115, 299
when embossing •
115
Wireless
creating a wireless
connection • 261, 273
list of
configurations • 264
reconnecting to
wireless network • 261, 262, 263
scanning for
wireless • 261, 263
signal strength. •
268
Word Count • 62
Word processor
advanced features •
121
description of • 43
Word wrap • 128
WordPerfect
translation to and
from • 156, 289, 305
Writing a Simple
Document • 13
Z
Zip files
Creating a Zip file
(zipping) • 292
Opening (unzipping)
• 292
Zipping a folder •
294